STORET USER HANDBOOK
THE
RIGHT ANSWERS
FOR
STORET USERS
VOLUME 2
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
OFFICE OF WATER AND HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
WASHINGTON, D.C. 20460
-------
HANDBOOK ORGANIZATION
STORZT is a computerized data base system maintained by the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) for the STOrage and
RETrieval of data relating to the quality of the waterways within
and contiguous to the United States. This STORET User Handbook
serves as the primary written source for both general and
detailed information on the concent and capabilities of t'hi-s
system, and was prepared to help STORET users learn and utilize
its many features.
The STORET User Handbook is divided by b.lue tabbed sheets into
parts, which are further divided into chapters, 'and into sect,ions
within chapters. Parts include an OVERVIEW (which provide^ a '"
general introduction to the development, content, and us.e of the
STORET system), and a separate part for each of the pri.nciple
files within STORET, such as the Water Quality File and the
Municipal Waste Inventory File.
The STORET User Assistance Section of the Monitoring and Data'
Support Division, Office of Water and Hazardous Materials at EPA
Headquarters in Washington, D.C., maintains this Handbook, as
well as a list of individuals who have been provided with a copy
of the document.- Handbook users should use the change-of-address'
cards to notify STORET User Assistance of any change in their
address or phone number. Initial releases of new material, as
well as updates to existing documentation, are distributed
automatically to individuals who appear on the list of Handbook
owners.
Following this Handbook Organization page is a page titled
'Record of Handbook Updates'. Users are encouraged to utilize
this page to record all changes made to their copy of the
Handbook, thereby providing for later reference an up-to-date
status of their Handbook. Following the 'Record of Handbook
Updates' page is a set of pre-addressed, pre-stamped Error
Discovery forms provided as a convenient vehicle oy which
Handbook users can advise STORET User Assistance of any ejrrors or
other appropriate comments relative to the content ..of the
Handbook.
We hope that you find this Handbook useful, and that.it helps you
learn and utilize STORET efficiently and cost^effecti-vely."'"Your
comments and suggestions on how to further improve th.e -H'aridJsdbk
to better serve your needs are always welcome. •-.For'-.further
information on this Handbook, please contact STORET ..User
Assistance in Washington, D.C. on (202) 426-7792.
STORET User' Assistance
-------
RECORD OF HANDBOOK UPDATES
Updates to the STORET User Handbook will be issued periodically
to revise or expand the Handbook information. Handbook updates
will be distributed to all Handbook users-of-record. Users are
urged tp_ integrate all updates into their Handbook immediately
upon re'c'eipt, and to record all such changes to this Record of
Handbook Updates form. This record will serve as a reference to
determine the updated status of the Handbook. Each update will
be transmitted by a cover letter which will date and number the
update, and which will provide a summary of the changes
documented by the update. These cover letters should be placed
behind this Record of Handbook Updates page for later reference.
The availability of all updates will be contained in
HELP d;ata set named HANDBOOK., and will be advertised
computer center periodical SIGNON.
the STORET
in EPA ' s
UPDATE
NO.
DATE OF
UPDATE
HIGHLIGHTS OF UPDATE
HANDBOOK UPDATED
BY
DATE
'. 4
i-eo //
Jun 77
Jan 79
Apr 79
May 79
Jul 79
Overview, 0V
Handbook Coyer, front matter
Sections 1-4 and 6, WQ-RET
Appendices, WQ-RET and WQ
Data Entry, WQ-DE
Introduction., WQ-NTRO
File Structure, WQ-FS
Remark codes WQ-DE, WQ-RET
New keyword STCNTY, WQ-RET
Sections 5 and 7, WQ-RET
Appendices F and G, WQ
Tabs: 0V, WQ, APPENDICES
Flow Data File, FL
Handbook Covers, Volume 2
Tab: WQ-RET, Cont
Appendix 7, WQ-RET
Second Edition of Basic
Retrieval
documentation: Sections 1,
2, 3, 4, and 6 and
Appendices 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
and 6 of Chapter WQ-RET;
'Appendices A, B, C, D, and
,-E of Part--WQ.
11
Revised 7/79
-------
RECORD OF HANDBOOK UPDATES, Continued
UPDAT:
NO. .
DATE OF
UPDATE
HIGHLIGHTS OF UPDATE
HANDBOOK UPDATED.
3Y
DATE
i 5
NOV 79
Appendix J, Part WQ
Parts EF and FK
Index to Part WQ
111
Issued "11/79
-------
PART
COMMENTS
CHAPTER
SECTION
NAME
PAGE
ERROR
!
i
:
ORGANIZATION PHONE
3
EPA H«, F~*> 7500-22 (4-77)
STORE! USER HANDBOOK ERROR
DISCOVERY NOTIFICATION
PART
CHAPTER
SECTION
COMMENTS
NAME
PACE
ERROR
ORGANIZATION PHONE
EPA Mq Form 7500-22 (4-77)
STORET USER HANDBOOK ERROR
DISCOVERY NOTIFICATION
PART
CHAPTER
SECTION
COMMENTS
NAME
PAGE
ERROR
ORGANIZATION PHONE
EPA Hq Farm 7500.22(4-77)
STORET USER HANDBOOK ERROR
DISCOVERY NOTIFICATION
-------
UNITED STATES
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
WASHINGTON, O.C. 20*60
OFFIC IAL BUSINESS
PSNAL.TY FOP PRIVATE USE J300
AN EQUAL OPPORTUNITY EMPLOYER
=OSTACe AND FEES =A.C
U.5- ENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION AGENCY
E = »-33!
L' S Environmental Protection Aeencv
Office of Wafer and Hazardous Materials
Monitoring and Data Support Division (WH-553/
-in I \1. St.. S.'.V.
Washington. P.C 20-160
UNITED STATES
ENVIRONMENTAL = ROTECTION AGENCY
WASHINGTON. O.C. 20460
. j E AS; - EES = a-:
OFCIC IAL BUSINESS
PENALLY "OR PRIVATE USE $300
AN EQUAL OPPORTUNITY EMPLOYER
U.S F.nvirontnental Protection Agencv
Office of Water and Hazardous Materials
Monitoring and Data Support Division (WH-553)
401 M. St.. S.'.V.
Washington. D.C. 20460
UNITED STATES
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
' WASHINGTON. O.C. 20460
OFFICIAL 3U3INES3
PENALTY POR PRIVATE USE 1300
AN EQUAL OPPORTUNITY EMPLOYER
POSTAGE AND FEES PAID
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION AOENCY
EP A-333
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Office of Water and Hazardous Materials
Monitoring and Data Support Division (WH~553)
401 M. St.. S.W.
Washington, D.C. 20460
-------
o
<
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART
0V
OVERVIEW
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
OFFICE OF WATER AND HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
WASHINGTON, D.C. 20460
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART 0V
OVERVIEW
This part of the STORET User Handbook provides
an overview of the development, content, and
capabilities of the STORET water quality data
base system and describes several of the uses
made of this system by those concerned and
involved with the abatement and control of
water pollution.
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
OFFICE OF WATER AND HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
WASHINGTON, D.C. 20460
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter Subject Page
OV-1 INTRODUCTION 1- 1
OV-2 FEDERAL LEGISLATION AND WATER QUALITY 2- 1
2.1 Highlights of America's Water
Quality Legislation 2- 1
2.2 The Charter of EPA 2- 1
2.3 Public Law 92-500 2- 2
2.4 STORET and PL 92-500 2- 3
OV-3 STORET: ITS EVOLUTION, DEFINITION, AND
OPERATION 3- 1
3.1 A History of STORET 3- 1
3.2 What STORET Is 3-2
3.3 STORET and the Computer 3- 3
OV-4 THE WATER QUALITY FILE 4- 1
4.1 Introduction 4- 1
4.2 What Is The Water Quality File? 4- 1
4.3 The Data in the WQF 4- 1
4.4 Who Collects and Uses WQF Data? 4- 3
4.5 WQF Data Entry Procedures 4- 3
4.6 WQF Output Alternatives 4- 4
OV-5 USES MADE OF STORET 5- 1
5.1 Introduction 5- 1
5.2 Progress Reporting/Water Quality File 5- 2
5.3 Standards and Criteria/Water Quality
File 5- 3
5.4 Toxic Substances/Water Quality File 5- 4
5.5 Basin Planning/Water Quality File 5- 5
5.6 Research/Water Quality File 5- 6
5.7 Waste Facilities/Municipal Waste
Inventory File 5- 8
5.8 Biological Data Summaries/Fish
Kill File 5- 9
5.9 Award Summaries/Contract Awards File 5-10
OV-6 SUPPORT OF STORET USERS 6- 1
6.1 How to Become a STORET User 6- 1
6.2 STORET User Support Services 6- 2
6.3 Regional STORET Representatives 6- 6
0V
-------
ITORET USER HANDBOOK
PART 0V
OVERVIEW
CHAPTER OV-1
INTRODUCTION
0V
-------
CHAPTER
OV-1
INTRODUCTION
This part of the STORET User Handbook provides an overview of the
development, content, functions, and capabilities of the STORET
water quality data base system, and describes some of the popular
uses made today of this system by those concerned and involved
with the abatement and control of water pollution.
This part was not intended to be a detailed reference document.
For detailed, technical information on STORET, please reference
the other parts of this Handbook—tabbed WQ for the Water Quality
File, MW for the Municipal Waste Inventory File, and so forth.
They contain complete, detailed information on data input
procedures, retrieval options, program and keyword
specifications, and other specific technical information of
particular interest to a STORET user. For information on the
availability of one or more of these parts, please contact STORET
User Assistance in Washington, D.C.
1-1
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART 0V
OVERVIEW
CHAPTER OV-2
FEDERAL LEGISLATION AND WATER QUALITY
This chapter highlights the principal
Federal legislation enacted by our
Government to restore and maintain
the quality of our Nation's waters.
CHAPTER CONTENTS
Section Subject Page
2.1 Highlights of America's Water
Quality Legislation 2-1
2.2 The Charter of EPA 2-1
2.3 Public Law 92-500 2-2
2.4 STORET and PL 92-500 2-3
0V
-------
2.1
CHAPTER
OV-2
FEDERAL LEGISLATION AND WATER QUALITY
HIGHLIGHTS OF AMERICA'S WATER QUALITY LEGISLATION
Our Nation's legislative efforts to restore and maintain the
quality of its waters date back to the late 1800s when Congress
passed the River and Harbor Act of 1886, and the Refuse Act of
1899. This latter law required states, through the U.S. Army
Corps of Engineers, to obtain permits for discharges into the
Nation'.s waters. Since this beginning, almost a hundred years
ago, a number of other laws and amendments to existing laws
relating to water quality have been enacted, administered over
the years by a number of different government organizations. One
good example would be the Federal Water Pollution Control Act
Amendments of 1956 (PL-660), which authorizes the Federal
government to award grants to municipalities to help finance
construction of sewage treatment facilities. The evolution of
these legislative endeavors culminated in the creation, in 1970,
of the Environmental Protection Agency, and the enactment, in
1972, of the Water Pollution Control Act Amendments of 1972, the
most complete and extensive water pollution control program ever
enacted to clean up our Country's waterways.
2.2
THE CHARTER OF EPA
To protect and enhance our Nation's environment today and for
future generations to the maximum extent possible under the laws
enacted by Congress—that is the charter of the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency. EPA's mandate is to mount an
integrated, coordinated attack on environmental pollution in
cooperation with state and local governments, private and public
groups, individuals, and educational institutions.
Title 3-THE PRESIDENT
Reorganization Plan No. 3 of 1970
Prepared by the President and transmitted to the Rrnate. and the Howe
of Repretentatwet in Congrett aniemblfd, July 9, 1970 pursuant to
the provisions of chapter 9 of title 6 of t/tf. United Statei Code.1
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
SECTION 1. Ettablithment of Agency, (s) There is hereby established
the Environmental Protection Agency, hereinafter referred to as tho
-Agency."
2-1
-------
EPA vas created because of increasing public and governmental
awareness and concern about the dangers to the health and welfare
of Americans caused by pollution. Established in December 1970
as an independent agency pursuant to the Government's
Reorganization Plan No. 3 of 1970, EPA brought together, in a
single Federal agency, many environmental protection programs
previously carried out by more than a dozen different departments
and organizations within the Government. EPA's responsibilities
encompass a range of environmental concerns including air
pollution, solid waste management, pesticides, noise pollution,
radiation, and of course, water pollution. As an independent
regulatory agency,-EPA has no conflicting obligation to promote
agriculture, commerce, or industry. It has only one mission—to
protect and enhance our environment.
The next section describes Public Law 92-500, one of the most
comprehensive pieces of legislation ever enacted to contend with
water pollution within the United States. EPA is the
administrator of this law.
SS
D
W
X
2.3
PUBLIC LAW 92-500
Our Nation's current program to prevent, reduce, and eliminate
water pollution is carried out under the Federal Water Pollution
Control Act Amendments of 1972, a public law enacted in October
1972 by the Second Session of the 92nd Congress. Known as PL 92-
500, this Federal law built upon and improved the water pollution
control program initiated by Congress in 1948 and amended
periodically in the '50s and '60s. The stated objective of
Congress in enacting this law was to restore and maintain the
chemical, physical, and biological integrity of the Nation's
waters—in other words, to clean up, once and for all, our
rivers, lakes and streams.
Public Law 92-500
92nd Congress, S. 2770
October 18, 1972
86 STAT. 816
To amend the Federal Water Pollution Control Art.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
l.'nited Statet of America in Congrens assembled, That this Act may be federal Water
cited as the "Federal Water Pollution Control Act Amendments of Pollution Con-
1972" tpol Act Amend-
SEC. 2. The Federal Water Pollution Control Act is amended to read 70"£*a£f ^j2'
as follows: 84 Stat! 91.'
33 USC 1151
not e •
2-2
-------
PL 92-500 proclaimed two goals for the Nation: to achieve,
wherever attainable by July 1983, an interim level of water
quality which provides for the protection and propagation of
fish, shellfish, and wildlife, and which provides for recreation
in and on the water; and to eliminate totally, by 1985, the
discharge of any and all pollutants into navigable waters.
To achieve these national goals, as well as other provisions and
policies as set forth in the legislation, the law provided for
the collection and dissemination of basic water quality data by
EPA in cooperation with other Federal departments and agencies,
and with public or private institutions and organizations
concerned with water pollution control and abatement. STORET,
EPA's computerized water quality data base system, has amply
demonstrated its utility to help organizations fulfill their
obligations under this law.
The following section briefly describes some of the ways STORET
is used to satisfy the requirements of the different sections or
titles of PL 92-500.
2.4 STORET and PL 92-500
PL 92-500 is the most comprehensive National program ever enacted
by our country to prevent, reduce, and eventually eliminate water
pollution within the United States. This law sets forth
guidelines for the control of industrial and municipal water
pollution, expands water standards, establishes a new system of
permits for discharges into the Nation's waters, and creates a
stringent enforcement machinery and heavy penalties for
violators. The following paragraphs briefly describe some of the
roles that STORET can play in helping government agencies achieve
the requirements established by the various provisions of PL 92-
500.
Title I—Research and Related Programs
Section 104 of this Title is frequently cited as a
legislative basis for STORET because of its directives
to operate a national water quality surveillance
system, to render technical services, and to collect
and disseminate water quality data. Other sections of
Title I outline requirements which are today being
fulfilled, if in part, by use of STORET. An example
would be the EPA Grosse lie Laboratory's Research
Program to improve the water quality of the Great Lakes
as set forth under Section 108.
2-3
-------
Title II—Grants for Construction of Treatment Plants
The purpose of this Title is to require and to assist
the development and implementation of waste treatment
management plans and practices. STORET serves as an
integral part of this planning and review process.
STORET provides quantitative data upon which
projections can be based concerning stream waste load
capacities and incipient overloading, and consequently
helps answer where and when waste treatment facilities
should be constructed. STORET Ihelps to determine the
efficiency of the operation and maintenance of
treatment works constructed with grants as compared to
the efficiency planned at the time the grant was made
(Section 210). Further, STORET contributes in the
preparation of areawide water quality management plans
within a river basin as required by Congress under
Section 208.
Title III—Standards and Enforcement
This Title is concerned primarily with determining
reasonable standards that will assure timely progress
toward the attainment of the 1983 and 1985 water
quality goals, and toward establishment of procedures
for enforcement of these standards. A number of STORET
report programs help states trace their progress of
water quality improvement efforts, as required by
Section 303. Also, STORET has become an indispensable
source of information in the preparation of reports on
the condition of the Nation's water quality (Sections
305a and 305b).
Title IV—Permits and Licenses
The Law establishes a new system of permits for
discharges into the Nation's waters, replacing the 1899
Refuse Act permit program. No discharge of any
pollutant from any point source is allowed without a
permit, a legal document which establishes the limits
of allowable discharges. Permits are granted to
individual dischargers only after they show that their
effluents will not contaminate a waterway in excess of
established water quality standards, or will not lower
its existing quality. Data within STORET can be
analyzed to assure compliance with these provisions,
and to identify sources of effluent violations.
2-4
-------
Over 80 percent of all current use of STORET is directly related
to implementing the various Sections of PL 92-500. Obviously,
STORET plays a vital and active role in the operational aspects
of our Nation's water pollution control programs.
The following chapters trace the evolution of the STORET system,
and further describe some of the many ways it is utilized to
achieve the objectives and requirements of PL 92-500.
2-5
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART 0V
OVERVIEW
CHAPTER OV-3
STORET: ITS EVOLUTION, DEFINITION, AND OPERATION
This chapter provides a brief history of
the development of the STORET system,
along with a description of the system
itself.
CHAPTER CONTENTS
Section Subject Page
3.1 A History of STORET 3-1
3.2 What STORET Is 3-2
3.3 STORET and The Computer 3-3
0V
-------
CHAPTER
OV-3
STORET: ITS EVOLUTION, DEFINITION, AND OPERATION
3.1 A HISTORY OF STORET
Prior to the 1960s, water quality data collected by local, state,
and Federal agencies could not be easily presented in uniform
format. (A very likely factor contributing to this situation was
the lack of a sophisticated computer capability.) More often
than not, an organization that secured data for one particular
study or requirement gave little thought to the possible reuse of
the information by others. Consequently, most data reports were
of limited use, and required costly and time consuming extraction
and analysis in order to be applied to situations other than
those of first concern.
But this situation soon changed as water pollution control
personnel became increasingly aware of the importance of sound
data handling and processing systems. The basic STORET concept
for the storage and retrieval of water quality data evolved from
ideas brought together in a brief informal conference held in
August 1961 in the Basic Data Branch, Division of Water Supply
and Pollution Control, of the U.S. Public Health Service. This
concept established a single coding structure for water quality
data which allowed the data to be stored in a computer and
ultimately made available for others to use. When initially
implemented on a Public Health Service Honeywell computer in
Cincinnati in 1964, the system contained data on approximately
140 sampling locations.
As the number of stations grew, the need to handle the rapidly
expanding volume of data and number of users more efficiently
became clearly evident. Then, in 1966, an Executive Order
transferred the jurisdiction of water pollution control from the
U.S. Public Health Service to the Federal Water Pollution Control
Administration within the Department of the Interior. (This
organization was later renamed the Federal Water Quality
Administration.) With this agency realignment, the system was
moved from the tape-oriented Honeywell system to a random access
IBM system operated and maintained by the Department of the
Interior. In 1968, users were able, for the first time, to use
modern medium-speed card reading terminals to communicate with
the central STORET system from terminals located in each of EPA's
regional offices.
The STORET system was improved in many other ways over this
period of time. The original retrieval method, which selected
stations based upon their River Mile Indices, a hydrologic coding
scheme, was expanded to allow retrievals by latitude and
longitude. New reporting and analytical tools were implemented
as well as less complex input procedures.
3-1
-------
Various display capabilities were added including the plotting
and microfilming of outputs. Systems and programs were developed
to provide information and reporting procedures on municipal and
industrial waste treatment practices, sewage plant construction,
and fish kills.
About the time the Federal Water Quality Administration was
folded into a totally independent agency (EPA), the STORET system
began to exceed the capabilities of the Interior data center.
So, in 1969, the STORET system was placed on a commercial time-
sharing system. This move greatly expanded the accessibility of
the STORET data base (via convenient low-speed keyboard type
terminals) to state and local agencies everywhere.
The advent of PL 92-500 in 1972 dramatically increased the need
for the capabilities provided by STORET. The amount of data
stored within the system continues to expand, as does its
versatility to provide the information needed by its users.
Thus, more than ever before, STORET is fulfilling a vital role
for those individuals and organizations concerned with the
control and improvement of our Nation's water quality.
3.2 WHAT STORET IS
STORET is an acronym used to identify the computerized data base
system maintained by EPA for the STOrage and RETrieval of data
relating to the quality of the waterways within and contiguous to
the United States. The system encompasses not only the
centralized data base of water quality data, but also the
associated software for storing and retrieving data on water
quality, water quality standards, point sources of pollution,
pollution-caused fish kills, waste abatement needs,
implementation schedules, and many other water quality related
items. The system is used by Federal, state, and local water
quality agencies to solve such problems as defining the causes
and effects of water pollution, measuring compliance with water
quality standards, checking the status of waste treatment plant
needs, and determining pollution trends.
A Collection of Programs
To input, retrieve, and analyze STORET data, users are
provided with a collection of related computer programs
and program elements which are activated or executed by
commands or control cards entered by users from their
computer terminals. The original programs of the
system were developed for the storage, retrieval, and
analysis of water quality data. The Water Quality File
(WQF) is currently the most widely used of the STORET
files, and is described further in the following
chapter.
3-2
-------
As the STORET system grew, additional programs were
added for the storing and retrieving of other types of
data. Data files within this group include the
Municipal Waste Inventory File, the Fish Kill File, the
Contract Awards File, and others.
A Central Repository
Water quality data is very expensive to collect, and it
has long been recognized that this data should not
simply be collected for a one-time use, but rather that
the data should be available, whenever possible, for
subsequent use by people and purposes other than those
initially responsible for the data collection.
Multiple use of data can lead to tremendous savings,
over the long run, if the data is available when and
where it is needed, and in the right format.
Furthermore, if the data is stored properly, it can be
reused at a later time to evaluate changes and trends.
STORET serves as a central repository for all water
quality and related data collected by EPA and many
other contributing agencies and organizations. States
and other organizations can use the data for their own
local pollution abatement efforts, while those
concerned with national programs can review the data in
broader perspectives. The pooling of data into a
central data base contributes significantly to the
value of the data base through the benefits of multiple
use and sharing of data.
An Analytical Tool
By itself, water quality data has limited usefulness.
In order to convert data to information, the data must
be statistically analyzed and reviewed, bearing in mind
the nature of the problem under attack, the kind of
information relevant to a solution, and the special
characteristics of the data being used. STORET,
therefore, in addition to being a repository of water
quality data, also provides extensive analytical
software to aid users in converting raw data to
meaningful information. The standard and customized
retrieval programs which make up this collection of
analytical software are described in detail within
other parts of this Handbook.
3.3 STORET AND THE COMPUTER
The utilization of computer technology has been an integral part
of the design, growth, and use of the STORET system, tracing back
to the initial development of the system in the early 1960s. The
first system on which STORET was implemented was a tape-oriented
3-3
-------
Honeywell computer located at the Public Health Service offices
in Cincinnati, Ohio. Use of this system was totally in the batch
mode, i.e., all input and output was performed by computer
operators physically located at the computer facility.
Individuals located outside the Cincinnati area had no
alternative but to phone or mail in their data and/or requests
for processing. After a batch run was performed, the results
were then mailed back to the requestor.
Today, the STORET system runs on a large-scale, third generation
IBM computer system which can easily accommodate the many
observations of water quality data available in the system, and
which can support a large number of users who are simultaneously
utilizing the system from remote terminals located in their
offices. The computer system is offered by a commercial time-
sharing service company whose primary business is to provide
remote processing services to its subscribers or clients.
Typically, commercial computer service organizations are very
quick to integrate the latest hardware components and software
releases into their user-available services, thereby passing on
to the users the benefits of the latest available computer
technology. STORET is updated and modified to take advantage of
these advances in computer technology.
3-4
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART 0V
OVERVIEW
CHAPTER OV-4
THE WATER QUALITY FILE
This chapter presents a general
description of STORET's Water
Quality File: what it is, what
data it contains, who uses the
data, and how the data can be
retrieved.
CHAPTER CONTENTS
Section Subject
4.1 Introduction
4.2 What is the Water Quality File?
4.3 The Data in the WQF
4.4 Who Collects and Uses WQF Data?
4.5 WQF Data Entry Procedures
4.6 WQF Output Alternatives
0V
-------
CHAPTER
OV-4
THE WATER QUALITY FILE
4.1
INTRODUCTION
The Water Quality File is the largest file within STORET in terms
of amount of data stored. Due to the size of the WQF relative to
the other STORET files, and due to the extensive use made of its
data, the WQF is described in somewhat more detail in this
OVERVIEW. Other parts of this Handbook describe each of STORET's
files in considerable detail.
4.2
WHAT IS THE WATER QUALITY FILE?
The WQF is a collection of data relating to the quality of the
waterways within and contiguous to the United States. This data
is gathered by a process called water quality monitoring whereby
samples are taken of water from streams, rivers, lakes, and other
bodies of water. These samples are then analyzed within a
laboratory to determine the presence, and if present the amount,
of pollutants and other particulates within the samples. The
findings of these analyses are stored as data in the WQF.
4.3
THE DATA IN THE WQF
The information within the WQF consists of two basic types of
data: station data, which describes and categorizes the
geographical location of where a sample has been taken; and
parametric data, which describes the conditions under which a
sample was taken (such as date, time, and depth) as well as the
results of the sample analyses.
The number of unique collection points, or stations, in the WQF has
grown significantly over the years, from about 150 in 1964 to over
200,000 in 1976. The shadings of
the map reflect the relative con-
centrations of these sampling
stations across the United
States. Station data may
include the following types of
station description information:
a unique station identification
number; the latitude and
longitude of a station's location;
the state and county codes iden-
tifying the station's political
location; a River Mile Index
identifying the station's hydrologic
4-1
-------
location; the major and minor river basins in which the station
is located; as well as other station identification codes and
descriptive information.
Some 1800 unique water quality parameters are defined within
STORET. Approximately 80 percent of the 40 million individual
observations available within the system pertain to approximately
200 of these parameters which are grouped into the general
categories shown in the table below. A single observation
represents a measurement of a single parameter at a specific
location, or station, at a specific point in time.
PRIOR TO 1966
^| 1966-1970
I 11971-1975
PARAMETER GROUPS
4-2
-------
4.4 WHO COLLECTS AND USES WOF DATA?
Many individuals and organizations actively participate in the
collection, storage, retrieval, and analysis of the data in the
WQF. Information is gathered through cooperative programs
involving EPA, state water pollution control authorities, and
other governmental agencies covering over 3.5 million miles of
rivers and streams, the Great Lakes, and coastal areas. Federal,
state, and local water quality control agencies utilize the WQF
to define the causes and effects of water pollution, to measure
compliance with water quality standards, and to determine
pollution trends. Many states utilize the WQF to help comply
with the reporting requirements of PL 92-500. The U.S.
Geological Survey, the U.S. Forest Service, the U.S. Army Corps
of Engineers, the Bureau of Reclamation, and the Tennessee Valley
Authority all utilize STORET's WQF in their water quality
monitoring efforts.
4.5 WQF DATA ENTRY PROCEDURES
Data may be entered into the Water Quality File via several
methods. These include keypunching data on cards and
transmitting the data via a medium-speed card reading terminal,
and entering data directly via a low-speed keyboard terminal.
Station data is screened by STORET to insure its validity for the
locations being specified. Edit checking is automatically
performed by the system on approximately 200 of the most
frequently sampled water quality parameters to preclude the
storing of erroneous values.
Once entered and permanently stored in the system, users may
change or delete any incorrect data, using the same procedures
available to input data.
4-3
-------
4.6
WQF OUTPUT ALTERNATIVES
The array of representative reports
pictured here exemplifies the ver-
satility of STORET and its water
quality data to help users prepare
a myriad of detailed, summary, or
exception reports relative to
their specific areas or locations
of interest. Data reported can
reflect the latest, most current
information available, or it can
draw upon the historical depth of
the data, going back as far as
the '50s. Most users obtain
their reports from small portable
computer terminals conveniently
located in or near their offices.
Output alternatives include tabular
listings of data values, statistical
summaries of parameter values, and
a number of plotting techniques,
including line printer or precision
plots of sample values or statisti-
cal analyses. Plotting capabilities
also include station location plots
which readily illustrate monitoring coverage over a selected
geographical area. Violations to established water quality
standards, on an individual or summary basis, may be reported.
In addition to printed and plotted output, output may also be
placed on tape or disk for subsequent use by user-written
programs or by other application software.
Station selection options are extensive. An area of interest can
be defined by a set of latitude/longitude coordinates (thereby
describing a polygon enclosing the desired area), or by state,
county, or basin designations. One or more individual stations
can be selected by specifying their station identification
numbers. And stations may be chosen based upon the presence or
absence of one or more specific parameters, or on prescribed
values of the designated parameters.
Users can write their own programs to perform specific analyses
or to present their data in any desired format. Additional
output alternatives are anticipated as the capabilities of the
WQF retrieval programs are expanded and enhanced.
4-4
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART 0V
OVERVIEW
CHAPTER OV-5
USES MADE OF STORET
This chapter highlights a number
of uses made today of the STORET
system.
CHAPTER CONTENTS
Section Subject Page
5.1 Introduction 5- 1
5.2 Progress Reporting/Water Quality Pile 5- 2
5.3 Standards and Criteria/Water Quality File 5- 3
5.4 Toxic Substances/Water Quality File 5- 4
5.5 Basin Planning/Water Quality File 5- 5
5.6 Research/Water Quality File 5- 6
5.7 Waste Facilities/Municipal Waste
Inventory File 5- 8
5.8 Biological Data Summaries/Fish Kill File 5- 9
5.9 Award Summaries/Contract Awards File 5-10
0V
-------
CHAPTER
OV-5
USES MADE OF STORET
5.1 INTRODUCTION
STORET is utilized by a variety of governmental agencies and
other organizations to achieve numerous objectives relating to
water quality assessment and management. New uses are conceived
every day to solve new problems or to perform different analyses
of data in light of changing or emerging water quality
situations.
In addition to the several examples portrayed on the remaining
paqes of this chapter, STORET can be used to do any of the
following:
To detect changes in pollutants that could change
ambient criteria/standards.
To help promote water quality programs by
substantiating the effectiveness of other similar
programs.
To help justify budget requests for water quality
programs.
To help cut sampling costs by coordinating efforts with
other organizations.
To provide a repository for data collection efforts.
To help identify where monitoring efforts are needed,
thereby determining where funds need to be allocated.
To help design overall programs based upon the
successes of others.
To help complete water quality management basin plans.
To help prepare fact sheets required for permit
processing.
To detect changes in pollutants that could change
existing permits.
The following sections of this chapter describe in more detail
several specific uses made of four of STORET's files: the Water
Quality File, the Municipal Waste Inventory File, the Fish Kill
File, and the Contract Awards File.
5-1
-------
5.2
PROGRESS REPORTING/WATER QUALITY FILE
Under Section 305(b) of PL 92-500, states are required to submit
annual reports to EPA and Congress on the pollution of the
states! waters—its nature, extent, recommendations for control,
and the cost of these controls. STORET is the primary way many
sta,tes have found to perform data analyses for these reports.
One of the most valuable methods of reporting and analyzing water
quality for 305(b) reports is the time series analysis. STORET
is ideally suited for presenting several years of data for
comparison. A good example is the graph shown below from a
recent State of Michigan report. From this report, the State
concluded that overall water quality was improving on the Raisin
River near Monroe, Michigan.
Another effective evaluation technique is a 'before and after1
analysis. EPA's Region VIII office used STORET to evaluate a
sewage treatment plant on Fountain Creek below Colorado Springs
which was activated in late 1972. The data in STORET collected
prior and subsequent to the implementation of the new plant were
compared. The number of violations for dissolved oxygen had
dr.opped from 53 percent to 7 percent, for dissolved solids from
59 percent to 33 percent, for BOD from 85 percent to 73 percent,
and for fecal coliform from 89 percent to 58 percent. Similar
improvement occurred and was demonstrated when a sewage treatment
plant was built in the Fargo, North Dakota area.
These examples show the applicability of using the data in STORET
to demonstrate progress either from an overall point of view or
from the viewpoint of a single effort. As practices become more
sophisticated, these reports should begin to reflect such things
as the effects of non-point sources, and the pollution of ground-
waters.
RAISIN RIVER AT MONROE
x
UJ
Q
O
o:
UJ
100.-
90.-
80.
70.
60.-
50.
40.
30.
20^
10.
STN = 580046
THE LINE OF BEST FIT SHOWS IMPROVING WATER QUALITY
OVER TIME — AS MEASURED BY THE WATER QUALITY INDEX
69 70 71 72 73 74
'TIME OF OBSERVATION
5-2
75
76
-------
5.3
STANDARDS AND CRITERIA/WATER QUALITY FILE
Under PL 92-500, the states have established specific water
quality standards for all navigable waterways which must be met
in order for the water to be used for its intended purposes,
consistent with the 1983 goals of water quality. Once standards
have been established by states in accordance with national
criteria, it is necessary to monitor the effect of water
pollution abatement and control activities relative to those
criteria. A number of STORET report programs can be used such as
the ones pictured below, to trace the progress of water quality
improvement efforts. These reports were generated by the
execution of the WQF retrieval program STAND.
VIOLATIONS SUMMARY
VIOLATIONS WITH
SUPPORTING
PARAMETERS
VIOLATIONS LIST
5-3
-------
5.4
TOXIC SUBSTANCES/WATER QUALITY FILE
Although many substances are potentially toxic to aquatic life
and other organisms when present in sufficient concentration for
a sufficient period of time, the term toxic substances generally
refers to those substances which are dangerous even in very low
concentration—substances such as meicury, cadmium, and
toxaphene. To protect the public health and welfare, EPA is
empowered to restrain discharges of any new pollutants which
present an imminent and substantial endangerment to the health or
livelihood of the public. In addition, EPA places special
emphasis on the control of toxics through its discharge permit
program.
All toxic substances for which water quality analyses have been
performed are defined within STORET, and the system can easily
accommodate the inclusion of additional substances upon their
discovery. Reports such as the one shown below (from a Council
on Environmental Quality Report) can be readily obtained from
STORET data to demonstrate the presence or absence of toxic
substances in any body of water for which data are available.
DDT Levels in U.S. Surface Waters, 1970-74
= 1.8
a
S I
S 1bU
I 4-
3. 0.6 [—
I0-4
yi
1 0.2
-Raw data
2-yeai moving average
0
1970
1971 1972
• Ei:.iiumTviii,j! P'otrCliOn AjwdCv. STORE!
1973
1974
1975
5-4
-------
5.5
BASIN PLANNING/WATER QUALITY FILE
A river basin is the area drained by a single river and its
tributaries. A water quality management basin plan is a
management document that identifies the water quality problems of
a particular basin or portion of a basin and sets forth an
effective remedial program to alleviate those problems. Overall
basin needs and priorities are assessed, actions scheduled, and
the necessary coordination with concerned organizations planned.
The needs and priorities are based largely upon water quality
data and the analysis of this data. For example, fecal coliform
bacteria is a common indicator of pollution problems in areas
affected by major municipal/industrial activity. A profile plot
of coliform along a stretch of a river using STORET's MSP
(Multiple Station Plot) program can quickly ascertain the
presence of a bacterial source and the extent of a pollution
problem as shown in the printout below.
The development of an effective planning process is crucial to
effective water quality management. This is particularly true
for river basin planning as required under various sections of PL
92-500. River basin plans are primarily the responsibility of
the states, and the law delineates the rather extensive amount of
information that must be provided.
5-5
-------
5.6 RESEARCH/WATER QUALITY FILE
In order to achieve our national objective of having water that
is clean enough both for recreational activity and for the
protection of fish and wildlife, numerous research and
development efforts have been initiated to acquire a thorough
understanding of the complex and variable biological systems that
characterize our waterways. Research tells us what a specific
level of a specific pollutant does to humans, animals, and crops.
It establishes thresholds at which we might expect adverse
effects from environmental pollutants alone or in combination.
(And from these thresholds, criteria for water quality standards
can be established.) It provides the basic scientific knowledge
we need to safeguard the public health and to balance the
benefits of a specific product against its environmental risks.
A representative effort is that of the EPA Grosse lie
Laboratory's Research Program to improve the water quality of the
Great Lakes. This Lab is involved with a number of other
agencies in developing the scientific information needed to
assess the effectiveness of implemented programs on Great Lakes
water quality, to form the basis for needed control actions, and
to develop the scientific information needed to support the
Canadian/U.S. Agreement for the Great Lakes. Over a dozen U.S.
and Canadian agencies, universities, and joint commissions are
participating in this extensive program launched in 1972.
Since this is an on-going international program involving both
water quality management and research, it is essential that all
data gathered on the water quality of the Great Lakes be readily
accessible by all investigators. Accordingly, all participants
are required to enter all collected data into STORET, thereby
greatly expediting the use and analysis of the information
through sharing of data. This significant multi-organizational
research program not only illustrates the value of STORET in
research-oriented endeavors, but also it demonstrates how the use
of an accepted central system can foster cooperation among a
group of organizations sharing common interests.
5-6
-------
CHLOROPHYLL IN LAKE ONTARIO
;--U r "* Niagara River
• HI
The above contour map, which shows the chlorophyll levels in Lake
Ontario during 1972 and 1973, illustrates the type of graphic
display that can be obtained from STORET via a plotting option of
the WQF retrieval program MSP (Multiple Station Plot).
5-7
-------
5.7
WASTE FACILITIES/MUNICIPAL WASTE INVENTORY FILE
Data on municipal waste sources and disposal systems are critical
to the planning and execution of pollution abatement and control
programs at all levels of government. It is essential that these
data be current in order to provide accurate input to the
preparation of basin plans, annual budgets, and annual reports
(such as EPA's Cost of Clean Water report) to perform periodic
assessments of the effectiveness of control/abatement measures,
and to monitor the degrees of compliance with standards. The
Municipal Waste Inventory File serves as the repository for this
data in STORET, and includes data from all communities and/or
municipal waste facilities, including those privately owned,
within the United States.
The presence of this File in STORET makes the data readily
available to all agencies and individuals having water quality
responsibilities. Reports such as the inventory of municipal
waste facilities within the State of Delaware, a portion of which
is shown below, which lists a number of characteristics of each
facility within the State, are easily obtainable.
COMMUNITY NAME
AND
COUNTY
NEW CASTLE CO PWD
S2810001511
NEW CASTLE
003
NEWPORT
5283000011
HE* CASTLE
003
RED LION
DRAGON RUN TRAIL PRK
5620000011
NEW CASTLE
003
ftEHOBOTH BEACH
57200000111
SUSSEX
00 5
SEAfORD
60SOOU00111
SUSSEX
005
SELBYVILLE
61600000111
SUSSEX
005
SMYRNA
62700000111
KENT
001
LCCATO OlST-PHASE 1
640UOOOU111
SUSSEX
005
BASIN
YR BG
YR RV
02/08
02/06
o2/oa
X
X
o /
9
9
0 /
9
9
0 /ll
X
02/Od
X
-
STORET SYSTEM
STATE OP DELAWARE (10)
DISCHARGE TO
REMARKS
DELAWARE RIVER
DELAWARE RIVER
DRAGON RUN CREEK
LEWES- KEHOBETH CANAL
NANTICOKE RIVER
WILL GO TO SEC EVEN
W/OUT REG SYS
BUNTINGS BRANCH
SMYRNA RIVER
MURDERKILL R. (FUTURE)
CANAL IN FUTURE
302 PEAK SEASON
POP
CENSUS
X
• 1180
1366
X"
X
1614
5537
1005
1099
4243
X
FLO MGO
DESIGN
-
-
.120
X
.880
X
.420
.500
-
TYPE
DES. BOD
NONE
SERVED
204
X
X
SECONDARY
X
210
S
E
W
S
S
B
S
DATA
MG/L (BOO)
UNTREATIDISCHG
131
157
X
87
97
X
NEEDS
TREATMENT
GRANTS
21
SEE WILMINGTON
00
SEE WILMINGTON
AC N PC WL
37 10 13
CM EGC ORH W BC
6,0.
47 10
G SC C EC DCRH BC
1.24,
38 10
SC LO ECG
34,34,
5H CM EGC DRH BO
22 IB
5-8
-------
5.8
BIOLOGICAL DATA SUMMARIES/FISH KILL FILE
The STORET Fish Kill File provides nationwide information on
major pollution-caused fish kills which result from a variety of
industrial, municipal, agricultural, and transportation-related
operations. A fish kill is usually first noticed by a fisherman,
camper, or sportsman who, as an interested and concerned private
citizen, reports the kill to a state official. In most
instances, the state agency sends trained specialists to
investigate and identify the size and cause of the kill. These
specialists sometimes request the help of Environmental
Protection Agency field personnel to assist in on-site
investigations, or to make laboratory analyses of dead fish
tissue samples. When water pollution is determined to be the
cause of the kill, the state submits a report, using the form
shown below, to the Environmental Protection Agency. Information
from these reports is entered into the Fish Kill File, which
contains fish kill data back to 1960, and from which fish kill
summary reports, such as the one shown for the State of Florida,
are easily obtained.
• AlHIMtTON. B.C. 294M
REPORT OF POLLUTION-CAUSED FISH KILL
.LOC T,0«« L-..0... ,^L«-,.(,.,-,
ATIOM1
~~] *QltO*t(P.*llcttHt. Ht>
r>i«T,u«M
3M«,,«MA,.A«.I.....
— L*SI UQUOM, 0* 'C(D
LOT 0»C**TIOMI
~J HMOUN4 OF f OUI'MIMT
M>0 CMTAINEM
[J] CHCulCMLt
•— ' WtEDfWDuCtl
[j TEITILIS
IT] °I-**'
B'*IL O '""" ~^ ***" °*
.,».. rj *•• " *°*T
FOR OWP USE ONLY
G"«"" n«"T LJ "»<"»•»
^J *[TDOICUU
|_j lUltEft AND »L*ITK»
C. MUMIC PAL O»ERA>
TIONS
Q it *[**(€ »VJUM
[71 •*»«« 011P91M.
[3 iwiuumt POOL
[2] »**•/ Public S*r*lt*l
Q «ST CMTML
GCOOTWCT,*, riu-.»«
n °™":
thftmfl attchftft.
ACPORTING OFFICIAL
INSTRUCTIONS: Upon completion foM e
• d(* tog 11 h*r.
•ttpU or ttp« toni
Mrl
FLORIDA
UPLANO CA TAVEFNIER 1
LA TriOhOTOSASSA TriONOTOSASSA
BEEOV Cfl W DISNEV UOHLO
POND LACHUA CO
LAKE CHARLOTTE POPKA
LAKE DtNTUN VON PARK
L-D CANAL CLLE GLADE
ED MCELVtM PC 8LOUNTSTOWN
LAKE HIBISCUS DCBAfly
LAKC HIBISCUS DCBARY
LAKE EVANS DCLTONA
TROUT CB DUVAL CO
CANAL FT LAUDERDALE
ST JOHNS H GENEVA
ATTAPULCUS CR HAVANA
PD-CORBETT CAMP INDIANTOWri
MONCRIEP CM JACKSONVILLE
LAKE JACKSON NEANANSVILLE
LAXE FRANCIS LA E PLACID
I-URKLV CR NA CLEKNV
TUKKEV CP MA CLENNV 1
HARCO IS GOLK Pi) NA LES
SPRUCE CP N£ SMYRNA BCH
LAKE rfEIR OKLAriAiiA
LAKE dELDONA ORLANDO
LT ECtiLCiCriTCrtEt: OxLANOO
LANE LUCE MM ORLANDO
LAKE COPE LAND UfllANDO
LAKE BARTON ORLANDO
LAKE LANCASTER ORLANDO
LAKE JESSUP UVIEOO
ST JOHNS R P4LATK*
LAKE CEORlJi: PALM BEACH
TROUT CR ST JOHNS CO
PEARL K SENINOLE CO
LAKE OWtNS U .1*1 1 L LA
MOLKES Ch VEHNON'
OD rr co
OJ 7]
06 Tj
25 7]
11 73
13 73
07 74
2S 74
08 74
04 74
04 74
11 74
OS 74
17 74
2 74
1 74
1 74
J 74
3 74
6 74
0 74
6 74
1 74
0 74
! 74
2 74
t 74
8 74
1 74
* 74
8 74
1 74
3 74
2 74
1 74
H 74
29 74
IS 74
09 74
21 74
DE tCAME
10
17
74
99
00
00
00
90
00
00
so
S3
SO
70
SO
IS
75
20
70
<0
SO
luO
1001 - J -
70% - S,C 0 4 B19A 3
81% 44 1 -
2S» 13 4 1SOA 3
It - 1,3 0 3 1A
0 1 )A
1001 - - 4 -
ISO 4 1A
SO 4 IN
lUt - 1,000 2 1A
1.000 2 fcA
600 4 10A
260 4 3A
200 4
loot - -
91,121 2 I9A
SOI - 1 ,000 3ri
100 4 in
47% - fl,S77 H
SOI - 60 A
100% - S33 M
US 4 H
301 - 215 4 M
50%
7S% - 42.6S3 2 4M
25% - ISO IDA
250 4
- 4 1A
UUI - - -
00 1 - - -
001 - - 9
oot - - -
HOt - B.UGC 3
loot - ISO 4 SH
301 - 1,000 3 SA
40t - 100 4
23 4
SOt - 2S.OOO 2 In
1,460 2 S6A
275 4 In
IB
R
[
24
j
-
I
"
5-9
-------
5.9
AWARD SUMMARIES/CONTRACT AWARDS FILE
A major element of the 1956 Federal Water Pollution Control Act
was the establishment of the construction grant program which
authorized the Federal Government to award grants to
municipalities to help finance construction of sewage treatment
facilities. Although this initial legislation authorized a
modest $50 million per year in grant funds, appropriations for
grant money rose substantially in the late '60s, reaching $1
billion for fiscal year 1971. The construction grant program was
significantly enhanced and expanded with the enactment in 1972 of
PL 92-500, which authorized EPA to make grants totaling $18
billion to the states for construction of new municipal treatment
facilities.
STORET's Contract Awards File helps interested individuals and
organizations to track the progress of the thousands of contracts
awarded by municipalities for sewage facilities construction, to
gather statistics on the nature of these awards, and to quantify
any patterns or trends in the contract award activity. Awards
dating back to 1952 are contained in the file. The report shown
below, which used data from this File, lists information on each
sewage facility construction award granted by the State of
Montana in 1975.
CONTRACT AWARDS LISTING
ST
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
CITYI
36360
15490
76140
45720
09900
09900
21240
3870U
38100
38700
406UO
39780
39780
39780
39780
39780
39780
49710
50300
66310
83450
83950
07740
07740
07740
07740
CO! BASIN
013 0901
015 0901
019 0903
029 1302
031 0901
031 0901
035 0901
041 0901
041 0901
041 0901
041 0901
049 0901
049 0901
049 0901
049 0901
049 0901
049 0901
051 0901
053 1301
073 0901
099 0901
101 0901
111 0902
111 0902
111 0902
111 0902
STATE OF HOHTANA
» LOCATION I DEN.
GREAT FALLS
CHOTEAU COUNTY
SCOBEY
KALISPELL
BOZEMAN
BOZEHAN
CUT BANK
HAVRE
HAVRE
HAVRE
KILL COUNT*
HELENA
HELENA
HELENA
HELENA
HELENA
HELENA
LIBERTY COUNTY
LINCOLN COUNTY
PONDERA COUNTY
TETON COUNTY
TOOLE COUNTY
BILLINGS
3ILLINGS
BILLINGS
BILLINGS
YR
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
HO DA
10 08
01 03
06 09
06 10
05 21
12 11
02 03
06 17
06 17
07 22
07 11
02 24
05 15
05 15
09 16
10 15
10 17
01 03
03 27
01 03
01 03
01 03
03 03
03 03
12 11
12 11
0 TYPE
4 6300
1 5200
2 9100
2 0110
2 0100
4 7100
1 5200
2 3300 •
2 4100
3 7400
3 7100
1 0100
2 9100
2 0000
3 7400
4 7100
4 0100
1 5200
1 0000
1 5200
1 5200
1 5200
1 5200
1 1300
4 7100
4 0010
$ VALUE SRC
4.351
528
76
314
49
41
590
483
289
152
38
78
112
56
265
112
199
528
284
528
528
528
8,068
3,759
53
62
,322 1
,954 1
,063 1
.371 1
,723 1
,869 1
,656 1
,954 ,1
,185 1
,156 1
,300 1
,419 1
,830 H
,415 1
,678 ,1
,611 1
,774 -1
,954 1
.330 1
,954 1
,954 1
.954 1
.000 1
,285 1
,978 1
,002 1
CONTR-R V
SLETTEN
KIEWIT
L t S
UTILITY
LONG
SCHflID
COP
FALLS
SrIULAND
MCNEIL
MCNEIL
MCNEIL
HELENA
HELENA
LOCKREM
LOCKREM
DUGDALE
KIEUIT
ZOOK
KIEWIT
KIEWIT
.KIEWIT
WEYHER
SHAWNEE
LEARY
LEARY
PAGE
2
CO TYPE PSG GROUPI
REPL ADDN 7
HATR COMB 4
WIS LINES 2
SDRN REPR 5
STORM DRN 5
COLL SEW 5
WATR COMB 3
DIST LINE 5
PUMP STAT 5
SEW COMB 5
COLL SEW 5
STORM ORN 5
WtS LINES 5
STORM SEW 5
SEW COMB 5
COLL SEW 5
STORM DRN 5
WATR COMB 3
STORM SEW 5
WATR COMB 4
WATR COMB 4
WATR COMB 4
WATR COMB 7
TRNS LINE 7
COLL SEW 7
STRM REPR 7
10
01
06
06
05
12
02
06
06
07
07
02
05
OS
09
10
10
01
03
01
01
01
03
03
12
12
DODGE!
1815880
1812488
1816760
1816795
1816687
1817698
1815810
1816764
1816764
1816896
1816896
1816176
1816669
1816669
1816852
1817385
1817385
1812488
1816131
1812488
1812488
1812488
1811696
1811696
1817648
1817648
5-10
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART 0V
OVERVIEW
CHAPTER OV-6
SUPPORT OF STORET USERS
This chapter describes the many helpful
user assistance services that are made
available by EPA to all STORET users.
CHAPTER CONTENTS
Section Subject
6.1 How to Become a STORET User 6-1
6.2 STORET User Support Services 6-2
6.3 Regional STORET Representatives 6-6
0V
-------
CHAPTER
OV-6
SUPPORT OF STORET USERS
6.1 HOW TO BECOME A STORET USER
Representatives from state agencies and from other Federal,
interstate, and local government agencies may become users of
STORET. Anyone interested in becoming a user of the system
should initially contact his or her EPA Regional STORET
Representative. The names, addresses, and phone numbers of these
individuals are listed elsewhere in this chapter.
The Regional STORET Representative can advise as to what
monitoring activities are currently underway within the new .
user's area of interest; he can provide information on the amount
and type of water quality data already present in the system that
might be of interest to the user; and often, he can identify
other users within the region who are pursuing an effort like or
similar to that being considered by the potential user. Further,
these representatives can provide helpful information about the
STORET system itself, and how its features and capabilities can
best be applied to benefit the user. Each region has its own
procedures with respect to its community of STORET users,
including how new users are placed on the system, and how they
are supported. However, the following guidelines should be
generally applicable as outlined below.
State Agencies
Once it is determined that the individual is to be
granted access to STORET, the Regional STORET
Representative will make the necessary arrangements to
obtain an account number which will enable the user to
access the computer system on which STORET resides. He
will discuss the alternatives available for funding the
state's use of STORET, including the arrangement of a
suitable suballowance whereby EPA reimburses the state
for its use of STORET up to the value of the
suballowance. (Should a state exceed its allotted
suballowance, it will need either to reimburse EPA or
to contract directly with the computer services vendor
for any additional computer usage charges incurred over
the suballowance.) He will also contact STORET User
Assistance in EPA Headquarters in Washington, D.C. who
will provide the user with whatever STORET
documentation and training is deemed appropriate.
If the state agency representative is establishing a
new monitoring network, a new STORET agency code will
need to be established which uniquely identifies the
6-1
-------
user's monitoring network to STORET. The potential
state user should have an estimate of the amount of
activity that will be made of STORET (the amount of
data to be stored, the number of system accesses per
month, and the amount and type of retrieval activity,
for example) so that necessary cost estimates and
budgetary provisions can be made based upon the
anticipated usage.
Federal, Interstate, and Local Agencies
Upon contacting the Regional STORET Representative,
individuals from these agencies will be advised of two
alternatives for paying for their use of STORET. They
may establish an interagency agreement for the transfer
of funds (where the agency reimburses EPA for its
STORET usage), or they may contract directly with the
computer service organization supplying the time-
sharing service. If contracting directly, the vendor
will obtain the necessary authorizations from EPA
allowing the new user to access STORET. Requests for
assistance, documentation, and training are normally
directed to the regional user assistance contacts;
however, these requests are frequently routed to STORET
User Assistance in Washington, D.C.
All users, whether state or others, are expected to provide for
their own computer terminals and terminal supplies.
6.2 STORET USER SUPPORT SERVICES
To effectively and efficiently utilize a system as large and
comprehensive as STORET, the user community must have a
responsive support organization to which it can turn for
assistance and guidance on an as-needed basis. The Data
Processing and User Assistance Branch, Monitoring and Data
Support Division (MDSD) of EPA's Office of Water and Hazardous
Materials in Washington, D.C. has this responsibility, and
provides operational and assistance support to the STORET system
and its users.
Assistance by Phone
STORET User Assistance personnel in EPA Headquarters,
Washington, D.C. are available by phone from 8 am to 5
pm Eastern Time, Monday through Friday, to answer
questions on all aspects of the STORET system.
Assistance is not normally available on weekends or on
Federal holidays.
6-2
-------
STORET User Assistance may be contacted for questions
pertaining to STORET's computer system and its
communications, to the use of the vendor's terminal
command language, and to making arrangements for such
things as tapes and output delivery. Although this
group may occasionally refer a caller to the computer
services vendor or to someone within another
organization, it is very interested in keeping in
frequent touch with users, so that it may be kept
abreast of the questions and problems being experienced
in the field.
All policy decisions, with the exception of national
STORET policies, are made at the regional level under
the direction of the Regional Point of Contact.
Questions regarding such matters as individual
suballowances (the funding process by which states are
given money by their EPA Region for the use of STORET)
and requests for programming or conversions should
properly be directed to the appropriate Regional STORET
Representative. The names of these individuals are
provided elsewhere in this chapter.
Users are invited to contact STORET User Assistance to
determine the availability of other support-related
services, such as the availability of toll-free 800
telephone numbers to be used to request assistance, or
information on how to route messages to STORET User
Assistance via the user's terminal.
Training Seminars
The available training on STORET consists of two
seminars: a three-day Basic STORET Seminar and a two-
day Advanced STORET Seminar. Appropriate STORET
documentation and associated materials are provided
with the seminars which are usually given in each
region at least annually. A minimum attendance of 12
is required to hold a seminar, with a maximum of 24 due
to terminal limitations.
The Basic seminar assumes no knowledge of STORET and
little or no knowledge of a time-sharing terminal
command language. Topics covered include an
introduction to STORET and its concepts; an
introduction to the terminal command language currently
in use, and associated terminal procedures; data
storage techniques; basic retrieval techniques; helpful
on-line data sets; how to submit jobs to, and retrieve
output from, the STORET computer system; and others.
The Advanced seminar discusses advanced retrieval
options, machine readable output options, and related
6-3
-------
internal logic of the STORET system software.
Prerequisites include the completion of the Basic
STORET Seminar, and at least six months experience as
an active STORET user.
Certificates of course completion are issued upon
successful completion of the seminars.
STORET User Assistance attempts to fulfill all training
requests from the state agencies whenever possible, and
will, on occasion, provide training for groups smaller
than 12 people if considered critical for state
programs. It also maintains a list of users who have
expressed an interest in receiving training, and
frequently conducts special seminars to accommodate
those unable to obtain training via the normal
schedules. Information on the current training seminar
schedule can be obtained by calling STORET User
Assistance or by listing the appropriate STORET HELP
data set.
Documentation
A great deal of information pertaining to the use of
STORET is maintained on-line in the form of helpful
data sets which users can access from their terminals.
An index HELP data set is available which briefly
describes all of the data sets placed on the system for
the purpose of assisting users in some aspect of the
system.
The STORET User Handbook is the primary document
containing complete information on how to utilize the
STORET system. This material is rather extensive in
size, and is prepared for inclusion in the special 3"
18-ring loose-leaf binders provided by STORET User
Assistance. The major division of this Handbook is a
part, and includes an OVERVIEW part and one part for
each of the files within the STORET system. A listing
of the appropriate STORET HELP data set provides an up-
to-date status on the availability of all parts,
chapters, and sections of the Handbook, along with any
revisions thereto.
STORET User Assistance publishes a periodical as
described elsewhere in this section. The availability
of all new or revised documents and HELP files are
announced in this publication.
STORET User Assistance maintains a list of Handbook
owners, which is used as a mailing list for all
updates, periodicals, memos, and other items that are
periodically distributed to all STORET users-of-record.
6-4
-------
Users are welcome to contact STORET User Assistance to
verify their presence on this list and the accuracy of
their mailing address.
Interagency Panel
The STORET Interagency Panel was established in
December 1974 to recommend policies, priorities, and
approaches to be followed in managing the STORET
system. In addition to representatives from EPA's
Offices of Water and Hazardous Materials, Planning and
Management, and Research and Development, the panel is
comprised of selected regions and states, the Council
on Environmentaal Quality, the Office of Management and
Budget, and other Federal agencies, including the U.S.
Geological Survey, the National Academy of Sciences,
and the National Oceanic Atmospheric Administration.
The panel meets twice yearly to provide an opportunity
for members to review STORET current activities and
future plans, and to keep abreast of, and participate
in, STORET management and policy decisions.
Annual STORET Users Meeting
The annual users meeting provides an opportunity for
STORET users from around the country to discuss and
exchange ideas on their uses of the STORET system. The
three-day agenda includes presentations on the status
of the system, on planned future capabilities, and on
methods to use the system efficiently and cost-
effectively. Individual users present papers on their
uses of STORET. The forum provides an excellent
opportunity for the exchange of information between
water quality managers, and provides exposure between
state managers and EPA representatives that otherwise
would be impossible to attain. The interaction between
users is invaluable in solving common problems, in
creating an awareness of the system's capabilities, and
in achieving uniform data quality.
User Periodical
STORET User Assistance publishes, and distributes to
all users-of-record on a quarterly basis, a user
periodical titled STOR ET CETERA. This publication is
dedicated to news about the STORET system, and
regularly features such items as information on new
system enhancements, system usage reminders, retrieval
hints, references to helpful on-line STORET data sets,
and announcements of other noteworthy STORET-related
happenings. The document also provides an opportunity
for STORET User Assistance to solicit users on their
opinions about selected STORET items-of-interest, such
6-5
-------
as a request for feedback on the preferred manner of
implementing a desired system enhancement. STORET
users are encouraged to contribute topics for inclusion
in the publication.
6.3 REGIONAL STORET REPRESENTATIVES
EPA Regional STORET representatives have been assigned for each
of the ten regions. The individuals listed under the Points of
Contact column have the responsibility, within their respective
region, for establishing and implementing STORET policies, for
determining which data should and should not be stored, who
should or should not be using the system, and what their usage
allowances should be. The individuals listed under the Regional
STORET Representatives column can provide direct assistance on
questions pertaining to the use of STORET programs and other
technically-oriented matters.
6-6
-------
Region
Region I
Region II
Region III
Region IV
Region V
Region VI
Points of Contact
Walter M. Newman, Chief
Systems Analysis Branch
Environmental Protection Agency
John F. Kennedy Federal Building
Boston, Massachusetts 02203
(617) 223-5885
Herbert Barrack, Director
Management Division
Environmental Protection Agency
26 Federal Plaza
New York, New York 10007
(212) 264-2520
Larry Miller, Chief
Water Quality Monitoring Office
Surveillance & Analysis Division
Environmental Protection Agency
Curtis Building
6th and Walnut Streets
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19106
(215) 597-9823
John Marlar, Chief
Technical Support Branch
Environmental Protection Agency
1421 Peachtree Street, N.E.
Atlanta, Georgia 30309
(404) 526-3012 (FTS) 285-3012
Christopher Timm, Director
Surveillance & Analysis Division
Environmental Protection Agency
230 S. Dearborn Street
Chicago, Illinois 60604
(312) 353-6738
David White, Chief
Technical & Administration Systems
Branch
1201 Elm Street
First International Building
Dallas, Texas 75270
(214) 749-3761
Regional STORET
Representatives
Martin Fraser
(617) 223-5885
Jack Sweeney
(212) 264-0388
(FTS) 264-9850
Ted Standish
(215) 597-8046
Dan Barber
(404) 526-5989
(FTS) 285-5989
Stuart Ross
(312) 353-2061
Dave White
(214) 749-3761
6-7
-------
Region VII
Region VIII
Region IX
Region X
Walter Robohn, Federal Regional
Council Representative
Environmental Protection Agency
1735 Baltimore Avenue
Kansas City, Missouri 64108
(816) 374-5495 (FTS) 758-5429
Keith Schwab, Director
Surveillance & Analysis Division
Environmental Protection Agency
1860 Lincoln Street
Suite 900
Denver, Colorado 80203
(303) 837-4935 (FTS) 327-4935
Clyde filler, Director
Surveillance & Analysis Division
Environmental Protection Agency
100 California Street
San Francisco, California 94111
(415) 556-7858
Dr. Gary O'Neal, Director
Surveillance & Analysis Division
Environmental Protection Agency
1290 6th Avenue
Seattle, Washington 98101
(206) 422-1193 (FTS) 399-1295
Dennis Degner
(816) 374-2018
(FTS) 758-2018
Thomas Entzminger
(303) 837-2226
(FTS) 327-2226
William Lewis
(415) 556-7550
Ray Peterson
(206) 399-1580
(FTS) 399-1580
Although these representatives, and their addresses and phone
numbers, were current as of the date of publication of this
OVERVIEW, they may change from time to time. Any changes to this
information can be obtained by calling STORET User Assistance.
Unless noted otherwise, the FTS telephone numbers are identical
to the public numbers shown.
6-8
-------
o
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
This part of the STORET User Handbook
describes the Water Quality File,
the largest data file within the
STORET system. All aspects of the
WQF are covered in detail, including
how to enter and retrieve data from
computer terminals.
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
OFFICE OF WATER AND HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
WASHINGTON, D.C. 20460
WQ
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapters
WQ-NTRO
WQ-FS
WQ-DE
WQ-RET
WQ-TERM
Subject
Introduction
File Structure
Water Quality Data Entry
Water Quality Retrieval
Terminal Procedures
Tab
WQ-NTRO
WQ-FS
WQ-DE
WQ-RET
WQ-TERM
Appendices
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
Subject Page
A WQF Glossary A-l
STORET Parameters and Parameter
Codes B-l
State and County Codes C-l
Basin Codes D-l
Sampling Sites Within Sewage
Treatment Plants E-l
STORET Station Type Codes F-l
Storing, Processing, and G-l
Retrieving Intensive Survey
Data
User Supplied Edits H-l
Quality Assurance Codes 1-1
Indicating Data Value J-l
Significance
WQ
Revised 5/79
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
O
PART WQ |
WATER QUALITY FILE Z
30
O
CHAPTER
WQ-NTRO
INTRODUCTION
WQ-NTRO APRIL 1981
-------
CHAPTER
WQ-NTRO
INTRODUCTION
This part of the STORET User Handbook describes the Water Quality
File (WQF), one of several files within the STORET system. The
WQF is the largest of the STORET files in terms of the amount of
data in the file, and it is the most frequently used STORET file.
This part describes all aspects of the WQF: how data is stored
into the file; how data is retrieved from the file; how the
system is utilized within a remote computer terminal (keyboard
and card reader) environment; and other items of information
necessary to the effective and efficient usage of the file.
The WQF part is divided into chapters, which are further divided
into sections, and into subsections within sections. To
facilitate locating a particular chapter or section, chapter
divider pages are light brown, section divider pages are light
grey. The part also has several supplementary appendices and an
index, whose divider pages are light brown. As with the part
designations, mnemonic (such as WQ-NTRO) rather than numeric
identifiers are used to identify chapters within the WQF part.
Chapter WQ-FS, File Structure, describes the structure of the
STORET Water Quality File, including the data base organization
and the layout and content of the records within the data base.
The program logic employed by STORET in processing user storage
and retrieval requests is outlined.
Chapter WQ-DE, Water Quality Data Entry, describes the procedures
and methods available to store, change, and delete station
location and parameter data in the WQF.
Chapter WQ-RET, Water Quality Retrieval, describes the retrieval
capabilities provided by STORET. The process of building a
retrieval request is described and general descriptions of each
retrieval program are given, along with detailed descriptions of
the retrieval keywords and programs that can be used to structure
a retrieval request. Retrieval examples illustrate the effect of
various keywords and keyword combinations on retrieval output.
Chapter WQ-TERM, Terminal Procedures, describes the procedures
used to access the computer system on which STORET resides, and
how data are entered and retrieved within a computer terminal
(both low-speed keyboard-type and medium-speed card-reading-type)
environment.
WQ-NTRO APRIL 1981
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sections Subject Page
1 Introduction 1-1
2 The Hierarchical Structure of WQF Data 2-1
3 The Programs and Files Used in Processing 3-1
WQF Data
4 Storing Data into the WQF 4-1
5 Retrieving Data from the WQF 5-1
WQ-FS
-------
SECTION 1: INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this chapter is to present an overview of the
Water Quality File programs, and data file structures, a-nd to
describe how they are utilized in the day-to-day activities of
storing and retrieving data. WQF processing programs and data
files are introduced and defined, and a number of flow diagrams
are presented which illustrate the relationships between these
programs and files.
The content of this chapter was not designed to provide internal
logic flows of the programs, nor to describe byte-by-byte layouts
of the various data files used by the programs. Rather, this
chapter was designed to provide enough detail necessary to
acquaint users with an overview of how user-written retrieval and
storage requests interface with WQF programs and files. It is
presumed that the reader of this chapter is an experienced user
of the STORET system.
Section 2 describes the hierarchical structure of STORET water
quality data in relation to the data files in which they are
placed. Section 3 defines the various programs and files which
make up the WQF. The remaining two sections describe the general
flow of storing and retrieving WQF data.
Other chapters of this WQ Part describe the processes of storing
and retrieving WQF data in greater detail.
WQ-FS
1-1
-------
SECTION 2: THE HIERARCHICAL STRUCTURE OF- WQF DATA.
The monitoring activities conducted by the states, EPA regions,
and other agencies and organizations are an essential aspect of
our Nation's program to prevent, reduce, and eliminate water
pollution. The findings of these monitoring activities (i.e.,
the amounts of pollutants found in water samples) are stored in
the Water Quality File, the largest of STCRET's files. This
section describes the monitoring process in general, the types of
data that are stored in the WQF, and how these data are stored i.r\
the WQF.
2.1 THE MONITORING PROCESS
Monitoring strategies are developed by individual
states, with guidance by EPA, to fulfill their own
particular water quality objectives. A great deal of
thought and planning goes into defining the area to be
covered, and in establishing the purpose to be
achieved. Once defined by planners, the network is
then defined to STORET by the assignment of an agency
code which is unique to all other networks defined in
STORET.
Part of the monitoring network scrategy is the
determination of the number and location of sites tc be
included within the network. It is mcs" important that
these sites be located properly so that they present an
accurate picture- of the water quality for the area of
interest. These monitoring sites are referred to as
stations in STORET, and -each station within an agency
is assigned up to four owner-specified unique 'to the
agency) station codes. The first station code, which
is required, is called the Primary Station Code. The
remaining three optional codes are called Secondary
Station Codes, and may be used as aliases for the
station.
Another aspect of the monitoring strategy for a network
is the determination of what needs to be sampled at the
monitoring sites, over what time frame, and at what
sampling frequency. Over 1800 unique parameters are
defined within STORET, and the planners decide which
parameters are to be measured 'in accordance with the
overall monitoring strategy.
Two basic types of samples are taken from water: a crab-
sample and.a composite sample. A grab sample is an
individual water quality sample collected at a specific
point in time; composite samples are combinations of
individual samples obtained at intervals over a period
of time. These may be several grab samples spanning a
WQ-FS
2-1
-------
24-hour period where all grabs are placed in a single
container, or a series of samples taken at equal
distances across a stream section. Analysis of these
samples for water quality data may be performed in the
field or within a laboratory. STORE! provides a means
to store information on any type of water sample, from
a simple grab to a sophisticated composite sample.
Each agency has escablished its own procedures for
coding the- results of the water sample analyses onto
sheets or forms used to prepare the data in machine
readable form, such as on punched cards. At this point
the data is ready .to be stored into the WQF.
2.2 THE DATA IN THE WQF
The information within the WQF consists of two basic
types of data: station location data, which describes
and categorizes the geographical location of where a
sample was taken.; and parametric data, which describes
the conditions under which a sample was taken (such as
date, time, and depth) as well as the results of the
sample analyses.
2.2.1 STATION LOCATION DATA
Water quality data measurement stations are located on
essentially all of the Nation's rivers, lakes, streams,
and other waterways; over 200,000 unique collection
points are defined within STORET. The .physical
location of a station can be identified or referenced
by any or all of the ways listed and described below:
agency code and station code identifiers
hydrologic references
latitude and longitude coordinates
state, county, basin, or other area
designations
AGENCY/STATION CODES
Every station is located within a specific monitoring
network which is identified by an agency code and which
is unique to all other agency codes defined within
STORET. Each station is assigned a primary station
code, and, optionally, up to three secondary station
codes, or aliases. Whenever parametric data is being
stored, changed, or deleted, the appropriate agency and
station codes must be referenced. Similarly, data for
one or more agencies and/or stations can be retrieved
by these codes.
WQ-FS
2-2
-------
HYDROLOGIC REFERENCES
A hydrologic index (or river mile index) is a numerical
code which identifies the location of a point on a
defined river system by defining the distance of the
point from, and its hydrologic relationship to, the
mouth of the river system.. A complete hydrologic index
is composed of the following codes: a major oasin
code; a minor basin code; a terminal stream number
which defines a stream in the minor basin; mileages
which define the distances between and to confluences
in the river system; and an index which identifies the
stream level on which the point is located.
LATITUDE AND LONGITUDE COORDINATES
Many stations, particularly those on open waters such
as oceans, lakes, bays, and estuaries, cannot always be
easily located using hydrologic indices. A station's
location can also be pinpointed by the conventional
geographical coordinates of latitude and longitude,
expressed in degrees, minutes, seconds, and tenths of a
second.
AREA DESIGNATIONS
Stations can also be identified with respect to the
state, county, and major/minor/subbasin in which they
are physically located.. Another area designation with
which stations can be retrieved is the 208 area
corresponding to the designated state areawide waste
.treatment management area as defined under
of PL 92-500.
2.2.2 PARAMETRIC DATA
Once a station has been identified to STORET and stored
,n the system, parametric data obtained at that station
:an be stored in the system.
:he selection of parameters that are sampled at a
station is a function of the monitoring strategy and
)ther requirements established by the agency
•esponsible for the station. Regardless of which
sarameters are sampled, certain information may be
Jefined for each parameter value that is to be stored
within the WQF. The following list summarizes this
.nformation:
WQ-FS
2-3
-------
the location (primary or secondary station
code) where the sample was taken (required^
the date (month, day, year) the sample
was collected (required)
the time (hour, minute) the sample was
collected (optional)
the depth (in feet or meters) at which
the sample was taken (optional)
the value (amount) of the parameter found
within the sample (required), and
the specification of one or more remark
codes which further describe the
conditions under which the sample was
taken (optional).
Only one set of analytical results (one data record1
may be stored under a single parameter code-date-time-
depth-location combination, which is unique to every
. other parameter value record stored within the WQF.
Analytical results (values) are associated with
standard 5-digit STORE! parameter codes. A complete
list of these codes, in various sort orders, can be
obtained by following the instructions given in
Appendix B: STORET Parameters and Parameter Codes.
These parameter codes define the method by which an
analysis was performed, as well as the form and units
of measurement in which the results were recorded or
stored.
2.3 HOW WATER QUALITY DATA IS STORED IN THE WQF
Figure 2-1 gives a schematic representation of how
station location and parametric data are stored within
the WQF.
As shown in the schematic, all data for a specific
station is associated with that station. Within the
system, data for a particular station is linked with
other data for that station by a series of record
pointers. Data elements are chained according to date
and time (schematically strung along a time-variable
clothesline), and according to depth within time.
Associated with each unique date/time/depth entry
within STORET are a variable number of sample values,
stored in increasing parameter code order. Only one
value may be stored for any unique
station/date/time/depth/parameter-code record. New
records are stored, and appropriately chained, in their
proper date/time and parameter code sequence.
WQ-FS
2-4
-------
STATION 3
RMI
LAT/UONG
STATE. CITY.
SA5IN. ANO
AREA COOES
O
x^^x-*
^/>1
/
~~lll 1
A
C
E i
N •
C
Y !
X
Y
z
i
d
STATION A (
RMI (
LATSUONG /
STATE. CITY, (
3ASIN, ANO )
AREA COOES (
/— Date ^— Date / — Date
/— Time X- Time /- Time
/— Depth ,/• Depth /- 0«oth
%-^ ./•- Composite Data /- Composite Data /— • Comoosite Data
•^ s^ \— Parameter code, j— Parameter code.
Ul
0
O
u
2
35
«f
,u
c
O
z
'
Remark code. Value
— Parameter code.
Remark code, Value
Remark code, Value
r Parameter coda,
. , Remark cod*. Value
Remark cod*, Valu*
— Parameter code.
Remark code. Value
r
— Parameter code,
Remark code, Va'ue
r ^
^
— Parameter coda, ' ^TI^I"
Remark code. Value * ' c
— Parameter code,
Remark coda. Value
'
^^.••^^•il^^l^—^
•^^••^^^^^^•••i*
FIGURE 2-1
CLOTHESLINE ANALOGY OF THE STORAGE OF
STATION LOCATION AND PARAMETRIC DATA WITHIN THE WQF
WQ-FS
2-5
-------
SECTION 3: THE PROGRAMS AND FILES USED IN PROCESSING WQF DATA
This section presents a brief description of each of the1
individual data files which collectively make up the Water
Quality File; it also describes the processing programs which are
invoked when users request that data be stored or retrieved.
Summary listings of these data files and programs, by function,
are shown in Figures 3-1 and 3-2. The data files are listed in
Figure 3-1 according to their use as an index, transient, or data
base file; the programs are listed in Figure 3-2 according to
their use in a storage or retrieval operation. All are described
below. The remaining two sections of this chapter discuss the
interaction of these files and programs in more detail.
TRANSIENT fILES
FIGURE 3-1
DATA FILES WITHIN THE WQF
WQ-FS
3-1
-------
3.1 DATA FILES WITHIN THE WQF
For purposes of explanation, these files have been
grouped into three basic categories: index files,
which are used to locate requested stations,- transient
files, which are created as an intermediate step before
data is permanently stored or retrieved; and the data
base file/ which contains the station and parametric
data which make up the WQF. Each of these files is
described in turn below.
3.1.1 INDEX FILES
Depending upon the station selection keywords specified
within a retrieval request, or depending upon the
storage requests specified within a storage deck, one
or more of these index files will be utilized to locate
specific stations referenced by the retrieval keywords
or storage instructions.
Each record within most of these index files contains
one or two fields which point to the exact location of
data within the WQF. These fields are the computer
sequence number (CSN) field and the relative station
position (RSP) field. Whenever a station is added to
the WQF, it is assigned the next available CSN which
will uniquely identify the station from all other
stations within the system. (CSNs of stations deleted
are permanently retired; they are not reassigned to
subsequent new stations.) The RSP points to the
beginning location in the WQF data base of the station
.location and parametric data associated with the
corresponding. CSN . As the STORET system processes a
retrieval request, it references various index files
depending upon the set of station identification
keywords specified within the
point to the locations of the
interest.
request, which in turn
water quality data of
LATITUDE AND LONGITUDE FILE (LATF)
This index file contains one 18-byte fixed-length
record for each primary and secondary station code
stored in the WQF, stored in an increasing longitude
within latitude order. The key consists of the
latitude coordinate concatenated with the longitude
coordinate .
Latitude/Longitude State
Coordinates Code
RSP
CSN
WQ-FS
3-2
-------
STATE AND COUNTY FILE ;STCOF:
This index file contains one 16-byte fixed-length
record for each primary and secondary station code
stored in the WQF, stored in ascending state, and
county within state, sequence. Station codes are
stored in random order within county codes.
The file also contains a record for each station
according to its location within a
major/minor/subbasin. Station codes 'are stored in
random order within subbasin codes.
State/County Code RS? CSN
Major/Minor/Subbasin Codes RS? CSN
AGENCY/STATION FILE IAS?)
This index file contains one 33-byte fixed-length
record for each primary and secondary station code
stored within the system. The records are stored in
ascending alphanumeric station number sequence within
agency code. (Due to this ordering scheme, the primary
and secondary station codes for a particular station
within an agency may not necessarily be grouped
together.)
Agency/Station Codes State RS? CSN
Code
WQ-FS
3-3
-------
MASTER STATION FILE (MSF)
This index file contains one 195-byte fixed-length
record for each primary station code stored within the
system, stored in ascending alphanumeric sequence
within agency code. (The MSF serves as a backup to the
other index files by containing all other station
location keys, such as state and county codes, latitude
and longitude, RMI index and mile levels, agency code,
basin codes, and station type.)
Primary
Station Code
Other Station RSP CSN
location codes
RIVER MILE INDEX FILE (RMIF)
This index file contains one 112-byte fixed-length
record for each primary station code stored within the
WQF. Each record contains the station's RMI
information which includes the major and minor terminal
basin codes and the terminal stream number, the set of
12 mile and level indexes, and the corresponding CS.N'
and RSP. Records are stored in a downstream to
upstream sequence (i.e., in an increasing river mile
index sequence). River mile indexes of stations
located on tributaries are stored within the respective
main stem, beginning with the tributary closest to the
terminal stream.
RMI Key
Other RMI
information
RSP
CSN
WQ-FS
3-4
-------
AREA FILE (AREAFLE;
This index file contains one variable length record for
each state designated areawide waste treatment
management area defined within Section 208 of Public
Law 92-500. (The STORE! help data set named
SEC203.AREAS contains a listing of all 2C3 areas
defined within the WQF.) Each record contains the
latitude/longitude polygon which bounds the named 2C3
area. An AREA retrieval is converted to a polygon
retrieval using this cross-reference file.
Area Name Polygon
RELATIVE STATION POINTER FILE (RSPF)
This index file contains one 22-byte fixed-length
record for each primary station code that has ever be=
stored within the WQF. Records are stored in ascendi:
numerical CSN sequence. The values within the RS?
fields point to the locations of station identificati:
data on the water quality data base file.
CSN RS?' State Station Code Type
MASK LIBRARY FILE (MASK;
This 'index file contains one 12,500-oyte fixed-length
record for each station mask created and stored within
the WQF. Each bit position within this record
corresponds to a single station. Masks have been
created for each STORET parameter which identify the
attribute 'parameter nnn is present at this station'
for all stations on the system. Users may also create
their own masks via the NOPAR program.
Mask
Key
B
it
Matri
X
WQ-FS
3-5
-------
3.1.2 TRANSIENT FILES
The transient files are intermediate files which are
created on a temporary basis by the retrieval and
storage programs. These files are described below.
KITS FILE
This transient file is created by the RETRIV program
and contains one record for each station that fulfills
the specified station selection and station restriction
criteria established by the station identification
keywords within the retrieval request. The file is
also utilized by RETRIV (by a program module other than
the one that created the file) during its processing of
the data selection keywords specified in the retrieval.
Records within the file are fixed-length, and contain
three fields of information: a record code, an agency
code, and a station code.
MOD FILES
These temporary files are created whenever a storage
request is processed by the programs EDIT3, GDIP,
DIPMS, or WQGSTOR. Their records contain syntax-error-
free station location and parametric data which is to
be added, changed, or deleted from the WQF. Each
record contains the date, agency and station codes, and
up to ten values per sample. These files serve as
input to the UPDATE program (run over a weekend by
STORET personnel) which performs the user's requested
data storage transactions on the STORET data base and
index files.
FURTHER COMPUTATIONAL FILE (FCF)
Further Computational Files (FCFs) are files created by
the RET program which contain normal RET retrieval
output (i.e., raw data values which have not been
manipulated in any way by the WQF analysis programs)
that can ultimately be used as input to user-written
programs. An FCF can have a variety of formats,
depending upon user requirements and the amount of
information needed. FCF records can be up to 305
characters in length, and can include parameter heading
records, station heading records, data records, and
delimiter records. Layouts of the different FCFs,
their records, and the fields within these records, are
described in detail in the description of the advanced
RET program.
WQ-FS
3-6
-------
ERROR FILE
This temporary file is created whenever a storage
request is processed by the programs EDIT3, GDI?,
DIPMS, or WQGSTOR. The file contains one record for
each error discovered in the processing of the storage
request. Information contained in each record includes
agency and station identification codes, the parameter
code in error, and an error number corresponding to the
error found. This file is in turn processed by the
ERROR program.
3.1/3 DATA BASE FILE
The WQF detail data base contains all the station
identification and parametric data that is available
for retrieval by the WQF retrieval programs. The data
base resides on multiple IBM 3330 Model II Disk Storage
units, all of which are on-line during normal system
availability hours. Data for any particular station is
purposely scattered over several disk packs, to improve
access availability and efficiency. Information on any
given station includes a header record and
approximately 14-variable length data records. The
header record contains a station's relative station
position (RSP) which is pointed to by the HITS file and
the RSPF file, the station's CSN, the date range of
data stored with the station along with other check
information, and a pointer to the first data record.
There is a data record for each element of station
identification information (i.e., there is one record
that contains only RMI data, another that contains only
latitude/longitude data, and so on), followed by
records that contain the parameter codes, values, and
remarks stored for the station. The records containing
station identification information are relatively
short, while records containing parametric data can be
as long as 2000 to 2500 characters. All data records
for a given station are chained.
WQ-FS
3-7
-------
3.2 PROGRAMS USED TO PROCESS WQF DATA
For purposes of explanation, these programs have been
grouped according to their use in either a storage or
retrieval operation as shown in Figure 3-2. A brief
description of each program is given below. Sections
and 5 discuss the interactions of these programs with
WQF files.
STORAGE RETRIEVAL
DISTRIBUTE SCAN
EDITS RETRIV
GDIP
DIPMS
WQGSTOR
RANGCHK
ERROR
UPDATE
FIGURE 3-2
PROGRAMS USED TO PROCESS WQF DATA
3.2.1 STORAGE PROGRAMS
DISTRIBUTE
The DISTRIBUTE program is essentially a control program
which is invoked by the procedure STWQJ. Its function
is to read the control statement entered by the user
which defines the type of storage procedure to be
initiated (i.e., 701, ?02, ?03, ?04), and to return the
proper return code which will call the appropriate
storage processing program. The program is not
returned to after it passes control to either EDITS,
GDIP, DIPMS, or WQGSTOR.
WQ-FS
3-8
-------
EDITB
The EDITB program is called by DISTRIBUTE in response
to a ?C1 type of storage procedure initiated by a user.
The program processes both station location data and
parametric data, whether adding, deleting, or changing
data. Input to the program consists of fixed-field,
standard card input. All fields are checked for
syntax, with errors written to the ERROR file. Data
passing these edit checks are written to the MOD file.
The program passes all parameter values to the RANGCHK
program, where they are checked for acceptable ranges,
before they are written to either the ERROR file or MOD
file, as appropriate. EDITB can process both grab and
composite data.
GDIP
The GDIP program is called by DISTRIBUTE in response to
a ?02 typ'e of storage procedure initiated by a user.
The program processes only new parametric data. Input
to the program consists of cards in a variable or free-
form format. All fields are checked for syntax, with
errors written to the ERROR file. Data passing the
edit checks are passed to the RANGCHK program which
checks parameter values for acceptable ranges. "---
are written to the ERROR file; values which are
acceptable are written to the MOD file.
rrors
DIPMS
The DIPMS program is called by DISTRIBUTE in response
to a ?03 type of storage procedure initiated by a user.
The program processes only new parametric data. Input
to the program consists of cards in a variable or free-
form format. All fields are checked for syntax, with
errors written to the ERROR file. Data passing the
edit checks are passed to the RANGCHK program which
checks parameter values for acceptable ranges. Errors
are written to the ERROR file; values which are
acceptable are written to the MOD file.
WQ-FS
3-9
-------
WQGSTOR
The WQGSTOR program is called by DISTRIBUTE in response
to a ?04 type of storage procedure initiated by a user.
The program processes parametric data (whether adding,
deleting, or changing data), and it can also process
both grab and composite data. Input to the program is
in a variable or free-form format, and consists of AC
and SC cards. All fields are checked for syntax
errors, with errors written to the ERROR file. Data
passing these edit checks are written to the MOD file.
The program passes all parameter values to the RANGCHK
program, where they are checked for acceptable ranges,
before they are written to either the ERROR file or MOD
file, as appropriate.
RANGCHK
This program is called by DISTRIBUTE whenever
parametric data are being stored in the WQF. It
performs an edit check against parameter values being
stored to assure that they fall within an acceptable
range pre-established for the parameters, and stored as
tables within the program. Appendix B to this Part of
the Handbook lists the highest and lowest acceptable
values that have been established for approximately 18C
parameter codes.
ERROR
This program is called by DISTRIBUTE to obtain a
listing of errors generated during a data storage
request. The program lists the errors written onto the
ERROR file by the EDITS, GDIP, DIPMS, and WQGSTOR
programs. This program may be invoked by the user to
obtain a listing of errors generated during an UPDATE.
UPDATE
The UPDATE program is the program that actually updates
the WQF data base. It is run each weekend by STORET
personnel, and processes the data written to the MOD
file by the storage programs during the previous week.
The program performs additional edit checks on the data
being stored, changed, or deleted. It groups all of
the data into groups of deletes, additions, and changes
before sorting the transactions into agency/station
order. It first updates all appropriate index files,
then updates the detail file.
WQ-FS
3-10
-------
2.2 RETRIEVAL PROGRAMS
SCAN
This program performs a syntax check on all records
within a retrieval request prior to the time the
retrieval request is passed to RETRIV. It is the first
program initiated as a result of executing the STORET
RET command. The program checks for proper keyword
spelling, formatting, and punctuation, and for proper
keyword and keyword/value combinations. The program
generates a listing of errors found, and if none are
detected, it passes the retrieval request to RETRIV for
continued processing.
RETRIV
The RETRIV program is the primary program involved with
the processing of a retrieval request. It takes
control once the retrieval has successfully passed the
syntax check performed by the SCAN program, and it
remains in control until analysis functions are
required, which are performed by routines inherent
within the statistical analysis retrieval programs.
RETRIV consists of several modules each of which
processes a specific set of retrieval request keywords,
as described in more detail in Section 5.
WQ-FS
3-11
-------
SECTION 4: STORING DATA INTO THE WQF
This section provides an overview of the process of storing data
into the WQF. The structure of a typical storage request is
described, as are the several types of storage procedures that
can be invoked by a storage request. The interactions between
WQF files and WQF storage programs are illustrated and described,
as are the various edit and error checks that are performed by
the storage procedures. (Chapter WQ-DE of this Water Quality
File Part presents a detailed discussion of the data storage
capability, and how it is utilized to store and maintain water
quality station location and parametric data within the WQF.)
4.i THE STRUCTURE OF A STORAGE REQUEST
A WQF storage request is composed of a set of 80-
character records (either punched cards or lines of
information within a data set) which defines what
information is to be processed, and what is to be done
with the information, i.e., is it to be initially
stored, or used to change, be added to, or delete
previously stored information. The majority of these
records, or cards, are of a fixed-field format, with
specific information being coded in specific fields,
including card type .codes which identify the card and
its contents to the STORET system. Certain storage
request cards relate only to station location
information, while others relate only to parametric
data.
There are nine different types of cards that can be
used, in differing combinations, to code station
location data. (And station location data can be
entered into the WQF only via these particular cards.)
The names, codes, and corresponding functions of these
cards are listed in Figure 4-1.
Other card types are used to code parametric data, and
include P cards, D cards, and 6 cards. (Chapter WQ-DE
describes these cards, and the fields within the cards,
in greater detail.)
Parametric data may not be stored in the same UPDATE
run that a new station is defined and stored in the
WQF. It is generally more prudent to first assure that
a station has been stored successfully and correctly
before storing parametric data associated with the
station.
WQ-FS
4-1
-------
CARD NAME
CARD CODE
O.SPECIFY
Agency Card A
Station Type Card T
Station Card S
Latitude/Longitude Card 0
RMI Card 1
RMI Card 2
Major/Minor Basin Card 3
Location Description Card 4
Descriptive Paragraph Card 5
general information
common to a set of stations
a code depicting the
characteristics of one or
more stations
information specific to
a single station
geographical coordinates of
a station's location
hydrologic' indices '.river ~lie
indices) of a station
continuation of information
on card 1
basin location information
additional information
identifying a station's
location
textual information
describing station activity
FIGURE 4-1
CARDS USED TO STORE STATION LOCATION INFORMATION
4.2 TYPES OF STORAGE PROCEDURES
There are four procedures available to the STORET user
to initiate different storage operations. These are
known as ?01, ?02, ?03, or ?04 storage procedures which
correspond to the way they are invoked via a keyboard
terminal. The uses or functions of these storage
procedure methods are summarized in Figure 4-2.
The ?01
employs
be used
station
the onl
change,
card and a
agency and
applicable
Figure 4-2
for a
cards
storage procedure (or fixed field procedure'
a fixed-field or standard card format, and can
to either add new, change old, or delete old
location data and/or parametric data. (This is
storage procedure which can be used to store,
or delete station location data.) An agency
station card will be coded to identify the
stations involved. This procedure is also
to all four types of samples listed in
The cards used to code the parametric data
?01 storage procedure are called parametric data
or 6 cards.
WQ-FS
4-2
-------
FUNCTION/USE
storing new station location data
changing station location data
deletina station location data
i "
i
storing new parametric data
changing parametric data
deleting parametric data
simple grab sample
grab sample with time
composite sample with dates
composite sample with all data
STORAGE
701
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
702
no
no
no
yes
no
no
yes
yes
yes
no
PROCEDURE
703
no
no
no
yes
no
no
yes
yes .
yes
no
704
!
no
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
FIGURE 4-2
PERMISSIBLE CODING PROCEDURES AS A FUNCTION OF USE
The 702 storage procedure (or decimal input procedure)
employs a variable or free-form card format, and can be
used only to store parameter values, and only to store
values sampled at a number of stations taken at
different times, dates, and depths (single station
storage). The ?02 procedure is not used to change or
delete parametric data, nor can it be used to store
composite samples with date, time, and sampling
conditions identified. The cards used to code this
procedure are an agency card, and one or more P cards
and D cards (and their respective continuation cards if
needed).
The 703 storage procedure (another form of the decimal
input procedure) also employs a variable or free-form
card format, and also can be used only to store
parameter values. This procedure is used to store
samples taken at identical, as opposed to different,
times, dates, and depths (multiple station storage).
The 703 procedure is not used to change or delete
previously stored parameter data, nor is it used to
store composite samples wich date, time, and sampling
conditions identified. The cards used to code this
procedure are an agency card, and one or more P cards
and D cards (and their respective continuation cards if
needed).
WQ-FS
4-3
-------
The ?G4 storage procedure (or WQGSTOR) employs a
variable or free-form format, and can be used either to
store, change, or delete parametric data. It also can
be used with all four types of samples. The cards used
to code this procedure are an agency card (using either
a fixed-format or a variable format', and one or more
SC cards.
Each of these procedures invokes the execution of a
specific program which processes the requested storage
procedure, as described and illustrated in the
paragraphs below.
4.3 ENTERING DATA INTO THE WQF
Figure 4-3 portrays the flow of a typical STORET
storage request through the STORET processing programs
that are invoked when a storage request is entered into
the STORET system. It also illustrates the various
files that are created as a result of the processing
performed.
Processing of a user's storage request is a two-phase
operation. It begins with the execution of the
procedure named STWQJ, which calls the DISTRIBUTE
program, which reads the user input files and which
calls the appropriate program required to process the
specified storage procedure. These programs (EDITB,
GDIP, DIPMS, and WQGSTOR) process the specified storage
request, perform a variety of error checking and field
editing routines, create both an ERROR file and a MOD
file, and if the storage request involves parametric
data, pass control to the range check program. Only
those storage request records which pass the various
editing and error checking routines are written to the
MOD file; all others are written to the ERROR file.
Errors written to the ERROR file are available to the
user who submitted the storage request, and after
correction, the storage deck can be resubmitted, and
placed on the MOD file, as described below.
Throughout the week, all users' edited and
syntactically-correct storage requests are collected on
the MOD file; this data is not permanently stored
during the week in the STORET data base as a direct
result of users' storage requests. The second phase of
the process of storing user water quality data occurs
over the weekend when STORET User Assistance personnel
run the STORET UPDATE program. UPDATE reads the data
in the MOD file, performs other edit checks on the data
being stored, changed, or deleted, and then updates the
WQ-FS
4-4
-------
STORE! index and detail data base files. Storage
requests which fail the UPDATE edits (e.g., a request
to delete a station not previously stored';, are called
secondary errors and are written to the ERROR file,
which users can access on Monday following the weekend
update.
CAflO
DECKS | '
V
EXEC
STWJJ
uSEfl ,
fiues ; |
FIGURE 4-3
THE FLOW OF A STORAGE REQUEST
WQ-FS
4-5
-------
SECTION 5: RETRIEVING DATA FROM THE WQF
This section provides an overview of the process of retrieving
data from the WQF. The structure of a retrieval request is
described, as is the logic that should be applied in building a
retrieval request in order to obtain only that data actually of
interest. Several diagrams are explained which illustrate the
interactions between WQF files and WQF retrieval programs.
(Chapter WQ-RET of this Water Quality File Part presents a
detailed discussion of the retrieval capability, and how it is
utilized to obtain the water quality station location and
parameter data of interest.)
5.1 THE STRUCTURE OF A RETRIEVAL REQUEST
A WQF retrieval request is composed of one or more
instructions which define what information is to be
retrieved, and how the information is to be presented.
(These instructions are entered into the STORET system
as 80-column punched cards or as lines of information
of a data set via a keyboard terminal.) An instruction
is composed of a keyword — an English word, letter, or
expression which generally depicts^ the function that
the keyword performs — and, in most instances, an
associated value which assigns a specific quantity or
other 'value' to the keyword. Thus the keyword and
value instruction is the basic element of the STORET
WQF retrieval language, and valid combinations of these
instructions make up a retrieval request. One keyword,
the 'PGM=program-name,' keyword, must appear as the
first keyword in any retrieval request,, and it
specifies which retrieval program is to be executed by
the STORET system.
Structuring a retrieval request is a relatively
straight-forward process, involving the consideration
of each of the six basic steps shown in Figure 5-1, and.
the selection of those keywords (relevant to each step':'
which will result in the desired data. (Chapter WQ-RET
describes this process in more detail, as well as the
keywords that may be specified in any retrieval
request.)
WQ-FS
5-1
-------
STEP
APPLICAS-LE KEYWOR
SELEC-"
APPROPRIATE
RETRIEVAL PROGRAM
STATE
PURPOSE
OF RETRIEVAL
IDENTIFY
STATION (S)
OF INTEREST
IDENTIFY
PARAMETRIC DATA
OF INTEREST
SELECT
PROGRAM-SPECIFIC
KEYWORDS
SELECT
PRINT CONTROL
DESIRED
X^SUEMIT\
( .FOP )
\?ROCE.CSING/
PGM
? rjp. P
P,2D,UC,ANC,.
SORT,SCALE,OR,
FIGURE 5-1
BUILDING A RETRIEVAL REQUEST
WQ-FS
5-2
-------
5.2 TYPES OF RETRIEVALS
There are thirteen programs available to the STORET
user to retrieve station and parametric data from the
WQF. Some programs are appropriate to those whose
interests are geographically oriented, while others are
suited to users who are more interested in one or more
water quality parameters, regardless of their specific
geographical location. In addition to the information
stored from a user's own station, a STORET user can
also retrieve data on stations other than his own,
depending upon the user's area of interest or concern.
The following list summarizes the primary function of
these retrieval programs and the types of information
they provide.
STATION INFORMATION ONLY
program-name primary function
STA produces a listing of all primary
and secondary station codes
associated with one or more
agency codes.
INDEX prints station header information
for each station retrieved.
NOPAR tests selected stations for the
satisfaction of certain
user-specified sampling criteria.
LOG plots a map identifying station
locations.
INVENTORY OF PARAMETERS SAMPLED
program-name primary function
INVENT produce summary listings about
INV120 all parameters sampled at
selected stations. INVENT
utilizes a 132-character print
line, INV120 utilizes a
120-character print line.
WQ-FS
5-3
-------
LISTINGS OF ACTUAL SAMPLE VALUES
program-name
RET
PUNCH
primary function
obtains tabular listings of actual
sample values (i.e., raw data
values which have not been
manipulated in any way by the WQF
analysis programs) for selected
stations.
punches selected parametric data
onto 80-column cards.
STATISTICAL ANALYSIS OF RAW DATA
primary function
compares the stored values of
selected water quality parameters
against a set(s) of user-specified
values or criteria.
performs a variety of user-specified
statistical calculations on the
values of requested parameters
sampled at selected stations.
extracts correlation and regression
information from selected parametric
data.
performs a variety of statistical
computations on the values of
selected parameters, and produces
graphic displays of the calculated
results as a function of the
stations selected.
retrieves user-specified parametric
data, and plots the values of each
selected parameter for each selected
station as a function of time.
The output that may be requested varies according to
the retrieval program, and includes printouts, punched
cards, plots, and machine-readable output located on
disk or magnetic tape.
program-name
STAND
MEAN
REG
MSP
PLOT
WQ-FS
5-4
-------
5.3 THE FLOW 0? A RETRIEVAL REQUEST THROUGH RETRIV
Figure 5-2 portrays the flow of a typical STORET
retrieval request through the STORET processing
programs that are invoked when a retrieval request is
entered into the STORET system. Although all retrieval
programs do not adhere to this general flow, the
majority do. Those programs that bypass RETRIV, such
as INVENT and STA, in effect perform their own RETRIV
functions internally.
The RETRIV program is the primary program involved in
processing retrieval requests. It takes control once a
retrieval request has successfully passed the syntax
check performed by the program SCAN, and it remains in
control until analysis functions are required, which
are performed by routines inherent within the
statistical analysis retrieval programs. RETRIV reads
all general retrieval keywords specified in the
retrieval request (and as documented in Section 4 of
the WQ-RET chapter.'; it reads the appropriate WQF index
files to locate the data sought; it creates a HITS
file; and after obtaining the requested data from the
STORET data base, it generates the requested output.
The following paragraphs describe the functions of the
three components of RETRIV 'SEC i, SEC G, and SEC 2 in
more detai 1.
The program module SEC 1 reads the station
identification keywords, and searches the appropriate
WQF index files for those station entries which satisfy
the user-specified station selection and station
restriction criteria. (This process includes the
resolution of any masks specified within the retrieval
request.) SEC 1 then creates a' retrieval HITS file
which contains a pointer to each station within STORET
that satisfies the specified selection and restriction
criteria. SEC 1 also prints a message indicating the
number of stations found, and produces a listing of all
control information available to the program during
this phase of execution. This control information is
often helpful to STORET User Assistance personnel for
diagnostic purposes.
Program module SEC G is executed only if the AGGR data
selection keyword is specified in the retrieval
request. If this keyword is specified, SEC G sorts the
HITS file according to the AGGR criteria, and appends
the numerical value of the AGGR keyword to each record
within the HITS file.
WQ-FS
5-5
-------
*0. STATIONS.
OTMER CONTROL
INFORMATION
REPORT
OF
OATA
SATISFYING
SELECTION
CRITERIA
OTHER
TEMPORARY
FILES
IFCF, OTHERS1
ANALYSIS
FUNCTIONS
Of
REQUESTED
RETRIEVAL
S RETRIEVAL
:^STRUC7lCNS TO
^ETBiV
1
] STATION IDENTIFICATION
|
-------
Program module SEC 2 reads the HITS file created by SEC
1 or SEC G, it .searches the STORE! data base for those
stations referenced by the HITS file, and it compares
the raw data found with the data selection keywords
specified in the retrieval request. It then produces
the output as requested via the print control keywords
specified in the retrieval, printing and/or writing to
other temporary files those data that passed the
selection criteria.
Processing of the retrieval request is then either
concluded or passed to the appropriate analysis
function of the requested program if any statistical
analysis processing is to be performed. Complete
descriptions of the data files used and created by
these program-specific analysis functions are described
within the WQ-RET chapter.
5.4 IDENTIFYING STATIONS WITHIN A RETRIEVAL REQUEST
Station identification keywords are divided into two
groups: station selector keywords, or selectors, and
station restriction keywords, or restrictors. 'These
keywords are listed and described in Section 4 of the
WQ-RET chapter.) At least one selector must be
included in a retrieval request, or no stations - and
therefore no data - will be selected oy the retrieva.
request. Optionally, one or more restrictors may be
included within the retrieval whose function is to
further screen the selected stations.
Station selection keywords employ OR selection logic,
while station restrictor keywords employ AND selection
logic. Normally, only a single selector should be
specified in any single retrieval request. Should more
than one selector be specified, however, caution must
be exercised, as the prevailing OR logic results in the
retrieval of all stations which satisfy all sets of
criteria as defined by the selectors, which could
easily result in the inadvertent selection of one or
more stations a multiple number of times. For example,
if a retrieval contained both a state selector keyword
(STC/ and a polygon selector keyword ;LT,L;, stations
located within any part of the state overlapped by the
polygon (area B/ would be retrieved twice, alone witn
WQ-FS
5-7
-------
all other stations within the remaijuo.gva.re.as, of the
polygon (area A) and the state (area C). 'Such
duplicated data more than likely would not have been
intended, would result in increased computer processing
costs, and surely would introduce analysis
incongrui ties.
The AND logic employed by the restrictors has the
effect of limiting or narrowing the number of stations
retrieved. Using the polygon/state example above, the
specification of the LT,L keywords and the ST keyword
(a restrictor which restricts the selection of stations
to the state indicated) would result in the retrieval
of stations located only in area B. The retrieval
would contain no duplication of stations, and
significantly fewer total number of stations.
The sequence by which RETRIV processes station
identification keywords is illustrated by the path
drawn in the diagram below. ' Selector keywords are
processed independently of each other: stations found
as a result of the first selector are ANDed with all of
the restrictor keywords specified in the retrieval,
with the surviving stations written to the HITS file;
subsequent selectors are similarly processed in the
order specified within the retrieval request.
RESTRICTORS
WQ-FS
5-8
-------
In addition to the selection, concept illustrated above,
there is another guideline that should be understood
and followed when deciding which stations should be
specified via selectors, and which should be specified
by restrictors. Since the system first retrieves those
stations specified by the station selector keyword, and
then narrows or reduces those stations via the station
restrictor keyword, the criteria that would expectedly
find the fewer number of stations should always be
identified by the station selector keyword. For
example,- if a user were interested in the stations
within one state of an agency whose station network
encompassed several states,the STC and U keywords
should be used. However, if it were known that an
agency didn't have too many stations, but that they
were spread over a wide multi-state area, the A, S and
ST keywords would probably result in the more efficient
retrieval. By following this guideline in retrievals
which have either STC and U, or A, S, and ST specified,
users will structure a more efficient retrieval since
less data will be retrieved, thereby minimizing the
cost of the retrieval.
WQ-FS
5-9
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART WQ O
WATER QUALITY FILE ^
m
CHAPTER
WQ-DE
WATER QUALITY DATA ENTRY
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sections
1
2
3
4
Appendices
1
2
Subject
The Monitoring Process
Ways to Identify Stations
Coding Station Location Data
Coding Parametric Data
Subject
Index of Available HELP Files
Record Layouts — Station Location
Data Storage Cards
Data Entry Error Messages
1-1
2-1
3-1
4-1
Page
Al-1
A2-1
A3-1
WQ-DE
APRIL 1981
-------
The purpose of this WQ-DE chapter is to describe, both in general
terms and in detail, the procedures and methods available to
store, change, and delete station location and parametric data in
the STORET Water Quality File (WQF).
This chapter is divided into several sections and supporting
appendices, as outlined in the Table of Contents. Sections one
and two are somewhat general in content, and present,
respectively, a description of the water quality monitoring
process, and a discussion on the different ways that the identity
and location of a station can be described. Sections three and
four are detailed in content, and describe the various procedures
which can be used to store, change, and delete station and
parametric data in the WQF. The information in the appendices
relates specifically to Data Entry and complements the
information provided in the appendices to the WQF part.
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
CHAPTER
WQ-DE
WATER QUALITY DATA ENTRY
SECTION O
THE MONITORING PROCESS i
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
-------
SECTION 1: THE MONITORING PROCESS
The monitoring activities conducted by the states, EPA regions,
and other agencies are an essential aspect of our Nation's
program to prevent, reduce, and eliminate water pollution. The
findings of these monitoring activities (i.e., the types and
amounts of pollutants found in water samples) are stored in the
STORET Water Quality File. The following paragraphs describe the
monitoring process as it relates to the WQF, from establishing a
network to entering data in STORET.
ESTABLISHING A NETWORK (AGENCY)
Monitoring strategies are developed by individual
states and other agencies, with guidance by EPA, to
fulfill their water quality objectives. A great deal
of thought and planning goes into defining the area to
be covered, and in establishing the purposes to be
achieved. Once defined by the planners, the network is
then defined to the WQF by the assignment of an agency
code (established at EPA Headquarters in cooperation
with the agency responsible for the network) which is
unique to all other networks defined in STORET.
DEFINING MONITORING SITES (STATIONS)
Part of the monitoring network strategy is the
determination of the number and location of sites to be
included in the network, so that they present an
accurate picture of the water quality for the area of
interest. These monitoring sites are referred to as
stations in STORET, and each station within an agency
is assigned a unique (to the agency) primary station
code.
SAMPLING STRATEGY
Another aspect of the monitoring strategy for the
network is the determination of the parameters to be
sampled at the monitoring sites, the sampling time
frame, and the sampling frequency. Water quality
managers decide which of STORET's 5000 parameters are
to be measured in accordance with the overall
monitoring strategy.
TYPES OF SAMPLES
Two basic types of water samples may be taken: a grab
sample and a composite sample. A grab sample is an
individual water quality sample collected at a specific
point in time; composite samples are combinations of
individual samples obtained at intervals over a period
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
1-1
-------
of time or distance. For example, a composite sample
may consist of several grab samples spanning a 24-hour
period where all grabs are placed in a single
container, or a series of samples taken at equal
distances across a stream section. Analysis of these
samples may be performed in the field or within a
laboratory. STORET provides a means to store data from
both simple grab and sophisticated composite water
samples.
CODING ANALYSIS FOR ENTRY INTO STORET
Each agency establishes its own procedures for coding
the results of the sample analyses onto sheets or forms
which are used to prepare the data so it can be read by
the computer from punched cards or a low-speed terminal
data set. At this point the data are ready to be
stored in the WQF, as described in detail in subsequent
sections of this chapter.
APRIL 1981 WQ-DE
1-2
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
CHAPTER
WQ-DE
WATER QUALITY DATA ENTRY
SECTION O
2 —
WAYS TO IDENTIFY STATIONS Z
ro
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
-------
SECTION 2: WAYS TO IDENTIFY STATIONS
The term station refers to a specific location, or collection
point, where water quality data are sampled. STORET's more than
500,000 stations are located on essentially all of the Nation's
rivers, lakes, streams, and other waterways. In order to
identify a station so that it can be stored and later retrieved,
the station must be adequately and correctly described.
2.1 IDENTIFYING STATIONS
A station can be identified by any or all of the
following ways, which are briefly discussed in the
paragraphs that follow. Items which are mandatory for
storing a station in STORET are denoted by an asterisk
(*) in the listing below.
* agency code and primary station code
secondary station codes (station aliases)
hydrologic references
* latitude and longitude coordinates
* state and county codes
* station type
station depth
* location description
descriptive text
* major/minor/subbasin codes
AGENCY AND STATION CODES
Every station is located within a specific monitoring
network which is identified by an agency code that is
unique to all other agency codes defined within STORET.
Each station is assigned a primary station code, and,
optionally, up to three secondary station codes, or
aliases. Agency codes are established at EPA
Headquarters.
HYDROLOGIC REFERENCES
A hydrologic index (or river mile index) is a numerical
code which identifies the location of a point (station)
on a defined river system by defining the distance of
the point from, and its hydrologic relationship to, the
mouth of the river system. A complete hydrologic index
for a station is composed of the following codes: a
terminal major basin code; a terminal minor basin code;
a terminal stream index, which defines the direction
and level of stream flow; mileages which define the
distances between and to confluences in the river
system; and a code which identifies the stream level on
which the point is located.
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
2-1
-------
LATITUDE AND LONGITUDE COORDINATES
Many stations, particularly those on open waters such
as oceans, lakes, bays, and estuaries, cannot always be
easily located using hydrologic indices. A station's
location can also be pinpointed by the conventional
geographical coordinates of latitude and longitude, in
degrees, minutes, seconds, and tenths of a second.
Latitude and longitude coordinates must be stored with
each new STORET station.
POLITICAL DESIGNATIONS
Stations must also be identified with respect to the
state and county in which they are physically located.
The standard code designations for all states and
counties within the United States as established by the
National Bureau of Standards are listed in Appendix C
to this part of the STORET Handbook.
STATION TYPE
Every station must be described by a code or codes
which depicts the station's characteristics, such as
where the station monitors water (for example, in the
open sea, in a lake, or from a well or a pipe).
STATION DEPTH
The total depth of the station may be stored to further
describe the station. This information is particularly
valuable for lake stations.
LOCATION DESCRIPTION
Every station must be described by its location or
landmark name.
DESCRIPTIVE TEXT
A station may be described by a detailed narrative.
MAJOR/MINOR/SUB BASINS
Every station is associated with an EPA major and minor
river basin, and optionally a subbasin.
Information which describes a station's location
typically does not change. When a station is initially
identified to STORET, all information asterisked in the
listing above must be stored, along with as much of the
other information as is known. The more information
APRIL 1981 WQ-DE
2-2
-------
about a station that is stored within STORET, the
greater the flexibility in how that station and its
parametric data can be identified and subsequently
retrieved.
2.2 TERMINOLOGY USED
The station location information described above can be
entered into the WQF as 80-column punched cards using a
card reading terminal, or as lines of information
within a data set using a keyboard-type terminal. (A
data set is a collection of logically-related data
records residing within a computer system and
accessible to users via remote terminals.) For all
intents and purposes, an 80-column card and a line of
information within a data set are equivalent entities
to the STORET system. (Similarly, a deck of cards and
an entire data set are also equivalent.) To simplify
the descriptions of the WQF coding requirements, all
records of information are referred to as cards within
this chapter. A collection of station location records
(information) is referred to as a station location
storage deck, and an individual record is referred to
as a station location storage card.
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
2-3
-------
2.3 CARDS USED TO CODE STATION LOCATION DATA
The process of coding station location data encompasses
not only the initial storing of these data into the
WQF, but also any subsequent changes, corrections, and
deletions made to the data. There are nine different
types of cards that can be used, in differing
combinations, to code station location data. (Station
location data can be entered into the WQF only via
these particular cards.) The names, codes, and primary
functions of these cards are as follows:
Card Name
Agency card A
Station Type card T
Station card S
Latitude/Longitude card 0
RMI card }\
RMI card 2
Major/Minor Basin card 3
Location Description card 4
Descriptive Paragraph 5
card(s)
Card Code Used to Specify
the agency responsible
for a set of stations
the characteristics of
one or more stations
station codes specific to
each station
geographical coordinates of a
station's location
hydrologic indices (river mile
indices) of a station
continuation of RMI card 1
the basins in which the
station is located
brief text describing
a station's location
textual information
describing station activity
APRIL 1981
WQ-DE
2-4
-------
These cards are specified in varying combinations
according to the storage function (initial store,
change, or deletion) to be performed. The valid
combinations are described in detail in Section 3. A
typical sequence of these cards within a station
location storage deck to establish a new station would
be as follows:
L
/DESCRIPTIVE PARAGRAPH CARD5
LOCATION DESCRIPTION CARD 4
L
MAJOR/MINOR BASIN CARD 3
RMI CARD 2
L
RMI CARD 1
LATITUDE/LONGITUDE CARD 0
L
STATION CARD S
STATION TYPE CARD T
AGENCY CARD A
A copy of the coding sheet used to code each of these
nine station location storage cards for new station
storage is provided in Appendix 2 of this chapter.
WQ-DE
2-5
APRIL 1981
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART
WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
CHAPTER
WQ-DE
WATER QUALITY DATA ENTRY
V)
m
o
SECTION 5
3 2
CODING STATION LOCATION DATA <•»
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
-------
SECTION 3: CODING STATION LOCATION DATA
This section describes, in detail, each of the nine cards used
for coding station location data, and it also describes which
cards (and which fields within the cards) are required to perform
initial station storage, station changes, and station deletion
functions, as follows: Subsection 3.1 presents, in one location,
the formats of the station location storage cards; Subsection 3.2
describes how to combine and code these cards to initially store
station location data; Subsection 3.3 describes how these cards
are used to change previously stored station location data; and
Subsection 3.4 describes how to delete station location data from
the WQF.
3.1 FORMATS OF STATION LOCATION STORAGE CARDS
This subsection describes in detail each of the station
location storage cards (including each field within the
cards) that are used to store, change, and delete
station location data within the WQF. These
descriptions are presented on the following pages in a
sequence that parallels their logical use and
application.
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
3-1
-------
The Agency Card (A Card); Required
The agency card is used to specify general information which
relates to the user/agency associated with a network of stations,
This card must be provided for any storage operation involving
station location data, whether an initial storage, change, or
deletion operation, and must precede the station and other cards
which further define the operation to ;be performed. Asterisked
(*) items are mandatory for new station storage.
AOtNCT CMD (A CAU»
columns 1-8
columns 9-12
columns 13-15
column 16
columns 17-24
Agency Code
The one-to-eight character agency code
assigned to the agency responsible for
collecting and entering data into, the WQF.
Entries £re to be left-justified, leaving
unused columns blank.
Blank
Unlock After
This field is used to indicate the number of
calendar days (beginning from the sampling
date as opposed to the data storage date)
the parametric data are to be locked (i.e.,
unavailable for retrieval by individuals
other than those authorized by the owners of
the data) after which time the data will be
unlocked automatically. Any numerical value
up to 360 is valid. Unused columns need not
be zero-filled. Default value is zero.
Blank
Unlocking Key
A one-to-eight alpna-numeric code, which
must be accurately specified before any
information can be stored for the respective
stations. This unlocking key serves as a
safeguard against unauthorized storage of
APRIL 1981
WQ-DE
3-2
-------
columns 25-61
columns 62-73
columns 74-77 *
columns 78-79
column 80
data. Entries must be left-justified,
leaving unused columns blank.
Name of Individual Storing Data
The name, location, telephone number, or
other information relevant to the individual
responsible for the storage of station
location information should be entered here.
The information within the field is not
stored in the WQF, but is printed on primary
error listings to facilitate user tracking
of jobs.
Blank
Lock After
The sampling date (in the format yymm) after
which data cannot be retrieved unless the
unlocking key is provided. If a Lock After
date is not desired, code this field as
9999. This field must be completed, and
each column must be filled with a numerical
value.
Control Code
This control code is a two-character
alphabetic value which varies according to
the storage operation being performed, i.e.,
storing a new station, or changing or
deleting previously-stored data on the
agency card or on the station type card.
The acceptable values are described in
detail in subsequent subsections.
Card Type Code
Code with the letter A.
WQ-DE
3-3
APRIL 1981
-------
The Station Type Card (T Card); Required
The station type card is used to denote one or more codes which
depict a valid type description of one or more stations. The
STORET help data set named STATION.TYPE provides a complete
listing of the acceptable station types. Asterisked items are
mandatory for new station storage.
STATION TYPf CAIO (T CAID)
A STRING Of VAIID COMBINATIONS OF STATION ITPt CODCS SEPARATED BV SLASHES
columns 1-78
column 79
column 80
Station Type Information
A string of one or more alpha-numeric codes,
separated by slashes (/), which denotes
valid combinations of acceptable station
types. Entries are to be left-justified,
leaving unused columns blank.
Blank
Card Type Code
Code with the letter T.
APRIL 1981
WQ-DE
3-4
-------
The Station Card (S Card); Required
The station card is used to specify station identification
information specific to a single station associated with the
user/agency designated on the agency (A) card. This card must be
provided for any data entry operation involving station location
information, whether an initial storage, change, or deletion
operation. Asterisked items are mandatory for new station
storage.
STATION CAIO (S CAID)
STATION ALIASES
1) SECONDARY SI At ION COW
}> SECONDARY STATION CODE
c cm-
coot
columns 1-3
columns 4-18
columns 19-33
columns 34-45,
46-57,
and 58-67
Sort No.
The individual cards included within a
storage deck can be assigned a sequence
number for the purpose of collectively
identifying all cards which relate to the
storage deck. Completing this field is
optional, as the information is not stored
in the WQF. Sort number may be any alpha-
numeric value.
Primary Station Code
The one-to-fifteen alpha-numeric primary
station code which uniquely identifies the
station in the monitoring network specified
by the preceding agency card. Entries are
to be left-justified, leaving unused columns
blank.
Blank
Secondary Station Codes
These fields are used to specify up to three
alpha-numeric secondary station codes (or
station aliases) associated with a
particular station. Secondary codes are
established for the purposes of cross-
referencing stations for cooperative
monitoring, and of facilitating the
retrieval process. Any or all of these
fields may be left blank, but if completed,
WQ-DE
3-5
APRIL 1981
-------
columns 68-69 *
columns 70-72 *
columns 73-77
columns 78-79 *
column 80
they must be left-justified, leaving unused
columns blank. All secondary station codes
and all primary station codes assigned to
stations within an agency must be unique
within the agency, i.e., an alias for a
station may not be the same as any other
primary or secondary station code
established for any station within the
agency.
State Code
The two-digit numerical Federal Information
Processing Standards (FIPS) state code. A
complete listing of these codes is provided
in Appendix C.
County Code
The three-digit numerical FIPS code
identifying the county or county equivalent,
A complete listing of these codes is
provided in Appendix C.
Blank
Control Code
This control code is a two-character
alphabetic value which varies according to
the station storage operation being
performed, i.e., storing a new station, or
changing or deleting a previously-stored
station. The acceptable values are
described in detail in subsequent
subsections.
Card Type Code
Code with the letter S.
APRIL 1981
WQ-DE
3-6
-------
The Latitude/Longitude Card (Header Card 0); Required
The primary purpose of the latitude/longitude card is to store
the latitude and longitude coordinates which identify a station's
geographical location. Asterisked items are mandatory for new
station storage.
uunun/iONomwi oum IHUMI cum tl
columns 1-3
columns 4-6
columns 7-13
columns 14-21
columns 22-27
Sort No.
This field may be used to assign a sequence
number to the cards within a storage deck.
Completing this field is optional, as the
information is not stored in the WQF. Sort
number may be any alpha-numeric value.
Blank
Latitude
The latitude of the station expressed in
degrees (dd), minutes (mm), and seconds
(sss). All columns must be completed with
numerical values, including leading zeros if
required. Seconds may be specified to the
nearest tenth of a second. The format of
this field, then, is ddmmsss, with no
embedded decimals.
Longitude
The longitude of the station expressed in
degrees (ddd), minutes (mm), and seconds
(sss). All columns must be completed with
numerical values, including leading zeros if
required. Seconds may be specified to the
nearest tenth of a second. The format of
this field, then, is dddmmsss, with no
embedded decimals.
Blank
WQ-DE
3-7
APRIL 1981
-------
column 28
PC (Precision Code)
A one-digit numerical value, from one to
eight, which denotes the degree of precision
associated with the coded latitude and
longitude values specified in columns 7-21.
If not completed, the value of this field
defaults to 4. The allowable codes denote
the following precisions:
precision
one tenth second
one second,
ten seconds
thirty seconds
precision
one minute
ten minutes
thirty minutes
one degree
column 29
columns 30-32
columns 33-79
column 80 *
D (Depth)
The unit of measurement in which station and
sample depths are recorded is identified by
the code F (for feet) or M (for meters). If
not completed, the value of this field
defaults to F.
Total Station Depth
A one to three digit numerical value
indicating the depth of the water at the
station location, in terms of the unit
specified in column 29. (This is not a
sampling depth.) Leading zeros must be
coded. If not completed, the value of this
field defaults to 000.
Blank
Card Type Code
Code with the numoer 0.
NOTE: Within the United States, the number of degrees
longitude is always greater than the number of degrees
latitude.
APRIL 1981
WQ-DE
3-8
-------
The River Mile Index Card (Header Card 1); Optional
A hydrologic, or river mile, index (RMI) is a numerical code
which identifies the location of a point on a defined river
system by defining its distance from, and hydrologic relationship
to, the mouth of the river system. The index is composed of a
major and minor basin code, a terminal stream number, and other
codes which identify the direction of flow, stream level, and
mileage references which allow data points to be precisely
located. This card, and the Header Card 2 card if necessary, are
used to store a station's RMI, and must be completed if
retrievals are to be made by river mile indices. These two
cards, if completed, are placed after the latitude/longitude card
within the storage deck. Asterisked items are mandatory if this
card is used to store station location information.
(Ml CMO (HIADfl CAID 1)
SOB I
. 1
I flfiftti 1
• - *
II
i - ?
' •
HI
srefAM
no
o io|n - i]
|
1
IIVEL 1 -.US
n - i«
lEVtl 1 INDEX
JO - »
1
UVil7.LIS
M - 11
LEVEL 3
31 - 34
LlVtL 3
MI11S
37 - 11
IEVEI *
INDEX
41 - .)
lEVtl 4
WILES
u - W
1
LEVEL I
INDEX
»l - M
LEVEL S
MltlS
» - J»
LEVEL 6
INDEX
•0 - *3
IEVEI 6
MILES
M - 4*
111
IEVEI 7
INDEX
1
IEVEI 1
MILES
IAST
LEVEL
USED
7' n
« M
'« '
columns 1-3
columns 4-6
columns 7-8
columns 9-10
Sort No.
This field may be used to assign a sequence
number to the cards within a storage deck.
Completing this field is optional, as the
information is not stored in the WQF. Sort
number may be any alpha-numeric value.
Blank
Term Maj Basin (Terminal Major Basin)
The two-digit numerical code identifying the
terminal major basin with which the river is
associated. (A terminal major basin is the
basin where the river loses its hydrological
identification, and is not necessarily the
same major basin in which a sampling station
is located.) A leading zero must be coded.
Refer to the EPA Regional office for the
terminal basin codes for the rivers you are
monitoring.
Term Min Basin (Terminal Minor Basin)
The two-digit numerical code identifying the
terminal minor basin with which the river is
associated. (A terminal minor basin is not
necessarily the same minor basin in which a
WQ-DE
3-9
APRIL 1981
-------
columns 11-13 *
columns 14-19 *
columns 20-76
columns 77-78 *
column 79
column 80
sampling station is located.) A leading
zero must be coded. Refer to the EPA
Regional office for the terminal basin codes
for the rivers you are monitoring.
Term Stream No. (Terminal Stream Number)
The one-to-three digit terminal stream
number within the terminal minor basin with
which the river is associated. Leading
zeros must be coded.
Level 1 Miles
The distance, in hundredths of a mile, from
the zero mile point of the terminal stream
to the point of confluence of the first
tributary entering the mainstem of the
river. Leading and trailing zeros must be
specified, if required, so that each column
in the field has an entry.
Level Indices/Level Miles
These columns are used in pairs to indicate
a station's location on a river with respect
to its river's hydrologic index. Use as
many pairs of level-indices/level-miles as
required. If more than seven levels are
required to define a station's hydrologic
location, specify the additional levels on
the River Mile Index Card 2 (Header Card 2).
All values specified must be numerical;
leading zeros must be provided. If a
particular level is coded, its corresponding
mileage must also be coded. Unused pairs of
level-indices/level-miles fields are left
blank.
Last Level Used
The value of the station's last (highest)
stream level is coded to designate the
station's hydrologic index, a numerical
value from 1 to 12. This value must
correspond to the last level coded on this
card, or on the Header Card 2, if provided.
A leading zero must be coded.
Blank
Card Type Code
Code with the number 1.
APRIL 1981
WQ-DE
3-10
-------
The River Mile Index Card (Header Card 2); Optional
This card is used in conjunction with the Header Card 1 if more
than seven levels of stream indices must be provided to identify
a station's hydrologic location. Up to five more levels (from
levels eight to twelve) may be specified via this card. If
provided, this card must follow the River Mile Index Card (Header
Card 1). This card is not required if a station's hydrologic
index can be defined in seven levels or less. Asterisked items
are mandatory if this card is used to store station location
information.
tW CAID (HIADEI CAM 1)
NO
}
S
, z
'
,
"
z
5
1
[
MULES
1
rvf
IN
XX
WllfS
1
IN
I
EX
B
MILES
j
III
in
•,:|
| |
II
| |
columns 1-3
columns 4-6
columns 7-13 *
columns 14-53 *
columns 54-79
column 80 *
Sort No.
This field may be used to assign a sequence
number to the cards within a storage deck.
Completing this field is optional, as the
information is not stored in the WQF. Sort
number may be any alpha-numeric value.
Blank
Term Maj Basin, Term Min Basin, Term Stream No.
These fields are coded identically as coded
on Header Card 1.
Level Indices/Level Miles
These columns are used to indicate a
station's hydrologic index if more than
seven levels are required. Use as many
pairs of level-indices/level-miles as
necessary. If a particular level is coded,
its corresponding mileage value must also be
coded. All values specified must be
numeric; leading zeros must be coded.
Unused pairs of level-indices/level-miles
fields are to be left blank.
Blank
Card Type Code
Code with the number 2.
WQ-DE
3-11
APRIL 1981
-------
The Major/Minor Basin Card (Header Card 3); Required
This card is used to store as part of the station location data
the major and minor river basin names and codes in which a
station is physically located. A complete listing of codes
established by the Environmental Protection Agency is provided in
Appendix D. Asterisked items are mandatory for new station
storage.
MAJOI/MINO* BASIN CAIO (MIAMI CAftD 3)
SOIM
NO
SIAIlON 1OCATION MAJOB BAilN NAMf
1
1
STATION LOCATION MINOR BASIN NAME
1* - »'
1
1
ftA
«0W,
SIN C0p«
Miiw
n fi
S«b
IHIanti
mw. >
columns 1-3
columns 4-27
columns 28-67 *
columns 68-69 *
Sort No.
This field may be used to assign a sequence
number to the cards within a storage deck.
Completing this field is optional, as the
information is not stored in the WQF. Sort
number may be any alpha-numeric value.
Station Location Major Basin Name
The name of the major river basin in which
the station is physically located. The
field should be left-justified, and embedded
blanks and hyphens are permissible. The
name must correspond to the major basin code
entered in columns 68-69 of this card.
Station Location Minor Basin Name
The name of the minor river basin in which
the station is physically located. The
field is left-justified, and embedded blanks
and hyphens are permitted. The name must
correspond to the minor basin code entered
in columns 70-71 of this card.
Major Basin Code !
A two-digit numerical code identifying the
major river basin in which the station is
physically located. This code should
correspond to the name of the basin provided
in columns 4-27 of this card. A leading
zero must be coded.
APRIL 1981
WQ-DE
3-12
-------
columns 70-71
columns 72-73
columns 74-79
column 80 *
Minor Basin Code
A two-digit numerical code identifying the
minor river basin in which the station is
physically located. This code should
correspond to the name of the basin provided
in columns 28-67 of this card. A leading
zero must be coded.
Sub Basin Code
A two-digit numerical code identifying the
sub basin in which the station is located.
A leading zero must be specified. If a sub
basin designation is not specified, the
system will generate zeros for this field.
Blank
Card Type Code
Code with the number 3.
NOTE: Listings of the major and minor basin codes are
contained within Appendix D to this part. They can
also be obtained by listing the STORET help data set
named BASIN.CODES. Since sub basin coding is performed
at the state level, the applicable state office should
be contacted for information on sub basin codes.
WQ-DE
3-13
APRIL 1981
-------
The Location Description Card (Header Card 4); Required
This card is used to store descriptive station header information
as part of the station location data. Asterisked items are
mandatory for new station storage.
LOCATION OfSCIIPTtON CARD (MIAMI CAftD 4)
lOCATlON Or SITE LANDMARK NAMES. HC
columns 1-3
columns 4-51
columns 52-79
column 80 *
Sort No.
This field may be used to assign a sequence
number to the cards within a storage deck.
Completing this field is optional, as the
information is not stored in the WQF. Sort
number may be any alpha-numeric value.
Location of site: Landmark names, etc.
An alpha-numeric description (up to 48
characters in length) of the station's
actual location, such as the alphabetic name
of the river on which the station is located
and other descriptive information which
would be informative to pinpoint the
station. Embedded blanks are permissible.
The field is to be left-justified.
Blank
Card Type Code
Code with the number 4.
APRIL 1981
WQ-DE
3-14
-------
Descriptive Paragraph Cards (Header Card 5); Optional
A maximum of 15 of these cards may be used to store a narrative
which describes the station in detail. This information is
stored as the station descriptive paragraph, which can be printed
on a retrieval output at the user's option. Each card contains
up to 72 alpha-numeric characters of descriptive information.
These cards are placed last in a station location storage deck.
Asterisked items are mandatory if this card is used to store
station location information.
Docnravi MUOUVH CAIM (MUDU CMC
DC&CRIT1ON (7->l>
SOtl NO Illlanil
columns 1-3
columns 4-6
columns 7-78 *
column 79
Sort No.
This field may be used to assign a sequence
number to the cards within a storage deck..
Completing this field is optional, as the
information is not stored in the WQF. Sort
number may be any alpha-numeric value.
Blank
Description
Up to 72 alpha-numeric characters of
descriptive information can be specified on
a single 5 card, and continued onto a
subsequent 5 card, for up to a total of
fifteen 5 cards. Embedded blanks and other
special characters, such as punctuation
marks, are permissible. Each 5 card
corresponds to a single line of information
within the descriptive paragraph.
Line Position Code
A single alpha-numeric value which denotes
the relative position of the line of
descriptive information (coded in columns 7-
78) within the descriptive paragraph. This
field must be completed with one of the
following codes:
WQ-DE
3-15
APRIL 1981
-------
column 80
relative line
position
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Card Type Code
Code with the number 5
relative line
code position
8 9
9 10
J 1 1
K 12
L 13
M 14
N 15
APRIL 1981
WQ-DE
3-16
-------
3.2 STORING A NEW STATION
In order to successfully enter a new station into the
WQF, certain information about the station must be
known and coded on the appropriate station location
data storage cards which are described in the preceding
subsection and which are shown in Appendix 2. Failure
to provide all of the required information will result
in an unsuccessful storage of the station.
As a general rule, STORET users should provide as much
information as possible in addition to the required
information to describe a station's location. The more
information that is stored, the more flexibility there
is in retrieving data stored with that station, not
only by the user storing the data, but also by other
users who may have an interest in data other than their
own.
EPA's processing of users' storage requests is a two-
phase operation. The first phase is invoked when users
submit their requests to add, change, or delete WQF
data, whether station location or parametric data.
These requests are processed by the appropriate STORET
input processing programs which perform a variety of
error checking and field editing routines. Those
storage requests which pass the data editing process
are written to a special STORET file, called the MOD
file, to await further processing. Any errors which
were detected during this first phase are made
available to the user.
Throughout any given week, all users' edited and
syntactically correct storage requests are collected on
the MOD file. These data are not permanently stored in
the WQF during the week. The second phase of the
process of storing user water quality data occurs over
the weekend when STORET personnel run the STORET UPDATE
program. This program reads the data accumulated in
the MOD file, performs other edit checks on the data
being stored, changed, or deleted, and then updates the
WQF. Storage requests which fail the UPDATE edit
checks (e.g., a request to delete a station not
previously stored) generate secondary errors which are
also made available to the user.
Parametric data may not be stored in the same run that
a new station is defined and stored in the WQF. It is
generally more prudent to first assure that a station
has been stored successfully and correctly before
storing parametric data associated with the station.
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
3-17
-------
Upon initially storing a station into the WQF, the
STORET system automatically appends three items of
information to the station location data stored with
the station: (1) the date the station was stored in the
WQF; (2) the station's archive class, which denotes
whether a station's data are on-line or in disk-
mountable status; and (3) the names of the state and
county in which the station is located. This
additional information appears in the station header
information printed at the top of retrieval outputs.
Each station data storage deck consists of two control
cards (a 7START card and a ?01 card) and an appropriate
set of station location storage cards as described
below.
The following station location storage cards (and
fields within those cards) are mandatory or optional as
shown below when storing a new station into the WQF.
Users are reminded that the coding of these cards is
described in the previous subsection.
Required Cards Optional Cards
A Agency Card 1 RMI Card
T Station Type Card 2 RMI Card
S Station Card 5 Descriptive Paragraph Card(s)
0 Lat/Long Card
3 Maj/Min Basin Card
4 Location Description
Card
Required Fields - A Card
columns field remarks
1-8 agency code
17-24 unlocking key
74-77 lock after
78-79 control code must be blank
80 card type code must be an A
It is strongly recommended that columns 25-61
be completed as this information is often
helpful to STORET User Assistance personnel
when attempting to assist a user with
storage questions or problems.
Required Fields - T Card
columns field remarks
1-78 station type code
80 card type code must be a T
APRIL 1981 WQ-DE
3-18
-------
Required Fields - S Card
columns field
4-18 primary station code
68-69 state code
70-72 county code
78-79 control code
80 card type code
Required Fields - 0 Card
columns
7-13
14-21
28
29
30-32
80
field
latitude
longitude
precision code
depth units
total depth
card type code
remarks
must be NS
must be an S
remarks
Required Fields - 3 Card
columns field
4-27 station location
major basin name
28-67 station location
minor basin name
68-69 major basin code
70-71 minor basin code
80 card type code
Required Fields - 4 Card
columns field
4-51 location of site
80 card type code
defaults to 4
defaults to F
defaults to 000
must be a zero
remarks
must be a 3
remarks
must be a 4
3.3 CHANGING STATION LOCATION INFORMATION
There are many situations that may necessitate the
modification, change, or correction of one or more
items of station location information that have been
stored previously, such as the need to change an
unlocking date, or to provide additional station
location information not known when the station was
stored initially. This subsection defines the types of
changes that can be made to station location
information already stored, along with the coding
required to effect the changes.
WQ-DE
3-19
APRIL 1981
-------
3.3.1 CHANGING AGENCY CARD INFORMATION (A CARD)
The only fields on the Agency Card which may be changed
by a user are the lock after field and the unlock after
field. Agency codes and their associated unlocking
keys can be changed only by STORET User Assistance and
necessitates a special maintenance run executed over a
weekend. Whenever an unlock after or lock after field
is being changed, changes to other station location
information cannot be made in the same update cycle.
The lock after date (columns 74-77 of the A card) is
the date after which data cannot be retrieved unless
the unlocking key is provided. The field may need to
be changed if data were initially locked and are now to
be released for retrieval purposes. To change a lock
after or unlock after date, code the following:
Required Cards
A Agency Card
S Station Card - one for each station whose data
are to be unlocked.
Required Fields - A Card
columns field remarks
1-8 agency code
13-15 unlock after replaces stored date
17-24 unlocking key
74-77 lock after replaces stored date
78-79 control code must be CD
80 card type code must be an A
NOTE: If the unlock after field is to be changed, the lock
after field may be left blank, and vice versa.
Required Fields - S Card
columns field remarks
4-18 primary station code left-justified
80 card type code must be an S
APRIL 1981 WQ-DE
3-20
-------
3.3.2 CHANGING STATION TYPE INFORMATION (T CARD)
Any station type code previously stored applies to one
or more stations within an agency code. A station type
code is changed by coding a new T card whose
information will completely replace the old station
type coding. The T card is followed by one or more S
cards which identify which stations are to have their
station type codes changed. The STORET help data set
named STATION.TYPE contains a list of valid station
types.
To change a station type, code the following:
Required Cards
A Agency Card
T Station Type Card
S Station Card - one for each station whose station
type codes are to be changed
Required Fields - A Card
columns field remarks
1-8 agency code
17-24 unlocking key
78-79 control code must be CT
80 card type code must be an A
Required Fields - T Card
columns field remarks
1-78 string of station this string replaces the
type codes old string
separated by
slashes
80 card type code must be a T
Required Fields - S Card
columns field remarks
4-18 primary station code
80 card type code must be an S
NOTE: Changes to T card information cannot be made in the
same update cycle in which changes are made to other
station storage cards.
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
3-21
-------
3.3.3 CHANGING STATION CARD INFORMATION (S CARD)
Secondary station codes and/or state/county codes may
be changed by the user. Primary station codes may not
be changed by the user, but may be changed by STORET
User Assistance at the request of the user. Changes to
fields on the S card may be made by entering the
control code CX in columns 78-79 of the S card, and by
coding the replacement values in the appropriate
fields. Fields which are to remain as presently stored
in STORET may be either left blank or coded at the
choice of the user. If a field is to be deleted (and a
replacement value is not to be provided), an X must be
coded in the first position of that field.
Required Cards
A Agency Card
S Station Card
Required Fields - A Card
columns field remarks
1-8 agency code
17-24 unlocking key
80 card type code must be an A
Required Fields - S Card
columns field remarks
4-18 primary station code left-justified
78-79 control code must be CX
80 card type code must be an S
Optional Fields - S Card
columns field remarks
34-45 secondary station code The fields to be changed
46-57 secondary station code must be coded with the
58-67 secondary station code replacement value. Re-
68-69 state code maining optional fields
70-72 county code may be coded or left blank
An X must be coded in the
first position of any sec-
ondary station code field
in order to be deleted.
NOTE: The state/county code (columns 68-72) is treated as one
field. Thus, if the county code is to be replaced but
the state code is to remain as stored (or vice versa),
the entire field (columns 68-72) must be recoded.
APRIL 1981 WQ-DE
3-22
-------
3.3.4 CHANGING LATITUDE/LONGITUDE CARD INFORMATION (0 CARD)
Any station location data stored via the 0 card can be
changed by the user. Changes to fields on the 0 card
may be made by entering the control code CX in columns
78-79 of the preceding S card, along with the new 0
card field(s) coded in their usual columns. Data
unchanged on the 0 card must be recoded. (Data on the
0 card may only be changed; no data may be deleted.)
Required Cards
A Agency Card
S Station Card
0 Latitude/Longitude Card
Required Fields - A Card
columns
1-8
17-24
80
field
agency code
unlocking key
card type code
Required Fields - S Card
columns
4-18
78-79
80
field
remarks
must be an A
remarks
primary station code
control code must be CX
card type code
Required Fields - 0 Card
columns
80
field
card type code
Optional Fields - 0 Card
columns field
7-21 latitude/longitude
28 precision code
29 depth
30-32 total depth
must be an S
remarks
must be a zero
remarks
The fields to be
changed may be
coded with the
replacement value.
Remaining fields which are
not to be changed must be
recoded.
NOTE: The data on the latitude/longitude card are treated as
one field. Thus, if any part of the field (columns 7-
32) is to be replaced, the entire field must be
recoded.
WQ-DE
3-23
APRIL 1981
-------
3.3.5 CHANGING RMI INFORMATION (1 and 2 CARDS)
All station location data stored via the 1 and 2 cards
may be changed by the user. Changes to fields on these
cards may be made by entering the control code CX in
columns 78-79 of the preceding S card, and by
reentering all the 1 and 2 card information, including
the fields to be changed. Entries on the 1 and 2 cards
are treated as a single field; therefore any change
made to fields on either card requires repeating all
RMI information.
These same procedures apply if RMI is being added to a
previously stored station which did not have RMI data
provided at the time the station was initially stored.
The following cards and fields are required to change
RMI data:
Required Cards
A Agency Card
S Station Card
1 RMI Card
2 RMI card - only if more than 7 levels are defined
Required Fields - A Card
columns field remarks
1-8 agency code
17-24 unlocking key
80 card type code must be an A
Required Fields - S Card
columns field remarks
4-18 primary station code
78-79 control code must be CX
80 card type code must be an S
Required Fields - 1 Card
columns field remarks
7-78 all fields Replacement fields
as well as the
remaining RMI
fields must be
f i11ed in.
80 card type code must be a 1
APRIL 1981 WQ-DE
3-24
-------
Required Fields - 2 Card
columns field remarks
7-53 all fields. This Replacement fields as
card is not well as the remaining
required if the RMI fields must be
hydrologic index filled in.
is defined in
seven levels or
less.
80 card type code must be a 2
NOTE: The data on the RMI cards are treated as single fields,
Thus, if any part of a field on a card is to be
replaced, then the entire card must be recoded.
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
3-25
-------
3.3.6 CHANGING MAJOR/MINOR BASIN INFORMATION (3 CARD)
All station location data stored via the 3 card may be
changed by the user. Changes to the 3 card information
are made by coding CX in the control code field
(columns 78-79) of the preceding S card, along with the
new 3 card field(s) coded in their usual columns.
Fields left blank on the card are not affected by the
change.
Required Cards
A Agency Card
S Station Card ;
3 Major/Minor Basin Card
Required Fields - A Card
columns
1-8
17-24
80
field
agency code
unlocking key
card type code
Required Fields - S Card
columns
4-18
78-79
80
field
remarks
must be an A
remarks
primary station code
control code must be CX
card type code must be an S
Required Fields - 3 Card
columns
field
80 card type code
Optional Fields - 3 Card
columns
4-27
28-67
68-73
field
station
major
station
minor
location
codes
location
basin name
location
basin name
basin
remarks
must be a 3
remarks
The fields to be
changed or added must
be coded. The fields
not to change may be
either specified or left
blank.
APRIL 1981
WQ-DE
3-26
-------
3.3.7 CHANGING LOCATION DESCRIPTION INFORMATION (4 CARD)
The station location information stored via the 4 card
may be changed by the user. Changes to the 4 card may
be made by coding CX in the control code field of the
preceding S card, along with the new location of site
data coded in columns 4-51 of the 4 card.
The same procedures apply if location description data
are being added to a previously stored station which
did not have location description data provided at the
time the station was initially stored.
Required Cards
A Agency Card
S Station Card
4 Location Description Card
Required Fields - A Card
columns
1-8
17-24
80
field
agency code
unlocking key
card type code
Required Fields - S Card
columns
4-18
78-79
80
field
remarks
must be an A
remarks
primary station code
control code must be CX
card type code must be an S
Required Fields - 4 Card
columns
4-51
field
station location
information
80
card type code
remarks
The information to
be changed or added
must be coded, as
the entire field
replaces whatever
information was
previously stored.
must be a 4
WQ-DE
3-27
APRIL 1981
-------
3.3.8 CHANGING DESCRIPTIVE PARAGRAPH INFORMATION (5 CARD)
All station location information stored via the 5 card
may be changed by the user. Changes to the 5 card may
be made by coding CX in the control code field of the
preceding S card, along with the new 5 card field(s)
coded in their usual columns. Any number of 5 cards
can be changed in this manner.
Required Cards
A Agency Card
S Station Card
5 Descriptive Paragraph Cards
Required Fields - A Card
columns
1-8
17-24
80
field
agency code
unlocking key
card type code
Required Fields - S Card
columns
4-18
78-79
80
field
remarks
must be an A
remarks
primary station code
control code must be CX
card type code must be an S
Required Fields - 5 Card
columns
7-78
79
80
field
description
line position
code
card type code
remarks
The information to be
changed or added must be
coded, as the entire field
replaces whatever information
was previously stored.
identifies the line of data
which is to be replaced.
must be a 5
APRIL 1981
WQ-DE
3-28
-------
3.4 DELETING A STATION OR SELECTED STATION LOCATION DATA
The STORET system allows users to delete stations that
have been stored previously (including all parametric
data stored with those stations), or to delete certain
station location data either for an entire card or on a
field-by-field basis.
3.4.1 DELETING A STATION AND ALL DATA ASSOCIATED WITH IT
To delete a station and all data stored with the
station, both station location data and parametric
data, code the following:
Required Cards
A Agency Card
S Station Card
Required Fields - A Card
columns field remarks
1-8 agency code
17-24 unlocking key
80 card type code must be an A
Required Fields - S Card
columns field remarks
4-18 primary station code station to be deleted from WQF
78-79 control code must be DS
80 card type code must be an S
3.4.2 DELETING SELECTED STATION LOCATION DATA
The station location data that may be selectively
deleted from STORET includes the following fields
and/or cards:
card information that can be deleted
S secondary station codes
1 all data on card
2 all data on card
5 all data on card
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
3-29
-------
To delete station location data, code the following
cards:
Required Cards
A Agency Card
S Station Card
Required Fields - ,A Card
columns field remarks
1-8 agency code
17-24 unlocking key
80 card type code must be an A
Required Fields - S Card
columns field remarks
4-18 primary station code
78-79 control code must be CX
80 card type code must be an S
Optional Cards
1 RMI Card 1
2 RMI Card 2
5 Descriptive Paragraph Card(s)
The placement of an X in column 7 of a 1, 2, or 5 card
deletes the entire card. The placement of an X in
column 34, 46, or 58 of an S card will delete that
secondary station code.
APRIL 1981 WQ-DE
3-30
-------
3.5 EXAMPLES OF CODING STATION LOCATION DATA
This subsection presents several examples of the
required coding necessary to store, change, or delete
station location data from the WQF, using the station
location storage cards described in this section.
3.5.1 STORING A NEW STATION
Store a new station for agency 14AGNFS9, whose primary
code is ABC987. The station also has two aliases:
123456 and WYZQ. The latitude and longitude of this
station located in Gogebic County, (FIPS 053) Michigan
(FIPS 26) are 46 degrees, 14 minutes, and 31.2 seconds
and 89 degrees, 21 minutes and 48.2 seconds,
respectively, to a precision of one tenth second. The
station depth is 10 feet, and the station is located in
the Platte minor river basin (code 17) within the Lake
Michigan major river basin (code 08). The station is
located on the Onowagon River (at point C on the map
below), at the Main Street bridge, 10 miles north of
the Fairchild Reservoir. The coding to store this
information is shown on the next page.
STREAM LEVEL
023J00020 *- INDEX NUMBER
08 MAJOR BASIN
1.7 MINOR BASIN
LAKE
TERMINAL
STREAM
NUMBER
WQ-DE
3-31
APRIL 1981
-------
01 2345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
? START
14AGNFS9 SECRET NAME OF USER 9999 A
AMBNT/STREAM T
ABC987 123456 XYZQ 26053 NSS
461431208921482 1F010 0
08170020133410000500038160001003116001002348 04 1
LAKE MICHIGAN PLATTE 081700 3
ONOWAGON RIVER 4
RIVER IS SAMPLED FROM BRIDGE ON MAIN STREET AT CENTER ON DOWNSTREAM SIDE05
SAMPLING POINT IS 10 MILES NORTH OF THE FAIRCHILD RESERVOIR 15
AVERAGE FLOW IS 430 CFS 25
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
APRIL 1981 WQ-DE
3-32
-------
3.5.2 CHANGING AND DELETING SELECTED STATION LOCATION DATA
Make the following changes and deletions to the data
stored in the preceding example.
- Change the level 4 miles on the RMI card to 30.34
miles.
- Change the latitude to 46 degrees, 15 minutes, and
32.0 seconds, and change the station depth to 20 feet.
- Change the station type to AMBNT/LAKE.
- Delete the secondary station code 123456.
01 2345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
? START
1 4AGNFS9 SECRET A
ABC987 X CXS
08170020133410000500038160001003116001003034 04 1
461532008921482 1F020 0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
01 2345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
?START
701
14AGNFS9 SECRET CTA
AMBNT/LAKE T
ABC987 S
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Note that changing data on either the 0 or 1 card
requires the entire card to be recoded. The X in
column 34 of the S card deletes the secondary station
code 123456. Note also that a change to T card
information cannot be made in a run in which other
station location data are changed; a separate run must
be made in the following update cycle.
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
3-33
-------
3.5.3 DELETING ALL DATA ASSOCIATED WITH A STATION
The following example deletes station ABC987 stored in
a previous example. All data associated with the
station, both station location and parametric, will be
deleted.
01 2 3 45 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
7START
14AGNFS9 SECRET A
ABC987 DSS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
APRIL 1981 WQ-DE
3-34
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART
WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
CHAPTER
WQ-DE
WATER QUALITY DATA ENTRY
V)
m
o
SECTION
4
CODING PARAMETRIC DATA
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
-------
SECTION 4: CODING PARAMETRIC DATA
The purpose of this section is to describe how parametric data
are coded for entry to the WQF. The section details each of the
cards used for coding parametric data, and also describes which
cards, and which fields within those cards, are required to
perform initial parametric data storage, change, and delete
functions.
4.1 DEFINING SAMPLE INFORMATION
The selection of parameters that are sampled at a
station is a function of the monitoring strategy and
other requirements established by the agency
responsible for the station. Regardless of which
parameters are sampled, certain information may be
defined for each sample that is to be stored within the
WQF. The following list summarizes the sample
information which may be stored in the WQF. Some of
the information is mandatory for data storage, and some
is optional. (These differences are noted later in the
section.)
- the location (primary or secondary station code)
where the sample was taken
- the date (year, month, day) the sample was
collected
- the time (hour, minute) the sample was collected
- the depth (in feet or meters) at which the sample was
taken
- the values (amounts) of the sample parameters
- the specification of one or more remark codes which
further describe the conditions under which.the
sample was taken
- and for composite samples, the composite type and
value indicators
Analytical results are stored as data records in the
WQF, one record for each sample. New data records are
created each time a date, time, or depth changes. For
example, assume a sample is stored containing values of
three parameters for February 10, 1981 at 2:00. If
three additional parameters are stored for the same
date and time they will become part of the original
record which will now contain values of six parameters.
If, however, the three additional parameters have a
date and time of February 10, 1981 at 3:00, a new
record will be created for the three parameters.
The maximum number of parameter values which can be
stored per sample per week is 250, a rather large
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
4-1
-------
number, which should not impose any restrictions on
normal data storage activity.
Analytical results (parameter values or amounts) are
associated with standard 5-digit STORET parameter
codes. Lists of these codes can be obtained by
following the instructions given in Appendix B:
Parameters and Parameter Codes. These parameter codes
define the method by which an analysis was performed
and the form and units in which the results were
recorded.
Users are cautioned that the codes they specify are the
correct codes, i.e., that the codes correspond to the
actual analytical method employed. (Some codes are
similar but distinctly different, e.g., 00070
Turbidity-Jackson Candle and 00075 Turbidity-Hellige;
other parameters may be analyzed in several forms,
e.g., metals which can be reported in total, dissolved,
or suspended forms; and others which may be reported by
a laboratory in units other than those required for
storage in STORET.)
4.1.1 TERMINOLOGY USED
The information described in this section can be
entered into the WQF as 80-cqlumn punched cards using a
card-reading terminal, or as lines of information
within a data set using a keyboard-type terminal. (A
data set is a collection of logically-related data
records residing within a computer system and
accessible to users via remote terminals.) An 80-
column card and a line of information within a data set
are equivalent entities to the STORET system.
Similarly, a deck of cards and an entire data set are
also equivalent. To simplify the descriptions of the
coding requirements for the coding of parametric data,
all records of information are referred to as cards
within this section. A collection of parameter data
cards is referred to as a parametric data storage deck,
and an individual record is referred to as a parametric
data card.
4.1.2 USE OF STATION LOCATION AND BEGINNING CONTROL CARDS
Depending upon the way the parametric data are being
coded, two station location storage cards — the Agency
card (A card) and, in some cases, a Station card (S
card) — are used to identify the agency and station to
which the parametric data belong. Each parametric data
storage deck begins with two control cards: a 7START
APRIL 1981 WQ-DE
4-2
-------
card, and a ?0n card, where n is a number from one to
four, which denotes the type of storage procedure used.
These beginning control cards are then followed by an
agency card as described below.
4.1.3 USE OF THE AGENCY CARD (A CARD)
As with any data entry operation involving either
station location or parametric data, the agency to
which the station and/or parametric data are related
must be specified. An unlocking key must also be
specified in order to prevent unauthorized data entry.
The agency card, as described in Section 3, is used to
provide this information when storing parametric data.
The following fields of an A card are to be coded when
storing parametric data by any of the storage
procedures described below.
columns 1-8
columns 9-16
columns 17-24
columns 25-60
Agency Code
The one-to-eight character agency code
assigned to the agency responsible for
collecting and entering data into the WQF.
Entries are to be left-justified, leaving
unused columns blank.
Blank
Unlocking Key
A one-to-eight character alpha-numeric code,
which must be accurately specified before any
information can be stored for the respective
stations. This unlocking key serves as a
safeguard against unauthorized; storage of
data. Entries must be left-justified,
leaving unused columns blank.
Name of Individual Storing Data
The name, location, telephone number, or
other information relevant to the individual
responsible .for the storage of station
location information should be entered here.
The information within the field is not
stored in the WQF, but is printed on primary
error listings to facilitate user tracking
of jobs.
WQ-DE
4-3
APRIL 1981
-------
column 61
column 62
columns 63-77
Date Check
This field is used primarily for correcting
or changing previously-stored parametric
data, for instance, data that may have been
stored incorrectly prior to the time that
date edit checking was performed
automatically by the STORET system.
Completing this field with the letter B
specifies that no date and/or time checking
are to be performed automatically by the
system. If date checking is to be
performed, leave this column blank.
Depth Unit
This field is used to specify the unit of
measurement in which the sample depths are
recorded. Either F (for feet) or M (for
meters) may be specified. If not completed,
the value for this field defaults to F,
feet.
Blank
columns 78-79 Control Code
This field is to be left blank for all
parametric data storage operations.
column 80 Card Type Code
Code with the letter A.
A free-format agency card may be substituted for the A
card when using the WQGSTOR (?04) storage procedure.
Its coding is described later in this section.
4.1.4 CARDS USED TO STORE, CHANGE, AND DELETE PARAMETRIC DATA
In addition to the agency and station cards, there are
several other cards which are used solely to input,
change, or delete parametric data. These include
Parameter or P Cards, Data or D cards, Parametric Data
or 6 Cards, and the AC and SC cards used in ?04 storage
procedures. Each of these cards is described in detail
in subsequent subsections.
APRIL 1981
WQ-DE
4-4
-------
4.1.5 WAYS TO CODE PARAMETRIC DATA
There are four ways that parametric data may be coded
for entry to the WQF. These are known as types ?01,
?02, ?03, and ?04 and each numbered procedure serves to
call the proper STORET edit program to perform against
the data. The uses or functions of these storage
procedure methods are summarized in the following
table, and are further described in the paragraphs and
subsections that follow:
FUNCTION/USE
STORAGE PROCEDURE
?01 ?02 ?03 ?04
storing new parametric data
changing parametric data
deleting parametric data
Sample Types
grab sample with date
grab sample with date and time
composite sample with
beginning and ending dates
sophisticated composite
sample with dates, times, and
conditions
yes yes yes yes
yes no no yes
yes no no yes
yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes
yes
no
no yes
The ?01 type of storage procedure (or fixed-form
procedure) employs a fixed-field or standard card
format, and can be used to either add new, change old,
or delete old parameter values. An agency card and
station card must be coded to identify the agency and
stations involved. This procedure is also applicable
to all four types of samples shown in the table above.
The Decimal Input (DIP) procedure types ?02 and ?03
allow keypunching of free-form data cards directly from
tables or reports.
The ?02 procedure is used when the same 30 or fewer
parameters are measured at all stations in the storage
deck but collection times, dates, and depths differ.
The cards -used to code this procedure are a 7START
card, a ?02 card, an Agency card (A card), one or more
P cards (30 parameters per P card and one P
continuation card) which identify the parameters to be
WQ-DE
4-5
APRIL 1981
-------
stored, and as many D cards as necessary to identify
the sampling stations, dates, times, depths, and
values. The procedure may be used only to add new
samples or additional parameters to existing samples.
Coding additional P and D cards provides for the
storage of an unlimited number of samples.
The ?03 storage procedure is used to store a set of
parameters taken at the same dates, times, and depths
for different stations. The cards used to code this
procedure are a 7START card, a ?03 card, an Agency card
(A card), one or more P cards which identify the
stations, and as many D cards as necessary to identify
the parameters, dates, times, depths and values. The
procedure may be used only to add new samples or to add
additional parameters to existing samples. Coding
additional P and D cards provides for the storage of an
unlimited number of samples.
The ?04 storage procedure (or WQGSTOR) employs a
variable or free-form card format, and can be used
either to store, change, or delete parametric data. It
also can be used with all four types of samples shown
in the table above. The cards used to code this
procedure are a 7START card, a ?04 card, an agency card
(using either a fixed-format or a variable format), and
one or more SC cards which identify the stations,
dates, times, depths, parameters, and values. Coding
for the variable format agency card .is described in the
next subsection.
4.1.6 THE UPDATE PROCESS
The processing of users' storage requests is a two-
phase operation. The first phase is invoked when users
submit their requests to add, change, or delete WQF
data, whether station location or parametric data.
These requests are processed by the appropriate STORET
input processing programs which perform a variety of
error checking and field editing routines. Those
storage requests which pass the data editing process
are written to a special STORET file, called the MOD
file, to await further processing. Any errors which
were detected during this first phase are made
available to the user.
APRIL 1981 WQ-DE
4-6
-------
Throughout any given week, all users' edited and
syntactically correct storage requests are collected on
the MOD file. These data are not permanently stored .in
the WQF during the week. The second phase of the
process of storing user water quality data occurs over
the weekend when STORET personnel run the STORET UPDATE
program. This program reads the data accumulated in
the MOD file, performs other edit checks on the data
being stored, changed, or deleted, and then updates the
WQF. Storage requests which fail the UPDATE edit
checks (e.g., a request to delete a date value not
previously stored) generate secondary errors which are
also made available to the user.
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
4-7
-------
4.2 STORING NEW PARAMETRIC DATA
This subsection describes in detail each of the
" -different parametric data storage cards, and each field
within these cards, that are used to store parametric
data within the WQF. In any given operation, only
those parametric data storage cards may be used that
apply to the storage procedure used (i.e., ?01, ?02,
?03, or ?04).
All four storage procedures ;may be used to add new data
to the WQF. They are presented in order of complexity
of usage and increasing capability from easier to more
difficult, starting with ?02 and progressing to ?03,
?04, and lastly ?01.
4.2.1 SINGLE STATION DIP INPUT (Type ?02)
Cards Used:
?START
?02
A Card
P Card(s)
D Card(s)
The single station decimal input procedure (DIP) is
used when the same set of parameters was sampled at a
number of stations, but the samples were taken at
different dates, times, and depths. Up to 30
parameters can be stored by a single P card and one
continuation card. (If more than 30 parameters are to
be stored, then multiple P cards - and continuation
cards - must be coded.) The P card is used to identify
the specific parameters whose values are to be stored.
The parameter values are coded on one or more Data
cards (D cards) which follow the P cards.
The format of the P card used for single station input
via the ?02 procedure is as follows:
APRIL 1981 WQ-DE
4-8
-------
The Parameter Card (P Card), Single Station DIP Format
columns 1-4
column 5
column 6
columns 7-76
Card Type Code
A letter P enclosed within single quotation
marks identifies this card to be a parameter
card. Enter a comma in the column after
this field. Thus, this four-column field is
coded: 'P',
Depth Indicator
This one-character field is to contain
either a blank or one of the following
alphabetic characters which indicates the
type of depth at which the sample was taken:
Blank - regular depth of sample measured from
the surface
B - the depth to the bottom of the water
column
V - a vertically-integrated sample taken
from the surface to the depth recorded
P - a pore sample which consists of the
water extracted from a core sample
D - a sediment sample taken at the bottom
using a sediment sampler such as an
Ekman or a Peterson dredge
C - a core sample taken at bottom using a
core sampler such as a Phlegar or a
Wilding sampler
The STORET help data set named
SAMPLE.IDENTITY lists all codes used to
identify water quality samples.
Sample Depth
If sample depths are to be coded on the
following data cards, code the letter D;
otherwise leave the field blank.
Parameter Codes
This field is used to code from one to
fourteen 5-digit water quality parameter
codes. Each code specified must be five
digits in length, i.e., leading zeros must
be specified. The codes must not be
separated by commas or blanks. A complete
list of the parameter codes defined within
STORET is referenced within Appendix B.
WQ-DE
4-9
APRIL 1981
-------
columns 77-79 Blank
column 80 Continuation Code
If more than fourteen parameters are to be
specified, code the letter C in this column,
and code the additional parameters on a
continuation card.
Continuation Card
A single continuation card may contain from one to
sixteen additional five-digit parameter codes, for a
total of thirty parameter codes. Coding begins in
column one, proceeding to column 80 if necessary. As
with the P card, individual codes must not be separated
by commas. If more than 30 parameters are to be
specified, additional P and continuation cards may be
used following the data cards (D cards) for the first
30 parameters.
APRIL 1981 WQ-DE
4-10
-------
The Data Card (D Card), Single Station DIP Format
field 1
field 2
field 3
field 4
Sequence Number
The leading field of the data (D) card may
contain a sequence or card sorting number.
The sequence number is composed of a dollar
sign ($) followed by numerical digits. The
entire number including the dollar sign must
be enclosed in single quotation marks
followed by a comma. Completing this field
is optional, as the information is not
stored in the WQF; if not used, proceed to
field 2.
Card Type Code
A letter D enclosed within single quotation
marks identifies this card to be a data
card. If sequence numbers are not used,
this field can begin in column one. Enter a
comma in the column after this field. Thus
this four-column field is coded: 'D',
Station Code
This field must be coded with an alpha-
numeric primary or secondary station code
enclosed in single quotation marks. If
sequence numbers are not used, this field
begins in column 5.
Date-Time
This field is used to code the date (year,
month, and day), and optionally the time,
that the samples were taken, according to
the type of sampling method used, as
follows:
1) For grab samples with no time
information, this field is to contain
a six-digit value: the first two
digits are to contain the year; the
third and fourth digits the month; and
the fifth and sixth digits the day of
the month.
2) For grab samples with time indicated,
this field is to contain a ten-digit
value: the first two digits are to
contain the year; the third and fourth
WQ-DE
4-11
APRIL 1981
-------
digits the month; the fifth and sixth
digits the day of the month; and the
last four digits the time, expressed
in terms of a 24-hour clock.
3) For composite samples with beginning
and ending dates indicated, this field
is to contain a twelve-digit value:
the first six digits are to contain
the beginning year, month, and day;
and the next six digits the ending
year, month, and day.
This field must contain no embedded blanks,
and leading zeros must be coded. This field
is concluded with a comma.
field 5 Sample Depth
If a D was coded in column 6 of the
preceding P card, sample depth is coded in
this field.
Depth units are assumed to be those
indicated on the immediately preceding
agency (A) card. This field is concluded by
a comma.
If a D was indicated on the previous P card
but no depth exists, code only a comma, and
proceed to field six.
If a sample has been stored with a depth
value, all samples having the same date and
time must have a numerical value coded for
depth, i.e., surface depths must be coded as
000, not as blanks.
field 6 Parameter Values
The remainder of the data card may be coded
with parameter values in the order the
parameters were specified on the preceding P
card. Parameter values are separated by
commas. If a value is not available for a
parameter, the corresponding field is coded
with a comma.
If a remark code is to be associated with a
parameter value, the remark code must
immediately precede the parameter value,
APRIL 1981 WQ-DE
4-12
-------
e.g., K5.2. Remark codes are defined in
Table 4-2 located within this section.
Parameter values may be designated via
either fixed point or floating point
numerical notation. The general expression
for the format of the data field is:
.XXXXXXX ESPP
where
1) The designation .XXXXXXX represents
a fixed point number or the mantissa of a
floating point number which may include
from one to seven numerical digits plus
a decimal point. The decimal point may
occur in any position or be omitted.
When floating point notation is used,
the decimal point is assumed to be
immediately to the left of the first
numerical digit or the position indicated.
2) The blank constitutes an exponent
separator. Its use is optional.
3) The designation S indicates the sign of
the exponent. It may be coded plus (+),
minus (-), or left blank. A plus
code will cause the decimal point to be
moved to the right, a minus code will
cause it to be moved to the left, and
a blank code will maintain the
indicated position. Use of the
exponent sign (E) is optional. If
a code is not provided the exponent is
assumed to be positive.
4) The designation PP represents the value
of the exponent. Two numerical digits
must be coded if floating point
notation is used. This code controls
the extent of movement of the decimal
point from the indicated position.
Correct codes for the numbers 5, 7.5, 0.1,
and 98,500 are 5, 7.5, 0.1 or l.OE-01, and
98500 or 9.85E04 or 9.85 E04 or 9.85E+04,
respectively.
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
4-13
-------
field 7 Delimiter
The last parameter value specified must be
followed by a comma.
Continuation Card
If all of the parameter values cannot be coded on a
single D card, a continuation card may be used. The
last character coded on the D card must be a comma; a
parameter value cannot be split and continued onto a
continuation card. The continuation card has no
special fields or codes; coding of parameter values may
begin in column one, and proceed as above. The last
character that must be coded on a continuation card is
a comma.
APRIL 1981 WQ-DE
4-14
-------
4.2.1.1 EXAMPLES OF STORING NEW PARAMETRIC DATA USING THE SINGLE
STATION DIP INPUT PROCEDURE (TYPE ?02)
Store the following parametric data for agency 14AGNFS9
for the indicated existing stations utilizing the
single station DIP input procedure. The parameter
codes are: 95 for conductivity; 10 for temperature; 400
for pH; 410 for alkilinity; 31505 for coliforms; 940
for chloride; 75 for turbidity; 900 for hardness; 300
for dissolved oxygen; 945 for sulphate; 620 for
nitrate; 435 for acidity; 305 for biological oxygen
demand; 1045 for iron; 550 for oil; and 650 for
phosphate.
STATION
NUMBER DATE
205090
205090
205090
1/7/80
3/8/80
5/20/80
STATION
NUMBER DATE
108130
108130
5/3/80
5/21/80
TIME
9:00
13:00
DEPTH
TYPE
BOTTOM
BOTTOM
DEPTH COND TEMP Ph ALK COLIFORMS
20 210 6.2 7.4 110 43,000,000
35 10.1 7.6 10,000
250 14.8 98 3,7E04
DEPTH
VALUE CL
TURB HARD DO S04 N03
20 <15 <250 120 9.8 25 <.85
20 >8 >130 8.7 20 0.92
STATION
NUMBER DATE
TIME
M350J1 4/1/80 4p.m.
M350J1 3/6/80
ACID ALK BOD CL DO HARD IRON QLL P04 S04
.41 32
8 105 2.4 17 9.8 110
6 100—15 105
15.02 95
50
01 2345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
?START
702
14AGNFS9 SECRET A
'P', D0009500010004000041031505
'D','205090',8001070900,20,210,6.2,7.4,110,43000000,
'D','205090',800308,35,,10.1,7.6,,!0000,
'D1,'205090',8005201300,,250,14.8,,98,3.7E04,
'P',80009400007500900003000094500620
'D','108130',800503,20,K15,K250,120,9.8,25,K.85,
'D','108130',800521,20,L8,,LI 30,8.7,20,.92,
'P', 00435004100030500940003000090001045005500065000945
'D','M350J1',8004011600,8,105,2.4,17,9.8,110,15.02,
95,.41,32,
'D','M350J1',800306,6,100,,15,,105,,50,,,
0 1 23 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
WQ-DE
4-15
APRIL 1981
-------
4.2.2 MULTIPLE STATION DIP INPUT (Type ?03)
Cards Used:
?START
?03
A Card
P Card(s)
D Card(s)
The multiple station decimal input procedure (DIP) is
used when the same set of parameters were sampled at a
number of stations at identical times, dates, and
depths. Up to 20 stations can be specified by a single
P card and three continuation cards. (If data for more
than 20 stations are to be stored, then multiple P
cards — and continuation cards — must be coded
following the data cards for the first 20 stations.)
The parameter codes and dates and times are coded on
one or more D cards which follow the P cards.
The formats of the cards used for multiple station
input via the ?03 storage procedure are as follows:
APRIL 1981 WQ-DE
4-16
-------
The Parameter Card (P Card), Multiple Station DIP Format
columns 1-4
columns 5-19,
20-34,
35-49,
50-64,
and 65-79
column 80
Continuation Card
Card Type Code
A letter P enclosed within single quotation
marks identifies this card to be a parameter
card. Enter a comma in the column after
this field. Thus, this four-column field is
coded: 'P1,
Station Codes
These fields are used to specify up to five
alpha-numeric station codes for the parameter
values to be stored. Either primary or
secondary station codes may be specified.
The codes must be left-justified, with
unused columns in each fifteen column field
left blank. (A station code can begin only
in columns 5, 20, 35, 50, or 65.) The
station codes are not to be separated by
commas.
Continuation Code or Depth Storage Indicator
If more than five station codes are
required, code the letter C in this column,
and code the additional station codes on one
or more continuation cards. If five or less
station codes are required, and depth values
are being stored, code the letter D.
Otherwise, leave blank.
Up to three continuation cards may be used to specify
up to a total of 20 station codes for which parameter
values are to be stored.
columns 1-4
columns 5-79
column 80
Blank
Station Codes
Complete these columns as described above
for the P card.
Continuation Code or Depth Storage Indicator
Code the letter C if another continuation
card is to be coded. If depth values will
be stored, code the letter D.
WQ-DE
4-17
APRIL 1981
-------
The Data Card (D Card), Multiple Station DIP Format
field 1
field 2
field 3
field 4
Sequence Number
The leading field of the data (D) card may
contain a sequence or card sorting number.
The sequence number is composed of a dollar
sign ($) followed by numerical digits. The
entire number including the dollar sign must
be enclosed in single quotation marks
followed by a comma. Completing this field
is optional; if not used, proceed to field
2.
Card Type Code ;
A letter D enclosed within single quotation
marks identifies this card to be a data
card. If sequence numbers are not used,
this field can begin in column one. Enter a
comma in the column after this field. Thus
this field is coded: 'D1,
Parameter Code
This field is used to code the five-digit
parameter code with which the parameter
values coded on this, and on following data
cards, for the same date, time, and stations
are associated. Leading zeros must be coded
to complete the five digit field. The field
is followed by a comma. A complete list of
the parameter codes defined within STORET is
referenced within Appendix B.
Date-Time
This field is used to code the date (year,
month, and day), and optionally the time,
that the samples were taken at all of the
stations indicated on the preceding P cards.
This field is coded according to the type of
sampling method used, as follows:
1) For grab samples with no time
information, this field is to contain
a six-digit value: the first two
digits are to contain the year; the
third and fourth digits the month; and
the fifth and sixth digits the day of
the month.
APRIL 1981
WQ-DE
4-18
-------
2) For grab samples with time indicated,
this field is to contain a ten-digit
value: the first two digits are to
contain the year; the third and fourth
digits the month; the fifth and sixth
digits the day of the month; and the
last four digits the time, expressed
in terms of a 24-hour clock.
3) For composite samples with beginning
and ending dates indicated, this field
is to contain a twelve-digit value:
the first six digits are to contain
the beginning year, month, and day;
and the next six digits the ending
year, month, and day.
This field must contain no embedded blanks,
and leading zeros must be coded. This field
is concluded with a comma.
field 5 Depth
This field is applicable only if a D was
coded in column 80 of the last P or P
continuation card, indicating that sample
depths are being specified. If this is not
the case, proceed to field 6.
The depth at which the sample was taken is
expressed in the format:
D [M]
XXX, where M and B, V, P, D, and
C are all optional, but where
only one value within each
pair of brackets may be
specified, and where XXX is
the depth.
The permissible values for this field are:
B - the depth to the bottom of the water
column
V - a vertically-integrated sample taken
from the surface to the depth recorded
P - a pore sample which consists of the
water extracted from a core sample
D - a sediment sample taken at the bottom
using a sediment sampler such as an
Ekman or a Peterson dredge
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
4-19
-------
C - a core sample taken at bottom using a
core sampler such as a Phlegar or a
Wilding sampler
All values specified will be in feet unless
the value includes an M which indicates the
values are in meters.
This field is followed by a comma.
If a sample has been stored with a depth
value, all samples having the same date and
time must have a numerical value coded for
depth, i.e., surface depths must be coded as
000, not as blanks.
field 6 Parameter Values
The remainder of the data card may be coded
with parameter values in the station-by-
station order specified on the preceding P
card(s). Parameter values are separated by
commas. If a value is not available for a
parameter, the corresponding field is coded
with a comma.
Parameter values may be designated via
either fixed point or floating point
numerical notation. The general expression
for the format of the data field is:
.XXXXXXX ESPP
where
1) The designation .XXXXXXX represents a
fixed point number or the mantissa of a
floating point number which may include
from one to seven digits plus a decimal
point. The decimal point may occur in
any position or be omitted. When floating
point notation is used, the decimal
point is assumed to be immediately to
the left of the first numerical digit
or the position indicated.
2) The blank constitutes an exponent
separator. Its use is optional.
3) The designation S indicates the sign of
the exponent. It may be coded plus (+),
minus (-), or left blank. A plus code
will cause the decimal point to be moved
APRIL 1981 WQ-DE
4-20
-------
field 7
Continuation Card
to the right, a minus code will cause
it to be moved to the left, and a blank
code will maintain the indicated
position. Use of the exponent (E) sign
is optional. If a code is not
provided the exponent is assumed to
be positive.
4) The designation PP represents the value
of the exponent. Two numerical digits
must be coded if floating point
notation is used. This code controls
the extent of movement of the decimal
point from the indicated position.
If a remark code is to be associated with a
parameter value, the remark code must
immediately precede the value, e.g., K5.2.
Remark codes are defined in Table 4-2
located within this section.
Correct codes for the numbers 5, 7.5, 0.1,
and 98,500 are 5, 7.5, 0.1 or l.OE-01, and
98500 or 9.85E04 or 9.85 E04 or 9.85E+04,
respectively.
Delimiter
The last parameter value specified must be
followed by a comma.
If all of the parameter values cannot be coded on a
single D card, a continuation card may be used. The
last character coded on the D card must be a comma; a
parameter value cannot be split and continued onto a
continuation card. The continuation card has no
special fields or codes; coding of parameter values may
begin in column one, and proceed as above. The last
character that must be coded on a continuation card is
a comma.
WQ-DE
4-21
APRIL 1981
-------
4.2.2.1 EXAMPLE OF STORING NEW PARAMETRIC DATA USING THE MULTIPLE
STATION DIP INPUT PROCEDURE (TYPE ?03)
Store the following parametric data sampled in 1980 for
the indicated existing stations of agency 14AGNFS9
utilizing the multiple station DIP input procedure.
Nitrate mg/1 is parameter code 620; DO mg/1 is code
300; and Total P04 mg/1 is code 650.
M075
Stations
M076 M077 M078
Parameter: Nitrate mg/1
M079
Date
7-17
7-18
7-19
7-20
7-21
Time
1300
-
-
-
—
Parameter:
7-17
7-18
7-19
7-20
7-21
1300
-
-
—
-
Parameter:
7-17
7-18
7-19
7-20
1300
-
-
—
Depth
Value
10
10
15
1
—
DO mg/1
10
10
15
1
-
Total P04
10
0
15
1
Depth
Type
Regular
Regular
Bottom
Pore
—
Regular
Regular
Bottom
Pore
-
mg/1
Regular
Regular
Bottom
Pore
.2
.1
.2
.2
.2
10.8
10.8
10.5
10.6
10.3
.01
<.01
.04
.03
.2
. 1
.2
. 1
.2
10.9
10.8
-
10.8
10.6
.01
<.01
.02
.02
Values
.2
.2
.2
.2
.2
10.9
11.2
-
10.9
10.9
<.01
<.01
.43
.05
.2
.2
. 1
. 1
.2
11 .0
11 .2
10.9
10.6
10.7
<.01
<.01
.19
.02
.2
.2
. 1
.2
.2
11.1
11.2
1 1 .0
10.8
10.8
.01
.02
.33
.02
APRIL 1981
WQ-DE
4-22
-------
01 2345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
?START
703
14AGNFS9 SECRET A
'P',M075 M076 M077 M078 M079 D
'D1,00620,8007171300,0010,.2,.2,.2,.2,.2,
'D',00620,800718,0010,.!,.!,.2,.2,.2,
1D',00620,800719,DB015,.2/.2,.2,.1,.1,
'D1,00620,800720,DP001,.2, .1, .2, .1, .2,
'D',00620,800721,.2,.2,.2,.2,.2,
'D1,00300,8007171300,0010,10.8,10.9,10.9,11,11 .1,
'D1,00300,800718,0010,10.8,10.8,11.2,11.2,11.2,
'D1,00300,800719,08015,10.5,,,10.9,11.0,
1D1,00300,800720,DP001,10.6,10.8,10.9,10. 6,10. 8,
'D1,00300,800721,10.3,10.6,10.9,10.7,10. 8,
'D',00650,8007171300,0010,.01,.01,K.01,K.01,.01,
1D',00650,800718,0000,K.01,K.01,K.01,K.01, .02,
'D1,00650,800719,08015,.04,.02,.43, . 1 9, . 33,
'D1,00650,800720,DP001,.03,.02,.05,.02,.02,
0 I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
4-23
-------
4.2.3 WQGSTOR INPUT (Type ?04)
Cards Used:
7START
?04
AC Card or A Card
SC Card
The variable format input procedure utilizes an AC
agency card (or a standard A card) and an SC storage
card. These cards may be used to code the values of
parameters sampled under varying sampling methods and
conditions, including a simple grab sample, a grab
sample with time identified, a composite sample with
beginning and ending dates, and a composite sample with
dates, times, and sampling conditions identified. Up
to 100 parameter codes and associated values can be
stored for any given sample.
Data items appearing in and after column four of the AC
and SC cards are coded in free form format, with commas
— and no intervening blanks — separating the fields.
A comma must be coded after the last field on the card.
The formats of the cards used for WQGSTOR input via the
?04 storage procedure are as follows:
APRIL 1981 WQ-DE
4-24
-------
The Agency Card (AC Card), Free-form Format
field 1
field 2
field 3
field 4
field 5
Card Type Code
The letters AC must be coded in columns 1
and 2, followed by a comma in column 3.
A=agency-code,
The one-to-eight alpha-numeric agency code,
beginning in column 4, followed by a comma.
UK=unlocking-key,
Unlocking-key is the one-to-eight alpha-
numeric code assigned to the user storing
the data, which must be accurately specified
before any information can be stored for the
respective stations. This field is to be
followed by a comma.
USER=user-name,
User-name is a one-to-fifty-four alpha-
numeric description of the user storing
data, including his or her name, location,
agency, telephone number, and any other
relevant information. Embedded blanks are
permitted. This field is to be followed by
a comma.
Validity check (NDC)
This field is used primarily for correcting
or changing previously-stored parametric
data, for instance, data that may have been
stored incorrectly prior to the time that
data edit checking was performed
automatically by the STORET system. The
letters NDC may be coded to indicate that
the date fields are not to be checked for
validity. If a validity check is to be
performed, this field is not to be coded.
If coded, the field is to be followed by a
comma.
WQ-DE
4-25
APRIL 1981
-------
The Storage Card (SC Card)
This card is used to code the remaining information to be coded
in a ?04 WQGSTOR storage procedure: the station code, dates,
depths, parameters and parameter values, and other pertinent
information. All fields are separated by commas. This card
follows either the AC agency card or the standard A card.
If more than one data card is required to record all data for a
given sample, the data may be coded on the card up to column 80.
Remaining data are then coded on a second card, and as many other
continuation cards, as required. Up to 100 parameters and
associated values can be specified in one set of SC and
continuation cards.
The length and content of the fields on the SC card are variable,
and depend upon storage requirements, the manner in which
parameter values were recorded, and other such variables. The
fields of the SC card must be arranged and coded in the following
sequence:
field 1
field 2
field 3
Card Type Code
The letters SC must be coded in columns 1 and
2, followed by a comma in column 3.
Station Code
This field must be coded with an alpha-
numeric primary or secondary station code to
which the information on the card pertains.
This code is to be followed by a comma.
Beginning Date and Time
The date on which the sample was taken, or
in the case of a composite sample, the
beginning date the sample was collected.
The date must be in the format:
yymmddtttt, where yy is the year, mm the
month, dd the day, and tttt the time in
hours and minutes, expressed in terms
of a 24-hour clock. Time is optional.
The field is to be followed by a comma.
APRIL 1981
WQ-DE
4-26
-------
field 4 Ending Date and Time
This field is coded only for composite data,
and is of the format yymmddtttt as described
above, followed by a comma.
field 5 Depth
The depth at which the sample was taken is
expressed in the format
D [M]
XXX, where M and B, V, P, D, and
C are all optional, but where
only one value within each
pair of brackets may be
specified, and where XXX is
the depth.
The permissible values for this field are:
B - the depth to the bottom of the water
column
V - a vertically-integrated sample taken
from the surface to the depth recorded
P - a pore sample which consists of the
water extracted from a core sample
D - a sediment sample taken at the bottom
using a sediment sampler such as an
Ekman or a Peterson dredge
C - a core sample taken at bottom using a
core sampler such as a Phlegar or a
Wilding sampler
All values specified will be in feet unless
the value includes an M which indicates the
values are in meters.
If a sample has been stored with a depth
value, all samples having the same date and
time must have a numerical value coded for
depth, i.e., surface depths must be coded as
000, not as blanks.
This field is to be followed by a comma.
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
4-27
-------
field 6 Composite Value Type
This field is used only with sophisticated
composite data, and is used to indicate the
composite value type. One of the following
values may be specified:
A indicates an average sample
H indicates a maximum value
L indicates a minimum value
N or # indicates the number of
observations within the sample
S indicates a standard deviation
U indicates a sum of squares
V indicates a variance
C indicates coefficient or error
X indicates a coefficient of
variance
E indicates skewness
F indicates kurtosis
Z indicates the number of samples
in the composite that exceeds
established limits
% indicates precision
$ indicates accuracy
B when none of the above apply
If coded, the field is to be followed by a comma.
field 7 Space/Time Composite
This field is used only with sophisticated
composite data, and indicates whether the
sample was collected over a period of time
or space, or both. One of the following
values may be specified:
S indicates space
T indicates time
B indicates both space and time
If coded, the field is to be followed by a comma,
APRIL 1981 WQ-DE
4-28
-------
field 8 Sample Type
This field is used only with sophisticated
composite data, and indicates what type of
sample was collected. One of the following
values may be specified:
C indicates the samples were
collected continuously
G indicates the samples are
individual grab samples, but
that the actual number are not
to be reported
GNxx xx is a two-digit number depicting
the number of individual grab
samples in the collection
B blank, when none of the above apply
If coded, the field is to be followed by a comma,
For sophisticated composite samples, fields
6, 7, and 8 must all be accounted for.
field 9 Parameter Code
This field is used to specify the parameter
code whose value is to be stored. The field
is coded in the format
PXXXXX which stores the parameter
XXXXX with the next field
(data item) as its value.
Leading zeros need not be
coded.
As many pairs of this field and the next
field may be coded as required. A comma
must follow each parameter code specified.
A complete list of the STORET parameter
codes is referenced within Appendix B.
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
4-29
-------
field 10 Parameter Value
This field is used to specify the value to
be stored for the parameter code specified
in the preceding field. If a remark code is
used, it must be the last character in the
value. Remark codes are defined in Table
4-2 located within this section.
Parameter values may be designated via
either fixed point or floating point
numerical notation. The general expression
for the format of the data field is:
.XXXXXXX ESPP
where
1) The designation .XXXXXXX represents
a fixed point number or the mantissa of
a floating point number which may include
from one to seven digits plus a decimal
point. The decimal point may occur in
any position or be omitted. When
floating point notation is used the
decimal point is assumed to be
immediately to the left of the first
numerical digit or the position
indicated.
2) The blank constitutes an exponent
separator. Its use is optional.
3) The designation S indicates the sign of
the exponent. It may be coded plus ( + ),
minus (-), or left blank. A plus code
will cause the decimal point to be
moved to the right, a minus code will
cause it to be moved to the left, and
a blank will maintain the indicated
position. Use of the exponent sign (E)
is optional., If a code is not provided
the exponent is assumed to be positive.
4) The designation PP represents the value
of the exponent. Two numerical digits
must be coded if floating point notation
is used. This code controls the extent
of movement of the decimal point from
the indicated position.
APRIL 1981 WQ-DE
4-30
-------
Correct codes for the numbers 5, 7.5, 0.1,
and 98,500 are 5, 7.5, 0.1 or l'.OE-01, and
98500 or 9.85E04 or 9.85 E04 or 9.85E+04,
respectively.
As many pairs of this field and the
preceding field may be coded as required.
A comma must follow each value specified.
Continuation Card
If all of the parameter values cannot be coded on a
single SC card, a continuation card may be used. The
last character coded on the SC card must be a comma, as
a parameter value cannot be split and continued onto a
continuation card. The continuation card has no
special fields or codes; coding of parameter values may
begin in column one, and proceed as above. The last
character that must be coded on a continuation card is
a comma.
Abbreviated SC Card
When coding multiple SC cards within a single storage
run for identical stations, dates, times, and depths
(fields 2 through 5), a '$' may be coded in their
stead, which automatically assumes that the values of
these fields are as specified in the preceding fully-
coded SC card.
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
4-31
-------
4.2.3.1 EXAMPLE OF STORING NEW PARAMETRIC DATA USING THE
WQGSTOR 'INPUT PROCEDURE (TYPE ?04)
Store the following 1980 parametric data for station
M075, agency 14AGNFS9, using the WQGSTOR storage
procedure. The 18 July sample was a bottom sample, and
the 19 July sample was a core sample. All depths are
in feet. The values listed for 20 July were average
and high composite sample values, respectively, and
both were space composites of individual grab samples.
DATE
17 July
18 July
19 July
20 July
20 July
TIME
_
2 pm
-
1 2-4 pm
1 2-4 pm
DEPTH
100
200
1
100
100
P=620
.2
.1
.2
.2
4
P=300
10.8
10.8
10.5
10.6
15
P=650
.01
<.01
.04
.02
3
01 2345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
?START
?04
AC,A=14AGNFS9,UK=SECRET,USER=NAME OF USER STORING DATA,
SC,M075,800717,D100,P620,.2,P300,10.8,P650,.01,
SC,M075,8007181400,DB200,P620,.1,P300,10.8,P650,.OIK,
SC,M075,800719,DC001,P620,.2,P300,10.5,P650,.04,
SC,M075,8007201200,8007201600,0100,A,S,G,P620,.2,P300,10.6,P650,.02,
SC,$,H,S,G,P620,4,P300,15,P650,3,
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
APRIL 1981
WQ-DE
4-32
-------
4.2.4 FIXFORM INPUT (Type ?01)
Cards Used:
?START
?01
A Card
S Card
Parametric Data Card(s) (6 Card)
The fixform input procedure is used to code parametric
data via a standard input procedure utilizing a fixed-
field card format. The 6 card is used to code the
values of parameters sampled under varying sampling
methods and conditions, including a simple grab sample,
a grab sample with time identified, a composite sample
with beginning and ending dates, and a composite sample
with dates, times, and sampling conditions identified.
Up to five parameter codes and associated values can be
coded on a single card.
The 6 card is used whenever parametric data are stored,
changed, or deleted via the ?01 procedure as described
in this section. An agency card (A card) and a station
card (S card) precede these parametric data cards in a
parametric data storage deck.
The format of the parametric data card is as follows:
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
4-33
-------
The Parametric Data Card (6 Card)
columns 1-3 Sort No.
columns 4-6
columns 7-18
This field may be used to assign a sequence
number to each of the parametric data cards.
Any alpha-numeric value may be specified;
leading zeros must be provided. Completing
this field is optional as the information is
not stored within the WQF.
Sample Depth
This field is used to store the depth at
which the sample was taken. The system will
assume the units specified on the preceding
A card. If sample depth is not be to
recorded, this field may be left blank.
If a sample has been stored with a depth
value, all samples having the same date and
time must have a numerical value coded for
depth, i.e., surface depths must be coded as
000, 'not as blanks.
Date-Time
i
This field is used to code the date (year,
month, and day), and optionally the time,
that the samples were taken, according to
the type of sampling method used, as
follows:
1) For grab samples with no time
information, this field is to contain a
six-digit value: columns 7 and 8 are
to contain the year; columns 9 and 10
the month; and columns 11 and 12 the
day of the month. Columns 13-18 are to
be left blank.
2) For grab samples with time indicated,
this field is to contain a ten-digit
value: columns 7-12 are to contain the
collection date as defined in 1) above;
and columns 13-16 the time, expressed
in terms of a 24-hour clock. Columns
17 and 18 are to be left blank.
3) For composite samples with beginning
and ending dates indicated, this field
is to contain a 12-digit value:
APRIL 1981
WQ-DE
4-34
-------
columns 19-23,
31-35,
43-47,
55-59,
and 67-71
columns 24-27,
36-39,
48-51,
60-63,
and 72-75
columns 28-29,
40-41,
52-53,
64-65,
and 76-77
columns 7-12 are to contain the
beginning year, month, and day; and
columns 13-18 are to contain the ending
year, month, and day.
4) For composite samples with beginning
and ending dates, times, and sampling
conditions identified, this field is
extended through column 30 as described
in detail in Table 4-1 below. In this
case, the coding of parameter values
must begin in column 31, as opposed to
column 19, as described below.
Parameter Code
These fields are used to specify the five-
digit codes of the parameters being coded.
All codes must be numeric and leading zeros
must be coded. A complete list of the
parameter codes defined within STORET is
referenced within Appendix B.
Parameter Value
These four-digit fields are used to specify
the values associated with the parameter
codes specified in the preceding five fields.
The first non-zero digit of the parameter
value is to be placed in the left-most
column of the field, regardless of the
magnitude of the value, with unused columns
to the right zero-filled. (For instance,
values of 0.006, 0.6 and 60 would all be
coded as 6000.)
Exponent
The location of the decimal point in the
parameter value field is assumed to lie
just to the left of the first significant
digit and the exponent field is used to
denote its proper placement. The numeric
values coded in this field place the
decimal point in its proper location, as
follows:
The left column of this field is used to
specify the direction of movement of the
decimal point. A code of 0 (zero) indicates
that the decimal point is either correct in
its assumed position, or is to be moved to
WQ-DE
4-35
APRIL 1981
-------
columns 30,
42,
54,,
66,
and 78
column 79
column 80
the left; a code of 1 (one) indicates that
the decimal point is to be moved to the
right for correct decimal placement.
The right column of this field is used to
control the extent of movement of the
decimal point, i.e., the value indicates the
number of positions the decimal is to be
moved. Any numeric code (0-9) is valid.
(For instance, the correct exponent codes
for the parameter values of 0.006, 0.6, and
60 are, respectively, 02, 00, and 12.)
Remark Code
These fields are used to assign a one-
character alphabetic remark code to further
define the parameter values. The standard
STORET remark codes and their corresponding
definitions are given in Table 4-2 below.
This field is optional and may be left blank.
Depth Indicator
Code this field with a blank or one of the
following one-digit depth indicator codes:
1 the depth to the bottom of the
water column
2 a vertically-integrated sample
taken from the surface to the
depth recorded
3 a pore sample which consists of the
water extracted from a core sample
4 a sediment sample taken at the
bottom using a sediment sampler
such as an Ekman or a Peterson
dredge
5 a core sample taken at bottom using
a core sampler such as a Phlegar
or a Wilding sampler
Blank regular depth of sample measured
from the surface
The STORET help data set named SAMPLE.IDENTITY
lists all codes used to identify water
quality samples.
Card Type Code
Code with the number 6.
APRIL 1981
WQ-DE
4-36
-------
TABLE 4-1
COMPOSITE SAMPLE CODING
COLUMNS 7-30: PARAMETRIC DATA CARD
columns 7-12
columns 13-16
column 17
column 18
Ending year, month, and day of the composite
sample, in the format yymmdd.
Ending hour and minute of the composite
sample, expressed in terms of a 24-hour
clock.
S - space composite
T - time composite
B - samples that are both space and time
composites
A - Computed average value of several
individual samples or average value of
a continuous record.
H - Maximum value of several individual
samples or the maximum value of a
continuous record.
L - Minimum value of several individual
samples or the minimum value of a
continuous record.
S - Standard Deviation
U - Sum of Squares
V - Variance
C - Coefficient of Error
X - Coefficient of Variance
N or # - The number of observations within the
sample.
E - Skewness
F - Kurtosis
Z - The number of samples in the composite
that exceeds established limits.
WQ-DE
4-37
APRIL 1981
-------
TABLE 4-1, Continued
columns 19-23
column 24
columns 25-28
columns 29-30
% - Precision
$ - Accuracy
Blank - If none of the above apply
Beginning date of a composite sample. The
date will be shown with 5 digits by recording
the last digit only of the year, followed by a
two-digit month, followed by the two-digit day.
Code with the letter C in all cases.
Beginning hour and minute of a composite
sample, expressed in terms of a 24-hour
clock.
Cb - (Where b is a blank) for samples
collected continuously.
Gb - Composite sample made up of individual
grab samples where the number of grab
samples is not to be reported.
NN - (Where NN is a two-digit number such as
04 or 12) used to report the number of
grab samples comprising a composite
sample.
bb - Both columns can be left blank.
APRIL 1981
WQ-DE
4-38
-------
TABLE 4-2
REMARK CODES
A Value reported is the mean of two or more determinations.
B Results based upon colony counts outside the acceptable
range.
C Value cculated.
D Indicates field measurement.
E Indicates extra samples taken at composite stations.
F In the case of species, F indicates female sex.
G Value reported is the maximum of two or more determinations,
H Value based on field kit determination; results may
not be accurate.
J Estimated value; value not accurate.
K Actual value is known to be less than value given.
L Actual value is known to be greater than value given.
M Presence of material verified but not quantified. In
the case of temperature or oxygen reduction potential,
M indicates a negative value. In the case of species,
M indicates male sex.
N Presumptive evidence of presence of material.
0 Sampled, but analysis lost or not performed.
S Laboratory test.
T Value reported is less than criteria of detection.
U Indicates material was analyzed for but not detected.
In the case of species, U indicates undetermined sex.
W Value observed is less than lowest value reportable
under "T" code.
X Value is a quasi vertically-integrated sample.
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
4-39
-------
4.2.4.1 EXAMPLE OF STORING NEW PARAMETRIC DATA USING THE
FIXFORM INPUT PROCEDURE (TYPE ?01 )
Store the following 1980 parametric data for station
M075, agency 14AGNFS9, using the FIXFORM storage
procedure. The samples were taken at a depth of 100
feet. The four samples shown below represent,
respectively, a simple grab sample, a bottom grab with
time, a vertically-integrated composite with dates only,
and a composite with dates, times, and sampling
conditions of time (T) and computed average value (A).
DATE TIME
17 Jul
18 Jul 1430
19 Jul
21 Jul 1100
DATE TIME
•H •->
- -
20 Jul
22 Jul 1200
P=620
.2
. 1
.2
.2
P=300
10.8
10.8
10.5
10.6
P=650
.01
<.01
.04
.02
01 2 3 45 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
?START
14AGNFS9 SECRET
M075
100800717 00620200000 00300108012
1008007181430 00620100000 00300108012
10080071980072000620200000 00300105012
1008007221200TA00721C1100 00620200000
00650100001
00650100001K
00650400001
00300106012 00650200001
A
S
6
16
26
6
01 2345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
APRIL 1981
WQ-DE
4-40
-------
4.3 CHANGING PARAMETRIC DATA ALREADY STORED
There are many situations that may necessitate the
modification or change of one or more items of
parametric data that have been stored previously, such
as to correct a coding error which resulted in the
storing of an erroneous value, or to add or change a
remark code associated with the value previously
stored. This subsection defines the two ways that
parametric data can be changed, and which parametric
data cards and fields are required to effect changes.
The two ways are via the ?01 and ?04 storage
procedures.
Following the descriptions of the two methods available
to change previously stored parametric data is an
example illustrating the coding needed to make changes
according to the procedure described. The examples
change data already stored for parameters 10, 310, and
400 sampled in 1980 for the stations shown within
agency 14AGNFS9.
STATION
070001
070002
070003
DATE
15 Jul
1 Jun
2-3 Aug
TIME
^
1400
—
P=10
^
-
20
P=310
0.3
0.2
~
P=400
0.5
-
—
WQ-DE
4-41
APRIL 1981
-------
4.3.1 CHANGING PREVIOUSLY STORED PARAMETRIC DATA USING THE
?04 (WQGSTOR) PROCEDURE
This procedure may be used for all four types of
samples. Refer to Subsections 3.1 and 4.2.3 for a
detailed description of the fields of the A, AC, and SC
cards.
Required Cards
7START
?04
A or AC
SC
Agency Card
Storage Card
Fields Used - A Card
columns
1-8
17-24
25-60
61
62
78-79
80
field
agency code
unlocking key
user's name
date check
depth unit
control code
card type code
Fields Used - AC Card
field I
1
2
3
4
5
field name
card type code
agency code
unlocking key
user name
validity check
remarks
required
required
optional but desired field
coding a letter B inhibits
date checking; otherwise
leave blank
required
must be blank
must be an A
remarks
AC followed by a comma
required
required
optional, but desired field
code NDC to inhibit date
checking, otherwise leave
blank
APRIL 1981
WQ-DE
4-42
-------
Fields Used - SC Card
field I
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
10
field name
card type code
station code
beginning date
ending date
depth
composite value type
space/time
sample type
parameter code
parameter value
remarks
SC followed by a comma
required
required
required if originally
stored for composite data
required if originally stored
required if originally stored
for composite data
required only if originally
stored for composite data
required only if originally
stored for composite data
required; specified in
the format PCXXXXX, where
the C indicates a change
for parameter code XXXXX
(leading zeros need not be
coded). As many pairs of
this field and the next
field may be coded as
required.
required; specify
the new value for
the parameter code
specified in the preceding
field. If changing a remark
code, it must be the last
character in the value.
4.3.1.1 EXAMPLE OF CHANGING PREVIOUSLY STORED PARAMETRIC DATA
USING THE ?04 (WQGSTOR) PROCEDURE
01 2345678
1234567890T234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901 234567890
7START
?04
AC,A=14AGNFS9,UK=SECRET,USER=NAME OF USER,
SC,070001,800715,PC310,.3,PC400, .5,
SC,070002,8006011400,PC310, .2,
SC,070003,800802,800803,PCI 0,20,
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
WQ-DE
4-43
APRIL 1981
-------
4.3.2 CHANGING PREVIOUSLY STORED PARAMETRIC DATA USING THE
?01 (FIXFORM) PROCEDURE
This procedure can be used to change data associated
with any type of sample. Refer to Subsection 3.1 for a
detailed description of the fields of the A and S
cards.
Required Cards
7START
A Agency Card
S Station Card
6 Parametric Data Card
Fields Used - A Card
columns
1-8
17-24
25-60
61
62
78-79
80
field
agency code
unlocking key
user's name
date check
depth unit
control code
card type code
Fields Used - S Card
columns
field
1-3 sort no.
4-18 primary station code
34-45 secondary station code
80 card type code
Fields Used - 6 Card
columns
1-3
4-6
field
sort no.
sample depth
7-18 date-time
19-23 parameter code
remarks
required
required
optional, but desired field
optional; coding a letter
B inhibits date checking;
otherwise leave blank
required
must be blank
must be an A
remarks
optional
either a primary or
secondary station code must
be coded
must be an S
remarks
optional
required if depth was
originally stored for the
sample
required as originally
stored with the sample
code the parameter whose
value is to be changed
APRIL 1981
WQ-DE
4-44
-------
24-27
28-29
parameter value
exponent
30
31-78
79
remark code
parameter information
card type code
80
card type code
code the new value to be
stored with the preceding
parameter code
code the appropriate exponent
information for the preceding
parameter value as
described in the parametric
data card description under
fixform input.
code the new remark, if
applicable
repeat, as required, as
described above for columns
19-30
code the letter C, which
specifies that data for all
parameters coded (and also
data for all parameters coded
on following continuation
cards) will be stored in place
of existing data. For
changing parametric data
which are associated with a
sample that has a depth other
than regular depth (e.g.,
core, pore, or dredge), code
the appropriate depth
indicator code in column 79,
and code a C, instead of a 6,
in column 80.
must be a 6
4.3.2.1 EXAMPLE OF CHANGING PREVIOUSLY STORED PARAMETRIC DATA
USING THE ?01 (FIXFORM) PROCEDURE
01 2345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
? START
SECRET NAME OF USER
00310300000 00400500000
1 4AGNFS9
070001
800715
007002
8006011400 00310200000
007003
80080280080300010200012
A
S
C6
S
C6
S
C6
01 2345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
WQ-DE
4-45
APRIL 1981
-------
4.4 DELETING PARAMETRIC DATA ALREADY STORED
The STORET system allows users to delete parametric
data that has been previously stored. Alj. parametric
data for a station may be deleted, or selected samples
or selected parameters within a sample may be deleted.
Following the descriptions of the several ways
available to delete previously stored parametric and/or
station data is an example illustrating the coding
needed to effect the deletions according to the
procedure described. The examples delete data and/or
stations already stored for parameters 310 and 400
sampled at station 070001 within agency 14AGNFS9 on
July 15, 1980.
APRIL 1981 WQ-DE
4-46
-------
4.4.1 DELETING BOTH STATION LOCATION AND PARAMETRIC DATA
An A card and a S card, with control code DS specified,
are the only cards needed to delete all station
location data and parametric data stored for a specific
primary station code. The indicated station is totally
removed from the WQF. Refer to Subsection 3.1 for a
detailed description of the fields of the A and S
cards.
Required Cards
?START
?01
A Card
S Card
Fields Used - A Card
columns
1-8
17-24
25-60
78-79
80
field
agency code
unlocking key
user's name
control code
card type code
Fields Used - S Card
columns
field
4-18 primary station code
78-79 control code
80 card type code
remarks
required
required
optional, but desired field
must be blank
must be an A
remarks
station to be deleted from WQF
must be DS
must be an S
4.4.1.1 EXAMPLE OF DELETING BOTH STATION LOCATION AND
PARAMETRIC DATA
01 2345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
7START
1 4AGNFS9
070001
SECRET NAME OF USER
A
DSS
01 2345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
WQ-DE
4-47
APRIL 1981
-------
4.4.2 DELETING ALL PARAMETRIC DATA PREVIOUSLY STORED WITH A
STATION
An A card and an S card, with control code DD
specified, are the only cards needed to delete all
parametric data previously stored with a station.
Refer to Subsection 3.1 for a detailed description of
the fields of the A and S cards.
Required Cards
7START
?01
A Card
S Card
Fields Used - A Card
columns field
1-8 agency code
17-24 unlocking key
25-60 user's name
78-79 control code
80 card type code
Fields Used - S Card
columns
4-18
78-79
80
field
primary
station code
control code
card type code
remarks
required
required
optional, but desired
field
must be blank
must be an A
remarks
required
must be DD
must be an S
Users are cautioned that when storing replacement data
for deleted data in the same run, the station reference
number must be the same, i.e., a station's data may not
be deleted using the primary station code and re-stored
using a secondary station code.
APRIL 1981
WQ-DE
4-48
-------
4.4.2.1 EXAMPLE OF DELETING ALL PARAMETRIC DATA PREVIOUSLY
STORED WITH A STATION
01 2345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
? START
14AGNFS9 SECRET NAME OF USER A
070001 DOS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
4-49
-------
4.4.3 DELETING ENTIRE SAMPLES USING THE ?04 PROCEDURE
Entire samples can be deleted from a station using the
?04 procedure as described below. Refer to Subsection
4.2.3 for a description of the AC and SC cards.
Required Cards
?START
?04
AC or A Card
SC Card
Fields Used - A Card
columns
1-8
17-24
25-61
78-79
80
field
agency code
unlocking key
user's name
control code
card type code
Fields Used - AC Card
field I
1
2
3
4
5
field name
card type code
agency code
unlocking key
user's name
validity check
Fields Used - SC Card
field |
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
field name
card type code
station code
beginning date
ending date
depth
composite value type
space/time
sample type
delete code
remarks
required
required
optional, but desired field
must be blank
must be an A
remarks
AC followed by a comma
required
required
optional, but desired field
code NDC when the date fields
of the following SC storage
cards are not to be checked
for validity; otherwise
leave blank.
remarks
SC followed by a comma
required
required
required if originally
stored for composite data
required if originally stored
required if originally stored
for composite data
required only if originally
stored for composite data
required only if originally
stored for composite data
code DEL,
APRIL 1981
WQ-DE
4-50
-------
4.4.3.1 EXAMPLE OF DELETING ENTIRE SAMPLES USING THE
?04 PROCEDURE
01 2345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
?START
?04
AC,A=14AGNFS9,UK=SECRET,USER=NAME OF USER,
SC,070001,780715,DEL,
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
4-51
-------
4.4.4 DELETING ENTIRE SAMPLES USING THE ?01 PROCEDURE
Entire samples can be deleted from a station using the
?01 procedure as described below. Refer to Subsection
3.1 for a description of the A and S cards.
Required Cards
?START
?01
A Card
S Card
Parametric Data Card (6 card)
Fields Used - A Card
columns
1-8
17-24
25-60
78-79
80
field
agency code
unlocking key
user's name
control code
card type code
Fields Used - S Card
columns
4-18
80
field
station code
card type code
remarks
required
required
optional, but desired field
must be blank
must be an A
remarks
either a primary or
secondary station code
must be coded
must be an S
Fields Used - Parametric Data Card
columns
1-3
4-6
field
sort no.
sample depth
remarks
optiona
require
7-18
date-time
19-21
80
delete code
card type code
original sample
required, both beginning
and ending dates must be
coded if regular composite
samples are to be deleted.
If a sophisticated sample
is to be deleted, only the
ending date need be
specified.
code DEL
must be a 6
APRIL 1981
WQ-DE
4-52
-------
4.4.4.1 EXAMPLE OF DELETING ENTIRE SAMPLES USING THE
?01 PROCEDURE
01 2345678
1 2345678901 2345678901 2345678901 2345678901 2345678901 2345678901 2345678901 234567890
? START
14AGNFS9 SECRET NAME OF USER A
070001 S
800715 DEL 6
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
4-53
-------
4.4.5 DELETING SELECTED PARAMETER VALUES USING THE ?04
PROCEDURE
Parameter values can be deleted from a station on a
selected basis using the ?04 procedure. Refer to
Subsection 4.2.3 for a description of the AC and SC
cards.
Required Cards
7START
?04
A or AC Card
SC Card
Fields Used - A Card
columns
1-8
17-24
25-61
78-79
80
field
agency code
unlocking key
user's name
control code
card type code
remarks
required
required
optional, but
must be blank
must be an A
desired field
Fields Used - AC Card
field I
1
2
3
4
field name
card type code
agency code
unlocking key
user's name
remarks
AC followed by a comma
required
required
optional, but desired field
APRIL 1981
WQ-DE
4-54
-------
Fields Used - SC Card
field I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
field name
card type code
station code
beginning date
ending date
depth
composite value type
space/time
sample type
parameter code
remarks
SC followed by a comma
required
required
required only for
composite data
required if originally
stored
required only for
composite data
required only for
composite data
required only for
composite data
required: PDxxxxx format
deletes the parameter
value associated with
parameter xxxxx for the
specified station-time-
date-depth combination.
(Leading zeros need not
be specified.)
4.4.5.1 EXAMPLE OF DELETING SELECTED PARAMETER VALUES USING
THE ?04 PROCEDURE
01 2345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
?START
?04
AC,A=14AGNFS9,UK=SECRET,USER=NAME OF USER,
SC,070001,800715,PD310,PD400,
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
WQ-DE
4-55
APRIL 1981
-------
4.4.6 DELETING SELECTED PARAMETER VALUES USING THE ?01
PROCEDURE
Parameter values can be deleted from a station on a
selected basis also by using the ?01 procedure. Refer
to Subsections 3.1 and 4.2.4 for complete descriptions
of the A, S, and 6 cards.
To delete an individual parameter for a given sample,
the parametric data card is coded as if data were being
stored except that a D is coded in the left hand column
of the value field which corresponds to the parameter
to be deleted. Numerical values in other fields of the
same card are treated as valid data and stored.
Replacement values for the deleted parameter may be
coded on the same or subsequent 6 cards. The cards and
fields that are to be coded are described below.
Required Cards
7START
?01
A Card
S Card
Parametric Data Card (6 card)
Fields Used - A Card
columns
1-8
17-24
25-60
78-79
80
field
agency code
unlocking key
user's name
control code
card type code
Fields Used - S Card
columns field
4-18 station code
80 card type code
remarks
required
required
optional, but desired field
must be blank
must be an A
remarks
either a primary or
secondary station code
must be coded
must be an S
APRIL 1981
WQ-DE
4-56
-------
Fields Used - Parametric Data Card
columns
4-6
7-18
31-35,
43-47,
55-59,
and 67-71
36-39,
48-51,
60-63,
and 72-75
80
field
sample depth
date-time
19-23 parameter code
24-27 parameter value
parameter code
parameter value
card type code
remarks
required if stored with
original sample
required; both beginning
and ending dates must be
coded if composite samples
are to be deleted.
code the five-digit para-
meter whose value is to be
deleted.
code a D in the left-most
position of the field to
delete the preceding
parameter code
repeat, as required, as
described above for
columns 19-23
repeat, as required, as
described above for
columns 24-27
must be a 6
4.4.6.1 EXAMPLE OF DELETING SELECTED PARAMETER VALUES USING
THE ?01 PROCEDURE
01 2345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
?START
701
14AGNFS9
070001
SECRET NAME OF USER
00310D 00400D
A
S
6
01 2345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
WQ-DE
4-57
APRIL 1981
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
CHAPTER
WQ-DE
WATER QUALITY DATA ENTRY
APPENDIX g
1 O
INDEX OF AVAILABLE HELP FILES O
m
V)
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
-------
APPENDIX 1: INDEX OF AVAILABLE HELP FILES
A number of helpful data sets are maintained on the system by
STORET User Assistance. These data sets are available on-line
and can be listed at any time by simply entering the appropriate
commands from a low-speed keyboard type terminal. They also may
be printed at an RJE terminal.
The STORET help data set named STORET.HELP.INDEX provides a
listing of the names of all currently available help data sets.
This data set also gives the date each data set was added or last
changed. STORET users should occasionally list this data set,
and scan the date column for any help data sets added or changed
since they last reviewed the index. (A listing of the help data
set names can be obtained at a keyboard terminal by issuing the
TSO command LISTC LEVEL(STORET).)
The STORET help data set named STORET.HELP.PRNTHELP contains the
job control language necessary to produce a listing of the names
of STORET help data sets at a user's RJE terminal.
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
Al-1
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
CHAPTER
WQ-DE
WATER QUALITY DATA ENTRY
APPENDIX
2
RECORD LAYOUTS
STATION LOCATION DATA STORAGE CARDS
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
-------
STORET WATER QUAUTY FILE - STATION LOCATION STORAGE
1234567
80
AGENCY CARD (A CARD)
AGENCY CODE
ll.i-Jl Ju\lifyi
UNLOCK
AFTER
liluy\t
I] - li
UNLOCKING KEY
i Left Justify I
INDIVIDUAL STORING DATA: NAME, LOCATION. AGENCY, TELEPHONE
I Optional Comment* - will not he \t»rvd)
CON-
TROL
CODE
STATION TYPE CARD (T CARD)
A STRING OF VAUD COMBINATIONS OF STATION TYPE CODES SEPARATED BY SLASHES
', T
STATION CARD (S CARD)
SORT
NO.
PRIMARY STATION CODE
(Left Juttify)
STATION ALIASES
(H SECONDARY STATION CODE
iLtfi Justify)
<2) SECONDARY STATION CODE
I Left Justify t
13) SECONDARY STATION
CODE (Left Justify)
CON-
TROL
CODE
LATITUDE/LONGITUDE CARD (HEADER CARD 0)
LATITUDE
-------
123456789 10 II 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 53 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43144
58 59 6()61
DESCRIPTIVE PARAGRAPH CARDS (HEADER CARD 5)
DESCRIPTION (7-78)
Ill/unit
9 5
I 5
TT
35
55
II
7 5
85
SORT NO.
1 - 3
TIT
TTTTTTTTnT
H
mr
III Mill
EPA Form 7500-24 (6-77)
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
CHAPTER
WQ-DE
WATER QUALITY DATA ENTRY
APPENDIX
3
DATA ENTRY
ERROR MESSAGES
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
-------
APPENDIX 3: DATA ENTRY ERROR MESSAGES
This appendix describes the error messages that are generated as
a result of an inaccurate or improper attempt to store, change,
or delete station and/or parametric data within the WQF. The
descriptions are presented in error message number sequence, and
give the format of the message itself, followed by a brief
explanation of the error message, and where possible, a suggested
corrective action to be taken. (A few of these messages are
informational in content and do not depict an error condition.)
DATA ENTRY ERROR MESSAGES
01 INVALID TYPE OF STATION
A required station type (T) card is missing from the
deck being used to store a new station. Include this
card in your storage deck and resubmit. The STORET
help data set named STATION.TYPE provides a complete
listing of the acceptable station types and their
codes.
02 UNLOCKING CODE IS BLANK
The unlocking key field (columns 17-24) of the agency
(A) card was found to be blank. This code must be
provided for all storage operations. Enter the proper
unlocking key, left-justified, and resubmit the storage
cards.
03 AGENCY CODE IS BLANK
The agency code field (columns 1-8) of the agency (A)
card was found to be blank. This code must be provided
for all storage operations. Enter the proper agency
code, left-justified, and resubmit the storage cards.
04 DATE CODE INVALID
The lock-after field (columns 74-77) of the agency (A)
card was checked for a numeric value, and one or more
blanks and/or alphabetic characters were found. This
field must be completed on all new station storage
operations, even if a lock-after date is not desired.
Correct the improperly-completed field (keying 9999 if
no lock-after date is desired) and resubmit the storage
cards.
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
A3-1
-------
05
INVALID CONTROL CODE
06
07
08
A value other than CD, CT (A card) or NS, DD, DS, CX (S
card) or a blank value (either A or S card) was found
in the control code field (columns 78-79) of either the
Agency (A) or Station (S) card. One of the above
values must be specified. Correct the control code
field and resubmit the storage cards.
ILLEGAL CARD FOR CT OR CD AGENCY CARD
One or more invalid types of storage cards were
detected after the agency (A) card. Only a station
type (T) card and a station (S) card are valid after an
agency card having a CD or CT coded in the control code
field, columns 78-79. Check for proper deck set-up or
for mis-coded card type codes (in column 80), correct,
and resubmit the storage cards.
CARD TYPE ORDER OR INVALID CARD TYPE
One or more cards in the storage deck are out of order
and/or have improper codes in the card code field,
column 80. Check for proper deck set-up or for mis-
coded card type codes and resubmit the corrected
storage deck.
LAT/LONG ERROR
The latitude and longitude fields (columns 7-21) of the
latitude/longitude (0) card either contain one or more
embedded blanks and/or alphabetic characters, contain
values which fall outside an acceptable
latitude/longitude range, or contain both. All columns
must be completed with numeric values, including
leading zeros if required, and the values must fall
within the following ranges:
latitude
longitude
DEGREES
>0, <90
<180
MINUTES
<60
<60
SECONDS
<600
<600
Correct the improperly-specified latitude/longitude
values, and resubmit the storage deck.
APRIL 1981
WQ-DE
A3-2
-------
09 INVALID MILEAGE AND INDEX CODE
One or more of the level-miles fields (columns 14-76 of
the 1 card, or columns 14-53 of the 2 card) of the RMI
cards contain embedded blanks and/or alphabetic
characters. All completed fields must contain only
numeric values, including leading zeros if required.
(Unused level-index/level-mile field pairs are to be
left blank.) Correct the improperly-specified
mileage/index values, and resubmit the storage cards
for that station.
10 SUPERFLUOUS 2 CARD
At least one pair of level-index/level-mile fields in
the preceding RMI card (Header Card 1) was blank,
therefore the detected RMI card (Header Card 2) is
unnecessary. No action required.
11 MILEAGE BLANK
An RMI card (either Header Card 1 or Header Card 2) has
a level-index coded without a corresponding level-
mileage. Enter the required level-mile value,
including leading zeros if needed, and resubmit the
storage cards for that station.
12 NO PRIMARY STATION CODE
The primary station code field (columns 4-18) of a
station (S) card is blank. This field must be
completed with an alpha-numeric value, left-justified,
leaving unused columns blank. Enter the proper primary
station code and resubmit the storage cards for that
station.
13 CARD 4 MISSING
A Location Description Card (Header Card 4) was not
found after a Major/Minor Basin Card (Header Card 3).
Provide the appropriate 4 card, and resubmit the
storage cards for that station.
14 INVALID COL 79
The line position code field (column 79) of a
Descriptive Paragraph Card (Header Card 5) contains an
improper value, i.e., a value other than 0 through 9,
or J through N. Correct this improperly-specified code
and resubmit the storage cards for the station.
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
A3-3
-------
15 This error message is no longer in use;
16 DATE ERROR
An invalid date or time was detected in a parametric
data storage card. No information was stored for the
sample. The error could have resulted from a blank or
alphabetic character being entered in the date time
field (all entries must be numeric with leading zeros
specified, if required), or from the specification of
an invalid date such as a 14th month, or a date
sometime in the future (a sampling date must be either
the current or an earlier date). For a ?01 storage
procedure, correct columns 7-18 of the parametric data
card. For ?02 and ?03 storage procedures, correct
field number 4 of the appropriate data (D) card. For a
?04 storage procedure, correct field number 3 of the
appropriate SC storage card. Resubmit the sample.
17 DEPTH ERROR
An invalid value was specified for the depth of the
sample. No information was stored for the sample.
Sample depth values must be numeric, and must not
contain embedded blanks or alphabetic characters.
Check the depth field for a mispunch (columns 4-6 of
the parametric data card for a ?01 storage procedure,
field 5 of the data D card for ?02 and ?03 storage
procedures, and field 5 of the SC storage card for a
?04 storage procedure). Correct and resubmit.
18 DATA VALUE ERROR
An invalid entry was detected in a parameter code field
or an exponent field of a parametric data storage card.
Parameter codes must be numeric, with leading zeros
specified, if required. The two-digit exponent field
also must be numeric: the left digit must be either a
1 or a 2, the right digit may be any digit (0-9). For
a ?01 storage procedure, check the appropriate fields
of the parametric data card (columns 19-23, 31-35, 43-
47, 55-59, and 67-71 for parameter codes; columns 28-
29, 40-41, 52-53, 64-65, and 76-77 for exponents). For
a ?02 storage procedure, check the parameter codes in
columns 7-76 of the P card (and the codes entered in
any P continuation cards, if coded), and check the
exponent values in the parameter values field (field
six) of the data (D) card (and of the exponents entered
in any D continuation cards, if coded). For a ?03
storage procedure, check the parameter code field
(field 3) and the parameter value field (field 5) of
the data (D) card (and any D continuation cards, if
APRIL 1981 WQ-DE
A3-4
-------
coded). For a ?04 storage procedure, check the
parameter code field (field 10) and the parameter value
field (field 11) of the SC storage card (and any SC
continuation cards, if coded). Correct the improperly-
coded entry and resubmit the data storage cards.
19 VALID S CARD MISSING FOR REQUESTED CHANGE
The card shown was rejected due to an improperly-coded
or missing station (S) card. No information for the
station was stored or changed. The presence of a
latitude/longitude card (Header Card 0), a Major/Minor
Basin Card (Header Card 3), or a Location Description
Card (Header Card 4) indicates that station location
information is being stored or changed, but that either
the required S card was omitted or a required control
code was miscoded. Check for the S card and for an NS
or CX control code in columns 78-79. Correct and
resubmit.
20 This error message is no longer in use.
21 INVALID UNLOCKING KEY
An invalid unlocking key was detected in columns 17-24
of the agency (A) card. This value must match the
unlocking key established by the owner of the agency.
Correct the improperly-specified entry, and resubmit
the A card and all storage cards associated with the A
card.
22 DIFFERENT COMPOSITE DATES - OLD DATA
A discrepancy was detected between the beginning and
ending dates coded on the data cards being stored and
the corresponding dates already stored for the sample.
Check the appropriate date field for an improper entry.
(For a ?01 storage procedure, columns 7-18 of the
parametric data card; for ?02 and ?03 storage
procedures, the date-time field of the data (D) card;
and for a ?04 storage procedure, the beginning or
sampling date and time field of the storage (SC) card.)
23 DATA DELETED
A deletion was performed as requested. No action
required.
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
A3-5
-------
24 TOO MANY NEW PLUS OLD PARAMETERS
An attempt was made to store more than 250 parameters
for a single sample for a given date and time. The
number of parameters within the storage run, when added
to the number of parameters already stored for the
sample, exceeded the system limit of 250. None of the
parameters within this storage run were stored. Reduce
the total number of parameters to 250 or less and
resubmit.
25 NO VALUE TO BE DELETED
An attempt was made to delete parametric data that do
not exist as identified in the deletion request. No
action was taken. Check the appropriate identifying
information (station code, date, time, depth, parameter
code), correct, and resubmit if necessary.
26 DUPLICATE PAR
An attempt was made to store parametric data that
already exist in the system. ; Check date, time, depth,
station number, and parameter code for correctness and
resubmit if necessary.
27 This error message is no longer in use.
28 DUPLICATE DESCRIPTIVE HEADER INFORMATION
An attempt was made to store a line of descriptive
paragraph information (via a Descriptive Paragraph Card
- Header Card 5) that is already stored for the
specified station. The duplicate line was not stored.
Check the appropriate 5 cards, and correct and resubmit
if necessary.
29 STATION NOT IN SYSTEM
An attempt was made to delete all parametric data for a
station not yet stored in the system. No data were
deleted. Check columns 4-18 of the station (S) card
and columns 1-8 of the agency (A) card for the proper
codes. Correct and resubmit.
30 TOO MANY NEW PARAMETERS FOR DATE
An attempt has been made to store more than 250
parameters for a single sample for a given date and
time. The number of parameters specified within the
storage run may not exceed the system limit of 250.
None of the parameters within ,the storage run were
APRIL 1981 WQ-DE
A3-6
-------
stored. Reduce the number of parameters to 250 or less
and resubmit.
31 This error message is no longer in use.
32 DUPLICATE NEW PARAMETERS
Two or more data cards within the storage run were
detected that contain identical parametric information
for the same station, date, and time. Only one of any
such duplicated card was stored. No corrective action
is required unless the duplication was caused by a
coding error, rather than by an inadvertent repetition
of a data card.
33 This error message is no longer in use.
34 DUPLICATE NEW STATION
An attempt was made to store a station that is already
stored for the specified agency. (This is a secondary
error message generated by the UPDATE program.) Check
the S card for a mis-specified primary station code, or
the agency (A) card for a mis-specified agency code.
Correct and resubmit if necessary.
35 This error message is no longer in use.
36 DUPLICATE SECONDARY STATION CODE
An attempt was made to store a secondary station code
that is identical to a primary station code already
stored for the specified agency. All primary and
secondary station codes defined within an agency must
be unique. No information for the duplicate station
was stored. Check the S card for a mis-specified
secondary station code, or the A card for a mis-
specified agency code. Correct and resubmit if
necessary.
37 DUPLICATE PRIMARY STATION CODE
An attempt was made to store a primary station code
identical to a primary station code already stored for
the specified agency. (This is a primary error message
generated by one of the editing programs.) All primary
station codes associated with an agency code must be
unique. No information for the duplicate station was
stored. Check the S card for a mis-specified primary
station code, or the A card for a mis-specified agency
code. Correct and resubmit if necessary.
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
A3-7
-------
38 NO MATCHING STATION
An attempt was made to change station location
information for a station that had not been previously
stored for the specified agency. No information was
stored or changed. Check the S card for a mis-
specified station code, or the A card for a mis-
specified agency code. If the station and agency codes
are correct, resubmit the station card and store the
information as a new station (by specifying NS in
columns 78-79 of the S card).
39 MISALIGNMENT
An invalid field length was detected in the beginning
or sampling date and time field (field 3) or in the
ending date and time field (field 4) of a SC storage
card entered as part of a ?04 storage procedure. Valid
entries for these fields are either six or ten digits
in length, and must be all numeric, with leading zeros
specified if required. Data were not stored. Correct
the improperly-specified date/time value and resubmit.
40 NO DATA TO BE DELETED FOR DATE
An attempt was made to delete all existing parametric
data for a particular sample date that does not exist
in the system as identified in the deletion request.
No action was taken. Check the appropriate identifying
information (station code, agency code, date), correct,
and resubmit if necessary.
41 DELETED ALL DATA FOR STATION
A deletion of all parametric data stored for the
specified station was performed as requested. No
parametric data, for any date, remains for the station.
No action required.
42 ATTEMPT MADE TO DELETE STATION - STATION NOT FOUND
An attempt was made to delete a station that does not
exist in the system as identified in the deletion
request. No action was taken. Check the primary
station code field (columns 4-18) of the station (S)
card, and the agency code field (columns 1-8) of the
agency (A) card. Correct and resubmit if necessary.
APRIL 1981 WQ-DE
A3-8
-------
43 DUPLICATE SECONDARY STATION CODE
An attempt was made to store a secondary station code
that is identical to another secondary station code
already stored for the specified agency. All station
codes must be unique within an agency code. No
information for the duplicate station was stored.
Check the secondary station code fields (columns 34-45,
46-57, and 58-67) of the station (S) card, and the
agency code field (columns 1-8) of the agency (A) card
for the mis-specified code, correct, and resubmit if
necessary.
44 DUPLICATE NEW STATIONS - ONLY ONE STORED
An attempt was made to store two stations having
identical station codes. All station codes must be
unique within an agency code. The first station
encountered was stored during the final storage run.
Submit a station inventory retrieval to determine which
station was stored. Check the primary station code
field (columns 4-18) of the station (S) card for
miscoding, correct, and resubmit if necessary.
45 PARAMETER COUNTING ERROR
An unequal number of parameter codes and corresponding
parameter values were detected in a ?02 DIP storage
procedure, i.e., the number of parameter codes
specified in columns 7-76 of the P card (and in the P
continuation cards, if present) was either less than or
greater than the number of parameter values specified
in field 6 of the D card (and in the D continuation
cards, if present). No information was stored for the
sample. Check the appropriate cards for the
omitted/extraneous codes/values, correct, and resubmit.
46 This error message is no longer in use.
47 INVALID REMARK
An invalid remark code was specified in a data card.
No information (either remarks or values) was stored
for the sample. Check the following fields for the
mis-specified alphabetic code: for a ?01 storage
procedure, columns 30, 42, 54, 66, and 78 of the
parametric data card; for ?02 and ?03 storage
procedures, the last position of the parameter values
within field 6 of the data D card; and for a ?04
storage procedure, the last position within field 11 of
the SC storage card. Correct and resubmit.
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
A3-9
-------
48 ACTUAL AND BLANK DEPTH
A storage transaction was encountered that lacks a
sampling depth value, while all other samples being
stored do have sampling depth values. The sample
lacking a depth value was not stored; the samples
having depth values were stored. Check columns 4-6 of
the parametric data card (for a ?01 storage procedure),
column 6 of the P card and field 5 of the D card (for a
?02 storage procedure), column 80 of the last P card
and field 5 of the D card (for a ?03 storage
procedure), and field 5 of the SC card (for a ?04
storage procedure). Correct and resubmit.
49 TRANSACTIONS WITH DIFFERENT COMPOSITE DATE
A discrepancy was detected between the beginning and
ending dates of sophisticated composites coded on the
data cards being stored and the corresponding dates
already stored for the sample.
Check the appropriate date field for an improper entry.
(For a ?01 storage procedure, columns 7-18 of the
parametric data card; and for a ?04 storage procedure,
the beginning or sampling date and time field of the
storage (SC) card.) For a sophisticated composite, if
the ending dates are the same, the beginning dates must
also be the same.
The sample with the latest final date was rejected. No
further action is required unless the composite data
stored were incorrect.
50 YEAR LESS THAN 32
A date check of a data card detected a year earlier
than 1932 (or no year at all). Check the date-time
field (columns 7-8 or 13-14) of the parametric data
card (for a ?01 storage procedure); the date-time field
(field 4) of the data (D) card (for ?02 and ?03 storage
procedures); and the beginning or sampling date and
time field (field 3) of the SC card (for a ?04 storage
procedure). Correct the date and resubmit.
If the year specified was intentional, code a B in the
date check field (column 61) of the agency (A) card (or
NDC on the AC card for ?04) which specifies that no
date checking is to be performed by the system.
APRIL 1981 WQ-DE
A3-10
-------
51 DATE GREATER THAN DATE OF RUN
An attempt was made to store data having a sampling
date greater than (or after) the storage date. A
sampling date must be either the current or an earlier
date.
Check the date-time field (columns 7-8 or 13-14) of the
parametric data card (for a ?01 storage procedure); the
date-time field (field 4) of the data (D) card (for ?02
and ?03 storage procedures); and the beginning or
sampling date and time field (field 3) of the SC card
(for a ?04 storage procedure). Correct the date and
resubmit.
52 MONTH EITHER GREATER THAN 12 OR 0
An invalid value was detected in a month field of a
data storage card. Values must be numeric, from 01 to
12, with leading zeros specified, if required. Check
the date-time field (columns 9-10 or 15-16) of the
parametric data card (for a ?01 storage procedure); the
date-time field (field 4) of the data (D) card (for ?02
and ?03 storage procedures); and the beginning or
sampling date and time field (field 3) of the SC card
(for a ?04 storage procedure). Correct the date and
resubmit.
53 DAY EITHER GREATER THAN 31 OR 0
An invalid value was detected in a day field of a data
storage card. Values must be numeric, from 01 to 31,
with leading zeros specified if required. Check the
date-time field (columns 11-12 or 17-18) of the
parametric data card (for a ?01 storage procedure); the
date-time field (field 4) of the data (D) card (for ?02
and ?03 storage procedures); and the beginning or
sampling date and time field (field 3) of the SC card
(for a ?04 storage procedure). Correct the date and
resubmit.
54 FIRST CARD OF RUN NOT AN A CARD - NO CARDS STORED
The first card within the storage deck was not an
agency (A) card. No information was stored. Insert a
proper A card in front of the station and data cards to
be stored and resubmit the entire run.
55 This error message is no longer in use.
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
A3-1 1
-------
56 NEW USER CODE
This message is printed whenever a new agency code is
successfully stored in the system by a special run
performed by STORET User Assistance. No action is
required.
57 STATION NOT PRESENTLY IN SYSTEM/*DATA CARD*/
Parametric data was stored for a station not yet stored
within the system. If the station is not stored before
the weekend update, the parametric data will not be
stored.
58 STATION NOT IN SYSTEM
An attempt was made to change station location
information for a station not yet in the system. No
station information was changed. A station must be
stored in the system before it can be changed or
deleted. Check columns 4-18 of the station (S) card
and columns 1-8 of the agency (A) card for the proper
codes. Correct and resubmit. If the station is to be
stored over the coming weekend, the information may be
changed next week.
59 NO CARDS IN INPUT FILE
An attempt to store data was made but no data were
found in the input stream. The data could have been
placed incorrectly within the job stream, or an
incorrect or empty data set referenced. Examine the
input stream, correct, and resubmit.
60 CONTROL CODE NO LONGER VALID - CHANGED TO CX
In an attempt to change station header information, an
invalid control code was specified in columns 78 and 79
of the S card. The control code for this operation is
CX. Correct the S card and resubmit.
61 INSUFFICIENT INFORMATION ON DATA CARD
Insufficient information was provided on the SC card
for a ?04 storage procedure. Information required
includes station code, date and time, and appropriate
parameter data.
APRIL 1981 WQ-DE
A3-12
-------
62 CARD AFTER "A" CARD NOT DATA CARD - REST NOT STORED
An SC storage card was not found immediately after the
agency card (either the fixed format A card or the
variable format AC card), as required with a ?04
storage procedure. No information was stored. Check
the card following the agency card for a mispunch in
the card type code field, columns 1-2 (AC card) or 80
(A card), or provide the required SC cards. Resubmit
the run.
63 ERROR IN PARAMETER CODE
A parameter code field contains a blank or alphabetic
character. Parameter codes must be numeric, with
leading zeros specified, if required. The parameter
and its corresponding values were not stored. Check
the appropriate parameter code fields: columns 19-23,
31-35, 43-47, 55-59, and 67-71 of the parametric data
card (for a ?01 storage procedure); columns 7-76 of the
P control card (for a ?02 storage procedure); field 3
of the D data card (for a ?03 storage procedure); and
field 9 of the SC card (for a ?04 storage procedure).
Correct and resubmit.
64 NO PARAMETER FOR VALUE
A parameter code was not specified for a corresponding
parameter value that was coded on a parametric data
card. No information for the sample was stored. Check
the parameter code field (columns 19-23, 31-35, 43-47,
55-59, and 67-71) of the data card used in the ?01
storage procedure. Correct and resubmit.
65 TOO MANY FIELDS FOR DATA CARD SET - ALLOWED MAX=100
Up to 100 parameters and associated values can be
specified in one set of SC and SC continuation cards in
a ?04 storage procedure. No information was stored for
the sample. Ascertain the number of parameter
codes/values in excess of this limitation, divide the
data into sets of SC storage cards having less than 100
parameters, and resubmit the data as multiple runs.
66 This error message is no longer in use.
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
A3-13
-------
67 INSUFFICIENT OR INVALID COMPOSITE INFORMATION
Information required to store composite data was not
specified or was improperly specified. No information
was stored for the sample. Both field 6 (composite
value type), field 7 (space/time composite) and field 8
(sample type) of the SC card must be completed when
storing composite data via a ?04 storage procedure.
Also, only certain values are permitted for each of
these fields. Check these fields for an omission or an
improper value. Correct and resubmit.
68 STATION NOT STORED - LAT/LONG MISSING
The latitude and longitude coordinates of the station
being stored were not specified. This station location
information is required in order to store a new station
into the WQF. The station was not stored. Check for
the presence of the required latitude/longitude card
(Header Card 0), or for the completion of columns 7-21
of that card. Provide the required information, and
resubmit the station location deck.
69 EITHER LAT/LONG OR STATE/COUNTY CODE IS INCORRECT
Whenever latitude and longitude coordinates and/or
state and county codes are initially stored or changed,
a check is performed to verify that the location
defined by the coordinates does in fact lie within the
state/county boundaries specified. The station was not
stored, or no existing station location information was
changed. Check the validity of the coordinates
specified in columns 7-21 of the latitude/longitude
card (Header Card 0) with the state/county codes
specified in columns 68-72 of the station (S) card, or
already stored in the system. Correct and resubmit.
70 NEW AGENCY CODES MUST BE STORED BY HEADQUARTERS
An attempt was made to store a new agency code into the
WQF, a procedure which can be performed only by STORET
User Assistance personnel in EPA headquarters. Please
contact this staff for assistance.
APRIL 1981 WQ-DE
A3-14
-------
71 LAT/LONG NO LONGER STORED AS PRIMARY STATION
An attempt was made to store a station via a 0 card
using the station's latitude and longitude coordinates
as the station's primary station code, a practice which
is no longer allowed. The station was not stored.
Resubmit the station location information but include
an S card to provide the appropriate primary and
secondary station code information.
72 PRIMARY STATION NOT CODED - STATION NOT STORED
An attempt was made to store a station without
specifying the station's primary station code; either
the station (S) Card was not submitted, or the primary
station code field (columns 4-18) of the S card was
blank. The station was not stored. Check the station
location storage deck for the omission. Correct and
resubmit.
73 STATION HAS BEEN ARCHIVED - STORAGE NOT PERMITTED
Information cannot be stored for the referenced station
code, as the station has been archived and is no longer
accessible via normal storage procedures. Contact
STORET User Assistance personnel at EPA Headquarters
for assistance.
74 'R1 CARD MUST BE PRECEDED BY AN 'A1 OR 'R' CARD
In order to transfer a station stored in the WQF to an
archive class, a special Archive Card (or R card) must
be used. An R card can follow only a fixed format
agency (A) card or another R card. Examine the storage
deck for proper card sequence. Correct and resubmit.
75 This error message pertains only to the storage of
effluent data. Refer to the Effluent Data part of the
Handbook.
76 This error message pertains only to the storage of
effluent data. Refer to the Effluent Data part of the
Handbook. I
77 This error message pertains only to the storage of
effluent data. Refer to the Effluent Data part of the
Handbook.
78 This error message pertains only to the storage of
effluent data. Refer to the Effluent Data part of the
Handbook.
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
A3-15
-------
79 This error message pertains only to the storage of
effluent data. Refer to the Effluent Data part of the
Handbook.
80 LAT/LONG NOT WITHIN STATE/COUNTY BOUNDARY
Whenever latitude and longitude coordinates are
initially stored or are changed, a check is performed
to verify that the location defined by the coordinates
does in fact lie within the political boundary
specified. The coordinates specified in this run via
the latitude/longitude card (Header Card 0) do not lie
within the state/county specified in columns 68-72 of
the station (S) card, and consequently were not stored.
Correct the invalid coordinate value(s) and resubmit.
81 LAT/LONG NOT WITHIN GREAT LAKE BOUNDARY
Whenever latitude and longitude coordinates are
initially stored or are changed, a check is performed
to verify that the location defined by the coordinates
does in fact lie within the political boundary
specified. The coordinates specified in this run via
the latitude/longitude card (Header Card 0) do not lie
within the boundary of the Great Lakes as specified in
columns 68-72 of the station (S) card, and consequently
were not stored. Check the coordinate values
specified, correct, and resubmit. Call STORET User
Assistance at EPA Headquarters should further
assistance be necessary.
82 LAT/LONG NOT WITHIN ATLANTIC OCEAN BOUNDARY
Whenever latitude and longitude coordinates are
initially stored or are changed, a check is performed
to verify that the location defined by the coordinates
does in fact lie within the political boundary
specified. The coordinates specified in this run via
the latitude/longitude card (Header Card 0) do not lie
within the boundary of the Atlantic Ocean as specified
in columns 68-72 of the station (S) card, and
consequently were not stored. Check the coordinate
values specified, correct, and resubmit. Call STORET
User Assistance at EPA Headquarters should further
assistance be necessary.
APRIL 1981 WQ-DE
A3-16
-------
83 LAT/LONG NOT WITHIN PACIFIC OCEAN BOUNDARY
Whenever latitude and longitude coordinates are
initially stored or are changed, a check is performed
to verify that the location defined by the coordinates
does in fact lie within the political boundary
specified. The coordinates specified in this run via
the latitude/longitude card (Header Card 0) do not lie
within the boundary of the Pacific Ocean as specified
in columns 68-72 of the station (S) card, and
consequently were not stored. Check the coordinate
values specified, correct, and resubmit. Call STORET
User Assistance at EPA Headquarters should further
assistance be necessary.
84 LAT/LONG NOT WITHIN GULF OF MEXICO BOUNDARY
Whenever latitude and longitude coordinates are
initially stored or are changed, a check is performed
to verify that the location defined by the coordinates
does in fact lie within the political boundary
specified. The coordinates specified in this run via
the latitude/ longitude card (Header Card 0) do not lie
within the boundary of the Gulf of Mexico as specified
in columns 68-72 of the station (S) card, and
consequently were not stored. Check the coordinate
values specified, correct, and resubmit. Call STORET
User Assistance at EPA Headquarters should further
assistance be necessary.
85 This error message pertains only to the storage of
effluent data. Refer to the Effluent Data part of the
Handbook.
86 This error message pertains only to the storage of
effluent data. Refer to the Effluent Data part of the
Handbook.
87 ALPHANUMERIC VALUES MUST BE 5 CHARACTERS OR LESS
The values for certain 84000-series parameter codes
used in the storage of data may contain alpha-numeric
data, but they must be five characters or less in
length. No information was stored or changed. Check
the appropriate parameters and parameter values
(columns 31-41, 43-53, 55-65, and 67-77 of the
parametric data card for a ?01 storage procedure, or
field-9 of the SC card for a ?04 storage procedure),
correct, and resubmit.
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
A3-17
-------
88 INVALID FARM BYPASS FIELD
An invalid bypass-code was specified for the FARM
subparameter on the EXEC statement. The job was not
run. Users may request a bypass code from STORET User
Assistance to store values for parameters or
latitude/longitude coordinates which are legitimate but
which do not meet STORET range check criteria.
89 This error message pertains only to the storage of
effluent data. Refer to the Effluent Data part of the
Handbook.
90 This error message pertains only to the storage of
effluent data. Refer to the Effluent Data part of the
Handbook.
91 TIME>2400 NOT ALLOWED
An invalid time value was specified in a date-time
field. No information was stored for the sample. Time
values are based upon the military 24-hour time system;
acceptable hour values range from 1 to 24, minute
values from 0 to 60. Check the appropriate date-time
fields: columns 7-28 of a parametric data card for a
?01 storage procedure; field 4 of data card for a ?02
or ?03 storage procedure; and fields 3 and 4 of an SC
card for a ?04 storage procedure. Correct and
resubmit.
92 PREVIOUS ERROR - LOOKING FOR AGENCY OR 'SC' CARD
The ?04 type storage procedure allows the entry of an
SC,$ as a coding shortcut and assumes the station code,
dates, times, and depths from the preceding SC card.
This message indicates that an error was detected in
the previous SC card which contained the station code,
date, and time references. The SC,$ card (and
subsequent SC,$ cards) will be ignored. Error checking
will resume with the next agency card (either a fixed
format A card or a variable format AC card) or SC card,
whichever occurs first within the deck.
APRIL 1981 WQ-DE
A3-18
-------
93 BASIN CODE ERROR
A syntactically-incorrect basin code was detected in
the basin code fields of the major/minor basin card
(Header Card 3). No information was stored for the
station. Check columns 68-73 of the 3 card which must
consist of a string of six digits. Alphabetic
characters and blanks are invalid, and leading zeros
must be coded if required. If a subbasin code is not
appropriate, the last two positions of this field may
be blank.
94 This error message pertains only to the storage of
effluent data. Refer to the Effluent Data part of the
Handbook.
95 NO ERRORS
This message prints whenever no syntax-related errors
were detected within a request to initially store,
change, or delete station location information. No
action is required. The requested transactions will be
processed with the weekly update, and if no logical
errors are detected, will be permanently stored in the
WQF as requested.
96 END OF RUN
The printing of this message indicates that the storage
run did in fact process successfully to completion.
This message appears immediately after any and all
error messages, or if none are found, appears at the
end of the run's printout. No action is required.
97 STATION DELETED
Both station location and parametric data for the
specified station were deleted as requested via the DS
value in the control code field of the station card.
No information pertaining to the station remains in the
system. No action required.
98 STATION CANNOT BE DELETED AND ADDED IN SAME RUN
An attempt was made to both delete and add station
location information to a station in the same run,
which is invalid. No information was stored or deleted
for the station. Station location information can be
changed or deleted only after the station has been
successfully stored into the WQF over a weekend by EPA
Headquarters personnel. Delete and then re-store the
station in subsequent weeks via separate runs.
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
A3-19
-------
99 T CARD INFORMATION
This is an information-only message, which indicates
that the T card as printed was processed. No action is
required.
100 NO LEVEL 1 CODE
An inconsistent or insufficient combination of station
type codes was specified on the station type (T) card.
One, and only one, level 1 code is required. No
information was stored for the station. Check the
string of alpha-numeric station type codes specified in
columns 1-78 of the T card. The STORET help data set
named STATION.TYPE contains a list of all station type
codes defined within STORET, as does Appendix F to the
WQ part of this Handbook. Correct and resubmit.
101 NO LEVEL 2 CODE
An inconsistent or insufficient combination of station
type codes was specified on the station type (T) card.
One, and only one, level 2 code is required. No
information was stored for the station. Check the
string of alpha-numeric station type codes specified in
columns 1-78 of the T card. The STORET help data set
named STATION.TYPE contains a list of all station type
codes defined within STORET, as does Appendix F to the
WQ part of this Handbook. Correct and resubmit.
102 NO LEVEL 3 CODE FOR PIPE
An inconsistent or insufficient combination of station
type codes was specified on the station type (T) card.
If PIPE was specified as a level 1 code, then one, and
only one, level 3 code must be specified. No
information was stored for the station. Check the
string of alpha-numeric station type codes specified in
columns 1-78 of the T card. The STORET help data set
named STATION.TYPE contains a list of all station type
codes defined within STORET, as does Appendix F to the
WQ part of this Handbook. Correct and resubmit.
103 NO LEVEL 4 CODE FOR PIPE
An inconsistent or insufficient combination of station
type codes was specified on the station type (T) card.
If PIPE was specified as a level 1 code, and if a level
3 code was specified, then one, and only one, level 4
code must be specified. No information was stored for
the station. Check the string of alpha-numeric station
type codes specified in columns 1-78 of the T card.
APRIL 1981 WQ-DE
A3-20
-------
The STORET help data set named STATION.TYPE contains a
list of all station type codes defined within STORET,
as does Appendix F to the WQ part of this Handbook.
Correct and resubmit.
104 MORE THAN ONE LEVEL 1 CODE
More than one level 1 station type code was specified
in the station type (T) card. One, and only one, level
1 code must be specified when storing a station in
STORET. The station was not stored. The STORET help
data set named STATION.TYPE contains a list of all
station type codes defined within STORET, as does
Appendix F to the WQ part of this Handbook. Correct
the codes specified on the T card and resubmit.
105 MORE THAN ONE LEVEL 2 CODE
More than one level 2 station type code was specified
in the station type (T) card. One, and only one, level
2 code must be specified when storing a station in
STORET. The station was not stored. The STORET help
data set named STATION.TYPE contains a list of all
station type codes defined within STORET, as does
Appendix F to the WQ part of this Handbook. Correct
the codes specified on the T card and resubmit.
106 PIPE AND AMBNT
The station type codes PIPE and AMBNT cannot both be
specified on a station type (T) card. If the level 1
code is PIPE, then the level 2 code must be other than
AMBNT; or if the level 2 code should be AMBNT, then the
level 1 code must be other than PIPE. The STORET help
data set named STATION.TYPE contains a list of all
station type codes defined within STORET, as does
APPENDIX F to the WQ part of this Handbook. Correct
the codes specified on the T card and resubmit.
107 NOT PIPE AND NOT AMBNT
The level 1 station type code specified in the station
type (T) card was not PIPE and the level 2 code was not
AMBNT. If the level 1 code is not PIPE, then the only
valid level 2 code is AMBNT; if the level 2 code is not
AMBNT, then the level 1 code must be PIPE. The STORET
help data set named STATION.TYPE contains a list of all
station type codes defined within STORET, as does
APPENDIX F to the WQ part of this Handbook. Correct
the codes specified on the T card and resubmit.
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
A3-21
-------
108 INVALID TYPE CODE IN T CARD
One or more invalid station type codes were detected in
the station type (T) card. No information was stored
for the station. Check the string of station type
codes specified in columns 1-78 of the T card for a
typographical error or other invalid entry. The STORET
help data set named STATION.TYPE contains a list of all
station type codes defined within STORET, as does
Appendix F to the WQ part of this Handbook. Correct
and resubmit.
109 MORE THAN ONE LEVEL 3 CODE
More than one level 3 station type code was specified
in the station type (T) card. A level 3 code is
required only if the level 1 code is PIPE; its use is
optional otherwise. If used, however, a maximum of one
level 3 code is permitted. The STORET help data set
named STATION.TYPE contains a list of all station type
codes defined within STORET, as does APPENDIX F to the
WQ part of this Handbook. Correct the codes specified
on the T card and resubmit.
110 CARD IGNORED - SEARCHING FOR NEXT A OR T CARD
An error had been discovered in a preceding card within
the storage deck that caused this, and perhaps
subsequent, cards to be purposely ignored and bypassed
without editing. Error checking will resume with the
next agency card, either a fixed format A card or a
variable format AC card.
111 INVALID Q CARD - JOB TERMINATED
An improper entry was detected in one or more fields of
the Quality Assurance (Q) card. No information was
stored for the station from this point on. Check
column 2 for a proper quality assurance code, or
columns 3-7 for a properly structured 5-digit parameter
code. All other columns, including column 80, are to
be blank. Correct and resubmit.
112 TOO MANY Q CARDS - MAXIMUM=200
The number of Quality Assurance (Q) cards submitted in
the run exceeded the maximum allowable number of 200
cards. None of the Q cards were stored, nor were any
of the other cards within the deck processed.
Ascertain the number of Q cards within the run, divide
them (and their associated data cards) into sets having
APRIL 1981 WQ-DE
A3-22
-------
less than 200 Q cards, and resubmit the data as
multiple runs.
113 INVALID AQC CARD
An invlaid code was detected in one or more columns of
the AQC card. The data referenced by the card was not
changed. Check the entries for valid AQC codes in all
positions. Correct and resubmit.
114 This error message is no longer in use.
115 This error message is no longer in use.
116 DATA NOT CHECKED, NO MATCHING X-REF STATION OR LIMITS
Although user-supplied data edit checks were invoked,
the referenced cross-reference station or pre-edit
limits were not found. Store the appropriate cross
references, and resubmit.
117 This error message is no longer in use.
118 REQUIRED FIELD LEFT BLANK FOR CX OR NS TRANSACTION
An attempt was made either to blank out a previously
stored and required station location information field
(via a CX transaction) or to store a new station
without providing all required station location
information (via an NS transaction). Check the station
location storage cards for missing required fields.
Correct and resubmit.
119 PARAMETER CODE IS IN INVALID RANGE
An attempt was made to store data behind an invalid
parameter code. All data following the invalid
parameter, within the concerned storage data set, was
not stored. Check the appropriate parameter code
fields: columns 19-23, 31-35, 43-47, 55-59, and 67-71
of the parametric data card (for a ?01 storage
procedure); columns 7-76 of the P card (for a ?02
storage procedure); field 3 of the D card (for a ?03
storage procedure); and field 9 of the SC card (for a
?04 storage procedure). Correct and resubmit.
120 TOO MANY CHARACTERS FOR STATION NUMBER
An attempt was made to store data, in which a station
code exceeding the allowed maximum of 15 characters was
specified. Check the appropriate station code fields:
field 3 of the D card (for a ?02 storage procedure),
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
A3-23
-------
and field 2 of the SC card (for a ?04 storage
procedure). Correct and resubmit.
121 MORE THAN ONE LEVEL 4 CODE
An attempt was made to store a station having more than
one level 4 code on the station type (T) card. Delete
the extra level 4 code(s) and resubmit.
122 INVALID COMBINATION LEVEL 5 SEWERS
An attempt was made to store a station having an
invalid combination of level 5 sewer identifiers on the
station type (T) card. Only one of the three accepted
level 5 sewer type codes (CMBSWR, SANSWR, or STMSWR)
may be specified for each station being stored.
Correct and resubmit.
123 SEWER IN LEVEL 5 BUT NOT OUTFALL IN LEVEL 4
An attempt was made to store a station having CMBSWR,
SANSWR, or STMSWR as a level 5 code, but having other
than OUTFL or CMBSRC as a level 4 identifier. When
using one of the three accepted level 5 sewer codes, a
level 4 type identifier must be specified, indicating
OUTFL or CMBSRC only. Correct the improperly-specified
entry on the station type (T) card and resubmit.
124 TOO MANY STATIONS ON "P" CARD - MAX=20
An attempt was made to store data, using the ?03
storage procedure, in which more than 20 stations were
coded on a single P card. Code the additional stations
on a separate P card, repeat the D cards associated
with those stations, and resubmit.
125 NO VALUE FOR REMARK CODE
A remark code was specified in a data (D) card, but no
value was associated with the remark code. For ?02 and
?03 storage procedures, parameter values are to
immediately follow remark codes in field 6 of the data
card; for ?04 storage procedures, parameter values
precede remark codes in field 10 of the SC card; and
for ?01 storage procedures, parameter values precede
remark codes in specific columns. Examine coding in
data cards, correct, and resubmit.
APRIL 1981 WQ-DE
A3-24
-------
126 DATA CANNOT BE STORED UNDER SEC I SAME WEEK AS STATION
STORAGE
An attempt was made to store parameter data behind a
secondary station code of a station initially stored
during the week. (Parametric data can be stored for a
station the same week it was stored only if the
station's primary station code is used.) No data were
stored. Resubmit storage run the next week.
127 This error message is not in use.
128 This error message is not in use.
129 This error message is not in use.
130 This error message is not in use.
131 NO VALUE FOR PARAMETER
In a ?04 storage run, a parameter code was specified in
field 9 of an SC card, but no parameter value for that
code was found in field 10. Examine the data coded in
the SC card, correct, and resubmit.
132 DUPLICATE COMMA
In a ?04 storage run, a comma was coded immediately
after another comma with no intervening data. In
coding AC and SC cards, a comma is coded to conclude a
data field only if data were coded for that field.
Correct and resubmit the run.
WQ-DE APRIL 1981
A3-25
-------
TABLE 0? CONTENTS
Suciect
1 Syntax Considerations 1-1
2 Building a Retrieval 2-1
3 General Descriptions of WQF Programs 3-1
4 General Retrieval Keywords 4-1
5 Advanced General Retrieval Keywords 5-1
6 Basic Retrieval Programs and Their Special 6-1
Keywords
Advanced Retrieval Program- and Their Special ~-i
Keywords
Aooendices Suciect ?aae
1 Index of Available HELP Files
2 Tables of WQF Keywords by Retrieval Program
3 Summary of Retrieval Keyword Descriptions A3'
4 Summary of Most Frequently Used Purpose Cedes
5 Terminal Procedures
6 U.S. Geological Survey Remark Codes
7 Retrieval Error Messaaes A"-l
WQ-RET
-------
The purpose of this WQ-RET chapter is to describe, both in
general terms and in detail, the retrieval capabilities of
STORE!'s WQF.
This chapter is divided into sections and supporting appendices,
as outlined in the Table of Contents. Section one describes the
syntax rules that generally apply to the use of the STORET
retrieval language and the Handbook. Sections two and three are
somewhat general in content, and present, respectively, a
discussion.cn structuring a retrieval request, and a general
description of each retrieval program. Sections four through
seven are detailed in content, and present complete descriptions
of the many keywords and programs which make up the WQF retrieval
capability. The appendices provide a number of indices,
summaries, and cross references to assist the STORET user.
In order to present the keywords and programs in an orderly
manner, they have been grouped into four logically-distinct
modules as follows:
Section - Contents of Section
4 General Retrieval Keywords
5 Advanced General Retrieval Keywords
6 Basic Retrieval Programs and Their Special Keywords
7 Advanced Retrieval Programs and Their Special Keywords
General retrieval keywords are those keywords which are not
program dependent, and are generally applicable to any WQF
retrieval. Section five describes advanced keyword capabilities
whose most effective use usually requires several months of
experience as an active STORET user. Sections six and seven
describe in detail the individual programs and those keywords
which are associated only with one or several specific programs.
Effective use of the programs described in Section seven requires
users to have several months of experience with the basic
retrieval programs.
Each keyword and program description includes all information
that pertains to the keyword or program being described,
including illustrative computer printouts. To facilitate the
location of a particular keyword and/or program description, al"
pages of the detailed descriptions have the name of the
keyword/program printed in the upper right corner for quick
visual reference.
ail
WQ-RET
-------
as illustrated in the steps described in Section 2,
Building A Retrieval.
The first instruction on a line normally begins in
column one, though it may begin in any column.
Subsequent instructions on a line normally begin
immediately after the preceding comma, though, one o:
more blanks may be left between instructions. The
following retrievals are equivalent.
PGM=RET, PGM RET,PUR? 305/STA,
PURP=305B/STA, or A 14AGNFS9, S G700C9,
A=14AGNFS9, P 11, P 30C,
5=070009,
P=11,P=300,
1.2 ORDER OF INSTRUCTIONS WITHIiN A RETRIEVAL REQUEST
The first instruction within any retrieval request must
be the ' PGM = program-name, ' instruction which -denotes
the beginning of a retrieval request, and which
specifies the WQF retrieval program to be executed.
There are a number of other instructions which must be
specified in a certain order when used in conjunction
with certain other instructions. For example, when
selecting stations, the agency keyword (A) must precede
its associated station keywords (S); and the county
keyword (CO) must follow the state keyword '.STC; to
which it applies. Positional requirements are noted in
the keyword detailed descriptions in Sections 4 through
7 .
1.3 SPECIAL NOTATION USED IN THIS DOCUMENT
Where the user must code a blank character or blank
space (a column in which nothing is coded), it will be
indicated in this document by a lower case letter b
with a slash through its stem (-6> .
When coding retrieval requests to be processed by a
computer, care must be exercised to ensure that the
letter oh (0^ is not mistakenly coded in place of the
digit zero (0), or vice versa. Readers should note
that the capital letter oh of the type face used in
this Handbook is noticeably rounder than its slimmer
zero. Similarly, the letter eye (I) must not be
' confused with the digit one (1).
WQ-RET
1-3
-------
1.4 UPPERCASE AND LOWERCASE
Within each keyword description is a discussion of the
various values that can be associated with the
respective keyword. These values are expressed either
as lowercase letters or words, or as numbers or
uppercase letters or words.
If the value is lowercase, then that value can be
assigned a variable quantity or expression, as defined
in the keyword description. For example, '?GM=program-
name,' means that the value for the PGM keyword, i.e.
program-name, can be -specified as RET, INVENT, PLOT, or
any other acceptable WQF retrieval program name.
If the value is either a number or in uppercase, then
that value cannot be a variable and must be entered as
(Bl.
shown. For example, BOT= (Wj, means that the only
acceptable instruction formats are 'BOT=3,' or
'BOT=W,'.
All keywords are given in uppercase letters which
indicates that they must be specified as indicated.
Abbreviations are not acceptable.
1.5 NOTATION CONVENTIONS
The presence of braces | } enclosing a column of two or
more values indicates that an optional choice exists
among the enclosed values, but that one of the enclosed
values must be specified if the associated keyword is
specified within the retrieval request. For example,
the format of the beginning date keyword is shown as:
Iyymmdd^ where yy=year
yymm I, mm=month
yy j dd=day
which indicates that if BD is specified, then it must
be assigned one of the kinds of values shown within the
braces.
1.6 DEFAULT VALUES
The system assumes a default, value for any optional
keyword not supplied by the user. These default values
are described in the section relating to the specific
keyword. Whenever a default value is overridden, the
entire default is replaced.
WQ-RET
1-4
-------
STEP
APPLICABLE KEYWORDS
SELECT
APPROPRIATE
RETRIEVAL PROGRAM
STATE
PURPOSE
OF RETRIEVAL
IDENTIFY
STATION (S)
OF INTEREST
IDENTIFY
PARAMETRIC DATA
OF INTEREST
SELECT
PROGRAM-SPECIFIC
KEYWORDS
SELECT
PRINT CONTROL
DESIRED
X^SUEMITX
( FOR )
\PROCESSINGX
PGM
PUF.P
A,B,S,RMI,LT,
P,3D,UD,ANC,
SCRT,SCALE,DR,.
PRT,SHIFT,HEAD,
WQ-RET
2-3
-------
STEP 1: SELECT APPROPRIATE RETRIEVAL PROGRAM
The keyword PGM is used to select the appropriate WQF
retrieval program. Some programs are appropriate to
those whose interests are geographically oriented,
while others are suited to those who are more
interested in one or more water quality parameters,
regardless of their specific geographical location.
The following list
these programs and
provide:
summarizes the primary functions oi
the type of information they
Inventory of Parameters Sampled
INVENT list summary information on parameters sampled
(132 character line)
INV120 list summary information on parameters sampled
(120 character line)
Listings of Actual Sample Values
RET tabular listings of selected parameters
ALLPARM list sample values for all parameters
PUNCH • punch selected parametric data onto 80-column
cards
Statistical Analysis of Parameter Data
STAND compare actual data values against standards
MEAN perform statistics on selected parameters
REG perform linear regression analyses on
parametric data
MSP plot selected statistics of parameter
values as functions of stations
PLOT plot data values as a function of time
Station Information Only
STA . list station codes for selected agencies
INDEX list station header information
NOPAR select stations meeting specified sampling criteria
LOC plot a map showing station locations
The first instruction in a retrieval request must be
the PGM keyword, whose value is one of the program
names listed above, such as:
STEP 1
PGM=RET,
Request tabular listings
of selected parameters.
Sections 6 and 7 of this chapter present detailed
descriptions of these retrieval programs.
WQ-RET
2-4'
-------
STEP 2: STATE PURPOSE OF RETRIEVAL
The PURP keyword, which identifies both the purpose and
the ultimate recipient of the output of a retrieval,
must be specified in each retrieval request and falls
logically as the second step in building a retrieval.
In most instances the purpose will be to satisfy some
reporting requirement of Public Law 92-500 and the
ultimate recipient will be a Federal agency, a state
agency, an EPA regional office, or other user. The
information provided by this keyword is used in various
analyses of the uses made of the data stored in the
WQF.
STEP 2
PGM=RET,
PURP=305B/STA,
Request will satisfy
requirements of
Section 305B of
PL 92-500.
Appendix 4 to this chapter contains a summary of
frequently used PURP values.
WQ-RET
2-5
-------
STEP 3: IDENTIFY STATION(s) OF INTEREST
The WQF provides several station identification
keywords used to define which of the approximately
500,000 sites available within the WQF are of interest
for a particular retrieval. The several basic ways
that stations can be selected are listed below, along
with the station identification keywords that are used
to achieve the resoective station selections.
Station Retrieval Alternatives
Station Identification
Keywords
1 all stations whose latitude/longitude
coordinates are within a user-defined
geographical area.
LT, L
2 stations by agency code and/or station codes A,S,B
3 stations along a length of a waterway RMI
STC,CO
4 stations within one or more states and/or
counties
5 stations by major/minor/sub basin
6 stations within any designated state
areawide waste treatment management area
as defined by Section 208 of PL 92-500
7 further screening of stations found within
one of the above categories
3S
AREA
U,ST,
EXTRACT
Section four describes each of these station selection
methods in detail along with the logic that must be
applied in the use of these keywords.
STEP 3
PGM=RET,
PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNF59,
5=070009,
Request will select
station 070009 owned
and maintained by
agency 14AGNFS9.
WQ-RET
2-6
-------
STEP 4: IDENTIFY PARAMETRIC DATA OF INTEREST
Data selection keywords enable a user to restrict the
parametric data retrieved to those specific parameters,
specific sampling dates, sampling depths, and sampling
conditions of interest. There are approximately 5000
unique parameters defined within STORET.
STEP 4
PGM=RET,
PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,
S=070009,
BD«730101,
P=11,P=300,
Request will select
all values for
temperature in degrees
Fahrenheit (? = !!'• and
dissolved oxygen (?=3G.
sampled since Januarv
1, 1973 (BD«7301C1).*
STEP 5: SELECT PROGRAM-SPECIFIC KEYWORDS
Most of the WQF retrieval programs have one or more
'special1 keywords. For example, the PLOT program has
a keyword which allows the user to choose symbols to
identify plotted data values. This keyword would
obviously not be applicable to programs whose function
is to print station descriptions.
STEP 5
PGM=RET,
PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,
S=070009,
BD-730101,
P«11,P»300,
DR=1,
Request will print
values for parameter
300 as whole numbers
WQ-RET
2-7
-------
STEP 6: SELECT PRINT CONTROL DESIRED
The final step in building a retrieval is to determine
whether the standard print format for the chosen
program is satisfactory, and if not, what changes
should be made. The PRT, HEAD, SHIFT, and PRMI
keywords allow the user some control over the content
and format of the printed output.
STEP 6
PGM=RET,
PURP*305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,
5=070009,
BD-730101,
P=11.P=300,
DR=1,
SHIFT,
SHIFT causes the
station header
information to be
shifted from the
upper right hand
corner to the upper
left hand corner of
each page of the
printed output.
SUBMITTING THE RETRIEVAL FOR PROCESSING
Once the retrieval has been set up and visually checked
for omissions and coding errors, it is ready for
submission to the STORET system for processing by the
computer. The retrieval instructions chosen in the six
basic steps can be keypunched onto cards and submitted
via a card-reading terminal, or they can be keyed via a
keyboard terminal. Computer output generated by the
above retrieval is shown on the next page.
WQ-RET
2-8
-------
i 3
•^-X-^;^ 070009 LOS<
' 5 ~ \"-- 46 14 31.2 039 i 1 43
jw
0 1
4
^^ • y
6
•-— ' ,-^iONG L.AKE 10 MI E WATERSMEET - ^--^. ._
7 , 26053 MICHIGAN -
/ — N •. ,-LAKE SUPERIOR
3 .M3 DNTONAGOS RIVER
070793-
,—±~-S 14AGNFS9 -• - ' --'—
11 0000 ?EET DEPTH CI-AS3 00
14 ' . '15 ' 16
• , ' ^ — <• •- — '
DATE TIME DEPTH
FROM OF
TO DAY FEET
73/01/03 09 25
73/05/15 03 30
73/06/04 09 00
73/07/05 09 10
73/03/03 08 30
73/09/11 09 15
73/12/20 10 50
74/05/16
74/06/13 09 30
74/06/26 09 25 0007
74/07/19 03 10 0007
74/08/27 10 30 0007
75/05/16 10 50
75/05/29 10 15
75/06/11 10 00 0010
75/06/24 09 00
75/07/02 11 00 0009
75/07/10 10 00
75/07/15 10 40
75/07/22 10 35
75/03/27 03 30 0009
75/09/24 09 30
75/10/02 10 00
75/10/07 11 00 0005
75/10/16 10 30
75/10/21 11 00 0005
75/11/04 10 00
76/04/23 10 30
76/05/28 10 15
10 30 0022
76/06/30 03 10
76/07/13 11 00
00011
WATER
TEMP
FA.HN
33.0
49.0
63.0
69.5
69.0
66.0
33.0
50.0
60.5
63.0
73.0
57.0
55.0
60.0
51.0
72.0
73.0
78.0
71.0
76.0
66.0
53.0
50.0
51 .0
47.0
43.0
43.0
44.0
63.0
57.0
69.0
73.0
6 - — ~
, .- — . i i
'10 " il.
^^' ^— AM3NT/LAKE
' 12
00300
DO
MG/L
14
11
9
3
3
3
14
10
9
9
j
10
9
3
3
10
11
11
10
10
3
3
1) .Primary Station Code 14)
2) Secondary Station Code
3) Latitude and Longitude
4) Station Location
5) State and County Codes
6) State
7) Major 3asin 15)
8) Basin Codes
9) Minor Basin
10) Agency Code 16)
11) Depth Units
12) Archive Class (00=online)
13) Station Type
Date sampled-required
information stored for
each sample. If no date
appears on the printout,
the date listed in the
preceding line applies.
Time Sampied-optionai
information which may be
stored for each sample.
Depth of Sample-optional
information which may be
stored for each samcle.
WQ-RET
2-9
-------
PGM=INVENT,
PGM=INV120,
The primary function of these two programs is to retrieve summary
information on all of the parameters that have been sampled at
the stations specified in the retrieval request. Information
listed for each parameter includes the number of observations,
the mean value, variance, standard deviation, coefficient of
variance, standard error of the values, the maximum and minimum
values, and the beginning and ending sampling dates for the data
stored. INVENT utilizes a 132-character print line; INV120
excludes the printing of the coefficient of variance and the
standard error so the listing can print on a 120-character line.
LJN
;*o
-A'
"9
A»e"*r '_A«E ; 4A
>•'
M^er^ ,,,e£a «A
j i ' *A""-' 3 -"<*0 J'AH'J
lv^;t *ia TEJI* FAHN
'""••"• - ; A -K ?
. ; 3 1 - ? . - L ) ?
. , « : '-2 ; 7 ."•'
,.!;•, JO
.- : 4 -; ; i rt
J"!*!: ^!l;j
'?>!* ,«;'ON 3
d'.V.T? -AC
•JOH: ;s
:-;:• I-N
7 , • j •* i ;
i
;•»- :
:?OT j
, . . 5 5 "VS'JNt .it J.:i
i o •* ; i : sc : .1 , TOT •;
•iv,' ::T ML: -rr.-ENDc /i
* L # 4 1> J .''0 ? LA S 4 y~ H £ 9 L
f 7 '-'
:s
U."*rtO
^
-'
^L
r_
j
0.1L
7E 8
13. . 'J
4 • •> . J 2
4 Ql. 12
S 4.3-00
i '".2
j ,';';
3 ^ i . "
3 * . i .
s a. 1C
« . J5 L
4 .001
•j ;j . i
7 19.9
T 132.
! 26: .
6 . 'J 0 0 '.
i i ) ;
.HS ^ :. ;34
VA^ASCS i
0
0 - 0 -j . " ) i
6 I 24 . 4 ?•)
J 2 . 2 J 0 ."; '..
0 S.300G2
3 'L ") " J . i 2
5 :o -i-'i
4 : > . :i ; '
r .'.::.' 4 j
1 !:^*:
j .MI jo T-
. jooood
7 2V »4il
0 3 25 . 1 tb
0
L 130972
0 . 0 C 0 J 'J 0
0 '. 5 f> 3 . 2 0
4 -i. 2 Jd? :i 4*. :• i
3 «!-.:* :CAN
3 • j ? E a ; j P ;~j7'j]
VTONAGCN .»: VE3
NF3*
0 ;LAaJ O'J
AN 3SV -•."£r .'AP jTASQ -7 '•^X rfl1,1*
1 ! j ?
0
|
S
d»
J7
,,
j i
°-
t\
ii
'J .252331 ^.344i7 "d.
•1 . i i 3 7 2 7 i . ,. 4 C i 4 i 2 .
4 ,4«)51! . 5i3?25 5.0
3 . j 1 i 7 4 7 1 . : I i 5 5 1.2
) .23:202 ;.?;;;4 2s 4
: ;iOi = 5 ' s^"o {'.'
5 lit::: . ~ : ; •> 4 5 i . .
i .;7T4"I . . 4 ; ' " 5 .4.
IS .054042 .244)39 '.2
4 . 705417 . ;
i !. D^ji .2
• '. . 1 «70 2«
1 . ; i 4 1 2 1 .
J.JHS .63*53 *.
6.i5L3 I. 3 663 •> .
l.i)54 . il 579 H
J7.:o3 1.56:4; -a
C 0 J 2 0 0 . J
9.i3*y 1 . ? I &4 5 1J
.S^M: J.*?OJd ^.
i?^ 'if
0637 :;.,
3205 50.
3*73 70.
30.
vu
:
3
'til !;oo;
"ft"* J4* '""
-:N[-J- i
". i ' 2 \
45. .2
i. ;;.
H..2
' '::..'
i -
30
J .
: .; i » :;.;::, . o
00
"••
JO
. 0
=
~
•"
'
i
^
i
3
•
:»
' '
,
:
3
t '
j
1.
- ~ -I
•2 . j
'
; :.7£
;" : :.
: • : i
: •< •• -
070009 LOSCL
LOMG LAR£ '.0 .^1 E -*TS3SHEST
LAKE SUPCRIOR 070743
•9 ONTC'MAGOU PIVER
A?»3NT-'LAI L . 40^ft5i 7 . 4000C 7 .
c* • . J3-JL54 . :aoo:c .:
.5 154.115 T:Q..;OO .:
:i 5. :3«oi 5o.oooo jo
46 Ii.031d 7'J.OC03 LO
10 . jojg jj
0.'H3 J4.3*l J JO.OOOU . J
47.0' 3 I . 3 J 5 6 400. J 0 0 10
90972 437.003 1500.30 i.
00000 .'JOOUOC . )OOOJO .0
6J.OO 3*. 5MSJ J4.JQJO . ;
.2.48.1 .4. Jill ,.,.H1 20.0000 .00
JCJ
30
JO
00
ao
oc
OJ
C.l
-0 J
JO
au
CO
0 J
00
00
5
7
•s
•j
•)
I
,
3
;
i
s
3
•JOJ S
c^o •
/
'
•
6'
3
j :
?
i •
3
j
5
6
1
t
]
:
3
i
•-0'' 7: -1 '-3
4 -0
* 0
5 0
Q •' '.'
i 3
6 :
S 0
I'c"
- .
t '-
5 '.
/O
1
•;
':
'
J
J
4 -- ;•
WQ-RET
3-3
-------
PGM=RET,
The function of the RET program is to obtain, for selected
stations and parameters, listings of actual sample values, i
raw data values which have not been manipulated in any
the WQF analysis programs. The listings show
times, and depths of the parameters specified
request. As many as fifty parameters can be
single retrieval.
in any manner by
the sampling dates,
in the retrieval
requested in a
BATE
raOH
TO
'3/01/03
73/05/15
73/06/04
73/07/05
73/03/01
73/09/11
73/12/20
74/05/16
74/06/11
74/06/26
74/07/19
74/08/27
75/05/16
75/05/29
75/0&/ 1 1
75/06/24
75/07/02
75/07/10
75/07/15
75/07/22
75/OS/2'
75/09/24
75/10/02
75/10/07
75/10/16
75/10/2!
'5/11/04
16/04/23
76/05/28
76/06/30
76/07/13
rtx:
Of
OAY
0)
03
09
09
03
09
10
09
09
J3
10
10
10
10
09
11
10
10
10
08
09
10
11
10
11
10
10
10
10
03
11
25
10
00
10
la
15
50
10
25
10
10
50
15
00
00
00
00
40
35
30
10
00
00
30
00
00
30
IS
30
10
00
0'0009 '.OHCL
44 14 11.2 039 21 4a.O \
LONG LAKE 10 *I £ rfATERS«££7
26051 *ICHI.3AM
LA«E SUPERIOR I'Q^!
.13 ONTONACON RIVES
DEPTH
fEET
0007
3007
3007
3010
5009
0009
0005
0005
0022
oooi :
HATE 9
TEMP
FAHS
11.0
49.;
63. J
S9. 5
69.0
66.0
33.0
50.0
60.5
S3.0
78.0
67.0
55.0
60.0
61.0
72.0
73.0
78.0
71.0
76.0
66.0
53.0
50.0
51.0
47.0
4 .0
4 .0
4 .0
6 .0
5 .0
6 .0
7 .0
00300
DO
"»C/L
13.3
10.6
i. 7
3.2
3. 1
3.4
D.9
10.2
3. 7
3.9
7.6
:o.2
3.3
7.6
8.1
1.1
10. S
11.4
) . ',
9.'
3.4
3.4
00400
?H
SU
. SO
.50
.50
.50
.50
.00
.50
.50
.70
.60
.50
.60
.00
.50
.20
. 4 2
. 70
.40
.00
.00
.'0
.00
.70
.00
.00
.50
.00
.00
.60
.60
.30
.30
0000
00610 01045
NH3-N IRON
TOTAt ft. TOT
SC/C. UC/L
50
140
140
52
280
120
140
230
620
120
0.050K 70
0.050* 100
3.050K 100
O.OSOI 501
0.050 90
fEET OCPTK C1AS3 JO
11501
TOT CO LI
If IMENOO
/100HL
10
100
1500
30
300
5
130
10
100
10
WQ-RET
3-4
-------
PGM=ALLPARM,
The ALLPARM program is used to obtain, without specifying any
parameter codes, tabular listings of actual sample values fi.e.,
raw data values which have not been manipulated in any manner by
the WQF analysis programs) for all parameters stored ct selected
stations.
« : -"• ' i r ? ; .•-/
>!,,.,.
411 . !<.' .[S fir
04.1 -.4--•-,..; , ;•;.-.4-i- r ;r,
TOT (,/L
WQ-RET
3-5
-------
PGM=MEAN,
The MEAN program performs a variety o'f user-specified statistical
calculations on requested parameters, and provides maximum
flexibility with regard to combining stations and grouping data
according to desired time frames. The statistical functions that
can be selected include maximum, minimum, mean, sum of squares,
variance, standard deviation, and other basic statistical
analyses. High and/or low data values can be eliminated prior to
analyses, and calculations can be performed on the logarithms of
the values. The program also can be used to calculate loadings,
dissolved oxygen saturation, temperature conversions, and un-
ionized ammonia.
AM8J4
DATE ?
??OM
TO 3
71 ' 0 1 /O 1
YEAR
74/01/00
74/01/01
YEAR
75/01/00
75/01/01
»CAR
76/01/00
76/01/01
YEA*
77/01/00
00/00/00
STATION
T/LAKE
! £ DEPTH
}
» FEET
U 8EJ
A l!»Cf
t i.-Jrt
J 8£P
A IPUH
I I MUM
E .1
j sen
A HUM
INlnun
EAS
LJM9ER
A1IMUM
t N I MUM
EAN
UMBER
AXIMUM
INIMU.1
EAN
30011
•ATE R
TEMP
FAUN
7.00000
i9. 5000
] 1 . COCO
5'.00000
73.3000
50.0000
34.71,00
15.0000
78.0000
43.0000
60. 5000
5.00000
73.0000
44.0000
61.2000
12.0000
78.0000
11.0000
40.0112
00100
X
-G/L
7.3HOOC
11.9000
i . 10000
4.30000
10. 2000
7.60000
1.84999
6.00000
10 . 6000
7.60000
9.16666
5. 00000
11.4000
1 . 40000
J.51999
22.0000
11.9000
7.50000
9.53181
070009 LONGL
4* 14 j! .2 089 !! 4E 10 *r i WOSRSMEET
26053 .4ICHI;*.«
LAKE 5-JPS 10? 370751
-3 ONTOSA ON -TVE."
14ACNPS9
3000 FEE DEPTH CLASS 30
10400 33510 31045 11 31
?H NHl-r» [RON TOT C i
TOTAL Ft. TOT -flM N O
ju -G/L as/(. /;o s
7..:C30C 5. 30000 .030
S.VJGOO 30.030 5>: . 3
5. -u MO 3.0000 . : 0 0
5.30000 .30000 .00000
5.7000U , 20.300 00.000
6.50000 20.300 0.0000
6.57999 56.000 25.000
15.0000
7.20000
5. 70000
6.24111
5.00000 5.30000 5.00003
5.JOOCO .3503003 100.0'JO
S.OOOCO .0500000 50.0030
6.55999 .0500.300 32.0000
12.3000 5.00000 15.0000 10.0000
7.20003 .0500000 420.000 1500.10
5.50000 .3530000 50.0000 5.00003
6.35175 .0500000 156.800 294.500
Statistical calculations of selected parameters can be easily
obtained by the MEAN program. This run produced yearly (for the
years 73 through 76) and period-of-record groupings of six
parameters stored at station 070009. The blank areas of the
report reflect no data stored for that parameter for that period.
WQ-RET
3-6
-------
PGM=PLOT,
The PLOT program plots the values of each selected parameter (y-
axis) for each selected station for the specified time period ' x-
axis). Values plotted may take the form of raw concentrations
(e.g. mg/1) or "loadings (e.g. Ibs/day). Options include scale
control and plotting of symbols. Plots are produced on EPA's
digital plotting equipment (CALCOMP} and disseminated to users.
C7C079 '.3«CL
-.6 :«l 31.8 089 I: 'it.Q :
->c _«e :a M. £ *areRs»eET
J50S.' ."ICiIGS"
.=«£ 3i.P!«!SH 075793
-g iwrcMacaN *;v£p
:3OC i:30 ,i-yi
This PLOT program output plots the values of
(Iron, Total, ug/15 stored at station 070009
through the first half of 1976.
parameter 01045
for the years 19'
WQ-RET
3-7
-------
PGM=LOG,
The LOG program plots a map of a user defined area, and plots a'
symbol to denote the locations of all stations within the area,
using CALCOM? plotting routines. Printed output from the mapping
routine includes a listing of all stations and their associated
latitude and longitude coordinates. Plots can optionally include
outlines of cities, lakes, reservoirs (where available), and
county lines. Plotted stations can be tagged with coded
identifiers which cross-reference to the printed output.
This LOG program output plots the locations of stations along the
Flint River in Michigan, along with the outline of the counties
through which the river flows. The stations are tagged for easy
cross reference to a list of station locations.
WQ-RET
3-8
-------
PGM=STAND,
The STAND program compares the observed values of selected water
quality parameters with a set of values (criteria) specified
within the retrieval request. These criteria could be the state
or Federal standards currently in force for a particular stream
segment of interest. Stored parameter values which do not
satisfy the criteria comparison are flagged with an asterisk (*}
in the program output. The program provides for various output
formats, including violations lists and violations summaries.
SUPPORT: NO PASA.-ETSRS
A.13NT/LASE
CATt 71 .* £
/Oa/04 3-JOO
/'j'/'.'f 03 M
TE.1P
F AriN
00320
•30
30400
?H
5U
3 ?;JOO'J LGSGL
46 It 31.2 J 3 9 „• 1 4 •). ) I
LONG LAKE 10 •«[ i «A TS S^.'-EET
iSOS 3 -tCH I CAN
LAKE SC?£S!Of> -) ' n. 7 J 3
"9 JN70NA-3CN StVE^
) i:: I
707 ::LI
MOO.'J-
ioo. :•
10.:
•J700
40 14
LONG
«d ON
A.13NT/UKE 14AGN
•JOCO
jU.lflAaY OF VIOLATIONS Of* 3A
0011 OOJOO 00<00 .-0610
W 7£a 00 ?^ NH3-N
ErtP TOTAL ?
*HN flC.'L 5U ^G/ L
10 3f MJ.1.-E3 }l 22 12 i
CAN (J. U. S. 0.
liDlAN 2. 3. 7. 0. 1
0 OF VIOUj J 3 J 0
SSCSNT VICL 0. 0. 0. 0.
INIMUH VIOL 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 . %
EAN V!OL J. 0. ). 0. i
PLEJ COLLECT
C104S 11
' ?CN 7? :
•jr./L .-10
;s
•i . i 294 .
0.0 ii.
7 2
0.) SM.
0 . 0 '. 1:0.
AXIflUH VIOL 3. 3. 0. 0. 520.0 1:00.
1 LJNCL
! 1 . 2 3 i 9 2 1 43.0 1
A
59
JiiT -JSPTH ;LAi5 OJ
•: ?FO- !i/oi..ai :o •,.,;:.:..
01
N c-:
i
2
Two formats of the STAND program are shown above: Violations with
Supporting Parameters, and a Violations Summary.
WQ-RET
3-9
-------
PGM=INDEX,
The INDEX program prints station header information (eight per
page) for each station retrieved to enable users to easily
examine stations of interest.
SIOGfl "SIBIEVIl OITE 79/06/01 D*CE
mif SI/CO I IQCiriON flSIN C3CE SinsiGf }*TP
111r1CN TTPE
USE' CODE ST1T10N SECONOier STltiONS rtj/rIK/1[n»
INOF>
"I SS1SS10P! ??077 r.O"OCHIlI3 »IVF« If 9CSFTTI, MIS
/TT»I/1KPNI/ST»E1"
?l»-.
31 19 ?0.0 091 36 ?0.3
INOEI
13UI3IIN1 ??053 i»l II »IV5» II »0«T VINCFNT. 11. !(.?;»?
/TT»»/1XPNT/S fBFIx
i >?«e,'- :?390i?o f i^ i"
3f i" ««.r 091 39 sa.?
/TT01/»x«NI/5IOfIX
10 t* ^^.0 091 17 0^.0
110 fl
/TTPI/lxPhI/5I8E1X
I 1?4>0 0737* I JO US It.
30 17 00.0 091 13 21.0
I«OEI
/ Tr»l/lw!>sr/S TSE i«
.'1 30 4 ).0 090 ?7 »0.0
I*0£I
|00| J8001 "1<5ISS1P»I 8. It NlTCHf?. "ISS. IC?|9J
11?^P0 n7?908BO 5-ISIW
31 33 37.0 091 J5 07.0
INOEI
WQ-RET
3-10
-------
PGM=STA,
The STA program produces a listing of all primary and secondary
station codes associated with a specified agency code.
JO.
JO
00.
JOS
:a<
•j-j
,0.
0
J j
00
JO
Jli
>u
JO
•>o
..0
OC
)0
j ;
JG
.10
•JO
;c
, J
• •j'j
•JU
aovESHELTEa ujs *OA :LADE L* cos
.1THGNY JX. 0:3 ANVIL LX 11 J'OS
U-j JOS AJ3-U JOS
'JS-3EDOOC ,'05 *US-5f*tTH 3R JOS
lAJLiY aAPID OOS 3ALLARO ?ONO JOS
ASS - CPGRQ 003 3ASS LAKE 30S
SEE 3UN OUa 3ELCW "UOOY JOS
'.'JOl Ou? 070002 OOP
~000? OOP J'OOOd OOP
7QOU OOP 'j"OC"i4 30?
OC I'J J3P 0*0020 OOP
002; 00?J?0026 -OP
£.; j i oo? O7oo 3 JOP
JJ37 Co? O'tlOi JOP
;Ui «o?J7iJio JJP
010* ± -j ? J • 0 1 0 0 3 P
01*0 j?;ou -o?
'-IH J y : u oo?
•j 4b o ? : ijo ;OP
"04 j ? : *oo oo?
T 1 2 JP24LJ ;jp
* i* OP: 4:0 OOP
"25 u P 2 426 JO?
" H Q ? i 4 34 ):?
* 4 i u j 3 US *Dfl [•< 005
* 'JOOU: 'J OJS •» ?T'w£ 3SAV J03
^0«4[N ^RCA 305 >D«IM 5ITS 3
^LLEN L OOS ».^.^0. 'JSfT J
VJ3LS PONO OflS A^PCA 3
^US-400'. 3H. 005 AL'SASLZ-.^IOJ J
IALT:.^C?C a. -jos SARD 3
SAr-i JOS 3AY-2
JKLOWSHELTSa JOS 3C««[S PaECIP 0
-000) ^'P 0-00-4
?QOQ» 30? 'JO i
7QOi 5 oo? a; j
"0021 0? 00
:oo2" o? :•:
"30J3 OP 00
700 Si OP } -J
70 103 03 3 i 300 U
?0i0o 0? ; LC"
201*2 0? i3«
20142 0? 14
20151 0? 15:
2" Cd 0? 40}
2 ' 1 4 j ? 4 ; ;
27 II 0? 422
2' 2: CP 423
2* 36 0? "4J"
05000004 :s 4 503:ou •;
o"020oi* ; ? .11 «.ARY srAriiH
OS
as
C3
OS
05
OS
OS
3?
OP
:?
j '
o?
5
5
I
.
p
P
p
p
p
p
p
15
5-2
S-IIM SITE J
^THOSY
j-;
'JS-3'.'?TCN 3
.4 ILL jut
AaSEM ?OP
£A? '.A** 2
3SNA ?S
"3 J5
- j i ;
70 ; '
7-: n
7 ] ;•)
"0 35
"J OGOOO}
':- 0305.2
:: l\
J! 17 i
144 i
4:1-
4 10
4 16
4 £ )
4 i ?
*33
^ o ; ; ; 3 ; *
04 jS:ONCARY j .
3 V(
5 XL
= 3A
3 ?A
3 3E
3 ^c.
: r
? ;•
? j ~
y ;.
P ,
? J
; j
' '
?
;
p
3
3
f
?
?
- •
; .** : : T t :
:POC-»=^,
." : v ^ ? t ;
3 : 4 2 - J t •
0 '.. M E "5
TON LA.<2
) ;
•- 3
'j 1
0 ;
„ ,
1 ^ J '- -j :
I ) - 3 1 -.
'- * i
1
i ; -
. 4 :
4 j
'':•.
4 . '
«t 4
* j - i
: ] i
•c c --;*'.. i
This run of the STA program produced a listing of the 2,004
primary station codes and 1233 secondary station codes (a portion
of which are shown here) associated with agency 14AGNFS9. This
listing is sorted in station code sequence, reading left to
right, top to bottom.
WQ-RET
3-11
-------
PGM=PUNCH,
Output from the PUNCH program is a deck of 80-column punched
cards containing the station codes, sampling dates, and data
values for up to six parameters. These cards may be used as
input to a user-written program and submitted through a card-
reading terminal.
WQ-RET
3-12
-------
PGM=MSP,
The MSP (Multiple Station Plot) program performs a number of
statistical computations on the values of selected parameters,
and plots the resulting values as a function of the stations
selected. The program allows the user rather extensive control
over the format of the resulting plots. Parameters to be
plotted, scaling and axes control, statistical values to be
plotted, stations to be grouped, and line printer or digital
plotter output are all user-optional specifications.
This run of the MSP program plots the max, mean, and nun values
of dissolved oxygen sampled over a seven year period at stations
located along a 180-mile stretch of a river.
WQ-RET
3-13
-------
PGM=REG,
The REG program allows the computation of the best-fit,, s.traight
line relationship between a parameter and time, between two
different parameters at the same site, or between the same or
different parameters at two different sites. The program permits
specification of features of the linear regression analysis to be
performed, including the specification of time periods, and
maximum abscissa and ordinate values.
\
This run of the REG program displays the best-fit straight line
relationship between two parameters (water temperature and
dissolved oxygen) at a single station location (station 070009)
A summary of the statistical computations performed is provided
on a summary page which accompanies the REG print plot; The
asterisks appearing in the plot margin denote the intercepts of
the regression line with the plot axes. Users may draw a line
between these points to show the regression line.
WQ-RET
3-14
-------
PGM=NOPAR,
The NOPAR program performs station selection only, and produces a
summary printout and three optional files which identify those
stations meeting specified sampling criteria based on minimum
sampling frequencies of parameter groups for specified time
periods. A representative output is not shown below since the
primary purpose of the NOPAR program is to produce a station file
which will be read by a subsequent retrieval utilizing another
WQF retrieval program.
WQ-RET
3-15
-------
SECTION 4: GENERAL RETRIEVAL KEYWORDS
This section describes in detail those WQF retrieval keywords
that generally apply to all or most of the WQF retrieval programs
available to STORET users. This group of general retrieval
keywords is divided into four logically distinct categories
titled: Retrieval Identification Keywords; Station
Identification Keywords; Data Selection Keywords; and Print
Control Keywords.
The order of these categories, as well as the order of the
keywords described within each category, parallels the suggested
sequence that a user should follow when considering keywords for
inclusion into a retrieval request. The Retrieval Identification
Keyword category contains two keywords, PGM and PCJR?, both of
which are required for all retrieval requests, and which
logically are the first keywords specified in any retrieval.
These are followed by one or more of the station identification
keywords that are used to specify which sampling stations are to
be selected in the retrieval request. The data selection
keywords define which water quality parameters and samples are to
be selected for the stations specified, and how the samples
containing those parameters will be treated. The print control
keywords further define the format of the information that is to
appear on the retrieval output.
The individual keyword descriptions contain extensive information
on the keywords, including what they are used for, what their
format and allowable values are, and how they are used with other
retrieval keywords and programs. The keyword name appears at the
top outside corner of the first page of each keyword description
to facilitate easy reference. If a keyword is required, the word
'required' will appear in the classification category of the
keyword description. Also included in each keyword description
are one or more examples which illustrate correct uses of the
keyword in various retrieval requests. Efforts were made to keep
the examples uncomplicated, in order to highlight the use of the
keyword being explained. To this end, portions of the following
standard format of keywords and keyword values will be used,
where appropriate, in all of the examples herein:
PGM-RET,PURP=305B/STA/
A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
P-11,P«300,P-400,P«610,P«1045,P-31501,
BD-730101,
Appendices to the WQ-RET chapter contain a Table of Keywords by
Program which summarizes which keywords can be used with which
programs, and a Summary of Keyword Descriptions, which gives a
brief description of each WQF retrieval keyword. A listing of
the general retrieval keywords appears on the next page.
WQ-RET
4-1
-------
GENERAL RETRIEVAL KEYWORDS'
Retrieval Identification Keywords
PGM
PURP
Station Identification Keywords
station selection keywords (selectors)
A,B,S
LT,L
RMI
STC,CO
BS
AREA
MASK
station restriction keywords (restrictors)
ST
STCNTY
U,ONLYU,NOTU
EXTRACT
ARCLASS
Data Selection Keywords
P
PARONLY
PARU,PARF
PRV,PLV,PHV
BD,ED
BT,ET
BG,EG
R
UD, LD >-
D
30T
DSROC
ANC
UK
AGGR
IS
Print Control Keywords
PRT
SHIFT
HEAD
PRMI
WQ-RET
4-2
-------
PGM
CLASSIFICATION: Retrieval Identification Keyword; Required
USE: This keyword denotes the beginning of a retrieval
request and is used to specify the WQF retrieval
program to be performed.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
PGM=program-name, where program-name is one of the
following WQF retrieval programs:
INV120
INVENT
RET
ALL? ARM
MEAN
PLOT
LOC
STAND
INDEX
STA
PUNCH
MSP
REG
NOPAR
The functions of these programs are
described in detail in Sections
3, 6, and 7 of this chapter.
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
This keyword must be the first keyword specified within
a retrieval request, and can be specified only once per
request.
In general, the keywords discussed in this section may
be used with any PGM option. The keywords which are
unique or special to the individual programs are
discussed in detail in Sections 6 and 7 of this WQ-RET
chapter. Appendix 2 to this chapter contains a summary
of keywords by program, which denotes which keywords
apply to which retrieval programs.
WQ-RET
4-5
-------
PUR?
CLASSIFICATION: Retrieval Identification Keyword; Required
USE: This keyword is used to identify both the purpose and
the recipient of each retrieval request. Retrieval
purposes are used to analyze the uses made of the
data stored in the WQF. This information can also be
used by the users of the system to determine how
STORET's WQF supports their program requirements.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
Iaaaa/bbb eeee \
PLcccc/bbb eeee |, where:
dddd )
aaaa is the section or subsection of PL 92-500
for which the retrieval is being requested
(followed by a slash), e.g. 106/ or 303E/.
bbb is a three letter code indicating the ultimate
recipient of the retrieval, as follows:
EPA In-house use by EPA HQ or Regional
personnel
FED Federal non-EPA personnel
STA State government personnel
LOG Local government personnel
ACA Academic (student, university)
personnel
CON Contractor
PUB General Public
cccc denotes the Federal legislation, other than
PL 92-500, for which the retrieval is being
made.
dddd is a l-to-35 letter description of the
purpose of the retrieval other than in
support of Federal legislation. FOI is
an acceptable entry for those requests
which answer.the requirement of the
Freedom of Information Act.
eeee is an optional text remark, up to 35
characters in length, including
positions used for public law and
recipient.
WQ-RET
4-7
-------
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
Specify only once per retrieval request.
Appendix 4 to this WQ-RET chapter contains a summary of
the most frequently used PURP values.
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve data for a
state in support of
section 303(e).
Retrieve data for a
contractor in support of
the Coastal Zone
Management Act of 1972.
Retrieve data for a state
in support of the Water
Quality Inventory Report
requirement (the second
version cites the subsection)
PGM=RET,PURP=303E/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,
or
PGM=RET,PURP = 303(E)/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,
PGM=RET,PURP=PL92-583/CON
A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD-730101,
PGM=RET/PURP=305/STA,
A=14AGNFS9',S = 070009,
P-11,P-300,P-400/
BD=730101,
or
PGM=RET, PURP = 30 5B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,
WQ-RET
4-8
-------
stations by specific agency code
stations with certain parameter or type
characteristics
5 archived data
Selectors vs. Restrictors
EXTRACT
ARCLASS
Station identification keywords are divided into two groups:
selectors and restrictors. The keywords ST, STCNTY, EXTRACT,
ARCLASS, and U, NOTU, ONLYU are restrictors. All other station
identification keywords are selectors.
At least one selector must be included in the retrieval request,
or no stations (and therefore no data) will be selected by it.
Optionally, one or more restrictors may be included whose
function is to further screen the selected stations.
Generally, only one selector should be specified per retrieval.
More than one selector may be specified, if necessary, but
caution should be used. Since each selector is processed
independently of the others, users may inadvertently select the
same station more than once. For example, if a retrieval
contained both the LT,L keywords (specifying a polygon which
encompassed part of a particular state) and the STC keyword
(specifying that same state), then, since LT,L and STC are both
selectors, the stations located within that part of the state
overlapped by the polygon (area B) would be retrieved, printed,
and analyzed twice, along with all other stations within the
remaining areas of the polygon (area A) and the state (area C).
LT=I/STC=nn,
LT=I,ST=nn,
(Stations in B are
selected twice)
(Stations only
are selected)
in B
STATION SELECTION LOGIC
WQ-RET
4-11
-------
The result is duplicated data that, will resu.l.t,. in an increase' in
the cost of the retrieval and difficulty with analysis-. The
logic employed by the restrictor keywords has the effect of
limiting or narrowing the number of stations retrieved. Using
the polygon/state example above, the specification of the LT
keyword (a selector) and the ST keyword (a restrictor for
retrieval by state) would result in the retrieval of stations
located only in area B since the stations would have to be in
both the polygon AND the state in order to be retrieved. There
will be no duplication of stations retrieved, and significantly
fewer total number of stations retrieved.
Selection Strategies
The set of station identification keywords allows for a number of.
different keyword combinations. In fact, different combinations
of selector keyword and restrictor keyword pairs can result in
the same set of stations retrieved. For example, the A keyword
and a range of stations identified by B and S can be used to
retrieve all stations within a particular agency, which are then
narrowed by those stations associated with the agency but located
in a particular state (ST keyword). The same group of stations
could be selected by specifying the STC and U keywords.
Whenever stations are selected both by state and by an agency
code, users have a choice of specifying these criteria by either
a station selector keyword (STC or A,S) or a station restrictcr
keyword (ST or U). The following guideline should always be
followed in determining which stations should be specified via
the selector keyword, and which should be specified by the
restrictor keyword. Since the system first retrieves those
stations specified by the station selector keyword, and then
narrows or reduces those stations via the station restrictor
criteria, the criteria that would expectedly find the fewer
number of stations should always be identified by the station
selector keyword. For example, if a user were interested in the
stations within one state of an agency whose station network
encompassed several states, the STC and U keywords should be
used. However, if it were known that an agency didn't have too
many stations, but that they were spread over a wide multi-state
area, the A, S and ST keywords would probably result in the more
efficient retrieval. By following this guideline in retrievals
which have either STC and U, or A,S and STC specified, users will
structure a more efficient retrieval since less data will be
retrieved, thereby minimizing the cost of the retrieval.
WQ-RET
4-12
-------
A
B
S
CLASSIFICATION: Station Selection Keyword
USE:
These keywords are used to select a specific set of
sampling stations by specifying the agency code (A) of
the owner/agency, .and specific station codes (S), as
established by that agency, or in conjunction with B,
ranges of station codes.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES;
A=agency-code,
S=station-cr e,
B-
DEFAULT VALUE: A:
S:
B:
NOTES ON USAGE:
used to specify the agency whose
stations are to be retrieved, where
agency-code is the cne-to-eight-
character agency code assigned to
the agency responsible for collecting
and entering the data into the WQF.
used to specify a specific station
code, to select that station,
or to serve as an end point for
a range (in conjunction with
keyword B).
specified in a retrieval request
to switch modes from single
station selection to range of
stations, and back again.
None,
None,
B-fi,
S may specify either a primary or a secondary station
code, or if used with B to delimit a range, may be a
fictitious station code. A must precede the first S to
which it applies.
Agency codes (A) and station codes (S) entered in the
retrieval are paired to form A and S pairs. Each
agency code is paired with all the station codes which
follow it, until superceded by another agency code.
WQ-RET
4-13
-------
Usually, A and S pairs are used as station selectors,
with each pair identifying one station to be retrieved.
The B keyword, if supplied, serves to re-set the search
technique/mode. If 'B=P,' is entered, subsequent A and
S pairs are used alternately as beginning and ending
points for ranges of primary (P) station codes. '3=S,'
has the same effect, but refers to beginning and ending
points of ranges of secondary (S) station codes.
'3=B,' refers to ranges that may include both primary
and secondary station codes.
'B= ,' is coded, together with a preceding 'A=agency-
code,' to turn off the range search. Subsequent A and
S pairs will be again used singly, and each will
retrieve one station.
Single stations are printed in the order requested;
ranges of stations are printed in increasing numerical
order. Agencies are always printed in the order
requested.
The A keyword is valid with all WQF retrieval programs.
For all programs except STA, INVENT, and INV120 if the
A keyword is specified, -the S keyword must also be
specified. The A keyword may be specified alone with
INVENT and INV120 and is the only station selector
keyword valid with program STA. A and S pairs provide
the only valid station selection method for program
REG.
A listing of the current agency codes is available in a
STORET help data set named AGENCODE. The STA program
(described in Section 6) may be used to obtain lists of
stations for agency codes of interest.
SOME REPRESENTATIVE USES:
When a specific network of stations, or one or more
specific stations, is of interest, these keywords
provide for the most efficient, and perhaps easiest,
way to define the stations within the retrieval.
WQ-RET
4-14
-------
EXAMPLE', S) :
Retrieve data from stations PGM=RET,PUR?=3053/STA,
with primary numbers between A=I4AGNFS9,B=P,5=070001,
070001 and 070009 for agency 5=070009,A=14AGNFS9,3= ,
14AGNFS9, and individual 5 = 070021,S=07QC24 ,
stations 070021 and 070024 P= 11, P = 3CO , ? = 400 .,
for the same agency. Note BD=730101,
the recommended practice of
repeating the agency code
whenever the 3 keyword
is respecified.
Retrieve data from stations PGM=RET,PURP=305/STA,
with primary numbers 070001 A=14AGNFS9,B=P,S=Q7GOG1,
through 070003 and from those S = 07Q003 , A»UAGNFS9 ,
with secondary codes LONGL B=S,S=LONGL,5=0406020006
through 0406020006 for agency
14AGNFS9.
WQ-RET
4-15
-------
LT
T
CLASSIFICATION: Station Selection Keywords
USE:
The area containing stations of interest may be defined
by coding the latitude and longitude coordinates of
vertices that form one or more polygons. A polygon is
a geographical area bounded by straight lines
connecting three or more vertices (a) whose locations
are pinpointed by their respective latitude and
longitude coordinates.
Two keywords, LT and L, are used to define this type of
station selection criteria. The LT keyword is used to
initiate one or more polygons within the retrieval
request. The L keywords are specified in pairs, one
pair for each vertex of the polygon.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
LT-I,
specifies that all stations within the defined
polygon are to be retrieved, including those
stations located at the vertices of the polygon
dddmmsst
dddmmss
ddmmsst
ddmmss
dddmm
ddmm
ddd
Idd
used in conjunction with the LT keyword
to specify the latitude and longitude
coordinates.of one or more polygon
vertices. The first L in a pair is
set equal to the latitude and the
second L to the longitude, using any
one of the formats shown, where d
stands for degrees, m minutes, s
seconds, and t tenths of a second.
Leading and trailing zeroes may be
omitted.
WQ-RET
4-17
-------
DEFAULT VALUES: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
The LT and L keywords are used in conjunction with one
another; if either is used, the other must be. The LT
keyword must precede all L keyword pairs to which it
applies. For each vertex, the latitude must be
specified before its longitude. (Within the
continental U.S., the degrees latitude of any location
is less than the degrees longitude of the location.)
Up to ten polygons can be defined within a single
retrieval each initiated with LT=I.. A total of 700
vertices may be used per retrieval request.
A "polygon" retrieval scans all stations within the
polygon whose vertices are specified by
latitude/longitude. The stations within this polygon
must have been stored with latitude/longitude
coordinates in order to be retrieved by these keywords.
Although the majority of stations stored within the WQF
have latitude/longitude coordinates stored, a small
percentage of stations do not. If you are aware of the
existence of a station but it does not appear in a
polygon retrieval,- then it was stored without
latitude/longitude coordinates. Storage of
latitude/longitude coordinates became a mandatory
requirement in 1974.
Once a geographical area has been defined, any
latitude/longitude pair of that area may serve as a
beginning point and the remaining vertices of the area
may be specified in either a clock-wise or counter
clockwise direction. Since the crossing of lines is
invalid, once a direction has been determined it may •
not be changed for a given polygon.
Stations will be printed in increasing longitude within
latitude order, beginning with the southeastern most
station of the polygon.
There are no restrictions on the use of these keywords
with other WQF retrieval keywords. However, care
should be exercised when using them with other station
selectors. The keywords are valid for all programs
except REG and STA.
WQ-RET
4-18
-------
SOME REPRESENTATIVE USES:
Retrieving stations by polygon is often helpful when
the area of interest is comprised of overlapping state
and basin boundaries. This station selector method is
also an effective way to determine the monitoring
networks that exist in a oarticular area of interest.
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve data for stations
within the specified polygon
SOME COMMON ERRORS:
PGM=RET,?rJRP = 305B/STA,
LT=I,L=4645233.L=8950,
L=4635,L=90,L=4610454,
L=8950102,L=46,L=S935.
L=4645233,L=8925,
P=11,P=30Q,P=4GC,
BD=73C101,
Specifying the coordinates of a polygon's vertices in
such a way that one or more lines connecting the
vertices (in the order defined by the sequence of L
keywords) cross other lines results in eliminating
desired areas. Stations located outside the polygon
described, say in area B in the diagram below, are
omitted from the retrieval.
WRONG WAY
RIGHT WAY
WQ-RET
4-19
-------
RMI
CLASSIFICATION: Station Selection Keyword
USE: This keyword is used to initiate the selection of
sampling stations utilizing river-mile-indices.
A hydrologic, or river mile, index (RMI) is a numerical
code which identifies the location of a point on a
stream by defining its distance from, and hydrologic
relationship to, the mouth of the river system. The
index is composed of a major and minor basin code, a
terminal stream number, and other codes which identify
the direction of flow, stream level, and mileage
references which allow stations to be uniquely located.
Parts of the following areas have RMI values stored:
Michigan, Northeast Region, Ohio River Basin,
Mississippi River, the Pacific Northwest, the Potomac
River Basin, and the Tennessee River Basin.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
The RMI keyword is coded on a card (line) by itself and
its values on the next card (line) in a fixed-field
format, where its various values must appear in
specific columns or positions on a line. Three types
of fixed field control cards (or line images) can be
specified, each of which must be preceded by the
keyword R.MI= (without a trailing comma). These cards
are a 7 card, an 8 card, and a 9 card.
The 7 card is used to retrieve all stations above a
control point along a waterway, and is coded as
follows:
7 card:
Column or Position Contents
1 The number
7-13 Major basin, minor basin, and
terminal stream number of the
terminal stream.
14 - 19, 20 - 24, The level 2 - 12 streams index
25 - 28, 29 - 32, numbers are entered as needed
33 - 36, 37 - 40, to describe the control point.
41 - 44, 45 - 48, The last level entered, is the
49 - 52, 53 - 56, one for the stream on which the
WQ-RET
4-21
-------
and 57 - 60
61 - 66
67
control poinU Ls,
The distance up the last
stream to the control point
to the nearest hundreth of 'a mile
Comma (,)
The 3 and 9 control cards are
retrieve stations between two
All of the 8 card and columns
card describe the location of
used as a pair to
points along a waterway
14 -through 53 of the 9
the upstream point;
columns 72 through 79 of the 9 card describe the
downstream point. These cards are coded as follows
8 card:
Column
or Position
1
Contents
The number
8
7-13
14
19
The major basin, minor basin
and terminal stream number
of the terminal stream.
The miles up the level 1
stream to the confluence of
the level 2 stream, or if the
upstream control point is on
the level 1 stream, the distance
to the control point (Base miles)
to the nearest hundredths of a mile
42
60
46
64
20 - 25
26 - 31
32 - 36
37 - 41
- 45, 51 - 54,
The level
number.
2 stream index
The miles up the level 2
stream to the nearest hundredth
of a mile.
The level 3 stream index
number.
The miles up the level 3
stream to the nearest hundredth
of a mile.
The index numbers for the
63, and 69 - 72 level 4-7 streams as
needed.
50, 55 - 59, The distance up the stream
68, and 73 - 76 that is indicated by the preceding
WQ-RET
4-22
-------
index number as needed.
A comma (,) must immediately follow the last entry
on this card.
9 card:
Column or Position
Contents
14 - 17,
30 - 33,
and 46 -
1
22 - 25,
38 - 41,
49
The number
The index
level 8 -
needed.
numbers for the
12 streams as
18 - 21, 26
34 - 37, 42
and 50 - 53
71
29,
45,
The miles up
is. indicated
index number
the stream that
by the preceding
as needed.
72 - 73
74 - 79
80
Type of retrieval control desired.
Code "2" to retrieve stations only
on the main-stem. Code "4" to
retrieve stations on the main-stem
and on the tributaries below the
control point.
The level of the stream on
which the downstream control
point is located.
The distance up the indicated
stream to the downstream
control point.
Comma (,)
WQ-RET
4-23
-------
DEFAULT VALUES: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
Stations will.be printed in upstream hydrologic order.
When main stem and tributaries are requested, all main
stem stations are printed followed by all stations on
each tributary, beginning with the tributary closest to
the terminal stream.
When using multiple sets of RMI cards within a single
retrieval request, all 7 cards should be entered
first, followed by all 8 and 9 card pairs.
An RMI card must precede each 7,'8, and 9 card. Each
7, 8, and 9 card must be ended with a comma; no comma
is to be coded after the RMI keyword. A station may be
physically located in a basin other than its terminal
basin. For example, a sampling station on the Ohio
River at Cincinnati would be physically located in
major basin 05 (Ohio River Basin); however, its
terminal major basin would be 10 (Southwest Lower
Mississippi Basin) since this is the last basin through
which water from the Ohio flows before it enters the
ocean.
There.are no restrictions on the 'use of RMI with any
ether retrieval keywords. However, care should be
exercised when using this keyword with other station
selectors. This keyword is valid for all programs
except REG and STA.
WQ-RET
4-24
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
14 MINOR BASIN -
TERMINAL
STREAM
NUMBER
Using the river system shown above, the following will
retrieve data from all stations above point A.
fC»«aeT.PU«P-iOS8/STA.
RH>
; •)) uoo 201100 loooo 10
?-U,P-)00,?-400.
80-7JOIOI , ?!WI,
To retrieve data from stations between points B and C
on the mainstem and on the tributaries below point C,
the 8 and 9 cards are utilized, as follows:
0 I I ) < 5 6 7 i
12 ]4*>7S90 12 34 Ji71>011]4J< 7190 12)4 Ji7l)0i:]4 1C WO 123416 '190 12)456 '890 12 ]45» 7190
RMI*
9 0
MI-
1
P-U.?-100,P-400.
ao-iioioi, piwi.
WQ-RET
4-25
-------
\
\
\
^*as\-
• . 7.41 \
';/
/
C« / 0
/
04-0010 A ,^3-00010 / ,'
8 :'« 9.28 /^'"
S / 02-000060
'
6.12
Control Point
1 is 0.75 mile
up Gamma Creek.
Control Point 2 is
2.20 miles up Delta Creek.
Control Point 3 is 17.62
miles UD Delta Creek.
Z. ZZ
X: level number
Y: stream index
number
Z: mileage
Major Basin: 12
Minor Basin: 03
The following will retrieve all stations above control point 1 on
the map above, namely stations A, B, C, and D:
0 1 2 ) 4 5 S 7 i
:2)45S7H10123456739012)456789012J456789012)4S67S90123456799012)456799012)45o7890
PO»*rMVENT.PURP-)058/STA.
The following will retrieve data from stations E and F on the
main stem of Delta Creek between control points 2 and 3. If a 4
were coded in column 71 of the 9 card (instead of a 2 as shown),
data from stations located on the tributary to Delta Creek
(stations G and H) would also be retrieved.
0
12 J
i 4 5
S6 73?0 U 14 S« 7890 12)4)6 1990 m<
i
901 211 5
12080020009610000)0001762,
WQ-RET
4-26
-------
STC
CO
CLASSIFICATION: Station Selection Keywords
USE:
These keywords are used to retrieve stations according to
the states and/or counties in which they are located.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
STC=state-code,
C0=county-code,
DEFAULT VALUES: None.
where state-code is a two-digit
numerical Federal Information
Processing Standards (FIPS)
state code. Leading zeroes may
be omitted.
where county-code is a three-digit
numerical FIPS code identifying
the county or county equivalent,
such as an independent city.
Leading zeroes may be omitted.
NOTES ON USAGE:
When one or more CO keywords are specified, they must
follow the STC keyword and value to which they apply.
STC can be specified without any
to retrieve all stations for all
state(s) specified.
following CO keywords
counties within the
There is no limitation on the number of times these
keywords can be specified within a single retrieval.
Care should be exercised, however, when these keywords
are used with other station selectors.
Stations are printed in random order within a county,
but counties always will be retrieved in numerical
order within a state regardless of order requested.
States are listed in the order requested.
These keywords are valid for all programs except REG
and STA.
Listings of the state and county codes are contained i
Appendix C to this part of the Handbook.
in
WQ-RET
4-27
-------
EXAMPLE(S;
Retrieve data from
stations in Gogebic(53)
and Ontonago(131) counties
in Michigan(26) as well
as Vilas(125) county in
Wisconsin(55) .
Retrieve a summary of the
data for all stations in
the State of California (06
in counties Sacramento (067
and El Dorado (017) .
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
STO26,CO=53,CO=131,
STC=55,CO=125,
P=11,P=3CO.
BD-730101,
P»40G,
PGM=INVENT,PUR?=104B6/STA,
STC=06,CO=017,CO=067,
SOME COMMON ERRORS:
The STC keyword should not be confused with the ST
keyword which is also used to request stations based
upon the state in which they are located. It should be
noted that STC is a station selector, where ST is a
station restrictor. When STC is used in conjunction
with another station selector, such as LT,L or RMI, it
could result in the retrieval of some stations twice.
The ST keyword should be used to restrict stations
retrieved (by means of a station restrictor) to those
in one or more states.
The keyword CO can not be used in conjunction with the
keyword ST.
WQ-RET
4-28
-------
BS
CLASSIFICATION: Station Selection Keyword
USE: This keyword is used to retrieve stations according to
the major/minor/sub basins in which they are located.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
BS =
mmnnss
mmnn
mm
where
mm
nn
ss
IS
is
is
the two-digit major basin code
the two-digit minor basin code
the sub-basin code
values -of 3S
Leading
Acceptable
mmnn, or mmnnss. Leading zeroes c
one digit codes must be specified.
include mm,
zeroes of
DEFAULT VALUES: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
These codes designate the major/minor and sub basin in
which a station is physically located, and should not
be confused with the terminal basin codes used with
RMI.
Listings of the major and minor basin codes are
contained within Appendix D to this Handbook. They can
also be obtained by listing the STORET help data set
named BASIN.CODES. Since sub-basin coding is performed
at the state level, the applicable state office should
be contacted for information on sub-basin codes. '
There are no restrictions on the use of this keyword
with other WQF retrieval keywords. However, care
should be exercised when using this keyword with other
station selectors. The keyword may be used with all
programs except REG and STA.
Stations are printed in random order within the sub
basin/minor'basin/major basin categories. Major basins
are printed in the order requested.
WQ-RET
4-29
-------
EXAMPLE(S:
Retrieve data from
stations in the
Ontonagon minor basin(12)
of the Lake Superior(22)
major basin.
Retrieve a summary of the
data in the Sacramento River
Basin.
PGM=RET,PURP-305B/STA,
BS=2212,
?=11;P=300,P=400,
BD-730101,
PGM=INVENT,PURP=1Q4B6/STA,
65=1409,
WQ-RET
4-30
-------
AREA
CLASSIFICATION: Station Selector Keyword
USE: This keyword is used to retrieve stations located
within a designated state areawide waste treatment
management area as defined within Section 208 of
PL 92-500.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
AREA=area-name, where area-name is one of the designates
208 areas.
DEFAULT VALUES: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
Stations are printed in latitude/longitude order within
the requested area.
A listing of all 208 areas defined within STORET can be
obtained by listing the STORET help data set named
SEC208.AREAS. Additional information can be obtained
from the publication titled "Water Quality Management
Directory", dated July 1, 1976 which lists designated
local and state WQM agencies, principal contacts, and
EPA regional contacts. The publication is available at
EPA regional offices or from the Program Management
Branch of the Water Planning Division, EPA
Headquarters, Washington, D.C. A recent map of the
designated 208 areas is shown on the next page.
A maximum of 10 areas can be specified per retrieval.
Polygons defining the 208 areas were computed utilizing
the Census Bureau county data base.
There are no restrictions on the use of this keyword
with other WQF retrieval keywords. However, care
should be exercised when using this keyword with other
station selector keywords.
This keyword is valid with all WQF retrieval programs
except STA and REG.
WQ-RET
4-31
-------
EXAMPLE{S):
Retrieve data from
stations in the
Muskegon, Michigan
208 area.
Retrieve a summary of data
for all stations in the
Cape Cod, Maine 208 area.
PGM=RET,PURP=3053/STA,
AREA-MUSKEGON,
P=11,?»300,P-400,
30=730101,
PGM-INVENT,PURP-208/EPA,
AR£A=CAPECOD,
MAP OF DESIGNATED 208 AREAS
WQ-RET
4-32
-------
MASK
CLASSIFICATION: Station Selector Keyword
USE:
This keyword is used in conjunction with the EXTRACT
keyword so that only those stations satisfying the
EXTRACT criteria are selected. (The keyword itself
selects no stations; its presence in a retrieval
satisfies the requirement that at least one station
selector be specified in each retrieval request.)
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
MASK,
There is no value associated with this
keyword.
DEFAULT VALUE: Not applicable.
NOTES ON USAGE:
This keyword is valid for all WQF programs except REG
and STA.
If this
EXTRACT
keyword
keyword
is specified
must also be
in a retrieval
specified.
the
EXAMPLES;
Retrieve all the stations
associated with municipal
water supplies that are
sampling parameters 31516 or
31517 and 70900 in the ocean
at points where all effluents
should have been effectively
treated.
PGM=INDEX,PURP=104B6/STA,
MASK,
EXTRACT=(P31516 OR P31517)
AND P70900 AND OCEAN AND
TREATD AND MUN,
WQ-RET
4-33
-------
CLASSIFICATION: Station Restrictor Keyword
USE:
This keyword is used in conjunction with a station
selector keyword to further limit the stations that ar;
selected to those within the states specified.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
ST=state-code,
where state-code is.one of the
two-digit numerical Federal
Information Processing Standards
(FIPS) state codes. A leading
zero may be omitted.
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
A maximum of three state codes may be specified in any
single retrieval request.
This keyword must be used in conjunction with at least
one station selector keyword.
Listings of the state codes are contained in Appendix C
to this.part of the Handbook.
This keyword is valid for all programs except REG and
STA.
Stations are printed in the order that the station
selection keywords (specified in the retrieval with ST)
are normally printed, unless the U keyword is also
specified, in which case stations are printed in
numerical order within agency.
EXAMPLE(S)
Restrict retrieval of
stations within the polygon
to only those stations
in the state of
Michigan.
PGM=R£T,PURP=305B/STA,
LT=I,L=4645283,L=8950,
L=4635,L=90,
L=4610454,L=8950102,
L=46,L=8935,L=46452S3,
L=8925,
ST=26,
P»11,P-300,P-400,
WQ-RET
4-35
-------
Retrieve an inventory for PGM=INVENT,PURP=104B6/STA,
the stations that are in the BS=090S,
Nebraska portion of the North ST=31,
Platte River Basin.
SOME COMMON ERRORS:
The ST keyword and the STC keyword are not
interchangeable. ST is a station restrictor, STC a
station selector; consequently, each functions
differently. If stations are to be selected within a
state without regard to other station selection
criteria, then STC should be used.
WQ-RET
4-36
-------
STCNTY
CLASSIFICATION: Station Restrictor Keyword
USE: This keyword is used in conjunction with a station
selector keyword to further limit the stations that are
selected to those within the state-county specified.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
STCNTY=SSCCC,
where:
ss is the two-digit FIPS code for the state
desired
ccc is the three-digit FIPS code for the county
within that state. Leading zeros must be
specified.
DEFAULT VALUES: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
You must specify all five digits for this keyword, for
example:
STCNTY=51001,
'You may specify the STCNTY keyword up to 30 times in
one retrieval.
This keyword must be used in conjunction with at least
one station selector keyword.
Valid FIPS state and county codes are found in Appendix
C to this part of the Handbook.
This keyword is valid for all programs except REG and
STA.
EXAMPLE(S:
Retrieve only those stations PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
whose primary station numbers A=14AGNFS9,
are between 070009 and 070029 B=P,5=070009,5=070029,
and which are also in Fairfax STCNTY=51059,
County, Virginia. BD-730101,P=ll,P=1045,
P=300,
WQ-RET
4-37
-------
Using the INDEX retrieval PGM=IN0EX;, ?URP:=.20S7LO'C,
format, retrieve only the SS=Q214,
stations in the Potomac ST-51,STCNTY»51059,
River basin (0214) that are ST=24,STCNTY=24031,
also in Fairfax County (059) STCNTY=24033,
Virginia (51) and Montgomery
(031) and Prince Georges (033)
counties Maryland (24).
WQ-RET
4-38
-------
u
ONLYU,
NOTU,
CLASSIFICATION: Station Restrictor Keywords
USE:
These keywords are used with a station selector keyword
to restrict a retrieval to all stations within
specified agency codes.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
U=agency-code,
ONLYU,
NOTU,
DEFAULT VALUE(S:
U:
ONLYU;
NOTU:
specifies the agency for which
stations are to be retrieved,
where agency-code is the one-to-
eight character agency code
assigned to the agency responsible
for collecting and entering the
data into the WQF. The stations
retrieved will be listed in
ascending numerical sequence within
agency code.
specifies that the stations
retrieved via one or more
U keywords are to be
listed in-the order of the station
selection keyword (e..g... RM.I -or LT,L!
rather than in numerical sequence.
There is no value associated with
this keyword.
specifies that the agencies
referenced by one or more U
keywords are to be excluded
from the retrieval. There
is no value associated with this
keyword. This keyword preserves
the order of stations established
by station selector keywords.
None.
Not applicable.
Not applicable.
WQ-RET
4-39
-------
NOTES ON USAGE:
Any number of U keywords can be specified
retrieval request.
in a single
The A keyword and U keyword are not interchangeable.
The A keyword is used as a station selector, usually in
conjunction with the S keyword; the U keyword is used
as a restrictor to limit selected stations to those
within specific agencies. (The A keyword is used when
selecting stations with the S keyword; the U keyword is
used when not selecting stations by station number.)
These keywords are valid with all WQF retrieval
programs except STA, REG, and ALLPARM.
NOTU and ONLYU are mutually exclusive,
be used in the same retrieval.
i.e. both cannot
Stations are printed in station order within agency in
the order the agencies are specified.
A listing of the current agency codes is available in a
STORET help data set named AGENCODE.
EXAMPLE(S;
Retrieve data from
only those stations in
Gogebic County, Michigan
which belong to agency
14AGNFS9.
Retrieve data from only
those stations in Gogebic
County, Michigan which
do not belong to agency
14AGNFS9.
Retrieve data from stations
within the specified
polygon belonging to
agency 14AGNFS9, and have
the selected stations listed
in order by the latitude
and longitude coordinates.
PGM=RET,PURP=3G5B/STA,
STC=26,CO=53,
U=14AGNFS9,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
STC=26,CO=53,
NOTU,U=14AGNFS9,
P=11,P=300,?=400,
BD-730101,
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
LT=I,L=4645283,L=8950,
L=4535,L=90,L=4610454,
L=8950102,L-46,L=8935,
L=4645283,L=8925,
ONLYU,U=14AGNFS9,
P=11,P=30C,P=400,
BD=7301C1,
WQ-RET
4-40
-------
CLASSIFICATION: Station Restrictcr Keyword
USE: This keyword is used to limit a retrieval request
those stations with a specific attribute or combin
of attributes as descriced'by station masks. A st
mask is a computer device which contains one bit cf
information on every STORE! station. Masks are created
by the STORET programming staff to be used by all
STORE! users, or they may be created by TR use
TORE!
(usinc ?GM=NOPAR) to meet their individual needs.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
EXTRACT=^ mask-name operator mask-name . .
where mask-name is the system name for
any existing STORE! mask, and operator
is a valid LOGICAL operator •' 'AND' .
'OR' }.
Mask names and operators may be cornsined in
any logically consistent fash.cn, using
parentheses where necessary to eliminate
ambiguity.
DEFAULT VALUES: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
A mask has been created for each STORE! parameter,
identifying the attribute 'parameter nnn is present at
this station' for every station on the system. The
names of these masks are the same as the parameter
number.
Masks have been created to facilitate retrieval by four
of the 129 priority pollutant groups. The four masks
are: PRIPOLIN for inorganics, PRIPOLME for metals,
PRIPOLPE for pesticides, and PRIPOLOR for organics.
The STORET help data set named PRIORITY.POLUTANT.GROUPS
lists the parameter numbers included in each group.
Masks have also been created to facilitate retrieval by
station type. The STORET'help data set named
STATION.TYPE contains a list of valid station type
codes (masks) which may be combined in any order to
retrieve stations with particular station type
. attributes.
WQ-RET
—4-41
-------
Users may create masks utilizing the retrieval program
NOPAR. Masks may be created for stations? in. a specific
area that are, for example, .sampling specific
parameters during a specific time period a specified
number of times per year. The criteria for a mask may
be as sophisticated or as simple as a user desires.
The EXTRACT keyword can then be used to restrict to
those stations identified in a user-created mask. When
utilizing user-created masks, a job control language
'JCD data definition (DD) statement must be used to
indicate the location of the mask. See the description
of the NOPAR program in Section 7, Advanced Retrieval
Programs- and Their Special Keywords, for more detail on
this capability.
EXTRACT may be used with all WQF programs except REG
and STA, and serves as a station restrictor, to be used
in conjunction with a station selection keyword such as
LT, L, RMI, or STC, to limit the numoer of stations
retrieved to those meeting both the -station selection
criteria AND the mask.criteria. Note that the EXTRACT
keyword functions to retrieve stations, not to print
data. The parameter keyword P must be specified as
usual to obtain data listings.
Stations are printed in the order that the station
selection keywords (specified in the retrieval with
EXTRACT) are normally printed., unless the U keyword is
also specified, in which case stations are printed in
numerical order within agency.
Note the use of the MASK station selector keyword
whenever no.other station selector is specified in a
retrieval with the EXTRACT keyword.
SOME REPRESENTATIVE USES:
This keyword might be used to limit a retrieval to
stations which sample a particular parameter, thus
eliminating from the retrieval any station which has no
observations of that particular parameter. In the
event that the parameter is infrequently measured (a
newly discovered toxic parameter, for example), the use
of the EXTRACT keyword can result in a major cost
reduction in the retrieval. Through the use of masks
built by the user with the NOPAR program (described in
Section 7), the retrieval can be very effectively
limited to stations with minimum acceptable quantities
of data.
WQ-RET
4-42
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
Obtain an inventory of
stations in Maryland
(STC 24) which sample
eith'er parameter 300 or
parameter 400.
Obtain an inventory of
stations in Delaware
(STC 10) which have at
least one observation of
Plutonium (22010) as well
as either one observation
of Total Uranium (22601)
or one observation of
Dissolved Uranium (22603).
Obtain an inventory of
stations in Colorado (STC 08
which have either parameter
present in each of the
following oairs:
608 - 610
10 - 11
400 - 430
PGM=INVENT,PURP=305B/STA,
STC=24,
EXTRACT=3QOOR400,
PGM=INVENT,PURP=305B/STA,
STC=10,
EXTRACTS 22601QR22603 )
AND22010,
PGM=INVENT,PURP=3G5B/STA,
STC=08,
EXTRACT*(6080R610?
AiND (IQORll)AND
(4000R430), '
Obtain an inventory of all
ambient stream stations
under agency code 1110NET.
Obtain an inventory of all
effluent stations for the
state of Delaware.
Obtain an inventory of the
ambient stream stations in
Maryland which also have
sampled parameter 650
(total phosphorus as P04)
during 1978.
PGM-INVENT,
PURP=208/STA PLANNING STUDY,
A=1110NET,
EXTRACT*AMBNT- AND STREAM,
PGM=INVENT,
PURP=305B/STA ANNUAL REPORT,
STC=10,
EXTRACT=PIPE,
PGM-RET,PURP-305B/STA,
STC=24,
BD=78,ED=78,
EXTRACT=(650ANDAMBNTANDSTREAM!
WQ-RET
4-43
-------
SOME COMMON ERRORS:
Even though a retrieval has EXTRACT references to
specific parameter codes, it uses- those only for
purposes of station selection.
For example:
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
STC = 51,EXTRACT* 315150R31516,
will NOT print-any results. In spite of references to
parameters 31515 and 31516, a retrieval must specify
(via the P keyword) which parameters are to be printed.
It is NOT necessary to print the parameters referenced
by the EXTRACT. The following is acceptable:
PGM=RET,?URP=305B/STA,
STC = 51,EXTRACT = 315150R31516,
P=300,P=400,P=610,P=395600,P=10,
and will print data on parameters 300, 400, 610, 39560,
and 10 for all STORET stations in Virginia (STC 51)
with at least one observation of either parameter 31515
or 31516.
WQ-RET
4-44
-------
ARCLASS
CLASSIFICATION: Station Restrictor Keyword
USE:
Some infrequently-used data in the Water Quality File
have been archived, i.e., taken off-line, in order to
save on-line storage costs and space. This keyword is
used to retrieve data for stations whose data have been
archived.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
ARCLASS=
i/n[/m...
ALL
where n and m are any
two digit whole numbers
of the archive ciassies!
to be retrieved. Each
archive class number
must be preceded by a
slash; a leading zero
must be specified. Any
number of individual
archive class numbers
may be specified.
Specifying ARCLASS=ALL
will retrieve all data
stored whether archived
or regular on-line data,
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
The archive status of parametric data for any given
station can be determined by examining the archive
class code printed in the station header information
for the station. (See Section 2 of this WQ-RET chapter
for a detailed description of the information contained
within station header information.) An archive class
other than 00 (on-line) indicates that data for that
station have been archived.
This keyword acts as a station restrictor/ consequently
it must be accompanied by one or more station selector
keywords within the retrieval.
This keyword is valid for all programs except INDEX and
STA.
WQ-RET
4-45
-------
EXAMPLE',
Retrieve all data that
may have been archived
for any station within
the agency.
?GM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,
ARCLASS=/01/02,
WQ-RET
4-46
-------
CLASSIFICATION7: Data Selection Keyword
USE: This keyword is used to specify the individual water
quality parameters that are to be retrieved.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
P=parameter-code, where parameter-code is one of
the five-digit water quality
parameters defined within STORET.
Leading zeroes need not be
specified.
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
This keyword is mandatory for all programs which
retrieve data except INVENT, INV120, and ALLPARM.
Up to 50 parameters may be specified for the RET, MS?
and STAND programs; up to 10 parameters may be
specified for PLOT, MEAN, MSP with the MEAN keyword
specified, and REG; up to 6 parameters may be specified
for PUNCH; up to 500 parameters may be specified for
INVENT and INV120; and up to 2000 parameters may be
specified for ALLPARM. If more parameters are
specified than are allowed, the retrieval does not run.
Parameters retrieved are listed in the order specified
in the retrieval request.
'P=0', will produce a blank column on printouts which
may be used as space for user comments or notes.
The same parameter may be requested more than once in a
retrieval request.
Complete listings of the STORET parameter definitions
and codes can be obtained via the computer as described
in Appendix B.
WQ-RET
4-49
-------
P must be specified with the programs RET, PUNCH,
STAND, MEAN, REG, MSP, and PLOT, unless 'PRT=PAR,' is
specified, which replaces the printing of data values
with a station description paragraph. When not
specified for programs INVENT, INV120, and ALLPARM, all
parameters stored will be retrieved.
EXAMPLE!S)
Retrieve data on water
temperature(11), D0(300),
pHUOO), ammonia( 610),
iron(1045), and coliforms
(31501).
PGM=RET,PUR?=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400,P=61G
P=1045,P=31501,
BD=730101
WQ-RET
4-50
-------
PARONLY
CLASSIFICATION: Data Selection Keyword
USE: This keyword is used to specify that parametric data
associated with each water quality sample are to be
printed only when values for certain selected
parameters are present; it is used in conjunction with
the P keyword.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
PARONLY=n, where n is a whole number from one to
ten which represents the number of
parameters which must be present in
the sample in order to print data for
all parameters specified in the
retrieval request.
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
The value of n can not exceed 10 or be greater than the
number of P keywords specified within the retrieval
request.
It is important to note that the parameters to which
PARONLY refers are those that appear first in the
string of parameters specified. For this reason, the
parameters that are referenced by PARONLY must be
specified before other parameters.
This keyword is used in conjunction with the P keyword.
It is positioned after the last P keyword within the
retrieval request.
This keyword is valid with all programs which retrieve
data except INVENT and INV120.
SOME REPRESENTATIVE USES:
This keyword is most helpful when used to assure the
presence of one or more parameter values before
producing output which will be used for such things as
establishing a water quality index, or input to a river
basin model.
WQ-RET
4-51
-------
EXAMPLE;s;
Retrieve data only
when there are values
for the first three
parameters (11,300,400
PGM=RET, PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400,P=610,
P=1045,P=31501,
30*730101
WQ-RET
4-52
-------
?AKU
PAR?
CLASSIFICATION: Data Selection Keywords
USE: These two keywords are used together to convert a
stored value for a parameter to an equivalent value
expressed in different units.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
PARU=new-units, where new-units is a string of up to
eight characters which denotes any
valid unit measurement expression.
PARF=factor, where factor is the multiplication
factor that will properly convert the
parameter value from its stored value
to its desired value.
DEFAULT VALUES: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
These keywords are valid with all programs which
retrieve data except INVENT and INV120. PARU and PARF
'should not be used with the MEAN program to compute
loadings or perform calculations.
Both keywords must be specified for each parameter
whose units and values are to be changed for reporting
purposes. These keywords do not alter the stored units
and values for the parameters.
STORET assumes that a correct conversion factor has
been specified. Consequently, it performs the
conversion according to the PARU, PARF instructions
without any check on the values specified.
The PARU keyword is positioned immediately after the P
keyword to which it refers, and immediately before its
associated PARF keyword.
The PARU and PARF keywords may be specified in pairs
for any number of parameters within a single retrieval
request.
WQ-RET
4-53
-------
EXAMPLE(S)
Retrieve raw data and PGM = RET, PURP = 3C5B/S.JA,
convert the values for A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
parameter 1045 (total iron) P=ll,P=300,P=400,P=61C,
from ug/1 to mg/1. P=1045,?ARU=MG/L,
PARF'.QOl,
30=730101,
Retrieve raw data and PGM=RET, P(JRP=305B/STA,
convert parameter 916 from A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
mg/1 to ug/1. PARF=1000,
WQ-RET
4-54
-------
?RV
?LV
PHV
CLASSIFICATION: Data Selection Keywords
USE
These keywords are used to specify that parametric data
associated with specified water quality samples are to
be printed only when the values for a specific
parameter or parameters within the sample fall within a
specified range.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
PRV=parameter-code,
?LV=low-value,
PHV=high-value,
where parameter-code is one cf
the five-digit water quality
parameters defined within STORZ7,
and specifies the parameter whose
values are to be compared with
the values specified by PLV and
PHV.
where low-value and high-value
are any numerical value, including
a decimal value, between -S99I+7
and +899E+7. PLV establishes che
low value of the desired range of
values for parameter-code; PHV
establishes the high value of the
desired range of values for
parameter-code.
DEFAULT VALUES: PHV=+1E+50,
PLV=-1E*50,
NOTES ON USAGE:
If the PRV keyword is used in a retrieval, either, or
both, the PLV and PHV keywords must also be specified.
A maximum of two sets of these keywords may be
specified in a retrieval request. If two sets are
specified, then both conditions must be satisfied
before data will be printed.
The PRV keyword may specify a parameter other than
those whose values are to be printed if the PRV
parameter's values lie within the specified range.
(The parameter keyword-P is used to indicate which
parameters are to be printed.)
WQ-RET
4-55
-------
EXAMPLES;
To specify a single value" for a" parameter-'-) set- PLV and
PHV equal to the same value.
These keywords are valid with all retrieval programs
which retrieve parametric data, exceot INVENT and
INV120.
Retrieve parameters 400, 300, PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
and 310 when the value for A=14AGNFS9,3=070009,
parameter 10 is between 12 PRV=10,PLV=12,PHV=18,
and 18 degrees, and when the PRV=30Q,PLV=8,?HV=8,
value for parameter 300 is 8. P=400,P=300,P=310,
WQ-RET
4-56
-------
BD
ED
CLASSIFICATION: Data Selection Keywords
USE:
These keywords are used to restrict the parameter
values to be retrieved by specifying that data sampled
before (3D) and/or after (ED) the specified dates are
to be eliminated from the data retrieved.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
jyymmdd]
BD= •' yymm > ,
I yy )
(yymmdd}
ED= / yymm \ ,
(yy )
values may be specified in any of
the three formats shown, where
yy = last two digits of the
calendar year
mm = two digit numeric for the
month of the year
dd = two digit numeric for the
day of the month
Leading zeroes must be specified.
DEFAULT VALUES: BD-010101,
ED=991231,
KEYWORD
VALUE
entered
assumed
BD
ED
yy
yymm
yy
yymm
yyOlOl
yymmOl
yy!231
yymm31
WQ-RET
4-57
-------
NOTES ON USAGE:
These keywords are valid with all programs which
retrieve data.
These keywords apply to all of the parameters selected
within the retrieval request.
Either keyword may be specified; they do not have to be
specified in pairs.
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve data collected
on or after July 15, 1972
Retrieve data collected
on or before July 15, 1972
Retrieve data collected
between April 5, 1966 and
August 18, 1970.
Retrieve data collected
during the entire years of
1972, 1973 and 1974.
Retrieve data collected
between the beginning of
April 1972 and the end of
October 1974.
SOME COMMON ERRORS:
PGM=RET,PURP = 30 5B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=720715,
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
ED=720715,
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=66Q405, ED=7Q0318,
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=72,ED=74,
PGM=RET,PQRP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
P»11,P-300,P»400,
BD=7204,ED=7410,
If a date range is specified when no data were sampled,
the result will be no retrieval output.
WQ-RET
4-58
-------
3T
ET
CLASSIFICATION: Data Selection Keywords
USE:
These keywords are used to restrict the parameter
values to be retrieved to those which were sampled
during a specific range of time during the day.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
BT=tttt,
ET=tttt,
where tttt is the time of day
based on a 24-hour-per-day
military time system. All four
digits must be specified; leading
zeros must be specified. BT
specifies the beginning time, ET
the ending time.
DEFAULT VALUES;
NOTES ON USAGE;
BT=0000,
ET=2400,
These keywords are valid for all programs which
retrieve data, and apply to all parameters selected
within the retrieval request.
When more than one time period is specified in a
retrieval, the periods must be specified in ascending
order.
Either keyword may be specified;
specified in pairs.
they do not have to be
WQ-RET
4-59
-------
EXAMPLE:
Retrieve data sampled between PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
the hours of 8:00 am to 11:00 A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
am, and between 3:00 pm and P=ll,P=300,P=400,
7:30 pm. BD=720715,
BT=0800,ET=1100,
BT=1500,ET=19'30,
WQ-RET
4-60
-------
BG
EG
CLASSIFICATION: Data Selection Keywords
USE:
These keywords are used to restrict retrievals to
parameter values sampled during specific months and
days of each year. Samples with dates before and/or
after the specified date groupings will be eliminated
from the retrieval.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
BG=mmdd, where mm is the two digit numeric for the
month of the year, and dd is the two digit
EG=mmdd, numeric for the day of the month. (yy for
year is not an option with these keywords.)
Leading zeroes must be specified, and both
mm and dd must be specified for each keyword.
BG specifies the beginning of the date group,
EG specifies the end of the date group.
DEFAULT VALUES: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
These keywords are valid for all programs which
retrieve data.
If used within a retrieval, both keywords must be
specified.
When more than one date group is specified, the groups
must be specified in ascending date order. A date
group may span one or more months, or one or more days.
BG and EG combinations may be specified a maximum of
three times in a retrieval.
If BG and EG are not used, no groupings will result;
data retrieved will be for periods indicated by BD
and/or ED, or for the period of record, if BD and/or ED
are not used.
SOME REPRESENTATIVE USES:
This keyword is helpful with season dependent
retrievals where one or more seasons (or sets of
months) are needed.
WQ-RET
4-61
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve data that'exists PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
for the month of January A=14AGNFS9,S=070C09,
and for the last four P=300,P=400,
months of all years between : 30=660101,ED=75123i,
1966 and 1975. BG=0101,EG=0131,
BG=Q901,EG=1231,
SOME COMMON ERRORS:
Date groups may not overlap (e.g., BG=0201, EG=0431,
BG=0301, EG=0631, is invalid), nor may they span the
end of a year (e.g., BG=1101, EG=0131, is invalid, but
BG-1101, EG-1231, BG=0101, EG=0131, is valid).
WQ-RET
4-62
-------
CLASSIFICATION: Data Selection Keyword
USE: At data storage time, users may associate one of
several remark codes with data values stored, for the
purpose of providing clarifying information on the
circumstances surrounding the sampling or analysis
technique. The R keyword is used to restrict the
retrieval of parameters to those values stored with
selected remark codes.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
EPA-remark-codes
ALL
OFF
*
where EPA-remark-codes is a string of one or more of
the following valid EPA remark codes:
A Value reported is mean of two or more
determinations.
B Results based upon colony counts outside
the acceptable range.
C Calculated.
D Indicates field measurement.
E Indicates extra samples taken at
composite stations.
F In the case of species, F indicates female
sex.
G Value reported is maximum of two or more
determinations.
H Value based on field kit determination;
results may not be accurate.
J Estimated value; value not accurate.
K Actual value is known to be less than value
given.
L Actual value is known to be greater than
value given.
M Presence of material verified but not
quantified. In the case of temperature
or oxygen reduction potential, M indicates
a negative value. In the case of species,
M indicates male sex.
N Presumptive evidence of presence of
material.
0 Sampled, but analysis lost.
S Laboratory test.
WQ-RET
4-63
-------
T Value reported is less than criteria of
detection.
U Indicates material was analyzed for but
not detected. In the case of species, U
indicates undetermined sex.
W Value observed is less than lowest value
reportable under "T" code.
ALL, retrieves all data for which a non-blank
remark code is stored. This value is
equivalent to specifying all of the above
alphabetic EPA remark codes.
OFF, disables remark code selection restrictions
until superceded by a subsequent R keyword
within the retrieval request. All values
are retrieved regardless of remark code stored
*, retrieves only data having no remark codes
stored.
DEFAULT VALUE: R=OFF,
NOTES ON USAGE:
This keyword is valid for all raw data retrievals and
inventory programs except ALLPARM.
The R keyword may be specified as many times as needed
in each retrieval, and applies to all parameters which
follow it within the retrieval request, until
superceded by a subsequent R keyword.
Data owned by the U.S. Geological Survey (STORET agency
code 112WRD) can of course be similarly restricted via
the R keyword in the retrieval. However, some remark
codes may mean different things than the EPA codes.
Appendix 6 contains a list of the remark codes used by
USGS (A=112WRD,). Most of the commonly used codes (J,
K,.L, M) have the same meaning for both agencies. Some
codes (such as F, G, X, and Y) have different meanings.
Users are cautioned against use of these codes as
retrieval restrictors in retrievals involving a mix of
agencies which include USGS. Refer to the descriptions
of the U and NOTU keywords for ways of controlling
inclusion of USGS data in vour retrieval.
WQ-RET
4-64
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve only those
values of parameters 11
and 1045 which have remark
codes of K or L. Retrieve
all values of parameters
300 and 400.
Retrieve data stored for
parameters 11 and 610 only
if no remark codes have been
stored with the values.
PGM=RET,?URP=305B/STA,
A=14AGN'FS9,5 = 070009,
R=KL,Pall,?=1045,
R=OFF,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,
PGM=RET,?URP=3053/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=C70Q09,
R=*,P=11,P=610,
BD=7301C1,
WQ-RET
4-65
-------
UD
LD
CLASSIFICATION: Data Selection Keywords
USE:
One
the values that can be stored with sampling data
is the depth at which the sample was taken. The UD and
LD keywords are "used to restrict the parametric values
to be retrieved to those sampled above, below, or
between specified depths.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES
UD=upper-depth,
LD=lower-depth,
where uppar-depth is any whole
number between zero and 999999
specifying the upper sample depth
limitation. Data sampled at
depths closer to the surface
(values numerically less than the
upper-depth value) will not be
retrieved.
where lower-depth is any whole
number between zero and 999999
specifying the lower sample depth
limitation. Data sampled at
depths closer to the bottom
(values numerically greater than
the lower-depth value) will not
be retrieved.
Leading zeroes need not be
specified for either UD or LD.
Values are assumed to be in feet
unless the D keyword is specified,
(D=M specifies depth in meters.)
DEFAULT VALUES:
NOTES ON USAGE:
UD=0,
LD=999999,
These keywords are valid with all programs which
retrieve data.
Either keyword may be specified; they do not have to be
specified in pairs.
If UD and/or LD are specified, samples which are not
stored with depth values are disregarded.
WQ-RET
4-67
-------
Each keyword may be specified once and if specified,
applies to data for all parameters selected within the
retrieval request. If either is specified more than
once, only the last-specified value will be valid.
The units associated with the values for UD and LD are
assumed to be feet unless the 'D=M,' instruction is
specified to request a conversion from feet to meters.
Appendix E contains a list of location codes which may
be stored in the sample depth fiel-d to denote inplant
sampling for municipal or industrial stations.
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve samples between 5
and 20 feet only.
Retrieve all samples from a
depth of 5 feet and below.
Retrieve all samples taken
from a depth of 20 feet and
above.
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
P=300,
UD=5,LD=20,
BD=730101,
PGM=RET,PURP=305S/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
P=300,
UD=5,
BD=730101,
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=07C009,
P=300,
LD=20,
BD=730101,
WQ-RET
4-.6 8
-------
CLASSIFICATION: Data Selection Keyword
This keyword is used to specify the units associated
with sample depths.
USE:
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
D= IF ( , where
Mj
D=F, specifies that depths are to be printed
in feet.
D=M, specifies that depths are to be printed
in meters.
DEFAULT VALUE: D=F,
NOTES ON USAGE:
This keyword is valid for all programs which retrieve
data except INVENT and INV120.
This keyword may be specified only once within a single
retrieval request and applies to all parameters
retrieved. If specified more than once, only the last
specified value will be valid.
Depth is stored in the WQF in feet, with values rounded
to the nearest whole foot. Data entered in meters is
converted to feet before storing. Data can be
retrieved in feet or in the nearest tenth of a meter.
This can result in an inconsistency when depth
information in meters is input to STORET, and is then
retrieved with D=M specified. Users should be aware of
this potential error, as illustrated in the following
example:
Assume a sample depth of 0.5 meter is input. This
value is converted by STORET to feet (1.64 feet) and
stored to the nearest whole foot (2 feet). If this
depth is retrieved in meters (D=M), the stored value (2
feet) is converted to meters (0.61 meter) and printed
out to the nearest tenth of a meter (0.6 meter).
WQ-RET
4-69
-------
EXAMPLE(S:
Retrieve data and print
depth information in
meters rather than in feet,
PGM--RET", PURP= 30'SB/STA,
A=14AGN?S9,5=070009,
P=11,P=30C,P=400,?=610,
P=1045,P=31501,
BD=730101,
D=M,
JATt
7J/01.-01
J /OS/1;
' /Je/04
: / .j ; / 3 5
7 • ; ^ / .. j
: o •» .' : i
• , i ;/ ;.„'
; ' •; ; ,. ; 1}
' / j b .• ! 2
* ' Jo/ Zb
7 .' ij ; ,.' \ 9
: /Od/27
:5/05/16
' }/ Oi/ 2*
75/06/11
:S/04/3«
75,07/02
75/07/10
75/07/15
Ti/07/22
7$, '03.' 2 "
75/09/24
7Vl'J/02
: j/ .')/C7
75/iu/U
; v uv : i
.'5/11/04
75/04/21
7&, -OS/Id
;»/o7/u
:« OCVTH
AY *£7iP.
15
!0
30
lu
i j
^ ^
•: d
JO
25 0 : . 1
10 32.1
jo ;:.!
so
15
0 '30 03.0
9 30
1 00 32. !
0 00
0 40
0 IS
a ic 02.7
•) ja
0 jO
I 00 01.5
0 1C
1 00 01.5
0 00
0 JO
0 15
0 JO 06.7
3 10
1 00
00011
4A7ES
F'AriN
! J .
49 .
6J.
63 .
^"J
1 1 .
lO
63
73.
3 7 .
55.
60 .
6 1
72
73
73
' 1
• 6
66
5J
50
Si.
4 7 .
43
43
44
6J
57
59
71
0
.3
0
5
;
J
i
0
0
0
0
0
•J
0
0
0
0
0
0
rj
0
0
0
•3
0
0
0
0
0
u
00)00 00400 00610
00 ?» SrtJ-H,
^G/L 5U IG/l
11 i 6.50
10 6 i.>0
3 7 6.50
i 2 *. 50
i 1 !. jj
j 4 6 . 00
: ! * 3 . • o
132 6 . ; 0
1 ' 'j . 7 '3
j * 6 . 60
7 a 6.50
6 . 6u
10.2 6.00
6.00
3.3 7.20
6.42
7.4 6.70
6.40
6.00
6.00
J.I 6. 70
6.00
5. 70
9.7 6 . 00
6.00
10.6 6.5C
6.00
11.4 6.00 ) OSOK
9.7 6. 60 0 3SOK
9.7 6.60 0 3SO«
3.4 6. 30 0 OSOK
3.4 6.30 0 050
j 70009 LONG:.
46 14 11. : 039 21 43.0 1
LA.<£ 5UP£P[Ot> 070793
14AC.N? S9
300'3 1ETS9 ;€?TH .".AJS 00
31045 11501
i ?cs ror :OL:
UG/L 100*1
50 10
140 100
1500
140 13
5.'
J'30
CiO :.
::-3 .30
140 13
23J )'3J
620 10
120
70
100
100
so*
90
WQ-RET
4-70
-------
30T
CLASSIFICATION: Data Selection Keyword
USE:
This keyword is used to specify whether bottom (mud)
samples are to be excluded or included in the data
retrieved. (This keyword refers only to samples
explicitly stored as bottom (mud) samples, and does not
necessarily refer to the lowest sample depth stored.)
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES
BOT=
W
where
BOT=B,
specifies that only bottom samples
are to be retrieved. All other
values will be excluded.
BOT=W, specifies that bottom samples are to
be excluded from the data retrieved.
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
NOTES .ON USAGE:
This keyword is valid for all programs which retrieve
data except INVENT and INV120.
Only one BOT keyword may be specified in a single
retrieval request and applies to all parameters
retrieved. If more than one are specified, only the
last-specified value will be valid.
If BOT is not specified,
samples are retrieved.
EXAMPLE(S)
Retrieve
samples.
only bottom
then both bottom and water
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
P=11,P=300,?=400,
30=730101,
30T=B,
WQ-RET
4-71
-------
DSROC
CLASSIFICATION: Data Selection Keyword
USE:
This keyword is used to specify whether the data
retrieved is to include only regular (grab) samples or
only composite samples.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
DSROC=
where
DSROC=1,
DSROC=2
specifies that data values from
regular (grab) samples are to be
retrieved. Data from composite
samples are to be excluded.
specifies that data values from
composite samples are to be
retrieved. Data from regular
(grab) samples are to be excluded
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
This keyword
data.
is valid for all programs which, retrieve
Only one DSROC keyword may be specified within a single
retrieval request and it applies to all samples. If
more than one are specified, only the last-specified
keyword will be valid.
If only specific composite value types are of interest,
use the ANC keyword. DSROC retrieves or excludes all
values stored as composites.
If DSROC is not specified within a retrieval request,
then both regular (grab) and composite sample data will
be retrieved.
EXAMPLE(S:
Retrieve data only from
composite samples.
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
P=11,P=30Q,P=400,
BD=730101,
DSROC*2,
WQ-RET
4-73
-------
ANC
CLASSIFICATION: Data Selection Keyword
USE: When storing data resulting from sophisticated
composite samples, certain calculated values associated
with the sample also can be stored. This keyword is
used to specify the types of composite values to be
retrieved.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
ANC=values, where values is a string of one or more of the
following characters which invoke the functions
described:
A specifies that the computed average values
are to be retrieved
H specifies that the maximum values are to
be retrieved
L specifies that the minimum values are to
be retrieved
*5 specifies that the measurement taken after
the compositing process has been completed
is to be retrieved
I or N specifies that the number of samples (that
comprise the composite) is to be retrieved
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
This keyword is valid for all programs which retrieve
data.
Values for the above ANC values must have been stored
for the composite. STORET will not compute them as a
result of this keyword being specified.
If ANC is not specified, then all values stored for
composite samples will be printed.
If the data to be retrieved includes any composite
value types, i.e. A, H, and #, ANC should be used to
specify which of the values are to be considered for
calculations and analyses.
WQ-RET
4-75
-------
EXAMPLE(S:
Retrieve only average
values for composite
samples.
Retrieve high and low
values for composite
samples.
PGM=RET,PURP-305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD«73C101,
ANC=A,
PGM-RZT,PURP-305B/STA
A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
P-11,P-300,P»400,
BD-730101,
ANC=HL,
WQ-RET
4-76
-------
CLASSIFICATION: Data Selection Keyword
USE:
When storing data into the WQF, users have the option
of protecting, or locking, the data from retrieval by
others for the purpose of checking the validty of the
data before releasing it. This keyword is used to
free, or unlock, the locked data for retrieval. All
WQF data remains protected for storage purposes by
users other than the owner of the data.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE
UK=unlocking-key, where unlocking-key is the one-to-
where unlocking-key is the one-tc
eight alphanumeric unlocking key
for the agency responsible for
storing the data.
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
This keyword
data.
is valid for all programs which retrieve
This keyword can be used only once within a retrieval
request. If specified more than once, only the .last-
specified value will be valid. If the retrieval
involves two or more agencies who have stations with
locked data, multiple retrievals must be run in order
to retrieve all locked data of interest.
Data is locked at sample level, not station level.
Therefore users can have part of their data locked, and
part unlocked.
When a retrieval encounters locked data, a diagnostic
message indicating the agency code, station number and
unlocking date for the locked data is printed.
Users must obtain unlocking keys directly from the
respective agency. STORET User Assistance does not
give out this information. Users can reference the
STORET help data set named AGENCODE to identify an
individual to contact within an agency of interest.
UK is usually used in conjunction with the A or U
station identification keywords. However, it can also
be used with other station identification keywords.
WQ-RET
4-77
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve data including
values locked with an
associated locking code of
12345678.
SOME COMMON ERRORS:
PGM=RET,PUR?=3053/STA,
A=UAGNFS9, 5 = 070009,
P=11,P=300,?=400,
BD=73C101,
UK=12345673,
Failure to specify an unlocking key when the data are
locked, or failure to specify an unlocking key
correctly via the UK keyword, will result in no data.
WQ-RET
4-78
-------
AGGR
CLASSIFICATION: Data Selection Keyword
USE:
The AGGR keyword is used to combine (or aggregate) data
retrieved from a group of stations into a single
station according to the geographical area specified
with the AGGR keyword.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
AGGR =
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
/ STATE
COUNTY
MAJORBASIN
MINORSAS IN
SUBBASIN
CELLaaaaaXbbbbb
ALL
where the value specifies
the geographical area into
which the retrieved data
are to be aggregated.
This keyword is valid
data.
for all programs which retrieve
Cells are.-used -to~.def Ln.e an. -ar_ea..specif ie.d i.n .seconds
of latitude (aaaaa) by seconds of longitude (bbbbb).
The maximum area which may be specified by the CELL...
value is approximately 27 degrees latitude by 27
degrees longitude (99999 seconds high, 99999 seconds
wide). Cells are computed from south to north,
beginning at the southeastern-most point of the
retrieval area, proceeding westerly. Leading zeros of
aaaaa and bbbbb values need not be specified.
Specifying 'AGGR=ALL,' aggregates all parametric data
for all stations retrieved as if the data were from a
single station.
EXAMPLE( S) :
Retrieve all stations in
Michigan and print the
requested data in area
aggregates whose
dimensions are 15 minutes
latitude by 30 minutes
longitude.
PGM=INVENT,PURP-305B/STA,
STC=26,
SP,
AGGR=CELL900X1800,
WQ-RET
4-79
-------
Retrieve all stations in
Michigan and print the
requested data in county
aggregates.
PGM=INVENT,PURP = 3 0 5B/STA,
STC=26,
SP,
AGGR=COUNTY,
<1959
1953
1959
1960
1961
1962
196)
1964
1965
1966
1967
1963
1969
1970
1971
1972
197)
1974
1975
1976
1977
TOTAL
STA SEC
0
I
0
1
0
2
0
0
0
4
i)
0
0
0
)
1)
2
9
0
0
19
STA END
3
0
0
0
0
0
3
0
1
0
2
3
0
2
3
10
0
3
19
26007
COUNTY
OF 08S 1 OF SAflPLE
0 0
20 )
61 12
60 11
19 3
19 10
531 43
199 19
263 26
210 27
17] 37
456 102
1107 »0
1078 94
959 19
1044 95
595 15
1127 16
6)5 22
782 26
0 3
199) 9)4
PARAMETER NUKgcR
00010
00020
900)1
00015
000)6
00060
00070
00076
00077
30090
00095
00)00
00)01
S0160
60400
60600
70100
70101
70)02
70101
rfATCR
AIR
CLOUD
tf[H3
HIMO
STREAK
rjR»
TtJRB
7RAISP
COLOR
c»oucTvr
00
30
ALCAE
OIATONS
3IATOHS
RES I DUB
DISS SOL
OISS SOL
DISS SOL
TEWP
TENP
COVER
VELOCITY
OID.rROM
FLOW
JISK
TRSIDKTfl
5ECCHI
PT-C3
AT 25C
SATUR
DESX1DS
CENTRIC
PENMATE
OISS-190
SUN
TONS/DAY
TONS PE1
CENT
CENT
PERCENT
NPM
HORTfl-O
CFS
JTO
HACH FTU
meats
UNITS
"tcaonHO
NG/L
PERCENT
TOT /*l
/NL
/*L
C HG/L
ACRZ-rr
6)9
)17
3)8
133
)21
252
39
64
1
12
27]
285
44
I
11
12
11
)
1
2
•0 <.S <) >•)
3000
0003
0030
0033
0000
0000
3300
0000
0010
0900
0101
0000
3003
0020
0003
0 .1 0 5
0 10 0 3
02)7
3003
003)
0000
0 14 6 19 !
Z6007 CCUNTY
NBAN
15.00)9
22.1987
51.6509
7.15285
199.67)
192.242
9.49««)
.60731
4.0000
.3)))]
45.194
.79959
4.6476
18.0000
94.7271
195.250
762.191
146.11)
726.000
.215000
VARIANCE
57.6400
21.3990
1542.3)
22.0)55
7551.42
344104
14)9.46
12.2)60
61.7379
M16.15
1.12257
45.1710
6241.82
100820
176)27
1680.17
.011250
STAN OEV
7.59210
4.67347
)9.2799
4.69420
36.9)92
518.110
17.9402
1.49799
7.9867]
36.1182
1.95514
6.72108
79.0052
117.521
611.455
40.1924
.106066
COB? VAJt
.50(009
.210754
.760468
.597770
.458)64
.6669)5
).995U
.759145
.904153
.249471
.191512
.079401
.3)4029
.30)141
.804867
.246447
.151144
3TANO BR
.300)39
.262761
2.1)649
.257240
4.35247
37.0600
4.02166
.4)7249
2.)0557
5.21211
.11581!
1.01)24
21.3210
91 . 5605
134.164
21.6669
.075000
«A-:NOH
29.0000
n.ogoo
100.000
30.0000
150.000
J970.00
360.000
18.0000
34 .0000
21.0000
955.000
15 . 6000
17 . 7700
IB .0000
252.300
995.000
2067.00
190.300
726.000
.110000
,;,,„„„
.000000
11.0000
.000000
.000000
20.C330
14.3000
1 .00000
1.30000
14.0000
.900000
12J.OOO
5.20000
65.7500
19.0000
). 00000
24.9000
123.000
119.900
726.000
.160000
BBS OAT;
60/ov::
59/06/13
69/06' 13
69/OS/19
69/06/19
a]/0]/12
49/01/22
•4/06/19
67/04/20
• 0/07. '1!
60/0 VI 1
61/31/12
6)/01/12
S9/07/16
61/06/13
69/06/19
60/07/11
74/03/29
67/04/0]
60/07/11
SNO 3ATE
76' 11/02
7)/OV09
11/11/19
71/07/39
72/09/1)
76'09/U
74/09/13
76/11/92
i 7/04/20
76/13/11
J6/11/02
76/11/32
65/12/21
69/9T''6
69/03/27
69/03/2)
74/09/13
74/09/1)
67/04/0)
57/04/0)
WQ-RET
4-80
-------
CLASSIFICATION: Print Control Keyword
USE:
This keyword is used to control what is to be printed
from a retrieval. Output options include combinations
of the station description paragraph and the raw data.
Station header information always prints.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
PRT =
PRT=PAR,
PRT=DATA,
PRT=BOTH,
PRT=NO,
the PRT keyword may be assigned any one of
the following values, as follows:
specifies that only the station description
paragraph is to be printed. Stored or
calculated parametric data values will
not print.
specifies that only the stored parametric
data values are to be printed.
specifies that both stored parametric data
values (and calculated values, if applicable)
and the station description paragraph are co
be printed.
specifies that the stored parametric data
values used for the analysis are not to be
printed. Calculated data values and station
header information will be printed.
DEFAULT VALUE:
NOTES ON USAGE:
PRT=DATA,
PRT=NO,
For programs RET and ALLPARM.
For all programs but RET and
ALLPARM.
This keyword is valid for all programs which retrieve
data except INVENT and INV120.
This keyword may be used only once in any retrieval
request. If specified more than once, only the last-
specified value will be valid.
The WQF analysis programs MEAN, STAND, PLOT, REG, and
MSP automatically suppress the printing of data values
used for analysis.
WQ-RET
4-83
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
Print the station PGM=RET,PURP=30SB/STA,
description paragraph along A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
with the station header P=ll,P=300,P=400,
information and the data. BD=73G101,
PRT=BOTH,
Print calculated values PGM=MEAN,PURP=305B/STA,
output by the MEAN program, A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
but do not print stored ' P=ll,P=300,P=400,P=610,
parametric data values. P=1045,P=31501,
BD=730101,
PRT=NO,
WQ-RET
4-84
-------
SHIFT,
CLASSIFICATION: Print Control Keyword
USE:
This keyword is used to shift a retrieval's station
header information from the upper right hand corner of
each page to the upper left hand corner of each page.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
SHIFT, There is no value associated with this kevword
DEFAULT VALUE: Not applicable.
NOTES ON USAGE:
This keyword is valid for all programs which retrieve
data except INVENT and INV120.
If SHIFT and HEAD are both used in a single retrieval,
care must be exercised in the specification of the HEAD
keyword character strings so that the station header
information (moved by SHIFT) does not override the
report identification information (specified by HEAD).
See further discussion under the HEAD keyword
description.
SOME REPRESENTATIVE USES:
Depending upon the information retrieved, the station
header information is often the only information on the
right half of the retrieval output. Shifting of this
header information will allow the output to be printed
on narrower paper, or to be trimmed for easier
handling.
EXAMPLE(S)
Print the station
header information in
the upper left hand
corner of each page
rather than in the
upper right hand corner.
PGM=RET,PURP=305/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,
SHIFT,
WQ-RET
4-85
-------
HEAD
CLASSIFICATION: Print Control Keyword
USE;
This keyword is used to specify user-entered report
identification information which is to be printed at
the top of each page of a retrieval. This information
is in addition to the station header information, and
optionally the station description paragraph, and is an
ideal way for users to title their retrievals.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
HEAD*text,
where text is a string of from
one to 66 alphanumeric
characters, including blanks,
which will be printed at top of
each page of the retrieval in t.h<
positions designated by the user
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
This keyword
data.
is valid for all programs which retrieve
The specified character strings may not contain any
embedded commas, but a comma must follow each line of
text.
Up to five HEAD keywords can be specified in a single
retrieval request for a total of five lines of report
heading information.
Care should be exercised when HEAD and SHIFT are used
in the same retrieval request. If the SHIFT keyword
which shifts the station header information to the left
corner of each page is specified along with the HEAD
keyword in a retrieval, 35 blanks must be left at the
beginning of each value of the HEAD keyword so that the
report
is not
identification information (specified by HEAD!
overriden by the station header information.
When used with the LOC program, the text for the HEAD
keyword may not exceed 35 characters.
WQ-RET
4-87
-------
EXAMPLES!
Print the following
two lines at the top
of each page of output:
DATA COLLECTED
SINCE 1973
SOME COMMON ERRORS:
PGM=RET,. PURP= 30 5B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400/
BD-730101,
HEAD*DATA COLLECTED,
HEAD=SINCE 1973,
When coding a lengthy value for a HEAD keyword, it is
very easy to overlook placing a comma at the end of the
instruction. The HEAD keyword is like all other
keywords in this STORET syntax requirement.
WQ-RET
4-88
-------
PRMI
CLASSIFICATION: Print Control Keyword
USE:
This keyword is used to specify that RMI coding (see
the description in this section on the RMI station
selector keyword) is to appear as an additional line of
station header information. (All other coding stored
with a station prints automatically.)
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
PRMI,
There is no value associated with this
keyword.
DEFAULT VALUE: Not applicable.
NOTES ON USAGE:
This keyword is valid for all programs which retrieve
data.
Programs INVENT, INV120, and INDEX print RMI
automatically. The keyword must also be used with
mileage-linear retrievals using the Multiple Station
Plot (MSP) program (see Section 7).
The storing of RMI information with a station is
optional. Obviously, RMI values have to have been
stored in order for this keyword to have validity.
EXAMPLE(S!
Print the RMI information
for the station along with
the station header and data.
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=1115D050,5=255420,
P=10,P=30C,P=400,
PRMI,
WQ-RET
4-89
-------
SECTION 6: BASIC RETRIEVAL PROGRAMS.
AND THEIR SPECIAL KEYWORDS
Program Name Primary Program Function
INVENT provides summary information on all parameters
. sampled at requested stations (132 character line:
INV120 provides summary information on all parameters
sampled at requested stations (120 character line/
RET list sample values for selected parameters
ALLPARM list sample values for all parameters
MEAN perform statistical calculations on parametric data
PLOT plot parametric data as a function of time
LOC plot locations of stations within a geographic area
STAND compare stored parameter values with parameter
standards
INDEX list station identification information
STA list primary and secondary station codes
PUNCH punch selected WQF data onto 80-column cards
The following pages contain a detailed discussion of each of
these programs, including a statement on the program's use, a
summary of the keywords that are special or unique to the
respective program, and sample printouts which illustrate the
printed output of the program. Immediately after each program
description are the detailed descriptions for the keywords
specific to the program.
A summary of the keywords described in this section, listed by
the program with which they are associated, follows.
WQ-RET
6-1
-------
INVENT
INV120
PSA
S?
RET
DR
BASIC RETRIEVAL PROGRAMS AND THEIR SPECIAL KEYWORDS
LOC
SCALE
NOCOUN
NOPOLPLT
TAGS,STREAMS,CLR
ALLPARM
NO SPECIAL KEYWORDS
MEAN
LV,HV
DG
SORT
BASE,VD
SF
LOAD
LOG
DM
LL1,LH1,LL2,LH2
CALCULATION OF DISSOLVED
OXYGEN SATURATION
CALCULATION OF UN-IONIZED
AMMONIA
PLOT
FACT,SYM
SC
LOAD
LOG
NOPLOT
LV,HV
STAND
LV,HV
PSI,PSA,PSO,PVS
TS
INDEX
NO SPECIAL KEYWORDS
STA
NO SPECIAL KEYWORDS
PUNCH
NO SPECIAL KEYWORDS
WQ-RET
6-2
-------
PGM=INVENT,
PGM=iNV12Q,
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
The function of these two programs is to produce
^summary listings about all parameters that have beer,
"sampled at the selected stations. Information listed
for each parameter includes the number of observations
and its period of record, as well as several
statistical expressions of the data. The programs also
produce the same summary information for selected
parameters. INVENT utilizes a 132-character print
line/ INV120 excludes two colu.-r.s of statistical data
(the coefficient of variance and the standard error) so
that the listing can print on a 120-character line.
GENERAL KEYWORD APPLICABILITY:
All station selection keywords described in Section 4
are valid with these programs. Data selection keywords
valid with INVENT and INV120 are ?, 3D, ED, 3G, EG, ET,
BT, R, AGGR, UD, LD, UK, ANC, and DSROC. The or.iy
valid print control keyword is HEAD. The keywords
SELECT and NOSELECT described in Section 5 are valid.
SOME REPRESENTATIVE USES:
These programs provide excellent summary information
for users who wish to review the coverage for their own
network, or who wish to review monitoring activities in
other geographical areas.
WQ-RET
6-5
-------
PROGRAM OUTPUT:
EXAMPLE 1
Retrieve an inventory
for station 070009
of agency 14AGNFS9.
PGM=INVENT,PURP=3C53/STA,
A=L4AGNFS9,5=070009,
.*NCNE3E
1?) 26.3513 :.]*«<
.07 a i . 3 ] 5 5 .ft 1j i
i'2 n:.:3j i.4»;i
EXAMPLE 2
Retrieve an inventory
for station 070009 of
agency 14AGNFS9 but limit
print to 120 characters.
PGM=INV120,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=0700C9,
T.H
4
). i«r
K. »4
' ;•• •
. . i« 3
•ti^'.;- ji.a.'-s i...-::: •::..:. 3
. ><;}•;
-------
PSA, I
PGM=INVENT,!
PGM=INV12C,I
CLASSIFICATION: Program Associated Keyword
USE:
The PSA keyword may be used with either the INVENT or
INV120 retrieval programs to print the station.header
information for all stations retrieved whether or not
they contain any data either for the parameter codes
specified or for the stations (if all parameters are
desired) in the retrieval request.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
PSA,
There is no value associated with this
keyword.
DEFAULT VALUE: Not applicable.
NOTES ON USAGE:
If not specified, station header information will not
print for stations which do not contain data.
EXAMPLE(S;
Print station header
information even if data
for selected parameters
are not present.
PGM-INVENT,PURP-305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,B=P,5=070001,
S=070009,
P=ll,P=300/P=4GO,P=6iO,
BD-730101,
PSA,
WQ-RET
6-7
-------
s?, I
?GM=INVENT,!
?GM=INV12G,,
CLASSIFICATION: Program Associated Keyword
USE:
The SP keyword may be used with either the INVENT or
INV120 retrieval programs to suppress printing of
individual station summaries. It produces a summary oi
the information for all stations retrieved as if the
data came from a single station. It also produces a
summary page showing parameter coverage.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
SP,
There is no value associated with this
keyword.
DEFAULT VALUE: Not applicable.
NOTES ON USAGE:
If not used, a summary for individual stations as well
as a summary which includes all stations will be
printed. If the AGGR keyword is used with SP,
summaries will print for each aggregate.
WQ-RET
6-9
-------
EXAMPLES
Retrieve a cumulative
inventory of all stations
specified and a summary
of parameter coverage. •
PGM=INVENT,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,B=?,S=070C01,
5=070009,30=730101,
P=11,P=300,P=400,P=610,
P=1045,P=31501,SP,
(T
c
110
Do
"SAN
«*.*54«
* . 5 ; S J 3
.053241
•>='• 33
.3311)34 .Oi;a
*•'*': 4 4 i •"> i
s
4
^
^ :
:39Z: .:j*3)l ;5.*000 *.
45:si . ;om!i .jjoooa .:
i\l-t, [*•'', 'il '•'•''"; ':'
'"j'L
•-1 }•' :
. ,.
;.].']•
!"•!!*•] T6":-'T
i ,•'.•:! ••;•::•:
: • '. T ' ' " > • - ' '.
' • ' •' ' 4 ^ - '
The following correspond to the circled numbers on the output.
1) The gross table was generated via the SP keyword.
This portion of the INVENT output is the standard
statistical summary provided by this program.
2) The number of stations initially stored during the
.year.
3) The number of stations deleted during the year.
4) The total number of observations made at all stations
during the year.
5) The total number of samples taken at all stations
during the year.
6) The life (period-of-record) of the stations deleted
during the year.
This INVENT output shows that stations within the specified range
were not established until 1973 during which time 5 stations were
established. In 1974, one of these 5 stations was deleted, and
another station was established. The remaining 5 stations were
deleted in 1976. Thus 4 stations had a life (period-of-record;
of at least 3 years, while 2 stations were deleted in less than 3
years.
WQ-RET
6-10
-------
?GM=RET,
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
The RET program is usually used to obtain tabular
listings of actual sample values, i.e., raw data values
which have not been manipulated in any way by the WQF
analysis programs. These listings show the sampling
dates, sampling times, depths, and values of requested
parameters. Up to 50 parameters can be specified;
values for ten parameters will be printed per pace.
GENERAL KEYWORD APPLICABILITY:
All general keywords described in Sections 4 and 5 are
valid with the RET program. The parameter code keyword
(P) should be omitted if the keyword 'PRT=PAR,' is
entered for printing of station descriptive paragraphs.
The default for the PRT keyword with program RET is
DATA.
WQ-RET
6-13
-------
PROGRAM OUTPUT:
Retrieve data on samples
taken since January 1, 1973
at station 070009, agency
14AGNFS9. The parameters to
be retrieved are water
temperature(11), DO(300),
pHUOO), ammonia( 610) ,
iron(1045), and coliforms
(31501) .
PGM-RET,PURP=3053/STA,
A«14AGNFS9,S-070009,
P-11/P-300,P«400/P»610,
P-1045,P-31501,
BD-730101,
*
DATS
-- 3- }fl
re
3 . _ i /
3 ' *\t
•£
, 1 2,'
/05/
/ ) a /
/•Jo/
/U7/
• Utf/
5 .' „• 5 /
5' J5/
5/CS/
5/0 o/
5/07.'
5/07,'
/07,'
/o:/
/ Jd/
,'Ot/
,10'
/ 1 0 /
/ i'j/
/ 1 o/
5-' 11,'
s/04/
9/05/
4/'Ja/
o/07/
^
>
]
i
0
1
?/UA«£
000
:*-i QE?:H ^A?£
Or 7E*
Ar F£2T TAH
q : $ j
! -o =
i ;• ;
V 10 1
•> JO i
i !5 J007 ,
•a 10 J007 7
v !U JU07 ,
'.' 50 5
U 1 5 a
0 JO .,010 •>
•i Ou 7
1 00 0005 7
w JO 7
0 10 7
0 15 7
B !0 J009 i
•4 J'J 5
J 00 5
1 .00 JOC5 5
0 Jo *
1 00 0005 '
u JO >
0 JO 4
0 15 4
0 ij ;022 5
3 13 i
1 JO 7
; jOi:j ;o
30 ?
"•j.'L 3
.0 1 ) . 3
1 ;;:;
.0 1.1
. J I J . *
. o ;o.:
. ': 1.7
.0 d . 4
.0 7.4
, -j
.0 10.2
, (j
.0 J.8
.0
.0 7.,
.0
. 0
. -j
. •:• J.I
.0
.0
.0 •>. 7
.0
.0 1C.S
J. J
» . -0 11.1
i.O 9.7
'.0 )-7
S.O J.4
J.O i.4
170001 LONC'L
' « i 4 si.; : j v ;: " • . : :
U'-NG LAKE i* " r i -ATtPs-'iir
26053 T-.-ISA.I
UA '-4]-''^* J°N 3ll/i?
01, JOSIO 01045 1150
srij-N i ??s *c? re
TCTAL Tt.TOT -FI-iN
.•*G/i. j'j/L /lOO.1^
. 50 JO
.50 1J.J
0, * i
. : 0 240
.:J 120 1
.70 140
.60 230 ) 0
.50 420 0
. 40 1 20
.00
.00
.20
. 1 2
. 70
.10
. :«
. JO
. ;o
. J'J
. 70
5.00
1.00
s. ;0
1.03
4.00 0.050K 7:
j.50 C.050K 100
5. SO O.J50K 100
i.6o o . :so< 50*
..JO 0.050 90
WQ-RET
6-14
-------
DR
PGM=RET,
CLASSIFICATION: Program Associated Keyword
This keyword may be used with the RET program to select
the location of the decimal point for parameter values
that are printed by the RET retrieval.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
DR-x,
where x
zero to
is any single digit value,
8, as follows:
from
value of x
DR=0,
DR=1,
DR = 2,
DR = 3,
DR = 4,
DR = 5,
DR=6,
DR=7,
DR = 8,
requested decimal placement
.XXXXE+XX
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxx.x
xxxxx.xx
XXXX.XXX
xxx.xxxx
XX.XXXXX
x.xxxxxx
.xxxxxxx
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
This keyword is parameter dependent and applies only to
the immediately preceding parameter code keyword (P).
It may be used once for each parameter requested.
If DR is not specified, the parameter values will be
printed with the decimal placement as defined in the
parameter code definitions.
SOME REPRESENTATIVE USES:
This keyword may be used to prevent retrieved
parameters from printing imprecise trailing digits with
their default decimal placement.
WQ-RET
6-15
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
Print values for parameter
11 as whole numbers
and values for parameter
400 with one number to
the right of the decimal
point. Decimal location
for parameter 300 will
not be changed.
Print values of parameter
625 using all available
decimal representations.
(See example below.)
PGM=RET,PURP=104/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
P=11,DR=1,P=300,
P=400,DR = 2,
BD=730101,
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=11EPALES,S=4435A2,
P=625,DR=0,P=625,DR=1,
P=625,DR=2,P=625,DR=3/
P«625,DR=4,P=625,DR=5,
P=625,DR=6,P=625,DR=7,
P=625,DR=8,
AHiiNT/iTSSA*
OATE
?9UK
TO
'2/OJ/26
~2/0 */09
2/U/14
2/11/04
2/12/09
J/01/06
J/02/0 J
J/OJ/OJ
J/OJ/1-
73/04/07
7J/04/21
7J/06/3J
•J/07/1J
I*
OP
• AJ
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
09
11
09
10
09
E DEPTH
.'££7
JO
10
J)
JO
30
JO
1J
15
15
50
30
JO
•J0625
TOT tjf.
X
1C /L
.799E»00
.-50E-00
.500E-00
.29U'00
. J19E-00
. 109E*00
,519E>00
. J41E-00
. J09E-00
. Ii7£«01
.J69E-00
.me. oo
,5)9£-00
30(25 00625 0062
TOT K.'EI. TOT KJE'_ TOT <-'
S * S
*G/'» 4C/L *G/l
1 O.J 0.
1 O.d 0.
0.5 3.5 0 .
O.J O.J 0 .
O.J J.J J .
0.1 0.1 0 .
1 0.5 3.
J.J 'J.J 0 .
J.J J.J 3 .
2 1.7 1.
0.4 0.4 0 .
3.4 3.4 0 .
1 0 . 0 3 .
5
EL
*0
75
50
JO
J2
11
;2
J5
Jl
6d
J7
40
50
4435*2 -J44};4
»; ou ;o.o o"i :•-: oo.-. 4
44 * . i :EO«GlA.'tLLE
5T HWY i JROC £ -iXJt 3F
Ue?ALES
0000 »f£T JEPTH :tAS3
00625
TOT
-------
PGM=MEAN,
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
The MEAN program performs a variety of user-specified
statistical calculations on requested parameters, and
provides maximum flexibility with regard to combining
stations and grouping data according to desired time
frames. The statistical functions that can be selected
include maximum and minimum value calculations, sum. of
squares, variance, standard deviations,, and other basic
statistical analyses. High and/or low data values can
be eliminated prior to analyses, and calculations can
be performed on the logarithms of the values. The
program is used to calculate loadings, dissolved oxygen
saturations, temperature conversions, and un-ionized
ammonia.
GENERAL KEYWORD APPLICABILITY:
All general keywords described in Sections 4 and 5 are
valid with the MEAN program. The parameter keyword P
IT,ay be specified up to 10 times.
OTHER NOTES AND COMMENTS:
Neither depth nor remark codes are printed by the MEAN
program.
WQ-RET
6-21
-------
PROGRAM OUTPUT:
Retrieve statistical summaries
for the selected parameters
and suppress raw data.
The example shows a portion
of the default groupings.
PGM=MEAN,PURP=305B/STA,
A-14AGNFS9, 5=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400,P=610,
P=1045,P=31501,
BD=730101,
PRT=NO,
AM8NT/LAKE
LAKE =-J?E.= !0? ;7;:-.!
14AONfS9
:cuo ?£ET -:2?rH ::.A5j ;o
DATS THE 36PTH
??CM Of
TO OAY ?££T
73/01/01
*EA3 NU.1BEB
.".AXI.1U.1
•»;«j l.-Kjfl
*£AN
M/0 i.-'OO
74 /a i/o i
YEA« NU!*d£?
."•AXirt'Jfl
- : w t -j.i
* t A ?f
'y;'|. U '
fiA?'"'01 NLV-8SP
.1AX1.1UH
.flNIHUrt
.It AM
76/U1/OD
74/31/01
YEAH NU'SES
1A4 I.iUrt
.*IN [fltl.1
.1EAN
77/01/00
00/00/00
-AXI.IUM
.^IN IflUM
3001!
•WATE5
TE.MP
?AHN
7.00000
69. 5000
11.5000
54.6423
5 .00000
78.3000
50 .0000
64 . "<;00
15.UOOO
73.0000
o.oooo
60.6000
5.00000
73. 1000
44.0000
61.20.30
32.0030
73. '3000
13.3000
60.0112
30300
DC
1G/C.
7 .00000
11.9000
i. 10000
10.2429
4.30000
10.2003
7 . 600CO
i.'.lXi
6.00000
'.0.6000
7.60000
9.16666
5.00C30
11.4000
3.40000
). 51999
22 . 00(30
D.iOOO
7.60000
* . i 11 3 1
00400
?H
SU
7 .00000
i. -0000
5. 50000
6.23571
5. 30000
6. 70000
i. SOOCO
6 . ; 7 9 5 )
15.0000
7.20030
5. 70000
6.24133
i. 00000
6. iUOOO
6.00000
S. 55999
1 2 . 0000
7.20000
5.50000
5.3)3-77
006 1C 01045
NH3-N iRON
72TAL .'£ . TOT
SO/!. JG/L
5.10000
230 . 000
53.D-300
112.400
5 . .30000
620.000
'.2-3.000
2 56 . 00 i
5.3U;300 5.' 30000
.05000CC 100. 000
.0500000 -O.OO.IO
,050'JOOO i2.0000
.3500000 620.300
.0500030 50.0030
.OVJ0032 I -5. 300
31501
TOT -C c L ;
.if :.i£Non
.".OO.-.L
6 . 3 3 C 0 C
150.3. 30
; . 30.J.3C
437. 5'30
4 .00000
100. 331
I '3 " 3 '.' •!
1 2 5 . ') i ;
'.503.3;
\ . 3'3 3'.)C
2-J4 . :;: :
WQ-RET
6-22
-------
LV,HV
PGM=MEAN,
CLASSIFICATION: Program Associated Keywords
USE:
These keywords may be used with the MEAN program to
exclude high and/or low values from calculations
performed by the MEAN program.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
LV=lower-limit,
KV=upper-l imit,
where lower-limit is any numerical
value, including a decimal value,
between -899E-"7 and +899E+7.
LV establishes the lower limit for
a parameter value; parameter values
less, or lower, than the lower-limit
are excluded from the MEAN
calculations.
where upper-limit is any numerical
value, including a decimal value,
between -899E+7 and +899E+7.
Parameter values which are greater
than the upper-limit are excluded frorr.
the MEAN calculations.
DEFAULT VALUES:
NOTES ON USAGE:
LV=-899E+7,
HV=+899E+7,
Either, or both, of these keywords may be specified for
each parameter.
These keywords are parameter dependent and apply only
to the preceding parameter code keyword (P).
Up to ten pairs of P and LV,HV keywords can be
specified in a single retrieval request.
Although LV and HV may be used with both programs MEAN
and STAND, their function is different with each
program. With program MEAN, values which are not
within the specified limits are excluded; with program
STAND, values which are not within the specified limits
are flagged.
WQ-RET
6-23
-------
EXAMPLE(S;
Exclude from statistical PGM-MEAN, PU.RPO.05B/STA,
calculations values for A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
parameter. 1045 which are . P=ll, P=1045, LV=5C, PO15C.
below 50 and values for HV=1000,
parameter 31501 which are BD=730101,
above 1000. All values for PRT=NO,
parameter 11 are used in the
calculations.
WQ-RET
6-24
-------
DG
PGM=MEAN,
CLASSIFICATION: Program Associated Keyword
USE: This keyword may be used with the MEAN program to
assign date groupings to the data to be analyzed. It
is also used in conjunction with the SORT keyword.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
DG=values, where values is a string of one or more of the
following alphabetic characters which invoke
the functions described:
S prints individual samples
M calculates summaries by month
Q calculates summaries by quarters
Y calculates summaries by year
P calculates summaries for period of record
.. G calculates summaries by aggregation of
all data retrieved as if they came from one
station
DEFAULT VALUE: DG=YPG,
NOTES ON USAGE:
The DG keyword may be specified only once within a
retrieval request.
The individual values for DG may be specified in any
order, e.g. 'DG=YPG,' or 'DG=PGY,' are equivalent
instructions. Regardless of the order, however,
summaries will be printed in the order of increasing
group size, i.e., in the order listed above.
The DG keyword must be specified when the SORT keyword
is used. Descriptions of its use with SORT are
provided in this section.
WQ-RET
6-25
-------
EXAMPLE(S)
Calculate statistical
summaries by month,
quarter, and year.
PGM=MEAN,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
P=11,P=300,?=4CO,
BD«730101,
DG=YMQ,PRT=NO,
WQ-RET
6-26
-------
SORT
PGM=MEAN,
CLASSIFICATION: Program Associated Keyword
USE:
This keyword may be used with the MEAN program to sort
samples prior to statistical analysis by the MEAN
program. The keyword must be used in conjunction with
the DG keyword.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
SORT
(SM 1
sv
AM
AV
SORT=SM,
SORT=SV,
SORT=AM,
SORT=AV,
SORT=AY,
the SORT keyword may be assigned any one of the
listed values, and functions in conjunction witJ
the DG keyword, as follows:
for each station,
in monthly order,
samples are to be sorted
ignoring the year field.
for each station, samples are to be sorted
in ascending order by values of the first
parameter specified in the retrieval.
samples are to be sorted in monthly order,
as in SORT=SM, except that the data for
all stations retrieved will be aggregated as
if the data were from one station.
samples are to be sorted in ascending
order by values of the first parameter
specified in the retrieval (as in
SORT=SV), except that the data are aggregated
as if the data were from one station.
samples are to be aggregated for all
stations as if the data were from
a single station and listed in
year/month/day order.
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
WQ-RET
6-27
-------
NOTES ON USAGE:
The SORT keyword can be specified only once in a
retrieval.
The SORT keyword must be used with the DG keyword,
which serves as a trigger to the sorting process.
The use of the SORT keyword increases the cost of
retrievals. In some situations, it may be possible to
achieve the same results by using date grouping (the DG
keyword) alone.
WQ-RET
6-28
-------
EXAMPLE 1
Retrieve individual samples
for the specified station.
Sort in monthly order
regardless, of year.
?GM=MEAN,PURP=305B/STA,
. . A=14AGNFS9,S = 070C09,
P=11,?=300,P=400,
BD=73C1Q1,ED=751231,
SORT=SM,DG=S,
SHI?T,?RT=NO,
.= '!;-!;.: ,„ n"3°i :
:bii-: • -ICHIJA.N
-A-<£ 5-;?£aiOr 0"'KJ]
13 J-N TvNAOON HUtH
ooaii -jj jyj
-ATi ::.•£ J5PTH -ATES 00
.•'.'C- OF Ti.l?
."0 JAY ,-EtT ;AHN -J '•_
3 / -J I / 0 J ; a 2 3 3 J . J 0 0 G i j . 3 0 0 0
1 " '• 5 .' 1 3 5 0 . J t,1 ; 0 , V - J J J
. ' J ^ ' ' * . ' ' .' • ; - • - 3 • J • '•; •:
i/yo/g« - »y.. i3.0-.. : s. *J^.;^
)/:"-li LJ*u 'V.JOOO
i/--"/^ luJ: "i.JOJu
1/ji'U JJSo ttiojoo 4':UJOU
v i'j/ u uj-j 4*. jyoa
1' . 1/J4 i'JU'i 4 ] .LO-JJ
i-- 1 :, ;w i js i • j . vju-j : i . i.j.jj
V3N7 LASS
; ; 4.;c
. s-;::o
. 5 C C 0 0
. 3»: Ja.j
50000
J-JO'-O
4 JLJuO
iC J03
. jUuOO
. J-O'JU
:;":;;
WQ-RET
6-29
-------
EXAMPLE 2
Retrieve individual samples,
monthly and quarterly
summaries for three stations.
Sort the data by
period regardless of year.
The output shown is for
station 070002.
PGM = MEAN,PURP = 30 53/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=070002,
5=070003,3=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,ED=751231,
SORT=SM,DG=SMQ,
SHIFT,PRT=NO,
:-ooo'
46 L4 ;
CuA?U L,
ia05J
LAA£ a.-1
.is ;NTO
UA,;SF3
J I) J 0 ?
OA7E
70
-J/OV'l
•4/05/j]
ri/05/i2
•j/Ji/ JJ
*V'J5/01
•OiNTn
*Vj /4/01
}'JA<»T£a
,-ovoo
•J/UVO*
' =, ' J ' / 1 '.
ION TH
-s/rjj/z'j
: 4 / -J 6 .' 2 ;
^ui/2!
rj/cl/g:
L-NfH/lJ
iVL-J/vU
;;JAKT£R
»VU/Ov
.4 039 20
XE " .11 3«
MJCH IOAS
-;s;oa
AGON 3IVES
£? 0£?TH
n.^e 3£?T
DA* ?££T
•J910
ja t 5
10JO
.'iiJ^BiS
"-AXIflU.".
.^£AN
1030
J J2Q
J-» J-J
')3 JO
j 3 I ';
ll.HI-U-
^U.18£3
1AXIMU.1
.^1.1 IM'J.1
IE AN
1045
0^4;
J *10
•i^aeR
* IN [ .1U1*
T SAN
•Jdli
C *UJ
•0310
HA.t I.1U *
-EAN
J045
•JJ.-3£H
.HAXI.^J.I
•4lNt*U-1
l£AN
•*U13£1
-AX[*ij.r
•INEMU.I
LARK
:~ .1 l
*A?£H5«£Sr
; ' o 7 ">
CLASS :j
juO t I
u WA:SR
»H!
46.-:ooo
;)J . JOOO
iil.OOOO
•t 3 . 0 0 0 U
4.00QQU
ii.O'JOU
56 . "50J
5 * . -J 0 0 0
•) 1 . i Jja
•j ; . : j o a
il.OOOQ
• i ._'.',' i
i. JGOUJ
5?::ooc
^.UOOGO
ii.UUOU
4i» . COOO
».«„
3: . JCOO
•3.0*00
•3.0000
•3.0000
4. ,0000
63.0000
34.0000
5 5 . uO 00
56.0000
34.0000
65.0000
3 3 . o o o o
1 .'JO-JOO
«J.OOOO
SS.JOOO
33.0000
3 .OOOOJ
•3.0000
34 . JOOO
34. ^SOO
040602C007
J
50300
00
10/t
11.5000
10.?000
). 30000
3 .00000
11.5000
10.3000
t . 40000
> . 30000
* . 4 0 0 0 0
(.50000
4.J.J03
1.40-OuO
' . 00000
11.5-000
9.40000
,.»,::
. 3.50000
3.20000
3.00000
3 ' '31'-
J. 21113
3 . 3 J 0 0 0
3 . '0000
3.50000
1. 30000
i.4)?»9
i. OJOO
1 . 0000
3. 0000
J. 0000
t. 000-0
•. oooo
3. 0000
3. 0000
3. 4235
».»3NT/1AK£
10400
?H
"
i. 50000
6.30000
6 .300U2
1.00000
3.3'OOOC
3.TOOOO
3.3-1000
3 . ; o -0 ; 0
3. 3 JO 10
3.30000
t JOO-JO
3.3'JOOO
•..'000-J
6.3UOOO
6 . 50000
3.'OOOJ
i . 10000
i.:ooo;
'* . aOOO'J
i. -OOJO
i . "OiDJG
3,0'J OJ
!'-o '•
•j-.ti 5-i
6 . : J C J
i . • j C 0 c
a . 50 00
i. 50 t;
o. 5J JO
- .- • ..'
0 . t ^ J •-
b . :•: wo
WQ-RET
6-30
-------
EXAMPLE 3
Retrieve individual samples
for each of the three
specified stations. Sort
the retrieval data in
ascending order by values
of the first parameter
specified (P=ll, water
temperature). The output
shown is for stations
070002 and 070003.
PGM=MEAN,PURP = 3 0 5B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=C70002,
S*070003,S=G700C9,
?=11,P=300,P=400,
BD*73C101,ED«751231,
SORT=SV,DG=S,
SHIFT,PRT=NO,
'••"»? . ..•-'-***
\Lj~m S-AKE ''M'J. i*rtns
>*E1jLvsii:oa''1 ''"*''" )
04c^-32
£• r
0:93
JOC *
000.. >S£T OEyTM O'.AiS 00
JOO
OATE TIME 3EP7H -'ATE
fao.i of :£s
•5/-.VO: 0930
•j/01/Oa 1010 32.0
• 4 / o i / : 3 i u i s 3i.o
•;.'05/ii 0931; <6.o
-:/10/;i 1015 51.0
•i/10/Zl 0100 il.j
* i . '. 0 / J • 0 9 4 • 53.0
' i • I0/'j ' 090'J i 3 . 0
•4/^5/21 -3.0
•4,'0o,'ii 1030 i'.,
• ; / 'J <3 / '. ': .; i : J 3 1 . .
•i/05/2: -J3li 53.0
•J/Oo/js 0130 al.o
*j/'j3/26 OJ15 34.0
•j/Oi/JO U'OO 35..'
•4/03/23 jiOO 3i.i
'.}'•"'-:'. "*". !°-J
'l/w'/xi 1J45 33.0
1 00300 00400
30
?d
3.00COO i.'OOOj
oo ;.*-
00 3.)..
00 1.5
00 j . 3
00 0.3
CO . •;
;o . • j
00 i, . •
j- '!o
CO . 50
CO . 3 :J
JU
30 . "'J
«*j . j;
JO * . " 0 0 0 0
0 i. uOoO
o i. oaco
0 ^ . 00 JO
'J » . 0 w J C-
j > . i'; J 0 ,
o * o •; i j
i tjOOO
-J -, ^OO.J
'- 5 o2/J
0 5 'JOOO
1 J 3 , * , 0 0 ,
- ' ' - - J - -
3 j j . iJOQO 6 . 6'jOw>;
TJ/o°/i, Jiio -5:o5oo i.:oooo ,.*oooo
•j/0^/10 Oilu -3.0
.o:?4°!3.3 ,i, ;-::]°3 :
CH'OOKEJ i.A*E a SI 3. -ATE
j.E^jpeaioa ^ ;
MAOMF3*
Ow
TO
5"iST
j*l)
\«a-.*/LA(f E
JOOO fEET OEPTH tLAaj JO
OOCU J030U J0400
-ATS THE 3E?TH JATE.
f«un Of .-£-.
TO SAt FiEf r'Art.
5/10/21 I'll: 51. J.
3,u;/30 JiOU i'.O^
4/05/io -Ja45 9.J
4/OWlt 0910 9.j^
3/U3/10 vlli 3.JW
j/uS/Jl Ii.l3 :..0l
JO
"C/L
oo iw.;o
oo : .so
00 t 4«J
^r
4/Od/i* 1000 T.^000 - 3V.O
i/0»/10 3900 0.0'
5/j3/r* 1U2S a.Ov
3/04/15 Oa30 3.0
3/UO/21 0930 i 0'
3/09/Od OajO 0 Ov
3/0^/09 1000 4 0'
5/06/20 1000 4 3-
4/y'/15 0955 4 0
5/v*V!0 0900 3 0
5/OVul 10iO "9 0-
OJ J *OC
00 J JOO
00 4 "00
00 a o 0 0
00 3 100
00 3400
0«
Olj 3. 4 CO
00
JO a.aflO
?H
5'J
0 ' '000.
a * soo jo
U i JJOOO
j J'JOuJ
j - •. • -.
10 1 jUOOO
0 i 3UOOO
u * j J 0 0 0
JO i -SOO-
3 -j .j * 0 J 0 0
)C - iJOOO
)0 1 JJoOO
i '0000
10 i 50000
,; i. ooooo
•;/OV23 Od45 34 50UO
WQ-RET
6-31
-------
EXAMPLE 4
Retrieve quarterly and monthly
statistical summaries with data
aggregated as if it were from
a single station rather than
the three separate stations
specified. The data for each
summary are made up of all
values sampled for the
particular quarter or month
regardless of year.
PGM=MEAN,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=070002,
5=070003,5=070009,
P=11,P«300,P=400,
BD=730101,ED=751231,
SORT=AM,DG=QM,
SHIFT,PRT=NO,
oooooo:.: oooooooo::o
BARTER .I'Jna'R
•INI.IUfl
47/05/01
ONTH MUSSES
."JKXIM'J-
JINIK-J*
.1EAN
IVJ6/00
*'/•:•»/j i
tGSTrt su*9£3
"INIWC"
IT/10/00
JT/avoi
X.I.4UIU!!
•SAN
1.00000
11.0000
i:.jooo
1.JOOOQ
il.OOOO
l.'JOOOO 1.00000
IS.9000 5.*0'J30
12.'000 4.5000C
14.1J31 4.-JCOG
1.30000
15. 'UOu
12.0000
45.3000
15.00CO
"4.0000
! •. : j o:
•4.0000
40.3300
15.0000
J4.0000
^O^T« .liMSCJ ). 00000
«x:-'.-s 19.0000
10000
.0000
,0003
94.
51.
10.0COO
.lAXIXUK ij.3'JOO
l.'JOOOO
41.0000
1.30000
13.0030
11.0000
11.0000
1.J3000
11.5000
9.50000
10.1J49
12.0000
».90000
11.5000
3.43330
9.-1S09
J.00000
3.50000
".40000
4.1:555
3.jgOOO
i.'OOL-l
• . 50000
3.OOOU3
3.40003
i.10000
1.231)1
20.OuOO
J.-0033
".40000
3.J0300
10.4300
i.OOCCO
1.30000
5.0*300
14.3000
24.0000
i.90303
».;oooo
'.15914
12.3i.-03
3.50300
4.33003
>.:c::o
5.50303
'.15555
•.5C003
a.3003:
6.500:0
25.0330
5.5C33C
4.92SOO
10.3-.-00
'.•-.OjO
12.0000
SI.0000
11.3000
49.iili
1.00003
4.30000
4 .'33000
1.00030 1.00300
11.9003 4.S0033
13.900J 4.50003
11.9000 6.50030
9.3COOO 12.3030
D.J333 '.'OOOO
9.03000 5.-0030
13.ld.19 4.50300
WQ-RET
6-32
-------
EXAMPLE 5
Retrieve samples with the
data aggregated as if they were
from a single station rather
than the three separate stations
specified. Sort the retrieval
data in ascending order by
values of the first parameter
specified (P=ll, water
temperature).
PGM-MEAN,?UR?=3053/STA,
A=14AGNFS9, 5 = 070002,
5=070003,5=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
3D=730101,ED=75i231,
SORT=AVtDG=S,
SHIFT,PRT=NO,
-
•
-
-
:
•
*
-
*
I
•
,
_
-
*
*
*
-
7
~
"
•
;
-
•
•
•
-
•
*
••
-
*
*
j
.-
t.-
3/
:/
3/
)/
j/
4/
j/
5''
y
?'
*
if
\/
4/
4 /
j/
; ,
4/
;,
4/
,/
,/
i ,
i/
4/
4/
*/
\/
^/
]/
; /
i,.
j/
j_.
j/
i,/
; /
4 /
i/
•/
4,
j/
a/
5,
i/
• /
;/
4/
•,-r
30 ^
. 1/-3
' / 2 3
.2/20
-;/-i
. '. . j 4
J i/ i ;
.C/16
IC/21
J5/1*
; j/ u
i<*/u k
.'j/ii~
l-/t:
•-,/ i '
. ^ ,• (, 7
- ,-]
^. "I
,9/1 I
,3/3.,
*!"'•• 5
-S/'.l
U0, ; ;
jo/ ; L
g o / ; i
* -; / 2 i
j a / •) a
^*/2*
^3 ,' J S
j,/ JO
to, 2i
w i / L 1
J i / j 2
Oa 'It
V 0 r' * 4
03/2"
-a/ii
:a/ LO
,0/ib
J 9 ' Z '.
0 0 ,' 1 5
; * / j j
J9/0"
-3/jJ
j"/Ja
;>/09
;-/:3
Co/24
jT/LA
u'/O »
0»/23
U ? ,' L 5
•J " / * 2
J"/ 2;
J'/IO
j " / i 0
« " / 1) *
j'/L'u
J*/l»
0 " / 0 I
."v^E 2£?TH
3P
J? 10
LOJJ
' J 1 i
1050
J9* 5
luOO
0930
13 JJ
HOC
Ja JJ
i JwJ
Il8u
09];
;*fj!
J1*, J
.**s
, > j .
I-]-
, t J'J
'^•# JC
;OJJ
0^2u
j*10
j o 1 5
.'al-
ts I i
; V J j
;»ii
101:
iS t5
•J9 Jj
j3 J j
Lu*0
1U3U
lOC^J
J?00
'. j i i
•J J JO
33 i J
'. i43
0543
JSJ'J
j HQ
03 3«;
1040
j V30
,"J4U
ioc;
IOOJ
i J33
J ->4 3
13)3
j J JO
• j » 0 0
llUJ
1000
JdiO
'.C50
*i/OT/2j -J043
J-3
WAT
7t
ii .
J 2 .
1 ] .
1 J.
4 ] .
46.
*' .
40 .
4 ).
;-J .
iO .
si.
-i*
n!
i i .
i j .
'!'
,-.
j ' .
i».
•j j .
9 1
9l
o2
9}
9 3
n 4
•»'
i?
i i
30
90
. 30
3 ?
9?
97
9d
3d
9 i
9d
5 j
!s
3 't
9 *
'0
*I
" ;
' ;
: 4
•4
? 4
*9
•6
T J
•j
*3
"d
•a
"•*
o:: )a3J3 i
S3
1?
L •; c •.
DGOO
OOOJ
JOOO
J ' i G j
Jl) Ju
3UOJ
oooa
-J3C J
JoOQ
JC30
j J'JO
3003
JO "'0
J.JJ.J
^J^j
.' J J 'J
J'JOJ
2o!!s
iOOu
•JCC3
OJOO
JOOO
•J 'J C i*
O-j'30
j ; u j
OOO'J
J J - y
JOJO
•ijao
J 00 w
SO 50
*'j jO
J300
D03U
300C
JCOO
0302
•;ooo
OOwJ
;oo-,
-.0 «0
3000
•3000
J^OO
•:ooo
0000
03GO
:OQJ
•JOOO
3JOC
oaoc
wOOC
wOOO
oo(;o
JOOO
3000
0033
i.
15
13
; \
•0
1C
10
i.
1U
10
i .
'
1 .
IJ
1C
3 .
J
, ,
) .
j
J
J
1
}
a
3
j
*
>
3
3
3
3
j
J
^
3
j
j
a
•*
•
a
20
i 0 C j 0
. "^ . J
y ij 2 C
. 90 a j
,ao;o
.ioo:
.9'J-JJ
. 9 -j 'J '.
. O'J Ju
* o a w o
.3000
. J-JOO
0 C j 0 C
" • - - J
4-j.jO'j
.i;.-.
"0010
dUUOO
JOOOJ
40000
S3UOJ
3 JOOO
JJ«J--
"JJ.O
iOOJC
40woO
iOJOJ
1 0 0 C ;
»-ul, J
9COUU
*OLO-:
*(JouO
oCQOO
' 0 0 OJJO
jCOQJ
i ; 30 j
0 G •_ ' J
i .' 3 J -
JCCOO
i •'. -J 0 0
: - -^ j 'J
••JOQO
•-:;oo
: w « j c
ii. jc.
:J3«.-
:iJ>J-
a..-;.';:
3V-J-.
^!^!i
• - j . •;
2300,
aOOdi)
3CJ30
u 2 J 'j
4-JJuj
';-J..
"•J-J-.d
.;-iu
J'jQ.JO
•JOOJJ
- , ; ; j
" j 0 'J 0
aGCUJ
; CO-JO
iOO.Jvj
9030-*
S.,J3
" 0 J C 2
h •'. 0 0 0
iO-Ju:
3-JJOJ
^ j 0 u • J
sJC-ifl
:j3ijj
42C-J
*C-J J J
OO'.O-
*:30-:
3 JOOO
oooac
' 0 v, j J
4 00 'JO
iJO'OO
0000 C
a 4 . o o ^ u
WQ-RET
6-33
-------
EXAMPLE 6
Retrieve samples and monthly
summaries with the data
aggregated as if they were from
a single station rather than
the three separate stations
specified. Sort the data in
ascending order by year/month/
day.
PGM=MZAN,PURP-305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=700C2,
3=070003,5=070009,
?=11,P=300,P=400,
3D=730101,ED=751231,
SORT=AY,DG=SM,
SHIFT,PRT=NO,
3AT£
FSOS
ro
•3/-,l/<33
7 i / 0 1 / 0 a
•J/Cl/01
MONTH
•3/05/11
73/05/15
?i/05/ 30
MONTS
"1/J6/04
73/06/06
71/05/a
•3/05/01
MONT!*
7I/OVOO
•5/10/02
'5/10/07
75/ 10/07
"5/10/07
•5/10/0'
•5/10/16
75/1-J/21
•5/10/21
75/10/21
•5/10/21
75/10/01
MONTH
•j/n/oo
75/11/04
75/11/J1
.MONTH
•5/12/JO
TIME 3E?T«
Of
uAT tlt-
3925
lulO
>UM3EP
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
MEAS
0930
3830
3900
,1'jMaefi
MAXIMUM
,£AN
I, »00
0830
39 30
.MUM3SH
MAXIMUM
•INIMj-B
MCAM
1000
1100
0945
090J
•3900
1010
1100
3930
1015
0900
•4U*9£P
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
MEA.S
1000
HUMd&it
.MAXIMUM
M ; N i M'J M
"•AM
00011
•ATE a
JEM?
?AHN
31.0000
32.0000
; .OjOOO
13.0000
12.0000
12.5000
6 .0000
9.0000
-.0000
.00000
•.C03C
S.J.,5-,'
53.0000
61.0000
55.3300
1 .00000
58.0000
61.0000
64.6667
iO.^000
il.OOOO
53 . 0000
53.0000
52 .'J00«
4* . 0000
49.3000
51.0000
51.3000
51.0000
10.0000
53. 0000
47.0000
50.7000
43.0000
1.-3000C
41.0000
41.0000
41.COOO
OOluO
00
Mi/L
ii.aooo
12.7000
2.300'JO
11.5-000
12.7000
11.2500
11.5000
10.6000
10.1000
3.00000
11. MOO
i i . 1 0 r. -3
*.-:ooo
)! J3000
4.60000
1.00000
9.50000
1. 50000
i. 91111
* . 70000
9.73000
9. '0000
9.0-3000
10.500-3
10.3000
10. 1000
10.1000
3 .00000
10.5000
9.00000
9.94999
00:0000: icj;-::-::;::
00400
?.-i
5J
6.5COOC
J. 70000
l.jOOOO
6.70000
6.5GOOO
6.50000
6.50000
6.5000C
•. J-300
1.-3000
7 . 5300
i. (33i
5.5000
5.5000
j.5000
1.0000
j.SOOO
6.50000
7.20000
5. '0030
6. JOOOO
5.50000
6.50000
7.50030
6.0000:
5. 50000
•.•oooo
5.50000
5.50003
10.0000
7.700CO
5.700C3
6.55000
6.00000
1.00050
4.00000
5.00039
6.3JOOO
WQ-RET
6-34
-------
BASE
VD
PGM=MEAN,
CLASSIFICATION: Program Associated Keywords
USE:
The BASE and VD keywords may be used with the MEAN
program to assign variable date groupings to the data
to be analyzed. The BASE keyword is used to specify a
beginning date other than a normal (the first day of
the first month) beginning date for the monthly,
quarterly, and/or annual statistical analyses, and the
VD keyword is used to specify date groupings other than
those that can be specified with the DG keyword.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
BASE=mmdd,
VD=mmdd,
DEFAULT VALUES:
NOTES ON USAGE:
where mm is the two digit numeric for the
month of the year, and dd is the two digit
numeric for the day of the month. (yy for
year is not an option with these keywords.)
Leading zeroes must be specified, and both
mm and dd must be specified for each keyword
VD:
BASE:
None.
BASE=0101,
BASE may be specified only once in a retrieval request.
If used the VD keyword must appear at least twice and
may be used up to 20 times.
If VD is not specified, the date groupings default to
those established via the DG keyword.
WQ-RET
6-35
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve statistical summaries
for data sampled between
February 15, 1973 and August
14, 1975. Group the summaries
in monthly and quarterly
periods from a starting date
of February 15.
Retrieve statistical summaries
for data sampled between
February 15, 1973 and August
14, 1975. Group data in the
following periods: February 15
through April 14, April 15
through August 29, August 30
through October 20, and October
21 through February 14.
PGM»MEAN,PURP-305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
P»11,P-300,P-400,-
BD=730215,ED=750814,
BASE=0215,DG=MQ,
PRT=NO,
PGM-MEAN,PURP«3053/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
P-11,P«300,P-400,
BD=730215,ED=750814,
VD-0215,VD"0415,VD-083G.
VD-1021,
PRT=NO,
WQ-RET
6-36
-------
SF
PGM = ME AN, •:
CLASSIFICATION: Program Associated Keyword
USE:
This keyword is used with the MEAN program to select
the arithmetic statistical functions that the MEAN
program is to perform.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
SF=values,
where values is a string of one or more of the
following alphanumeric characters which invoke
the calculations indicated:
N calculates the number of observations
H calculates the maximum value of the
observations
L calculates the minimum value of the
observations
S calculates the sum of the values
2 calculates the sum of the squares
M calculates the mean
V calculates the variance
D calculates the standard deviation
C calculates the coefficient of variation
E calculates the standard error
F calculates flow weighted average
DEFAULT VALUE: SF=NHLM,
NOTES ON USAGE:
The SF keyword can be specified only once within a
retrieval request.
The individual values for SF may be specified in any
order, e.g. 'SF=HLS2,' or 'SF=H2SL,' are equivalent
values.
See keyword LOG for calculations of geometric
statistics.
WQ-RET
6-37
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve statistical summaries
with all statistics, except
flow weighted average,
calculated.
PGM=MEAN,PURP-305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
P=ll,?=300,?=400,
BD=730101,
S?=N2CSHLMVDE,
PRT=NO,
•iATt
f 3V.1
:o
" j/ n/ui
YiA3
* 4 •' J 1 •' M v)
' * - i •' j 1
*3/«i/uu
Ta/wl/Ul
YEAR
'»/ jl/OO
"o/Ol/Ol
iEAS
"/'JlAiU
^.'-J/'JO
j 7 * ? [ CM
"'•"""
7I!"E DtPTH
•J?
JAY ?E£T
Si,:M3£3
1AX Lit'.*
MN'i.lijr
jj 1
JJ.'-SOUAR
*£*N
MS [ ASC£
3TV13 itV
wOEr 'AH
3 "AN J • rf 8
'A < : rt-j.^
1 i.i r'ij.1*
j-'rt
JU.f-J»iJAi4
lLA.'i
I'AriiA.'i,;?
5TANO 3£.'
.'JSr .««
.4U.13ER
:UNl-Uf
3-J.1
3 J * - 3 JIJA S
.1SAN
VARIANCt
jTANO 25V
C-JEF VA«
STANO saa
Njissa
5-J.1
5U.1-aOUAH
.l£ AS
/*SIANC£
jTA.'O 3£V
CJt- 7AR
5 TA:JJ s.-i.t
NU.-llE3.
.*AX:W.W •
.IINI^-.I
5 U.I
5U1-3JUAR
«£AN
VASCA.'JCE
57A.HO 3E.*
:JSF VAH
5? AND £83
.011
-ATES
r £.*!?•
?AH.i
" . 0 J 0 J 0
a ) . ia03
31. JOOG
1*2.500
i 249 i . 2
34 . s4 2a
tt>5 . "21}
Is . JJ 1 2
- i'H Ji 2
1 . 1 6it '
:3. J.;JQ
i j . J Jjtf
K I . 500
2Ui".:
64 . 7uOO
US.'JS
I'J. 1293
.1599J-
15.0000
4). 0000
309 . 000
5"14 3 . 3
60 . 9000
14o. )')
12.1233
. 200054
1.11021
.'j°5°^
:45..'00
11617. j
90.3)33
I'J-. 002
10.3442
.1-1451
3.1490"
1 9 . 0 G 0 0
73.00CO
11.0000
2153.00
114611
59. 9444
150. j70
12.2:01
.204161
2.04K1
iO
•«.;'!.
-.10000
13.90JO
1.15000
-i.-ooo
-'5.109
10.2423
6 . ' 3 il 2
2.90440
.254265
. »o4 i -;
u.: c.
7.9'. Ou
15.1 00
116. 'jj
i . 34 11
1.13 -2
1.09 I'
.120 'I
9.00000
-.50000
55.0000
:-ii.3C'j
i. 16666
1.12691
1.19419
.110 JO 9
. IS 76 4 )
lo.ooou
75a . 1 5 3
3.17999
9.31512
3.14003
.334943
.395-4"
27.0000
11.9000
.-ooooo
241.900
2161.1-
3.01111
6.036U
2.46-02
.27)102
. 474^73
46 11 1 . . i v 3 i : 1 1 ; . ; .
-u.'w -«• - I'J J. ^i ^ A i i. 3*ii .
LAKE JJ?£H:OS :'i-:-;
Id Osr-jfAGGN ':.'£.-
10400
?H
5 J
* . :oooo
6.50)00
5.5000.
1 4 . C 0 0 .'
2"* . 500
5.235"!
.1517i j
. 1 3 i 1 i "
.0525^0"
. 1 H " J 2
3 . '-JO Jj
9 . 5 . J J 0
)2 . *00.j
2 1 6 . 5 1 j
9 . 5 ' '1 1 9
. J 0 - J 3 "
. ;3 9 1 1 3 3 5
.012-916
LJ.JJ'JO
5 . "JOOO
93.0MO
:36.5)S
5 . 2 1 1 ; )
. '. :, 5 " i 9
. 1 t.i 4 '2
.05)0172
.102.190
10. JOOO
9 . 3UOOO
:. JJOOO
416. IJ'J
5.4)999
.1-1355
.415960
.054-451
.1)1151
17.001,0
".20000
5.50000
214.920
K90.35
5.14919
. 147U 1
. 1915)9
.06040-4
,0o)05]2
WQ-RET
6-38
-------
LOAD,
PGM=MEAN,
CLASSIFICATION: Program Associated Keyword
USE:
The LOAD keyword may be used with the MEAN program to
compute stream loadings for selected parameters.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
LOAD, specifies that loadings are to be calculated
for the immediately preceding parameter
keyword. There is no value associated with
this keyword.
DEFAULT VALUE: Not applicable.
NOTES ON USAGE:
A flow parameter, such as 58 (average flow, gpm), 59
(instantaneous flow, gpm), 60 (average flow, cfs), 61
(instantaneous flow, cfs), 5G050 (conduit flow, mgd),
50051 (instantaneous flow, mgd), or 74020 (flow, pump
out, mgd), must be present in the retrieved sample in
order to perform the loading calculation for other
parameters in the sample.
LOAD applies to each parameter keyword it follows, and
can be specified as many times as is required within a
retrieval request.
The
PARF
4)
MEAN program cannot compute loadings i
1 are used (see Data Selection Keywords
if PARU and
in Section
The following depicts what unit conversions are
performed when computing loadings on the parameter
values having the stored units shown.
STORED UNITS
milligrams/liter(mg/l)
micrograms/1iter(ug/1)
pico curies/liter(pc/l)
/100 milliliter
LOADING COMPUTATION
Ibs/day
Ibs/day
pc/day
No./day
WQ-RET
6-39
-------
EXAMPLE(S)
Calculate loadings for PGM=MEAN,PURP=305B/STA,
parameter 650 (phosphates) A=1115D050,S=255420,
at the specified station. P=60,P=650,LOAD,P=1045,
Loadings are not to be calculated PRT=NO,
for parameter 1045 (iron). The
example shows default date
groupings and statistical
functions.
WQ-RET
6-40
-------
LOG,
PGM=MEAN,
CLASSIFICATION: Program Associated Keyword
USE:
The LOG keyword may be used with the MEAN program to
compute the logarithms of the retrieved parameter
values prior to the statistical analysis, thus
providing geometric statistics, such as geometric'
means.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
LOG,
specifies that logarithms of the values of the
immediately preceding parameter keyword are to
be computed. There is no value associated
with this keyword.
DEFAULT VALUE: Not applicable.
NOTES ON USAGE:
LOG applies to each parameter keyword it follows, and
can be specified as many times as required within a
retrieval request.
EXAMPLE!
Retrieve statistical summaries
with logarithms computed for
parameters 300 and 600 prior
to calculations.
PGM-MEAN,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
P«11,P-300,LOG,P"600,LOG,
BD-730101,
PRT=NO,
WQ-RET
6-41
-------
DM
I PGM=MEAN,
CLASSIFICATION: Program Associated Keyword
USE:
This keyword may be used with the MEAN program to
select the location of the decimal point for parameter
values that are printed by the MEAN retrieval.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
where x is any single digit value, from
zero to 8, as follows:
value of x
DM=0,
DM-1,
DM = 2,
DM = 3,
DM = 4,
DM = 5,
DM = 6,
DM=7,
DM=8,
requested decimal placement
.XXXXE+XX
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxx.x
xxxxx.xx
xxxx.xxx
XXX.XXXX
xx.xxxxx
x.xxxxxx
.xxxxxxx
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
This keyword is similar in function to the DR keyword
used with the RET program.
DM applies to each parameter keyword it follows, and
can be specified as many times as is required within a
retrieval request.
EXAMPLE(S
Produce statistical summaries
and print values for parameter
11 as whole numbers and values
for parameter 400 with one
number to the right of the
decimal point.
PGM=MEAN,PURP=3053/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=C70009,
P=11,DM=1,P=300,?=4OC,DM=2
80=730101,
PRT=NO,
WQ-RET
6-43
-------
LL1 LH1
LL2 LH2
PGM=MEAN,
CLASSIFICATION: Program Associated Keywords
USE;
These keywords may be used with the MEAN program to
specify acceptable ranges for the values of either one
or two of the parameters retrieved. LL1 and LH1 refer
respectively to the lower and higher acceptable values
of the first water quality parameter in the retrieval,
LL2 and LH2 refer similarly to the second parameter in
the retrieval. The entire sample will be ignored if
the value of either parameter falls outside the
specified values.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
LLl=lower-limit,
LHl=upper-limit,
LL2=lower-limit,
LH2=upper-limit,
where both lower-limit and upper-limit
are any numerical value, including a
decimal value, between -900E>37 and
+900E+38. Parameter values less, or lower
than lower-limit fall outside the
acceptable range; parameter values
higher, or greater, than upper-limit
also fall outside the acceptable range.
DEFAULT VALUE:
NOTES ON USAGE:
LL1= -900E+37,
LH1= +900E+38,
LL2 = -900E+37,
LH2= +900E+38,
LL2 and LH2 cannot be specified unless LL1 and LH1 are
specified.
EXAMPLE(S):
The entire sample will be
ignored unless the value for
parameter 11 is between
35 and 70, AND the value
for parameter 400. is between
6 and 8.
PGM=MEAN,PURP=305B/STA,
A«li'GNFS9,5=070009,
P=11,P=400,P=300,
LL1=35,LH1=7Q,
LL2=6,LH2=8,
BD-730101,
WQ-RET
6-45
-------
DO |
Saturation I
Calculation j
PGM=MEAN, I
CLASSIFICATION:
USE:
Program Associated Function;
Calculation of Dissolved Oxygen Saturation
This function is performed automatically by the MEAN
program on each sample which contains the proper set of
parameter code keywords described below. This function
is not invoked by a keyword/value specification.
PROCEDURE:
To have the dissolved oxygen saturation calculated by
the MEAN program, specify the following parameters
within the retrieval request: P=10 (temperature in
degrees Celsius) or P=ll (temperature in degrees
Fahrenheit); P=299 (dissolved oxygen, probe) or P=300
(dissolved oxygen); and P=301 (percentage of dissolved
oxygen saturation). The MEAN program will then
automatically perform the necessary conversions and
calculations, and will place the calculated value into
the positions associated with parameter 301. (It is
essential that P=30V be specified in the retrieval,
otherwise no computation will result as there would be
no column in which to record the results of the
calculations.)
Certain adjustments can be made to these calculations
based upon the presence of chlorides and on the
altitude of the station at which the DO saturation
values are being calculated. By specifying P=904
(chloride), the MEAN program will allow for the
presence of these compounds in the DO saturation
calculations. By specifying P=42 (altitude in feet),
the MEAN program will also allow for the effect of the
associated altitude in the calculation of the DO
saturations.
NOTES ON USAGE:
The altitude of the station must have been stored as
parameter 42 for sample date 01/01/01.
This calculation will not be performed on samples
containing a user stored value for DO saturation.
WQ-RET
6-47
-------
EXAMPLE(S)
Retrieve statistical summaries
including calculations of the
dissolved oxygen saturation.
PGM=MEAN,PUR?=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
?=11,P=300,P=301,?=40C
BD=730101,DG=S,
A.iaNT/LAXE
CAT! TIME OCP7H
faow IF
70 DA* f££T
'3/01/03 '19 25
'1/05/15 03 10
71/0o,04 09 00
75/10/16 LO 10
'5/io/:: 11 oo 3005
75/11 '04 10 00
74'04/21 10 10
74/05/23 10 '.5
10 10 3022
10 45 0044
74/06/10 33 10
76/07/11 11 00
'6/03/01 10 00
10 15 30:0
10 30 OJ40
76/00/25 03 10
39. 45 3015
09 00 0010
76/09/14 10 1C
11 00 3313
1! 10 0014
'-, 10/29 19 •;
COO 11
"'ATE 3
TE.-P
11.0
49.0
43.0
47.0
44.0
4 .0
4 .0
5 .0
5 .3
4 .0
5 .0
73.0
53.0
60.3
54. u
70.0
71 .0
51.0
52.0
52.0
49.0
V
30100
y>
I]
1C
4
10
1 1
9
4
s
j
3
3
7
j
o
$
•1
3
j
3
it i
3
5
6
1
6
0
0
4
5
5
4
3
^'
30101
00
SAT'J."
373309 LOSCL
4 14 31.2 339 21 4a.: 1
2 353 <:;H!:A>
1 HE 3UPEPIOR 070'91
-•4 3MTONAGON ?:v£?
. 3000 .'SET 3EPTH C^A5S 33
00400
6.50
4.50
5 . 50
4.30
4.50
6.00
6.00
4 . 60
6.40
5.30
6.30
6.30
4.90
4.60
: .30
4.50
5 .00
6.20
5.20
4 . i 1
o . 40
Afl8N7/LA«E
TO QA» ?EET
71/01/01 0925
73/Oj/l i H10
73/06/04 0300
75/10/16 1030
75/10/21 1100
75/11/04 1000
76/04/21 1030
!6/05/2o 1015
76/05/23 1010
76, OS/IS 1045
76/06/ 10 0910
76/07/11 1100
74/09/03 1000
7S/08/03 1015
76/03/03 1010
76/03/25 3830
76/03/7,5 0345
76/00/24 0900
74/09/U 1010 •
75/09/16 HOC
76/09/16 1:10
76/10/29 3950
00'3 1 1
f"<
11. uOOO
49 .0000
41.0000
4 7 .0000
48 .0000
41.0000
44 .0000
61.0000
57.000-3
47.0000
69 .0000
71.0000
48.0300
69.0000
54.0000
70 .3000
71 .0000
6! .3000
42 .0003
62.0000
•9.0JOO
11.9SOC
00 100
DO
ii.aooo
10.4000
3.70030
10.5000
11.4000
9 70000
9 70000
6 00000
3 43000
3 40000
a :ooso
7 50000
. 00000
3 '300UO
3 OOOOli
. 4000JC
a.jooao
9.50000
.400000
11.3003
,.*~
00301
•ES
97
41
39
31
91
100
91
50
91
96
18
32
4 .
33
90
4 .
37
i?
1.
31
CENT
.lan
.3791
.6907
.1791
.4426
.0000
.2692
.4202
.1111
.551'
.0434
.6087
43143
.3339
.909 1
;iooo
.6299
.6239
44o27
.0936
070039 LON^l
L11G LA«E 10 It E .A7E?S»£ET
44 :4 11.2 339 :: i?.: i
i4041 «t:il3«i
f_A<£ S'jpE^ICy J7C79]
."e OHTCtAOON 3:vE =
;4ACNI'i9
3030 ?EET j£?TM :'.»33 3'
0040:
5'J
4.53:00
6.50.;oo
4.50030
4.33000
6.50003
5.03000
5.00000
6.60000
5.600CO
5.30000
6.30000
6.30000 '
5.90000
5.60000
5.30300
6.5.000
5 . 30000
4.2..'OC.)
5 . 20COG
5.23000
6.50000
1) Stored parameter data values
2) Calculation of dissolved oxygen saturation
WQ-RET
6-48
-------
Un-icnized
Ammonia
Calculation
PGM=MEAN,
CLASSIFICATION:
Program Associated Function;
Calculation of Un-ionized Ammonia
USE:
This function is performed automatically by the MEAN
program on each sample which contains the proper set of
parameter code keywords described below. This function
is not invoked by a keyword/value specification.
PROCEDURE:
To have the percent of un-ionized ammonia calculated by
the MEAN program, specify the following parameters
within the retrieval request: P=10 (temperature in
degrees Celsius) or P=ll (temperature in degrees
Fahrenheit); P=400 (pH.) or P = 403 (lab pH); P = 610 (total
ammonia, mg/1 as N) or P=71845 (total ammonia, mg/1 as
NH4); and P=619 (percentage of un-ionized ammonia).
The MEAN program will then automatically perform the
necessary conversions and calculations, and will place
the calculated values into the positions associated
with parameter 619. (-It- is essential that P = 619 be--
specif led in the retrieval, otherwise no computation
will result, as there would be no column in which to
record the results of the calculations.) The percent
of un-ionized ammonia in the water is computed
according to the table provided by -Thurston, et al,
1974.
NOTES ON USAGE:
The program will use either of the temperature or
ammonia parameters it finds if both are specified in a
retrieval. If a data value exists for both of the
temperature or ammonia parameters for the same date,
the program will use parameter 00011 (degrees F) for
the temperature and 71845 (ammonia, total NH) for
ammonia instead of 00010 (degrees C) and 00610 (total
ammonia). The limits of the computation are between 5
and 30 degrees C and between 6 and 10 pH units. For
example, when pH is 8.5 and temperature is 34 degrees
C, 20% will be used to compute un-ionized ammonia.
WQ-RET
6-49
-------
Temperature and pH are the two most commonly measured
parameters in the WQF, while ammonia is number 13 in
terms of reporting frequency. Consequently there is a
good chance that the data necessary for the calculation
will be present for the stations of interest.
This calculation will not be performed on samples
containing a user stored value for un-ionized ammonia.
The MEAN program cannot compute loadings if PARfJ and
PARF are used (see Data Selection Keywords in Section
4) .
WQ-RET
6-50
-------
EXAMPLE(S)
Provide statistical summaries
including calculations of
un-ionized ammonia.
PGM=MEAN,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=070G09,
P=11,P=40C,P=6IO,P=619,P = 3 0 0 ,
3D=7301C1,DG=S,
1.0
3 0
IG'L
•H3-
:C-'
0 00
0 10
0 15
0 1:
0 3o
''°°*
0022
J J44
jo ; 3
]
t
j
?
7
4
3
i
i
J
o
j
'J
o
J
y
J
.J
"-^
.0*0
. c ;j o . j s ;
.60 •; . j c. o
.60 0.050
.30 J.Ji-,
.JU -J.050
.30 J . J ^ J
.90 J . J i 'i
.ad ; . J i L,
10.S
i I 4
V*8NT.'LAKE
2»TE ?[.1£ 2E? TH
?p>:- 3F
70 3At ?tIT
J''Jl/Oj 0925
j / (1 i / 1 i )930
l/io/04 090U
/10/li 1030
/ io/ ;i I'.oo
,11/04 1000
.•04/23 1010
.'05/13 1015
,'05/23 1010
/05/23 1045
,'Og/lC 3910
/07/1J 1100
/OS/01 1000
.'03/03 1015
/Oa/03 10JO
/ 10/29 0950
300 1 I
'ATE?
Tt.^P
?ArtH
J .0000
? .0000
3.0JOO
;.oooo
3 . J 0 0 0
3 .0000
4 .0000
3 .0000
7.0000
7.0300
9.0000
3.0000
3.0000
3.0300
4.0000
30 400
??
iU
3.50000
5 . 50000
3 . 50000
3 .00000
5. 50000
3.00000
6.00000
3 .60000
3.30000
5.JOOOO
3.30003
6.30000
5. ,0000
6.60000
5.30000
6.50000
"7
306 10
NH1-N
TOTAL
•n/L
35-jCOOO
05C 300Q
0500000
0500000
0500000
.0500000
.0500000
.0500000
.2dOOOO
006 : )
•j.i- ion:
: SMI-.HH
i «a/L
.30000)3
.30-00151
.0000609
.0000102
.000160)
.000ia;4
.0001919
.0000983
.OOOO'SS
O'OOO' '-•-.•"•.I
43 It 31.; >39 ii 43. C I
:»05i ncaiMN
19 >NTCXAGO'4 3IVE3
UWSfS'9
1000 fEET 3EPT" .".•Si 33
00130
00
«C,'.
13. JOOO
10.6000
i . -OSOO
10 .5000
11.4000
1 M'OOO
) 70000
3 00000
1 40000
j 40000
i 10000
7 50030
.700000
11. JOOO
1) Stored parameter data values
2) Calculation of un-ionized ammonia
WQ-RET
6-51
-------
PGM=PLOT,
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
The PLOT program retrieves data from the WQF and plots
the values of each selected parameter for each selected
station (Y-axis) for the specified time period (X-
axis). Values plotted may take the form of raw
concentrations (mg/1), loadings (Ibs/dy), or
logarithms. The program allows for the control of the
plot format including size control and plot symbols
used.
GENERAL KEYWORD APPLICABILITY:
All general keywords described in Sections 4 and 5 are
valid with the PLOT program. The parameter keyword P
may be specified up to 10 times.
OTHER NOTES AND COMMENTS:
The program generates the plot data onto a magnetic
tape which is forwarded to EPA headquarters for
plotting and dissemination to the user.
Users should exercise restraint in producing a large
number of plots in a relatively short period of time.
Each specification of 'PGM=PLOT,' generates a separate
plot tape which is sent to EPA by the computer services
vendor. Requests for a large number of plots in a
short period of time may result in a backlog of tapes
to be plotted at EPA and a depletion of the number of
tapes available for use as plot tapes. If you have any
questions relating to your particular plotting
requirements, please call STORET User Assistance.
The following keywords described in the MEAN program
may be used with the PLOT program to plot calculated
values:
LOAD allows computation of stream loadings
LOG calculates logarithmic values
LL1... specifies acceptable ranges for parameter
values
LV establishes lower limit for a parameter
value
HV establishes upper limit for a parameter
value
calculation of dissolved oxygen saturation
calculation of un-ionized ammonia
WQ-RET
6-55
-------
PROGRAM OUTPUT:
Plot values of iron(P=1045
The starting date for the
x-axis(time) is to be
January 1, 1973.
PGM=PLOT,PURP=305B/STA,
A-14AGNFS9,5=070009,
P=1045,
3D=730101,
PRT=NO,
145 '.-4 31. i is? j!
-3*0 ..-axS :: "; i
CCCC .-E-- 3E»?H -1 = 53 OC
s .
soo ice '.we ;toc
WQ-RET
6-56
-------
FACT
SYM
PGM=PLOT,
CLASSIFICATION: Program Associated Keywords
USE:
These keywords may be used with the PLOT program to
specify the size of each plot and the plotting symbol
to be used to represent the plotted data points.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
FACT=n, where n is any numerical value, including a
decimal value, between 0.1 and 5 inclusive.
The specified value is the multiple by which
the basic plot size of 5 1/2" x 6 1/2"
(FACT=1.0) is increased or decreased.
SYM=mss, where ss is any two digit whole number that
equates to one of the plotting symbols shown
below, and where m is an optional minus
sign which specifies that the plotted symbols
are not to be connected by straight lines.
a
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
/\
07
Z Y
08
09
10
11
11
20
The value of 20 specifies that no symbol is to
be plotted.
DEFAULT VALUES
NOTES ON USAGE:
Leading zeroes must be specified.
connected by
FACT-1.40, (7.75" x 9.0")
SYM=02, (plot using the symbol
straight lines. )
These keywords may be specified only once in a
retrieval request.
WQ-RET
6-57
-------
EXAMPLE(S)
Plot values of water temperature PGM=PLOT,?URP=305B/STA,
and DO as a function of time A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
using an "X" to mark data points. P=ll,?=300,
The size of the plot produced BD=730101,
is to be approximately 11" by 13". FACT=2,5YM*4,
PRT=NO,
WQ-RET
6-58
-------
sc
PGM=PLOT,
CLASSIFICATION: Program Associated Keyword
USE: This keyword may be used with the PLOT program to
specify that the scales of the axes of the plots are to
be uniform throughout the program. The keyword SC
specifies that the scales of all plots associated with
stations and parameters are to be identical.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
SC=A, examines all of the data retrieved and
then sets scales according to the maximum
value for each parameter retrieved and the
maximum number of days. This causes the
scales for the various plots to be the
same.
DEFAULT VALUES: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
If 'SC*A,' is not specified, the x- and y-axes will be
set to the maximum and minimum sampling dates and
maximum parameter values for each parameter at each
station.
WQ-RET
6-59
-------
EXAMPLE(S)
Plot values of DO for the three
stations specified (i.e. three
plots will be produced). The
sampling characteristics of the
three stations are as follows:
PGM«PLOT,PURP-305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=C70C02,
S=070006,5=070009,
P=300,
30=730101,
SC = A,
PRT=NO,
station
070002
070006
070009
date
730108/760713
730108/740516
730103/760713
max, value
. 11.0
16.4
13.9
Since 'SC=A,' is specified the axes
will be set as follows for all three
plots.
origin point
730103
0
end point
760713
16.4
WQ-RET
6-60
-------
NOPLOT,
PGM=PLOT,
CLASSIFICATION: Program Associated Keyword
USE: This keyword may be used with the PLOT program to
eliminate the plotting .of specified parameters.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
NOPLOT, specifies that the values of the immediately
preceding parameter are not to be plotted.
There is no value associated with this keyworc
DEFAULT VALUE: Not applicable.
NOTES ON USAGE:
If not specified, all requested parameters will be
plotted.
NOPLOT applies to each parameter keyword it follows,
and can be specified as many times as is required
.within a retrieval request, up to a maximum of 10
times. -
SOME REPRESENTATIVE USES:
For calculating loadings, a flow parameter must be
retrieved, but need not be plotted.
EXAMPLE(S):
Plot loadings for parameter PGM=PLOT,PURP=305B/STA,
650 at the specified station A=1115D050,5=255420,
but do not plot values for the P=60,NOPLOT,P=650,LOAD,
flow parameter (60).
WQ-RET
6-61
-------
PGM=LOC,
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
The LOG program plots a map of the area defined with
any station selection method, and plots a symbol to
denote the locations of all stations within thac area,
the state boundaries, and optionally, the county
boundaries and polygon vertices. The map will be a
maximum of 24" high (north/south), and 49" wide
(east/west) to include the area plotted. Included with
the map is a listing of all stations and their
associated latitude and longitude coordinates.
GENERAL KEYWORD APPLICABILITY:
All station identification keywords described in
Section 4 are valid with this program. Data selection
keywords are not valid since the LOG program retrieves
no data. The HEAD keyword may be specified and will
appear in the title block of the map. (When used with
LOG, the text of the HEAD keyword may not exceed 35
characters.) SHIFT, PRT and ?RMI are not valid for
LOG.
All advanced general retrieval keywords described in
Section- 5 are v-alid except the-PM keyword-.--
OTHER NOTES AND COMMENTS:
Although all station selection methods are valid, it is
recommended that polygon selection (LT,L keywords) be
used to ensure the most accurate locations of stations
plotted.
See the LOG program description in Section 7, Advanced
Retrieval Programs and Their Special Keywords, for a
discussion of the use of LT=NORET to eliminate the
plotting of stations located at unwanted or
incorrectly-stored coordinates.
WQ-RET
6-65
-------
PROGRAM OUTPUT:
Plot a map of the area
described by the specified
polygon, with symbols plotted
to denote stations belonging
to agency 21MICH.
PGM»LOC,PURP-305H/STA,
TAGS,STREAMS,CLR,
SCALE=250000,
LT=I,
L-4320,L«8404,L=4315,
L-833730,L-4330,L-8315,
L=4330,L=830730,L=430730,
L=8304,L«432230,L*825230,
L-433730,L-825230,L«433730,
L=8247,L=4345,L=8247,L=4345,
L-8315,L-433730,L-8315,
L*4330,L=8345,L«433C,L=8405,
U-21MICH,
WQ-RET
6-66
-------
SCALE
PGM=LOG,
CLASSIFICATION: Program Associated Keyword
USE:
The SCALE keyword may be used with the LOG program to
specify the desired scale for the map to be plotted.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
SCALE=scale,
where scale is any numerical value
indicating the scale desired. No
commas are to be embedded within
the value. Units are in a map-
distance to real-distance ratio',
so SCALE=500000, will produce a
map at scale 1:500,000.
DEFAULT VALUE: Scale=5000000, (5 million)
NOTES ON USAGE:
If this keyword is not specified, the system
maximize the scale used, based upon the size
area to be plotted.
will
of the
If the scale specified would result in a map over 24"
high (north-south direction) or 49" wide (east-west
direction), this keyword will be ignored, and the map
will be reduced to 24" x 49".
This keyword must be used in order to obtain any
standard map scale; a standard scale is not
automatically provided if SCALE is not specified.
EXAMPLE(S)
The map specified is to be
plotted with a scale of
1:250000.
PGM»LOC,PURP-305B/STA,
SCALE=250000,
LT=I,
L=4320,L=8404,L=4315,
L=833730,L=4330,L=8315,
L»4330,L»830730,L=430730,
L«8304,L»432230,L-825230,
L«433730,L«825230,L-43373C,
L=8247,L=4345,L=8247,L=434:
L=8315,L=433730,L=8315,
L=4330,L=8345,L=4330,L=840:
U=21MICH,
WQ-RET
6-67
-------
NOCOUN,
PGM=LOG,
CLASSIFICATION: Program Associated Keyword
USE:
The NOCOUN keyword may be used with the LOG program to
suppress the mapping of county boundaries.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
NOCOUN, There is no value associated with this
keyword.
DEFAULT VALUE: Not applicable.
NOTES ON USAGE:
On maps covering large geographical areas, the presence
of county boundaries on the map may hinder the study
and interpretation of the map. Specifying NOCOUN can
help alleviate this condition, as well as reduce the
cost of the plot.
EXAMPLE(S:
The map specified will be
plotted with county lines
suppresed.
PGM=LOC,PURP=3053/STA,
SCALE = 250000,NOCOUN,
LT= I
L=4320,L=34G4,L=4315,
L=833730,L=4330,L=S3i5,
L«4330,L«83073Q,L*430730,
L=8304,L=432230,L=825230,
L«433730,L«325230,L«433720,
L=8247,L=4345,L=8247,L=434:
L=8315,L=433730,L=8315,
L=4330,L=8345,L=4330,L=8405
U=21MICH,
WQ-RET
6-69
-------
NOPOLPLT,
PGM=LOG,
CLASSIFICATION: Program Associated Keyword
USE:
The NOPOLPLT keyword may be used with the LOG program
(when the area whose stations are to be plotted is
defined by a polygon) to suppress mapping of the
polygon.
KEYWORD FORMAT AflD VALUES:
NOPOLPLT,
There is no value associated with this
keyword.
DEFAULT VALUE: Not applicable.
EXAMPLE(S):
The map
plotted
polygon
specified will
without the
outline.
be
PGM=LOC,PURP-305B/STA,
SCAL£=250000,NOPOLPLT,
LT=I,
L=4320,L=8404, L=4315,
L=833730,L=4330,L=8315,
L=4330,L=830730,L=430730,
L=8304,L=432230,L=32523C,
L=433730,L=825230,L=433730,
L=8247,L=4345,L=8247,L=4343,
L=8315,L=433730,L=8315,
L=4330,L=8345,L=4330,L=8405,
U=21MICH,
WQ-RET
6-71
-------
TAGS, I
STREAMS, !
CLR, !
PGM=LOG,
CLASSIFICATION: Program Associated Keywords
USE:
These keywords may be used with the LOG program to tag
stations with a cross reference number, and to plot,
where available, streams, cities, lakes, and
reservoirs.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
TAGS, specifies that each station plotted on the
map is to be tagged with a coded identifier
which relates to a listing of descriptive
information for the stations.
STREAMS, specifies that stream traces are to be plotted,
if the data are available. (Areas which have •
such data include the State of Michigan and
the Southeast Region.)
CLR, specifies that the outlines of cities, lakes,
and reservoirs are to be plotted, if the data
are available. (Areas which have such data
include the State of Michigan and the
Southeast Region.)
There are no values associated with any of these keywords.
DEFAULT VALUES: Not applicable.
NOTES ON USAGE:
If TAGS is specified, only 300 stations may be
retrieved/plotted. STORET will produce up to 5 maps to
avoid overprinting any of the tags. Users should not
use this keyword when plotting many stations located in
a relatively small area.
WQ-RET
6-73
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
For the previous map include PGM-LOC, PURP=305B/STA,
cross reference tags for the TAGS,STREAMS,CLR,
stations, stream traces, and SCALE*250000,
outlines of cities, lakes LT=I,
and reservoirs. L=4320,L=8404,L=4315,
L=83 3730 ,L=4330,L=8315,
L=4330,L=830730,L=430730,
L = 83.04,L=432230, L = 825230,
L=433730,L=825230,L=433730,
L=8247,L=4345,L=8247,L=4345,
L=8315,L«433730,L=8315,
L=4330,L=8345,L=4330,L=8405,
U=21MICH,
WQ-RET
6-74
-------
PGM=STAND,
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
The STAND program compares the stored values of
selected water quality parameters with a set of values
(criteria) specified in the retrieval request. These
criteria, for instance, could be the State or Federal
standards currently in force for a particular stream
segment of interest. Stored parameter values which do
not satisfy the criteria comparison are flagged with an
asterisk in the printed output. The program provides
for various output formats, including violations lists
and violations summaries.
GENERAL KEYWORD APPLICABILITY:
All general keywords described in Sections 4 and 5 are
valid with the STAND program. The parameter keyword P
may be specified up to 50 times.
WQ-RET
6-77
-------
PROGRAM OUTPUT:
Retrieve a list of violations
along with supporting parameter
values and a violations summary.
The parameters to be examined
are iron (P=1045) with maximum
criteria of 500 and -coliforms
(P=31501) with maximum criteria
of 600.
PGM = STAND,PURP = 30 53/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
P=11,P=300/P=400,P=610,
P=1045,HV=500,P=315C1,HV=600,
BD«730101,
PSA=T,PVS=T,
PRT=NO,
-tTrt aOPPOST :NO
• ATEP
TiMP
:"*HN
i'OOO* -ONGL
46 i * ) i. 2 •: 3 $ :: i s.:
LONG LAKi • ; *r. i -*TS
ZoOH «;CHICAN
:i'J4$ 31 >01
:?ON TOT COL I
A*3NT/1AX
M 3K VAi'JES
.«.;AN
.•S3 IAS
NC 2f VIOLJ
JSPCiNT VIOL
•:N;*U* v:ji.
.1EAN VIOL
.fAXIUjfl VIOL
3u««
;Uvll OOJCO
•iAT^S 00
?AMS "0-L
12 22
SO. 10.
»2. 9.
o o
0 . 0 .
:. o.
0 . fl .
0. 0.
r ;F VIOLATIONS ON
OJ4CC -3J610
?H ,
-------
LV,HV
PGM=STAND,
CLASSIFICATION: Program Associated Keywords
USE:
These keywords may be used with the STAND program to
establish the upper and lower limits against which
parameter values are to be compared. Parameter values
which are outside of these keyword values are flagged
with asterisks in the printed output. Either or both
can be used in a retrieval.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
LV=lower-limit,
HV=upper-limit,
where lower-limit is any numerical
value, including a decimal value,
between -899E+7 and +899E+7. LV
establishes the lower limit for a
parameter value; parameter values
less, or lower, than lower-limit
will be flagged.
where upper-limit is any numerical
value, including a decimal value,
between — 8-9-9E+7--and- -»-89-9E-t-7-.- -
Parameter values which are
greater than upper-limit will
be flagged.
DEFAULT VALUES
NOTES ON USAGE:
LV=-899E+7,
HV=f899E+7,
These keywords apply only to the preceding parameter
code keyword (P), and in order to flag any values
outside the specified criteria, either, or both, but at
least one, of these keywords must be specified in a
'PGM=STAND,' retrieval request.
Although LV and HV may be used with both programs STAND
and MEAN, their function is different with each
program. With program STAND, values which are not
within the specified limits are flagged; with program
MEAN, values which are not within the specified limits
are excluded.
WQ-RET
6-79
-------
LV and HV may be specified, in any order. Up. to 5.0
pairs of P and LV/HV keywords can be spec-ified in a-
single retrieval request.
EXAMPLE(S)
Flag all temperature values PGM=STAND,PURP=3053/STA,
less than 35 degrees F and A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
all coliform values greater P-ll,LV=35,P=31501,HV=600
than 600. BD-730101,
PRT=NO,
WQ-RET
6-80
-------
PS I
PSA
PVS
PSO
PGM=STAND,
CLASSIFICATION: Program Associated Keywords
USE: These keywords may be used with the STAND program to
specify the format for the program's output.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
PSI=T, specifies that only the number of parameters
retrieved, the criteria for these parameters,
and the number of transformations to be
performed are to be printed.
PSA=T, specifies that the flagged value of each
parameter that violated the specified criteria
will be printed for each occurrence. In
addition, it will print the supporting data
•values for all other parameters specified for
each violation that occurred. (I.e., if a
violation occurred at a certain date for one
parameter, the data for all parameters
specified are to be printed for that date.)
PVS=T, specifies that a summary of the values falling
outside the criteria specified for all
parameters is to be printed.
PSO=T, specifies that only those parameters that are
in violation of the specified criteria are
to be printed.
DEFAULT VALUES: PVS=T, PSO=T,
WQ-RET
6-81
-------
NOTES ON USAGE:
.Any combination of these four keywords may be specified
in a STAND retrieval.
The summary provided by 'PVS=T,' includes the
following:
Number of total values
Mean of total values
Median of the total values
Number of violations within the total
values
Percent of violations
Minimum value of those in violation
Mean value of those in violation
Maximum value of those in violation
Minimum value specified in the retrieval
request as a criteria
Maximum value specified.in the retrieval
request as a criteria
WQ-RET
6-82
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
Produce all four output
formats. The following
annotated output shows
the results of the retrieval.
?GM=STAND,PUR?=3053/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
P=11,LV=35,P=31501,HV=600,
30=730101,
PVS=T,PSO=T,
PSA=T,PSI=T,
PRT=NO,
CJNTHOL [NFOi».-«Ar:-J!i AS i.WJT
i7ATI3..j/CaiTS*lA LIST
;TVC!U>i 3TH-KISC JJIViSIA 0
CSITEJIA 1
I 1S.OJ-J""
JUM.ITY v:OLAT:C.-i5
AMSHT.'UKE
00011 31501
•ATE* TOT COUI
TEX? KMKCNOO
TIME ?AHN /100XL
•J/Ol/J] 09!5
:j/o«/04 o^oo
:i/a«/u mis
•1/12/20 1050
Jl.OU- 10.0
63.00 1500.0*
it.00 100.3-
J3.00' i.O
to 14 !!.! lit 21 43.0 I
."1CHISAN
3 3NTC*ACOH RIVtR
oooo FEET 3e?TH ;LAS$
ioOSJ
LAKE
1) Output specified by 'PSI-T,'
2) Output specified by 'PSA=T/<
WQ-RET
6-83
-------
VIOLATIONS
A-OST/ LAKE
300i: )i'.ji
• A7ER TOT COLi
TE.1P 1FI.12NOO
OATE 71,'E fAHN /10J*L
•3/01/0) 1125 D.'JO-
•J/uo/^4 g)uO 1500.0-
•1/-H/U 3»1= iOt.O-
"j/12/20 U5J 13.00'
0
CO)
4 !; .2 OS
-A7ER DUALITY VIOLATIONS
G
j-ooos :
46 14 H.2 Hi :i
L01-; LA
-------
TS
| PGM=STAND,
CLASSIFICATION: Program Associated Keyword
USE: This keyword may be used with the STAND program to
perform a linear transformation of water quality
parameter values prior to the values' comparison with
the specified criteria. The form of the linear
transformation is Y=A+BX.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
TS=abcd, where abed represents a 24 digit value, as
follows:
a is the two-digit positional indicator for
parameter Y
b is the two-digit positional indicator for
parameter X
c is the ten-digit intercept value A in
the linear transformation equation
d is the ten-digit slope value B in the
linear transformation equation
Leading and trailing zeroes must be coded.
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
This keyword must be coded precisely, using the 24
digit abed as a fixed format, position dependent value.
If the parameter referenced by b is not stored for a
given point, no transformations will be performed.
Since transformation results are recorded under the
parameter referenced by the A and Y values,
transformation will not be performed for samples that
already contain a raw data observation for that
parameter.
X is the parameter present in the sample, and Y. is the
parameter to which it is transformed.
WQ-RET
6-85
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
Assume that data on phosphorus PGM=STAND,PURP=3053/STA,
at a particular station are A-11140100,3=173816,
stored as both parameter 665 P=665,LV=1.2,HV«1.7,P=650,
(phosphorus total), and
parameter 650 (total PRT=NO,
phosphorus as P04). Also
assume these two phosphate
parameters can be equated
using the transformation
P665+ 0.33333 (P650), which
transforms the P04 to total
phosphate. The example shown
will convert values for
parameter 650 using the
transormation shown prior to
comparing the parameter values
(for 665 and 650 transformed)
against the specified criteria.
WQ-RET
6-86
-------
APPENDIX 1: INDEX OF AVAILABLE HELP FILES
A number of helpful data sets are maintained on the system by
STORE! User Assistance. These data sets are available on-line
and can be listed at any time by simply entering the appropriate
commands from a low-speed keyboard type terminal. They also may
be printed at an RJE terminal.
The STORET help data set named INDEX provides a listing of the
names of all currently available help data sets. This data set
also gives the date each data set was added or last changed.
STORET users should occasionally list this data set and scan the
date column for any help data sets added or changed since they
last reviewed the index.
The STORET help data set named PRNTHELP contains the job control
language necessary to produce a listing of the names of STORET
help data sets at a user's RJE terminal.
WQ-RET
Al-1
-------
APPEiNDIX 2: TABLES OF WQF KEYWORDS 3Y RETRIEVAL PROGRAM
The following two tables depict the applicability of all general
retrieval keywords (described in sections 4 and 5 of chapter WQ-
RET) with respect to the WQF retrieval programs. Table A2-1
lists the keywords in alphabetical order; table A2-2 lists the
keywords by functional group. The following Key to Table Entries
applies to both tables.
KEY TO TABLE ENTRIES
meaning
keyword may be used; keyword description
found in Section 4
keyword may be used; keyword description
found in Section 5
keyword is not valid for the designated
program; do not use
* keyword must be used
+ keyword may be used (Table A2-2)
G keyword may be used; keyword description
found in Appendix G
I keyword may be used; keyword description
found in Appendix I
WQ-RET
A2-1
-------
TABLE A2rl
GENERAL RETRIEVAL KEYWORDS BY RETRIEVAL PROGRAM,
ALL-
INV120
FARM RET INVENT MEAN PLOT LOG STAND INDEX STA PUNCH MS? REG NOPAr,
A
AGGR
ANC
ARCLASS
AREA
B
BD,ED
BG,EG
BOT
BS
BT,ET
D
DSROC
EXTRACT
HEAD
IS
LT,L
MASK
NCRET
NOSELECT
NOTU
ONLYU
P
PARF
PARONLY
PARU
PGM
PLV,PHV
PRV
PM
PRMI
PRT
PURP
RMI
R
S
SELECT
SHIFT
ST
STC,CO
4
no
no
no
4
4
4
no
no
4
no
no
no
4
no
no
4
4
no
no
no
no
4
no
no
no
4*
no
no
no
no
no
4*
4
no
4
no
no
no
4
4
,*
t
4
4
4
4
4
•4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
G
4
4
5
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4*
4
4
5
4
4
4*
4
4
4
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
no
4
4
no
4
4
4
no
4
4
no
5
4
4
4
no
no
no
4*
no
no
no
no
no
4*
4
no
4
5
no
4
4 •
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
G
4
4
5
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4*
4
4
5
4
4
4*
4
4
4
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
G
4
4
5
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4*
4
4
5
4
4
4*
4
4
4
5
4
4
4
4
no
no
4
4
4
no
no
no
4
no
no
no
4
4
G
4
4
5
5
4
4
no
no
no
no
4*
no
no
no
no
no
4*
4
no
4
5
no
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
G
4
4
5
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4*
4
4
5
4
4
4*
4
4
4
5
4
4
4
4
no
no
no
4
4
no
no
no
4
no
no
no
4
no
no
4
4
5
5
4
4
no
no
no
no
4*
no
no
no
no
no
4*
4
no
4
5
no
4
4
4*
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
4*
no
no
no
no
no
4*
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
G
4
4
5
5
5
5
4
4
4
4
4*
4
4
5
4
4
4*
4
4
4
5
4
4
4
4
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
G
4
4
5
5
A
*t
4
4
4
4
4
4*
4
4
5
4
4
4*
4
4
4
5
4
4
4
4*
4
A
t
4
no
4
4
4
4
no
4
4
.1
•»
no
4
no
no
no
5
3
no
no
4*
4
4
4
4*
4
4
5
4
4
4*
no
4
4*
5
4
no
no
j
t
no
no
4
4
4
no
no
nc
A
T
no
no
no
•i
no
no
4
•i
^
5
T
4
no
no
no
no
4*
no
no
no
no
no
4*
4
•t
no
4
5
no
4
4
WQ-RET
A2-2
-------
TABLE A2-1
CONTINUED
STCNTY no 4
U no 4
UD,LD 4 4
UK no 4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
no
no
4
4
4
4
4
4
no
no
no
no
no
no
4
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
no
no
4
4
.1
~y
^
no
no
WQ-RET
A2-3
-------
TABLE A2-2
GENERAL RETRIEVAL KEYWORDS BY' FUNCTIONAL GROUP-
» . - •' . 4 • •• -
1
r
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
!.
l
1
i
i
'
i
I
i
1
'•
!
1
i
1
i
i
1
1
1
I
1
I
SEC-I RETRIEVAL
TIONI . 1 ! 1 ! 1 1 1 i
i TAV?L.';G ='~-
•VS4LY3 13 VSC :
. i
!
. : 1
•JT II 1
201 .SOPI? i L:C : :•;:
M
1 : ' t
1 i - •
1
i | l '
1 , '. * "
; : * 1 -
II*. '
• . : 1
' * ! " ' "
i i '.
ii-
1 ' :
i :
;
• ' .
<
; i so •;".
1 i SO ; ''.•', ' s
: i so si ;
! i -JO : M: •:
; : •;- ; -;-; .
. i -;^ \ .;'",
i i NO i '. ; ; •:
j i •;<} , .j,-. ; •;
: i \*c- ' •; :
i ' •.•'" N;
i | ,;-- . ..^ . .;
1 ' ''i'~' • ",'; "'.
-. \ '•"'? :.'•";
i : •[•;, - . •;
1 l :
, ; ;
| j ^.^ ' M '• 1 •;
! ' '' ' ' * i '«
i i -;o ! *;.: i s
i i 'io i NJ i •:
1 ! > '
i 1 i
! 1 * ! * i -
!!•.!+ i--
ll NO ! NO 1
! f J i
_0> . . ^ '.
1
X 57-
-
i
•; ^
i N-
*( ;
* :•; z
WQ-RET
A2-4
-------
APPENDIX 3: SUMMARY OF RETRIEVAL KEYWORD DESCRIPTIONS
This appendix provides a complete summary, in alphabetical order,
of all WQF retrieval keywords. Each entry gives a brief
description of the keyword's function and the number (letter)
within parentheses indicates the WQ-RET section (appendix) in
which the keyword is described in detail. Keywords are generally
applicable to all WQF retrieval programs unless otherwise noted.
Keyword Description
A (4) retrieves stations by agency codes
ADDM (7) inserts a mileage for a retrieved
station (MSP)
AGGR (4) combines data retrieved from a group of
stations into a single station
ANC (4) specifies the type of composite sampling
information to be retrieved
ARCLASS (4) retrieves archived data
AREA (4) retrieves stations within designated 203
areas
ASA99 (7) generates overlays of the 99-area set
of Aggregated Subareas (LOG, MSP)
AT (7) specifies the inserted location of a
station relative to another station with
a known mileage (MSP)
AUXFILE (7) specifies additional location data to
be plotted (LOO
AUXSYM (7) specifies the plotting symbol to be
plotted for auxfile (LOO
B (4) qualifies specified stations as individual
or a range of stations
BASE (6) establishes beginning date for statistical
analysis (MEAN)
BD (4) restricts parametric data to samples taken
' after a certain date
BEGIN (7) a dummy keyword, often used with the
SAMSTA keyword (MSP)
BG (4) eliminates parametric data outside of
a date group
EOT (4) specifies whether or not bottom (mud)
samples are to be retrieved
BS (4) retrieves stations by major/minor/sub
basin codes
BT (4) restricts parametric data to samples
taken after a specified time
CKNO (7) specifies the position of the first
character in the check value field (LOO
CKWDTH (7) specifies the number of characters in
the check value field (LOO
CLR (6) plots outlines of cities, lakes, and
reservoirs (LOO
WQ-RET
A3-1
-------
Keyword
Description
CO
COMSCL
CONLEV
CONN
CONV
CSIZE
D
DELM
DG
DG=,
DM
DO SAT
DR
DSROC
EARLY
ED
EG
ET
EXTRACT
FACT
FLEX
GRAPHNO
GROUPS
(4)
(7)
(7
(7)
(7)
(7)
(4)
(7)
(6)
(7)
(6)
(6)
(6)
(4)
(7)
(4)
(4)
(4)
(4)
(6)
(7)
(7)
(7)
retrieves stations b'y county codes
specifies that the scales of a plot
are to be the same as the previous
plot (MSP) .
sets the vertical (z-axis) increment at
which contour lines are to be drawn (MS?)
draws a continuous line through the
plotted stations even if a station
is not plotted (MSP)
produces an all-character output (RET)
specifies the height of the first line
of characters in the title block
(LOC, MSP)
specifies units associated with
depth-related output
specifies that a station is not to
be plotted on every plot (MSP)
specifies date grouping criteria (MEAN)
suppresses printing of statistical
calculations performed by the MEAN
program (MEAN)
controls decimal placement (MEAN/
method of calculating dissolved oxygen
saturation (MEAN)
controls decimal placement (RET)
specifies whether grab or composite
samples are to be retrieved
specifies the areas or stations to be
used as an early point of reference f-or
a trend map (MSP)
restricts parametric data to samples
taken before a certain date
eliminates parametric data outside of
a date group
restricts parametric data to samples
taken before a specified time
restricts retrieval to stations
with certain parameter or type
characteristics
controls size of plot (PLOT)
omits plotting of contour lines outside
a specified polygon (MSP)
specifies symbols or types of shading
to be plotted (MSP)
partitions data linearly into groups
(MSP)
WQ-RET
A3-2
-------
Keyword
GROUPSB
GROUPSQ
Description
(7)
(7)
HEAD
HV
I NCR
IS
L
LABEL
LATE
LD
LEFTn
LK1/LH2
LINEAR
LINMIL
LINSTA
LL1/LL2
LOAD
LOG
LT
LT=NORET
LV
(4)
(6)
(7)
(G)
(4)
(7)
(7)
(4)
(7)
(6)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(6)
(6)
(6)
(4)
(7)
(6)
partitions data into groups at specified
breakpoints (MSP)
partitions data into four groups having
an approximately equal number of
observations in each group (MSP)
specifies user-written report
identification information
establishes upper limit for a parameter
value (MEAN, PLOT,. STAND)
specifies the number of miles per
unit increment along the x-axis for
mileage-linear plots (MSP)
retrieves intensive survey data
specifies latitude and longitude
coordinates for a polygon retrieval
supplies map title information
specifies the areas or stations to be
used as a late point of reference for
a trend map (MSP)
specifies a lower depth limitation
for samples
specifies that the scale, parameter
and values of the nth parameter are
appear on the left side of the plot
specifies acceptable ranges for
parameter values (MEAN, PLOT)
plots a parameter on a linear scale
specifies mileage-linear scaling for
the x-axis (MSP)
specifies station-linear scaling for
the x-axis (MS?)
specifies acceptable ranges for parameter
values (MEAN, PLOT)
allows computation of stream loadings
(MEAN, PLOT)
calculates logarithmic values prior
to statistical analysis (MEAN, PLOT);
plots a parameter on a log scale (MSP)
selects stations within a user
defined polygon
eliminates the plotting of data located
at unwanted coordinates (LOG, MSP)
establishes lower limit for a parameter
value (MEAN, PLOT, STAND)
name
to
(MS?'
(MSP;
WQ-RET
A3-3
-------
Keyword
Description
M + nS
M-nS
MASK
MAX
MEAN
MEAN=n
MIN
MODELL
MODELR
MORE
MSPARMS
MUL
NMIN
NOBOX
NOCONN
NOCOUN
NOLIST
NOPARCDS
NOPAREND
NOPLOT
NOPOLAUX
NOPOLPLT
NORET
NOSELECT
(7)
(7)
(4)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(6)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(6)
(7)
(6)
(5)
(5)
plots the mean value of the parameter
plus n times sigma (MSP)
plots the mean value of the parameter
minus n times sigma (MSP)
selects stations satisfying system and/or
user-supplied masks
plots the maximum value of the parameter
(MSP)
invokes execution of PGM=MEAN (MSP)
plots the mean value of the parameter
(MSP)
plots the minimum value of the
parameter (MSP)
establishes plot specifications for
the left axis (MSP)
establishes plot specifications for
the right axis (MSP)
places RET retrieval output onto
disk or tape (RET)
denotes the beginning of MSP-specific
keywords (MSP)
specifies the character to be used
to plot positions on which two or
more statistics fall (MSP)
plots a station as a function of the
number of observations found (MSP)
suppresses the drawing of.a box around
a plot (LOG, MSP)
causes the connecting line to be
broken when a station is not plotted
(MSP)
suppresses plotting of county boundary
lines (LOG, MSP)
suppresses the printing of listings
normally produced by the MSP program
(MSP)
denotes the beginning of NOPAR control
cards (NOPAR)
denotes the end of NOPAR control cards
(NOPAR)
eliminates plotting of selected
parameters (PLOT)
plots points in the
(LOG, MSP)
suppresses plotting
(LOG, MSP)
bypasses retrieval
stations and data
bypasses retrieval of
stations
of
of
auxiliary field
the polygon
water quality
water quality
WQ-RET
A3-4
-------
Keyword
NCSTATE
NOTRMK
NOTU
NOVERLAY
NUMLITE
ONEORG
ONLYU
OUT
P
P=n
PARF
PARONLY
PAPU
%TILEnT.
PGM
PHV
Pi
PLOT
PLOTMSG
PLV
PM
POINTS
POST
PRMI
PRT
Description
(7) suppresses plotting of state and
county boundary lines (LOG, MSP!
(7) controls the plotting of parametric
data according to the remark codes
stored with the data (MSP)
(4) excludes specific agencies from retrieval
(7) suppresses plotting of state and
county boundary lines (LOG, MS?)
(7) controls the number of thin contour
lines to be plotted between thick
contour lines (MSP)
(7) forces all plots to begin at the same
origin (LOG)
(4) lists stations retrieved in order
of station selection keyword
(7) places MEAN program output onto disk or
tape (MEAN)
(4) specifies water quality parameters
to be retrieved
(7) specifies that the nth parameter in
sequence is to be plotted (REG)
(4) converts a parameter's stored value
to an equivalent value
(4) retrieves parametric data only
when certain parameters are present
(4) converts a parameter's stored units
to equivalent units
_(.7.). allows ±.h.e_.pio±Lin.g..af-_pej^cent.Ll.e~n -UMSP.)
(4) specifies which WQF retrieval program
is to be executed
(4) restricts data selection by value of
parameter
(7) prescribes conditions under which the
parametric data are acceptable (MSP)
(7) declares the type of plot and
associated printout desired (REG, MSP)
(7) generates a message to the plotter
operator (LOG)
(4) restricts data selection by value of
parameter
(5) reports related parameters
(7) determines the plotting symbol to be
used (MSP)
(7) controls the appearance of raw data
points (MSP)
(4) includes RMI coding in station header
information
(4) controls what is to be printed from
retrieval output
WQ-RET
A3-5
-------
Keyword
PRV
PSA
PSA=T
D_escription
(4)
(6)
PSI=T
PSO = T
PURP
PVS = T
QUALITY
QUALMAP
R
REGPARMS
RES
RIGHTn
RMI
RMK
S
SAMSCL
SAMSTA
SAVE
SAVEOUT
(6)
(6)
(4)
(6)
(7)
(7)
(4)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(4)
(7)
(4)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
restricts data selection by value of
parameter
prints station descriptions for all
stations retrieved even if parametric
data are not present (INVENT, INV120)
prints and flags the value of each
parameter that violates specified
criteria (STAND)
prints only the number of parameters
retrieved and their criteria (STAND)
prints only those parameters in
violation of specified criteria (STAND)
identifies the purpose and recipient
of the retrieval request
produces a summary of the values
outside specified criteria (STAND)
specifies the value of the quality
standard line to be plotted (REG)
requests geographical water quality
maps (MSP)
restricts retrieval to parameters
having certain remark codes
denotes the beginning of REG-specific
keywords (REG)
controls the fineness of the contour
lines plotted (MSP)
specifies that the scale, .parameter name,
and values of the nth parameter are to
appear on the righ-t-side -of - the plot 4MS?)
initiates a hydrological retrieval
based upon river mile indices
controls the plotting of parametric
data according to the remark codes
stored with the data (MSP)
specifies individual or groups of
stations to be retrieved
provides a common scale for both axes
of a plot (MSP)
groups stations together as if they
were a single station (MSP)
places MSP output onto disk or tape and
suppresses printing of MSP output (MS?)
places MSP output onto disk or tape (MSP)
WQ-RET
A3-6
-------
Keyword Description
SC (5) causes scales of axes to be
identical (PLOT)
SCALE (6) selects the desired scale for the
area to be plotted (LOG, MSP)
SEG (7) selects time intervals for plotting
(MSP)
SELECT (5) bypasses retrieval of water quality
data
SF (6) allows selection of statistical
functions to be performed (MEAN)
SHIFT (4) shifts a retrieval's station header
information from the right corner
of the page to the left
inhibits plotting of light lines to
avoid over-crowding (MSP)
sorts data prior to statistical
analysis (MEAN)
suppresses all printed output except
summary information (INVENT, INV120)
restricts retrieved stations by
state codes
specifies mileage starting point for
a mileage-linear plot (MSP)
specifies which parameter statistics
are to be mapped (MS?)
STC (4) selects stations by state codes
STCNTY (4) restricts retrieved stations by counties
STOPMSP (7) denotes the end of MSP-specific
keywords -(-MSP) -
STOPREC (7) specifies the highest check value to be
plotted in a given plot (LOO
STOPREG (7) denotes the end of REG-specific
keywords (REG)
STREAMS (6) plots streams (LOO
STRTREC (7) specifies the lowest check value to be
plotted in a given plot (LOO
SYM (6) provides for choice of plotting symbols
representing data points (PLOT)
SYMANG (7) specifies angle of rotation of plotted
symbols (MSP)
SYMSIZE (7) specifies height of plotted symbols (MS?
TAGS (6) tags mapped stations with a cross
reference number (LOO
TIME (7) allows specification of beginning and
ending dates for the analysis (REG)
TLAT (7) specifies the vertical position of a
plot's title block (LOG, MSP)
SKPLESS
SORT
SP
ST
START
STAT
(7)
(6)
(6)
(4)
(7)
(7)
WQ-RET
A3-7
-------
Keyword
TLONG
TPLOT
TRNDNLY
TS
U
UD
UK
UN-ION AM
VD
XMAX
YMAX
ZOOM
Description^
(7) specifies the horizontal position of
a plot's title block (LOG, MSP)
(7) requests the plotting of a trend map
(MSP)
(7) suppresses plotting of data defined in
a plot request (MSP)
(6) converts one form of a parameter to
another (STAND)
(4) restricts stations by agency-code
(4) specifies an upper depth limitation
for samples
(4) unlocks locked data for retrieval
purposes
(6) method of calculating un-ionized
ammonia (MEAN)
(6) allows variable date groupings (MEAN)
(7) specifies the maximum value for
the abscissa parameter (REG)
(7) specifies the maximum value for the
ordinate parameter (REG)
(7) restricts plotting to a specified area
(MSP)
WQ-RET
A3-8
-------
APPENDIX 4: SUMMARY OF MOST FREQUENTLY USED PURPOSE VALUES
The PURP keyword must be specified in each WQF retrieval request,
and is used to identify both the purpose and the ultimate
recipient of the retrieval. The information provided by this
keyword is used by EPA headquarters personnel in various analyses
of the uses made of the data stored in the WQF. The following
summary lists the Sections of PL 92-500 that are most frequently
used as the value of this keyword. It is not intended to be all
inclusive and users may specify their own values for this keyword
in accordance with the procedures identified in Section 4 of this
chapter.
SECTIONS OF PL 92-500
TITLE I - Research and Related Programs
Sec. 104 - Research, Investigations, Training and Information
Sec. 104(a)(5) - National Water Quality Surveillance System (NWQSS)
Sec. 105 - Grants for Research and Development
Sec. 106 - Grants for Pollution Control Programs
Sec. 107 - Mine Water Pollution Control Demonstrations
Sec. 108 - Pollution Control in Great Lakes
Sec. 113 - Alaska Village Demonstration Projects
Sec. 114 - Lake Tahoe Study
TITLE II - Grants for Construction of Treatment Works
Sec. 201-- Cons-tructi-on-Grant Fac-i'l it-y- P-lan - - • -
Sec. 208 - Areawide Waste Treatment Management Plan
Sec. 209-- Basin Planning
Sec. 210 - Annual 0 & M Survey
TITLE III - Standards and Enforcement
Sec. 303 - Water Quality Standards and Implementation Plans
Sec. 303(e) - Basin Plans
Sec. 305 - Water Quality Inventory
Sec. 305(b) - Water Quality Inventory
Sec. 308 - Inspections, Monitoring and Entry
Sec. 311 - Oil and Hazardous Substance Liability
Sec. 314 - Clean Lakes
Sec. 315 - National Commission on Water Quality
Sec. 316 - Thermal Discharges
Sec. 318 - Aquaculture
WQ-RET
A4-1
-------
TITLE IV - Permits and Licenses
Sec. 402 - National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System
Sec. 403 - Ocean Discharge Criteria
Sec. 404 - Permits for Dredged or Fill Material
TITLE V - General Provisions
Sec. 516 - Reports to Congress
Sec. 516(b) - Economics of Clean Environment (Water) Report
WQ-RET
A4-2
-------
APPENDIX 5: TERMINAL PROCEDURES
A complete description of these procedures is given in Chapter
WQ-TERM.
WQ-RET
A5-1
-------
APPENDIX 6: U.S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY REMARK CODES
The following remark codes may be stored with USGS data (agency
code 112WRD).
x
Blank - regular analysis, positive value
"-" - regular analysis, negative value
"F" - field analysis, positive value
"G" - field analysis, negative value
"X" - extra grab sample at composite site,
positive value
"Y" - extra grab sample at composite site,
negative value
y
Blank - no remark
"J" - estimated value
"K" - actual value is known to be less than
the value shown
"L" - actual value is known to be greater
than the value shown
"M" - presence of material verified but
not quantified
"N" - presumptive evidence of presence of
material
"U" - material specifically analyzed for
but not detected.
"B" - results based on colony count outside
the acceptable-range Cnon-ideal colony
count)
WQ-RET
A6-1
-------
APPENDIX 7: RETRIEVAL ERROR MESSAGES
This appendix describes the error messages that are generated as
a result of an inaccurate or improper attempt to retrieve
information from the WQF. In all cases, the requested retrieval
is not performed, unless otherwise noted. The descriptions are
divided into three primary groups: 1) general retrieval error
messages; 2) error messages specific to the REG program; and 3)
error messages specific to the MSP program.
The descriptions give the format of the message itself, followed
by a brief explanation of the error message, and if possible, a
suggested corrective action to be taken. Error messages are
bounded by pound signs (I) so that they may easily be noted when
checking the retrieval.
The general retrieval and REG program .error messages are both
numbered to facilitate their reference within this documentation
Note that each series begins with the number one.
WQ-RET
A7-1
-------
GENERAL RETRIEVAL ERROR MESSAGES,
tl BAD CHAR(S) IN KEYWORD*
Alphabetic characters were found in a value required to
be numeric. Check for alphabetic and/or blank
characters. Correct and resubmit.
#2 NO RETRIEVAL INSTRUCTIONS FOUND*
A /* JCL statement was encountered before any retrieval
instructions were read. Perhaps an incorrect data set
was referenced, or the data set containing the
retrieval request was inadvertently omitted from the
job stream.
*3 MULTIPLE EXTRACT KEYWORDS!
The EXTRACT keyword may be specified only once per
retrieval request. The format and value of the EXTRACT
keyword are described in detail in Section 4.
#4 EXTRACT VALUE TOO LONG!
No more than 299 characters (including parentheses and
blanks) may be coded between the equals sign and the
trailing comma of the EXTRACT instruction. The format
and value of the EXTRACT keyword are described in
detail in Section 4.
15 EXTRACT VALUE IS ILLEGAL*
The specified value violates the Boolean logic required
of this keyword, e.g., a violation of the parenthesis
convention, or the specification of two operators
without an intervening mask. The format and value of
the EXTRACT keyword are described in detail in Section
4.
#6 INVALID KEYWORD*
An invalid keyword (as opposed to an invalid value) was
specified. This error normally results from a
typographical error.
WQ-RET
A7-2
-------
17 NOPAR CARDS MISSING*
A NOPAREND keyword was encountered with no preceding
NOPAR control cards and/or NOPARCDS keyword. The NOPAR
program, and its special keywords and control cards,
are described in detail in Section 7.
#8 PGM NOT FIRST KEYWORD*
The PGM keyword must be the first keyword specified in
any retrieval request. This keyword is described in
detail in Section 4.
*9 PGM VALUE ILLEGALI
An improper program-name was specified as a value for
the PGM keyword. This keyword is described in detail
in Section 4.
#10 MULTIPLE PGM KEYWORDS*
The PGM keyword may be specified only once in a
retrieval request. This keyword is described in detail
in Section 4.
#11 INVALID AUXSYM VALUE*
An invalid two-digit value was specified for the AUXSYM
keyword. Check the acceptable values for this keyword,
which is described in detail in Section 7.
#12 TOO MANY HEAD KEYWORDS*
A maximum' of five HEAD keywords may be specified in a
single retrieval request. This print control keyword
is described in detail in Section 4.
#13 TOO-MANY ST KEYWORDS*
A maximum of three ST keywords may be specified in a
single retrieval request. This station restriction
keyword is described in detail in Section 4.
WQ-RET
A7-3
-------
#14 CONFLICTS WITH KEYWORD ONLYU*
The data selection keywords ONLYU and NOTU may not both
be used in the same retrieval request. These keywords
are described in detail in Section 4.
#15 CONFLICTS WITH KEYWORD NOTU*
The data selection keywords ONLYU and NOTU may not both
be used in the same retrieval request. These keywords
are described in detail in Section 4.
116 TOO MANY BG KEYWORDS*
No more than three pairs of BG,EG keywords may be
specified in a retrieval request. These data selection
keywords are described in detail in Section 4.
#17 UNMATCHED BG AND EG KEYWORDS*
The BG and EG keywords, if specified, must be specified
in pairs. These data selection keywords are described
in detail in Section 4.
#18 UNMATCHED L KEYWORDS!
The L keyword, if specified, must be specified in pairs
in order to properly designate a vertices' latitude and
longitude coordinates. This station identification
keyword is described in detail in Section 4.
#19 INVALID LT VALUES
A value other than I was specified as the value of the
LT keyword. This station identification keyword is
described in detail in Section 4.
#20 LT KEYWORD HAS NOT BEEN GIVEN*
The set of L keywords was not preceded by an LT keyword
as required. These station identification keywords are
described in detail in Section 4.
WQ-RET
A7-4
-------
#21 TOO MANY L KEYWORDS*
A maximum of 700 L keywords (describing up to 350
polygon vertices) can be specified in any single
retrieval request. This station identification keywor;
is described in detail in Section 4.
#22 RMI CARD TOO FAR FROM EQUAL SIGN*
A blank line was encountered between the RMI keyword
and its 7, 8, or 9 card value. This station
identification keyword is described in detail in
Section 4.
#23 INVALID MAJOR BASIN CODE*
An invalid major basin code was specified as a value
for the BS keyword. This keyword is described in
detail in Section 4; the valid major basin codes are
defined in Appendix D.
#24 KEYWORD A MISSING/MISPLACED!
If one or more S keywords are specified in a retrieval
request, they must be preceded by at least one A
keyword. These station selector keywords are described
in detail in Section 4.
#25 KEYWORD A MISSING*
The A keyword must be specified in a STA retrieval
request. The use of general retrieval keywords with
this program is described in detail in Section 6.
%
#26 KEYWORD P NOT VALID FOR PGM#
Specification of the P keyword is invalid for retrieval
programs STA, NOPAR, INDEX, and LOC. The use of
general retrieval keywords with these retrieval
programs is described in Sections 6 and 7.
WQ-RET
A7-5
-------
#27 TOO MANY P KEYWORDS!
Too many P keywords were specified for the program
specified. The maximum number of ?' keywords that can
be specified by program are:
retrieval program maximum number of P keywords
RET,MSP,STAND 50
PLOT,MEAN,REG 10
PUNCH - 6
INVENT,INV120 500
MSP with MEAN . 10
#28 LV KEYWORD FOUND WITHOUT PRECEDING P KEYWORD*
The LV and HV keywords are parameter dependent and
refer to the immediately preceding P keyword, which
must be specified. The use'of these keywords with the
MEAN, STAND, and PLOT retrieval programs is described
in detail in Section 6.
#29 TOO MANY PREVIOUS PARU KEYWORDS*
The PARU keyword has been specified more than once for
a single P keyword. The use of the PARU and PARF
keywords is described in detail in Section 4.
#30 TOO MANY PREVIOUS PARF KEYWORDS*
The PARF keyword has been specified more than once for
a single PARU (and thus a single P} keyword. The use
of the PARU and PARF keywords is described in detail in
Section 4.
#31 TOO MANY AREA KEYWORDS - MAX=100#
A maximum of 100 AREA keywords may be specified in any
single retrieval request. This station selection
keyword is described in detail in Section 4.
#32 INVALID AREA VALUE#
An invalid value was specified for the AREA keyword,
which is described in detail in Section 4. The STORET
help data set named SEC208.AREAS contains a complete
list of valid AREA values.
WQ-RET
A7-6
-------
#33 TOO MANY VD KEYWORDS*
A maximum of 20 VD keywords may be specified in a
retrieval request. The use of the BASE and VD keywords
with the MEAN program is described in detail in Section
6.
#34 TOO MANY TS KEYWORDS!
A maximum of five TS keywords may be specified in a
retrieval request. The use of this keyword with the
STAND program is described in detail in Section 6.
#35 EXTRACT VALUE NOT FOUND: VALUE*
The indicated mask specified by the EXTRACT keyword was
not found. Check the value for a typographical error.
The EXTRACT keyword is described in detail in Section
4.
#36 INVALID AGGR VALUES
An invalid value was specified for the AGGR keyword.
The description of this data selection keyword in
Section 4 gives a list of the AGGR values allowed.
#37 PURP KEYWORD MISSING*
The PURP keyword is required for all retrieval
requests. The use of this retrieval identification
keyword is described in detail in Section 4.
#38 NOPAREND KEYWORD MISSING*
The NOPAREND keyword is required in all NOPAR
retrievals. The use of the NOPARCDS and NOPAREND
keywords is described in Section 7.
#39 PRT KEYWORD NOT PERMITTED WITH PGM INVENT OR INV120#
This keyword is valid only with programs that list
stored or calculated parametric data values, as opposed
to calculated statistical summaries listed by the
inventory programs. This print control keyword is
described in detail in Section 4.
WQ-RET
A7-7
-------
140 SCALE=CELLHT VALID ONLY WITH AGGR=CELL#
The use of the CELLHT value of the SCALE keyword
requires the use of the AGGR keyword. A complete
description of the use of the SCALE keyword with the
LOC program is presented in Section 7.
#41 SORT KEYWORD VALID ONLY WITH PGM=MEAN#
SORT is a keyword special to the MEAN program, which is
described in detail in Section 6.
#42 INVALID SORT VALUEI
An invalid value was specified for the SORT keyword.
Section 6 contains a detailed description of the use of
the SORT keyword with the MEAN program, and of the
acceptable values for SORT.
#43 INVALID DG VALUE*
An invalid value was specified for the DG keyword in
its use with the SORT keyword. Monthly and/or
quarterly groupings can not be specified when
'SORT=SV,' is specified. A detailed description of the
MEAN program, and the keywords special to it, is given
in Section 6.
#44 PARONLY GREATER THAN NUMBER OF P KEYWORDS*
The value specified for PARONLY must be equal to or
less than the number of P parameters specified within
the retrieval request. The PARONLY keyword is
described in detail in Section 4.
#45 NO P KEYWORDS USED#
The parameter keyword P must be specified for all
programs which retrieve data, except INVENT and INV120.
WQ-RET
A7-8
-------
ERROR MESSAGES SPECIFIC TO THE REG PROGRAM
The following error messages are issued by the REG program and
indicate problems or specification discrepancies which cannot be
processed. In all cases the requested analysis is not performed.
Error messages one through seven relate to errors encountered
during program processing; error messages nine through thirty-
three relate to errors encountered during input processing.
(Error message eight is no longer used.) Following the
descriptions of the error messages is an example of a REG
retrieval request with an explanation of the errors generated by
the retrieval during its processing.
(1) FILE HEADER PRESENT WITH NO DATA FOR STATION XXXXXXXX
ALL ANALYSIS FOR THIS STATION DELETED.
XXXXXXXX = Input station number.
A station has been requested and retrieved for which no
data on the requested parameter exists. No analyses
were run against this station.
User corrective action: none.
(2) NO RETRIEVAL DATA FOUND FOR STATION XXXXXXXX
YYY CASE 2 ANALYSES WERE DELETED.
XXXXXXXX = Input station number.
YYY = Number of analyses deleted.
Z = Case number.
A station has been requested for analysis which does
not match any of the retrieved station numbers.
Therefore, no analyses were run against this station.
The type and number of analyses deleted are listed,
(3) ANALYSIS FOR STATION XXXXXXXX PARAMETER YY
WAS DELETED DUE TO INSUFFICIENT DATA.
XXXXXXXX = Input station number.
YY = Parameter position.
The requested parameter has less than 20 observations
at the station under a Case I analysis.
.; 4) NOT ENOUGH DATA FOR EITHER PARAMETER YY OR ZZ OR BOTH
AT STATION XXXXXXXX.
XXXXXXXX = Input station number.
YY, ZZ = Parameter positions.
WQ-RET
A7-9
-------
One or both of the requested parameters had less than
20 observations at the station un.de,:"" a Cas'e; !!
analysis. Analysis was deleted.
(5) NO DATA FOR YYYYYYY THRU ZZZ2ZZZ.
YYYYYYY = Start date.
ZZZZZZZ = End date.
In plotting the trend line, a graph segment spans a
time interval in which no observations occur. The
graph for this segment was suppressed and the above
message issued.
(6) INSUFFICIENT DATA, ONLY ZZZ POINTS.
EITHER STATION XXXXXXXX PARAMETER YY OR STATION WWWWWWWW
PARAMETER SS
SS, YY = Parameter position.
XXXXXXXX, WWWWWWWW = Station number.
ZZZ = Number of data points.
One or both of the requested parameters had less than
20 observations at the stations under a Case III
analysis. Analysis was deleted.
(7) CASE THREE ANALYSIS FOR STATIONS XXXXXXXX,YYYYYYYY
DELETED BECAUSE NO DATA WAS FOUND.
XXXXXXXX, YYYYYYYY = Station Number.
One or both of the stations requested for a Case III
analysis were not present in the retrieved file, i.e.,
the input's station request did not match any retrieved
station numbers.
(8) This error message is no longer in use.
The following messages are associated with improperly specified
input. Each time an error in an input card is detected the card .
image is printed out and the error underlined with dollar signs
(S). Each error message is followed by the statement:
CARD BYPASSED DUE TO ERRORS.
WQ-RET
A7-10
-------
(9) UNIDENTIFIED FIELD IN CARD XXX FIELD MARKED IS NEITHER
KEYWORD NOR OPTION.
XXX = Card number.
The underscored alphanumeric string is not recognized
by the REG program.
(10) UNIDENTIFIED FIELD IN CARD XXX. FIELD IS NOT KEYWORD AND
IS TOO SHORT FOR OPTION FIELD.
XXX = Card number.
The underscored alphanumeric string is not recognized
by the program.
(11) UNIDENTIFIABLE KEYWORD PARAMETER IN CARD XXX.
XXX = Card number.
A keyword (station, parameter, time, etc.) is
encountered which the program cannot identify.
(12) STATION FIELD EXCEEDS 15 CHARACTERS IN CARD XXX.
XXX = Card number.
The station identification number exceeds the maximum
allowable number of characters.
(13) MORE THAN 2 STATIONS-ENCOUNTERED IN. CARD XXX,
XXX = Card number.
No more than 2 stations can be specified on any one
analysis request.
(14) ILLEGAL CHARACTER IN PARAMETER FIELD, XXX.
XXX = Card number.
The parameter field can only contain numeric values.
(15) ILLEGAL PARAMETER VALUE IN CARD XXX.
XXX = Card number.
The parameter field numeric value must be between 1 and
10.
WQ-RET
A7-11
-------
(16) MORE THAN -2 PARAMETERS 'ENCOUNTERED IN CARD- XX-X,.
XXX = Card number.
No more than 2 parameters can be specified on any one
analysis request.
(17} TOO MANY TIME FIELDS ENCOUNTERED, XXX.
XXX = Card number.
Start and end dates can be specified, but no more than
two time fields can be specified on any one analysis
request.
(18) ILLEGAL CHARACTER ENCOUNTERED IN TIME FIELD ON CARD XXX.
XXX = Card number.
The time field may contain only numeric values or
numeric values and slashes (/). Any other characters
are illegal.
(19) TOO MANY SLASHES ENCOUNTERED IN TIME FIELD ON CARD XXX.
XXX = Card number.
Only two slashes are allowed in any one time field.
(20) DATE TOO BIG IN CARD XXX.
XXX = Card number.
Date improperly specified.
(21) DATE NON-ZERO BUT LESS THAN YEAR 10 IN CARD XXX.
XXX = Card number.
A date earlier than 1910 may not be specified.
(22) MORE THAN 1 QUALITY FIELD-IN CARD XXX.
XXX = Card number.
Only one standard value allowed per analysis request.
WQ-RET
A7-12
-------
(23) ILLEGAL CHARACTER ENCOUNTERED IN QUALITY FIELD IN CARD
XXX.
XXX = Card number.
Quality field must contain only numeric values.
(24) MORE THAN'1 XMAX IN CARD XXX.
XXX = Card number.
.Only one abscissa maximum value can be specified per
analysis.request.
(25) ILLEGAL CHARACTER IN MAX FIELD IN CARD XXX.
XXX = Card number.
Maximum field specification must be numeric.
(26) MORE 'THAN 1 YMAX IN CARD XXX.
XXX = Card number.
Only one ordinate maximum value can be specified per
analysis request.
(21) NO STATION FIELD FOUND IN CARD XXX.
XXX = Card number.
No station number on card. A station number must be-
present in all analysis requests.
(28) NO PARAMETER FIELD FOUND IN CARD XXX.
XXX = Card number.
No parameter position on the card. The parameter
position must be present in all analysis requests.
(29) TWO IDENTICAL STATION NUMBERS ON CARD XXX.
XXX = Card number.
For a Case III analysis, the station numbers must be
different.
WQ-RET
A7-13
-------
(30) TOO MANY CASE YY ANALYSES.. AS OF CARD XXX.
XXX = Card number.
YY = Type case number (1,2,3).
ZZZ22ZZZ = Station number.
The maximum number of analyses of type YY has been
reached. No further requests for this type of analysis
are honored.
(31) More than 10 STATIONS REQUESTED AS OF CARD XXX.
XXX = Card number.
Unle'ss the default option for Case I is used, the
maximum number of different stations for one execution
of the analysis package is 10.
(32) TOO MANY CASE YY CARDS FOR STATION ZZZZZZZZ IN CARD XXX.
XXX = Card number.
YY = Type case number (1,2,3).
ZZZZZZZZ = Station number.
The maximum number of Type YY analyses at the given
station has been reached. No further requests for this
type analysis at this station are honored.
(33) * "WARNING - 2 STATIONS AND 1 PARAMETER ENCOUNTERED IN CARD
XXX.
XXX = Card number.
A Type III analysis has been requested but only one
parameter specified. The program issues a warning and
then assumes, that the parameter is the same at both
stations. Analysis request is not deleted.
(34) ONE ANALYSIS REQUEST REQUIRES MORE THAtf ONE CARD
Any single plot request may not be longer than 80
characters. The format and value of the keywords
special to the REG program are described in detail in
. Section 7.
WQ-RET
A7-14
-------
The following REG retrieval request contains several input
errors. The error messages that this retrieval generates are
numbered to match the numbers given in the error message
descriptions.
Card No
0 PGM=REG,PURP=305B/STA,
1 5=010120,P=2,T=63/01,T=65/01,
2 S=010120,T=63/01,P=S,Q=7.0,T=65/01,
3 P=2,P=3,S=010i20,S=010077,T=63/01,T=65/01,
4 * 5=020110,P=22,T=62/10,
5 * P=5,T=5310,
6 * 5=020011832,T=65,P=7,
7 5=020111,P=5,T=6404,
8 S=020111,P=5,P=8,T=60,T=65,
9 * T=6201,S=01523,5=010077,P=6,T=6801,
10 * 5=020110,P=l,OUT,
11 * A=10223,P=6,T=5510,
12 5=010077,P=3,T=60/10,
13 .* 5=020111,T=7,T=63,5=020110,P=9,5=020111,
Explanations of errors flagged (*) in order shown
Error
Number Explanation
15 ILLEGAL PARAMETER VALUE IN CARD 4
5=020110,P=22,T=62/10,
CARD BYPASSED DUE TO ERRORS.
27 NO STATION FIELD FOUND IN CARD 5
P=5,T=5810,
CARD BYPASSED DUE TO ERRORS.
12 STATION FIELD EXCEEDS 8 CHARACTERS IN CARD 6
5=020011832,T=65,P=7,
CARD BYPASSED DUE TO ERRORS.
33 *.**WARNING - 2 STATIONS AND 1 PARAMETER ENCOUNTERED
IN CARD 9
10 UNIDENTIFIED FIELD IN CARD 10
FIELD IS NOT KEYWORD AND IS TOO SHORT FOR OPTION FIELD
S=C20110,P=1,OUT,
CARD BYPASSED DUE TO ERRORS.
WQ-RET
A7-15
-------
1 UNIDENTIFIABLE KEYWORD PARAMETER IN CARD 11
A=10223,P=6,T=5510, .
CARD BYPASSED DUE TO ERRC>RS;.
13 . MORE THAN 2 STATIONS ENCOUNTERED IN CARD 13
S=020111,T=7,T=63,5=020110,P-9,S-020111,
CARD BYPASSED DUE TO ERRORS.
WQ-RET
A7-16
-------
ERROR MESSAGES SPECIFIC TO THE MSP PROGRAM
SALL KEYWORDS BETWEEN MSPARMS AND STOPMS? WILL BE PRINTED BELOW
ALONG WITH ANY SYNTAX ERRORS*
This message appears in the listing produced by the MSP
program. Keywords which have no errors are repeated or
echoed. Keywords with which some problem was
encountered are flagged (underprinted) with either an
X, a question mark (?), or an asterisk (*), which
connote the following:
flag meaning of flag
X the referenced keyword is invalid with MSP,
and processing of the MSP retrieval was
terminated.
? MSP failed to recognize the referenced
keyword as a valid keyword, but did not
terminate processing of the MSP retrieval
request.
* The referenced keyword was not interpreted,
probably because of the problem generated
by a preceding error referenced by an X.
Processing of the MSP retrieval was not
terminated.
WQ-RET
A7-17
-------
ERROR MESSAGES SPECIFIC.JTG,^T.HE NOPAR.PROGRAM
The following error messages are issued by the NOPAR program and
indicate problems or specification discrepancies which, in most
cases, resulted in the abnormal termination of the processing of
the retrieval request.
TOO MANY GROUPS
A maximum of 25 parameter groups may be defined within
a single NOPAR retrieval.
ERROR
OVERLAY
MAX SIZE
The indicated expression was not recognized by NOPAR as
a valid NOPAR control card or keyword, and consequently
was not processed.
A parameter code may not appear in more than one
parameter group.
The maximum allowable number of parameters that may be
specified in the parameter code range has been
exceeded. The description of the Parameter Group
Control Card lists these maximum allowable numbers.
STATION LIST NOT ALLOWED IN RETRIEVAL MODE
An illegal attempt was made to input a manual station
list simultaneously with an automatic station list.
NO STATIONS IN LIST
No stations were found in the automatic station list.
WQ-RET
A7-18
-------
STORE! USER HANDBOOK
PART
WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
APPENDIX
• A
A WQF GLOSSARY
[Basic Retrieval; Second Edition!
WQ
-------
APPENDIX A: A WQF GLOSSARY
The words and terms included in this glossary are frequently used
by users of the STORET Water Quality File. Its entries include
environmental and water-pollution-related items, expressions
related to STORET and the WQF, and the terminology associated
with the data processing aspect of STORET.
A WQF GLOSSARY
abatement: The act or process of reducing the degree or
intensity of pollution.
abend: Abnormal end or termination. The abnormal termination of
a computer program due to invalid data, conflicting
control' cards, or other circumstances which prevent
successful program completion.
agency: A name or code which uniquely identifies a specific
water quality monitoring network to STORET.
bacteriologic parameters: One of several general categories into
which approximately 35 of the most popular water
quality parameters are grouped. Parameters such as
coliform, fecal coliform, and fecal strep are included
in this group.
basin: -see-"river basirr"" • • -
basin plan: see "Water Quality Management Basin Plan"
batch processing: A technique of data processing in which jobs
are collected and grouped before processing.
Processing is generally scheduled in accordance to a
series of priorities (ranging from within a few minutes
to a day) as opposed to being processed immediately.
biological parameters: One of several general categories into
which approximately 335 of the most popular water
quality parameters are grouped. Parameters such as
chlorophyll, pheophytin, and total algae are included
in this group.
BOD: Biochemical oxygen demand. A measure of the amount of
oxygen consumed in the biological processes that break
down organic matter in water. One of the more
frequently retrieved WQF parameters.
collection point: A point on a body of water where samples are
taken, e.g., a monitoring station on a stream, river,
WQ
A-l
-------
or lake. STORE! contains data on samples taken from
more than 200,000 unique collectiah-p'o'in'ts-- located o'n"-
essentiaily all of the nation's rivers, lakes,'"streams
and other waterways.
common carrier: In data communications, a public utility company
that is recognized by an appropriate regulatory agency
as having a vested interest and responsibility in
furnishing communication sources to the general public,
e.g. Western Union, The Bell System.
composite sample: Composite samples are combinations of
individual samples obtained at intervals over a period
of time. These may be several grab samples spanning a
24 hour period where all grabs are placed in a single
container or a series of samples taken at equal
distances across a stream section.
computer network: An interconnection of computer systems,
terminals, and communications facilities.
connect time: A measure of system usage, usually the time
interval during which the user's terminal is on-line
during a terminal session.
conversational.processing: A mode of processing that involves
step-by-step interaction between a computer and a
remote user at a terminal by means of keyboard cype
terminals. Interactive processing.
CPU time - Central Processing Unit Time: A measure of system
usage by a user, based on the total amount of computer
processing time used.
data base: A structured collection of information
organizationally regarded as an entity or collection of
related files treated as an entity.
data collection: The act of bringing data from one or more
points to a central point.
data retrieval: The process of extracting data from a data base
in a desired format; see "retrieval request"
data set: A collection of data records that have a logical
relationship to one another, that reside within a
computer system, and that are accessible to users via
remote terminals.
data sharing: The ability of users at several locations to
access and utilize data stored at a single location.
WQ
A-2
-------
data storage: The process of entering data into and maintaining
data in a data base such as STORET.
data transmission: The sending of data from one place for
reception elsewhere.
delimiter: A character that separates and organizes elements of
data, such as a slash, comma, or blank.
Dial-up^line: A communications circuit that is established by a
switched circuit connection.
digital plotter: A device used to produce graphic output of
digital coordinates.
duplex: Simultaneous two-way independent transmission in both
directions. Also referred to as full-duplex.
effluent: A discharge of pollutants into the environment,
whether partially or completely treated, or in its
natural state.
enrichment: The addition of nitrogen, phosphorus and carbon
compounds, or other nutrients into a lake or other
waterway that greatly increases the growth potential
for algae and other aquatic plants.
environment: The sum of all external conditions and influences
affecting the life/ development and ultimately, the
survival of an organism.
environmental impact statement: A document prepared by a Federal
agency on the environmental impact of its proposals for
legislation and other major actions significantly
affecting the quality of the human environment. They
are used as tools for decision making, and are required
by the National Environmental Policy Act.
erosion: The wearing away of the land surface by wind or water.
Erosion occurs naturally from weather or runoff, but is
often intensified by man's land-clearing practices.
eutrophication:. The normally slow aging process by which a lake
or other body of water evolves into a bog or marsh and
ultimately assumes a completely terrestrial state and
disappears.
fecal coliform bacteria: A group of organisms common to the
intestinal tracts of man and of animals. The presence
of fecal coliform bacteria in water is an indicator of
pollution and of potentially dangerous bacterial
contamination.
WQ
A-3
-------
foreground processing: High-priority processing.,.,,,usually ..
resulting from real-time—en-tries, giverr-precedence, by-
means of interrupts, over Tower priority 'background1'
processing.
.^general inorganic parameters: One of several general categories
into which approximately 65 of the most popular water
quality parameters are grouped. Parameters such as
carbon dioxide, cyanide, sulfur, and fluoride are
included in this group.
grab sample: An individual water quality sample collected at a
specific date and time.
ground water: The supply of freshwater under the earth's surface
in an underground bed or stratum of earth that forms
the natural reservoir for use by man.
half-duplex: A communications circuit designed for transmission
in either direction, but not in both directions
simultaneously.
HASP: .An acronym for Houston Automatic Spooling Program. An IBJr
front-end software package which performs job input and
output spooling and which controls communications
between local and remote processors and RJE stations.
hard water: Water containing dissolved minerals such as calcium,
iron, and magnesium.
hardware: Physical computer equipment, as opposed to a computer
program or method of use, including me.chanical,
electrical, magnetic, or electronic devices.
hydrology: The science dealing with the properties,
distribution, and circulation of water and snow.
implementation plan: A document delineating the steps to be
taken to ensure attainment of environmental quality
standards within a specified time period.
job: The major unit of work of a computer system. A job
consists of one or several related steps defined by a
series of job control language (JCL) statements
consisting of a JOB card, one or more job step (EXEC)
statements, and for each step, one or more data
definition (DD) statements.
job control language (JCL): A user-written computer control
language used to define a job and its requirements to
the computer system.
WQ
A-4
-------
job step: A subdivision of a job performed as a separate task
and defined by an execute (EXEC) statement that, among
other things, contains the name of the program to be
executed to perform the step.
keyword=value: An instruction to a WQF retrieval program which
defines a certain action to be taken in the processing
of the retrieval request in which it is specified. A
keyword generally may be assigned one or more values.
leased line: A communications channel or circuit reserved for
the exclusive use of a leasing customer without
interexchange switching arrangements.
login: A user access procedure to a computer system which
involves identification, access control, and exchange
of network information between the user and the system.
Logon. Signon.
logout: A user exit procedure from a computer system often
providing usage statistics to the user. Logoff.
Signoff.
metals parameters: One of several general categories into which
approximately 200 of the most popular water quality
parameters are grouped. Parameters such as calcium,
barium, nickel, and manganese are included in this
group.
mgd: millions of gallons per day. Mgd is commonly used to
express rate of flow.
monitoring: Periodic or continous determination of the amount cf
pollutants present in the environment.
National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES): The
NPDES permit system was established by Public Law 92-
500 to control the discharge of pollutants into any
waterway, for insuring that effluent limits are met,
that the necessary technology is applied, and that all
requirements of the 1972 law for controlling discharges
and complying with water quality standards are met on
schedule.
nitrogen parameters: One of several general categories into
which approximately 40 of the most popular water qualty
parameters are grouped. Parameters such as ammonia and
NOx are included in this group.
observation: A measurement, or sampling, of a single parameter
at a specific location or station, at a specific point
in time. Over 40 million observations are stored
within STORE!.
WQ
A-5
-------
off-line: The status of computer equipment or devices when not
under control of the central processing uni.t. Mjay ajsp
be used to describe terminal equipment which is not
connected to a transmission line.
on-line: The status of computer equipment or devices under
control of the CPU. Also describes terminal equipment
which is connected to a transmission line.
operating system: Computer Software that controls the execution
of computer programs and that may provide scheduling,
debugging, input and output control, accounting,
storage assignments, data management, and other
functions. Sometimes called Supervisor, Executive,
Monitor, Master Control Program, depending upon the
computer hardware manufacturer.
organic parameters: One of several general categories into which
approximately 95 of the most popular water quality
parameters are grouped. Parameters such as oil-grease,
organic carbon, and phenols are included in this group.
outfall: The mouth of a sewer-, drain, or conduit where an
effluent is discharged into the receiving waters.
oxygen demand: One of several general categories into which
approximately 100 of the most popular water quality
parameters are grouped. Parameters such as BOD-5 day,
COD-low, and COD-high are included in this group.
parameter: The STORET water quality file designation, for an
individual element for which values relating to water
quality are associated. Approximately 5000 individual
parameters are defined within the WQF.
parametric data: WQF information which describes the conditions
under which a sample was taken (such as date, time, and
depth) as well as the results of the sample analyses.
password: A word or string of characters that is recognizable by
a computer system and that permits a user to access
protected storage files.
permit: A legal document which establishes the limits of
allowable discharges into navigable waters. Permits
are granted to individual dischargers only after they
show that their effluents will not contaminate a
waterway in excess of established water quality v
standards, or will not lower its existing quality.
Permits are issued for fixed terms not exceeding five
years and can be terminated for violations of any
conditions of the permit.
WQ
A-6
-------
pesticide parameters: One of several general categories into
which approximately 190 of the most popular water
quality parameters are grouped. Parameters such as
chlordane, DDD, DDE, DDT, dieldrin, and heptachlor are
included in this group.
phosphorus parameters: One of several general categories into
which approximately 35 of the most popular water
quality parameters are grouped. Parameters such as
SOLP04, POLYP04, and P40S-T ORTHO are included in this
group.
physical parameters: One of several general categories into
which approximately 165 of the most popular water
quality .parameters are grouped. Parameters such as
water and air temperatures, water salinity, pH, and
color are included in this group.
point source: Any discernible, confined and discrete conveyance,
including but not limited to any pipe, ditch, channel,
tunnel, conduit, well, discrete fissure, container,
rolling stock, concentrated animal feeding operation,
or vessel or other floating craft, from which
pollutants are or may be discharged, or from which
there is or may be a thermal discharge.
pollutant: Any introduced gas, liquid, or solid that makes a
resource unfit for a specific purpose.
pollution: The presence of matter or energy whose nature,
1 ocation-,~-or; -quantrty ~prradu"Ces~ ~und-esrred'"enviTonrtrents 1~
effects.
ppm: Parts per million. The unit commonly used to represent t;-.e
degree of pollutant concentration where the
concentrations are small. Usually a weight/volume
ratio.
primary station code: The prime station identifier by which the
WQF associates the location at which data has been
collected and stored in the WQF.
program: A logically self-contained sequence of instructions
that can be executed by a computing system to perform a
specific task.
radiological parameters: One of several general categories intc
which approximately 270 of the most popular water
quality parameters are grouped. Parameters such as
Alpha and Beta waveforms are included in this group.
WQ
A-7
-------
random access: Pertaining to a storage device where data or
blocks of data can be, rve.ad, in any. particular or.degr,
including sequential.
remote job entry: The submission of jobs through an input
device, such as a remote terminal, that has access to a
computer through a communications link.
response time: The elapsed time between the generation of the
last character of a message at a terminal and the
receipt of the first character of the reply. It
includes terminal delay and network delay.
retrieval request: A collection of keywords and values, or
instructions, which describe a specific request for
• information to be obtained from the WQF. Each
retrieval request constitutes one computer job.
river basin: A geographical area of hydrologic drainage. The
total area drained by a river and its tributaries.
river mile index: A hydrological index. A numerical code which
identifies the location of a sampling station on a
defined river system by defining its distance from and
relationship to the mouth of the river system.
sample: A representative part of a body of water collected for
subsequent analysis for the presence of pollutants;
grab sample, composite sample.
secondary, station, codej.. Additio.nal- station- identifiers, or
aliases, of the primary station code, by which the WQF
associates the location at which data has been
collected and stored in the WQF.
software: A set of computer programs, procedures, rules, and
associated documentation concerned with the operation
of computers. Computer software includes compilers,
monitors, editors, and utility programs.
solids parameters: One of several general categories into which
approximately 135 of the most popular water quality
parameters are grouped. Parameters such as residues
and silica are included in this group.
sorting: The act of collecting records of a data set or file in
accordance with a prescribed sequence either ascending
or descending.
spooling: (Simultaneous Peripheral Operations On-Line.) The
software technique by which output to relatively slow
devices such as printers is placed into queues on
relatively faster mass storage devices to await
WQ
A-8
-------
transmission in bursts. This allows for more efficient
use of a computer system.
station: A specific location, or collection point, within an
agency where water quality data are sampled.
station data: WQF information which describes the geographical
location of where a sample has been taken, such as the
station's latitude and longitude. This data is not
likely to ever change.
STORET: The acronym used to identify the computerized data base
utility maintained by EPA for the STOrage and RETrieval
of data relating to the quality of the waterways-within
and contiguous to the United States.
surface water: Water on the earth's surface that is exposed to
the atmosphere.
terminal: A physical device used to access a computer system
from locations remote from the computer site. Two
basic types of terminals are keyboard-type terminals
and card-reading terminals.
terminal basin: A body of water, such as.a large lake, ocean, or
gulf, into which all water will ultimately flow. A
terminal basin can also be associated with an area
where a river flows across an international boundary.
time-sharing.- A method of computer operation in which a computer
facility is shared concurrently..by multiple.users^fcr . - .
varying purposes. Although the computer actually
services each user in sequence, one at a time, the
high-speed of the computer makes it appear that users
are handled simultaneously and that a user is the only
user of the system.
turnaround time: The elapsed time between the submission of a
job to a computer system and the return of results.
user number: A unique number assigned to a user of a computer
system which is used to gain access to the system and
to which all usage charges are accumulated for
accounting purposes. User id; account number.
value: A qualifying word or expression which further defines the
action to be taken by a keyword in the processing of
the retrieval request in which the keyword-value
combination is specified.
water pollution: The addition of sewage, industrial wastes, or
other harmful or objectionable material to water in
WQ
A-9
-------
concentrations or in sufficient quantities to result in
measurable degradation- of- water* quality-.
•'; , • . ••**• -, *.:<.•-•*, v
water quality criteria: The levels of: pollutants that affect the
suitability of water for a given use. Generally, water
use classifications include: public water supply;
recreation; propagation of fish and other aquatic life;
agricultural use; and industrial use.
Water Quality File: WQF. One of several files within STORE?
that pertains to the storage, retrieval, and analysis
of water quality data.
water quality management basin plan: A management document that
identifies the water quality problems of a particular
basin, or portion of a basin, and that sets forth an
effective remedial program to alleviate those problems.
water quality sample: A water sample collected from a stream,
lake, river, estuary, or waste treatment discharge.
The sample is usually collected in a device holding a
quart, liter, or 250 ml and placed in the water at a
given depth. Samples are analyzed, usually in a
laboratory, for various constituents and pollutant
indicators.
water quality standard: .A plan for water qualty management
containing four major elements: the use to.be made of
the water; criteria to protect those uses;
the water; criteria to protect those uses;
implementation plans and enforcement plans; anc
anti-degradation statement to protect existing high
quality waters. .
WQ
A-10
-------
STORE! USER HANDBOOK
PART
WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
APPENDIX
3
STORET PARAMETERS AND PARAMETER CODES
(Basic Retrieval; Second Edition!
-------
APPENDIX B: STORET PARAMETERS AND PARAMETER CODES
The term- 'parameter1, as related to the STORET Water Quality
File, is defined as a designation for an individual element, or
water quality measurement, for which values relating to water
quality are associated. There are approximately 5000 unique
water quality parameters defined within STORET, and, over the
years, these definitions or designations have become universally
recognized by both Federal government and state agencies as being
the standard water quality measurement designations.
CLASSIFYING PARAMETERS AND GROUPS
For purposes of classification, the collection of
parameters defined within STORET are grouped into the
16 general categories listed below (Figures are as of
Aoril 1979):
TABLE B-l
PARAMETER GROUPS WITHIN THE WQF
Parameter Name of t Parameters t Observations
Group Number Parameter Group Within Group Within STOP.ZT
1 Administrative 54 684,080
2 Bacteriological 59 2,403,153
3 Biological 735 644,390
4 Dissolved Oxygen 6 3,098,561
, 5 Flow 35 1,937,599
6 General Inorganic 116 9,119,301
7 General Organic 1,827 883,054
8 Metals 438 7,995,713
9 Nitrogen 67 4,635,072
10 Oxygen Demand 194 1,830.195
11 . Pesticides 559 757,519
12 Phosphorus 51 2,189,963
13 Physical 277 10,948,230
14 Radiological 343 528,724
15 Solids 194 4,957,324
16 Temperature 32 4,265,816
4,987 56,878,719
WQ
B-l
-------
PARAMETER CODES
\
Associated with each parameter is a parameter code, a
five-digit number which is unique-to each individual
parameter. This numerical coding structure along with
the uniqueness characteristic allows parameter codes to
be easily referenced by the computer-based STORZT
system.
Users may obtain a sorted listing of existing parameter
codes by executing any of the following STORET help
data sets, which contain the necessary job control
language to sort the parameter codes in the order
shown:
NAME OF DATA SET SORTED IN
PARMALFA alphabetic order by parameter name
PARNUMER numerical order by parameter code
PARGROUP alphabetic order within parameter
group
PARNOBS parameter code by'number of
observations
WQ
B-2
-------
MOST POPULAR PARAMETERS
The 20 most-frequently sampled water quality parameters withi
the WQF are listed below:
Parameter Code
Parameter Name
Number of Observations
2,
2,
2,
2,
2,
1,
1,
1,
1,
913,
370,
319,
073,
012,
446,
236,
227,
111,
987,
974,
912,
877,
783,
715,
652,
690,
610,
594,
593,
383
412
715
034
027
911
507
078
516
251
366
626
355
273
753
263
756
166
619
175
00010 Temperature-Degrees Celsius
00400 pK
00300 Dissolved Oxygen
00095 Conductivity
00940 Chlorides
00410 Alkalinity
00900 Hardness, Total
00310 BOD - 5 day
00070 Turbidity
00011 Temperature-Degrees Farenheit
00945 . Sulfate
00060 Flow
00610 Ammonia - N
00665 Phosphorus, Total
31616 Fecal Coliform
00902 Hardness, Non-carbonate
00530 Residue
00620 Nitrate
00440 Bicarbonate Ion
00925 Magnesium
EDIT CHECKING OF PARAMETER VALUES
Prior to any parameter value being stored in the WQF,
an edit check is performed against each parameter value
being stored to assure that it falls within an
acceptable range pre-established for that parameter.
The tables provided at the end of this appendix give
the highest and lowest 'acceptable values for the
parameters included within the respective parameter
groups.
ADDING NEW PARAMETERS TO THE STORET SYSTEM
The process for adding new parameters to the STORET
Water Quality File is relatively simple. A user who
needs a new parameter submits a written request on a
standard EPA form using furnished instructions (see the
following pages). The request form contains
information about the user and the parameter In
question, sufficient to permit EPA programs to process
the request. A new parameter number is assigned for a
request where a parameter number does not already
exist. After assignment, the identification number and
parametric data are entered into the Water Quality File
and the user is notified.
WQ
B-3
-------
5TOPFT 5VSTTM P.WJ-JFTS?- 3HXSST FCFM
. Phor.e
es and .-ddress: 3. Da_e
Fcr SSvircrser.tal Pro-cscticr. .-csr.cy Pecicral L'se Cnly:
^n-.u=rc i i -
3. 3ar.pli.-.c Ac-^vicy:
I. Verier c: Sarzlir.c Lccat-crj
^a :-!ay Be P-jrc.uJ.vec cr Ceiecad After (Date:
WQ
B-4
-------
.-. S'r.cr" :.'ar.s:
Tcr trrvircnaer/Lai ?rrcec;icr. Acer.cy Heado^ar^ars 3TC?.=.. -Vse CrJ.-..
Analysis Type: , 3: 3 ,
PsconL-.c v.-.i;s:
~
3her-; Xars: . p • 3 , ; (See .-ixr.-ei
r^li >:=.-=: 0 ? , . (See .-i
-------
INSTRUCTIONS FOR COMPLETING THE PARAMETER REQUEST FORM
PART I
I. Initiating Individual
Items A, C, and D are self-explanatory. Item B should also
specify whether the agency is: State, Federal (other than EPA),
Interstate, or EPA. Enter a check mark in item E if the number
is needed immediately,- otherwise leave this space blank for the
normal response. The normal response is a Xerox copy of the
parameter request form with the assigned parameter code.
II. For Environmental Protection Agency Regional Use
To be completed by EPA regional STORET coordinators. Items A, B,
and C are self-explanatory.
III. Description of Parameter
List the parameter's most common name. Use descriptive words or
phrases such as: "Total organic Kjeldahl nitrogen in bottom
deposits." Also, list technical and trade names if they apply to
the parameter. The description should also include the units
that the observation is reported in.
IV. Description of Analysis Technique, Collection Procedure,
Sensitivity of Analysis, Etc.
Be sure the information clearly shows the distinctive
characteristics which separate this parameter from other
parameters. This minimizes confusion or duplication in the
existing parameter number file. When analysis techniques conform
to a procedure provide the "reference title., chapter-page-
section-etc. ". For example, EPA manual of Methods For Chemical
Analysis of_ Water and Wastes, page 150 describes the standard
methods for tin. Where confusion results from a stated quantity
such as "total", "bottom deposits", "filtering", etc., include
additional information to differentiate between this parameter
and others. The same conditions apply to sample location or
collection procedure, when appropriate. In addition, be sure to
distinguish between the various different sample medias, such as:
whole water sample, fish tissue, sediment, etc.
WQ
B-6
-------
T «T
V. Classification
Select the most appropriate classification•from the following
list and write it in the space provided.
Administrative Oxygen Demand
Bacteriological Pesticides
Biological Phosphorus
Dissolved Oxygen . Physical
Flow Radiological
General Inorganic Solids
General Organic Temperature
Metals ' Miscellaneous
Nitrogen
VI. Sampling Stations
A. Check appropriate boxes for type of sampling stations
which will provide data under this parameter code. I
none are appropriate specify in space marked other.
•Bl. Check appropriate box for sampling activity. Data
already collected refers to data which have been
taken from prior measurements of a parameter which are
not identified in the STORE! listings. Data to be
collected refers to a parameter which is not in the
STORZT listings and for which data will be collected
and stored in the STORET data base if a parameter
number is assigned. Both is self-explanatory.
B2. Indicate the number of sampling locations (stations)
where the parameter is expected to be measured.
B3. ' Show the average number of observations expected for
this parameter per year for all stations.
B4. Show estimated number of years this parameter will be
observed. If data are to be collected for a special
project of limited time, indicate the beginning and
ending dates.
C. List your agency code under which data will be stored.
If more than one agency will be using this parameter,
list other agency codes.
D. If parameter number is needed for temporary data
storage and use, estimate the date of expected
completion so that data can be taken out of active
storaae.
WQ
B-7
-------
VII. Suggested Computer Printout Abbreviation and Parameter
Description
A. Show parameter abbreviation listing as you would like
to see it in the STORET printout retrieval. Use
existing printout of similar parameters for an
example. Always show units in the third row.
B. Describe parameter as you would like to see it in the
STORET retrieval printout. For uniformity, list the
parameter name first (for example, Iron or Nitrogen,
not Total or Dissolved). An existing printout of a
similar parameter can.be used as an example.
C. Show preferred decimal point for parameter measurements
in appropriate block. This information is for
computer printing only and does not effect data entry
or computer storage. The maximum number of numeric
characters is 8, with all data values being in floating
point format and may range from 99 x 100**(xx) to
99 x 10**(-xx) .
D. Indicate the preferred units for the parameter. Review
STORET parameter code listing to verify if parameter
number already exists in easily converted units (for
example, inches to feet). Also check to see what the
usual reporting units are for a parameter group (for
example, metals are usually reported as ug/1,
micrograms per liter).
WQ
B-8
-------
TABLE B2 - Metals
5,000 is revised limit!
STORE!
Code
910
915
916
920
925
927
929
930
931
935
937
1000
1002
1005
1007
1010
1012
1020
1022
1025
1C27
1030
1032
1033
1034
1040
1042
1045
1046
1047
104.9
1051
1055
1056 •
1065
1067
1075
1077
1090
1092
1105
1106
1145
71890
71895
71900
74010
Parameter Name
Calcium (CAC03)
Calcium - diss
Calcium - total
Magnesium (CAC03)
Magnesium - diss
Magnesium - total
.Sodium - total
Sodium - diss
Sodium Adsb. Ratio
Potassium - diss
Potassium - total
Arsenic - diss
Arsenic - total
Barium - diss
Barium - total
Beryllium - diss
Beryllium - total
Boron - diss
Boron - total
Cadmium - diss
Cadmium - total
Chromium
Chromium
Chromium
Chromium
Copper
Copper
- diss
- Hex Val
- Tri Val
- total
- diss
- total
Iron - total
Iron - diss
Iron - Ferrous
Lead - diss
Lead - total
Manganese - total
Manganese - diss
Nickel - diss
Nickel - total
Silver - diss
Silver - total
Zinc - diss
Zinc - total
Aluminum - total
Aluminum - diss
Selenium - diss
Mercury - diss
Mercury - Susp.
Mercury - total
Total Iron (as Fe)
Highest Acceptable
Value
mg/1 3000
mg/1 1000
mg/1 1000
mg/1 3000
mg/1 1000
mg/1 1000
mg/1 5000
mg/1 5000
mg/1 50
mg/1 175
mg/1 175
ug/1 5000
ug/1 5000
ug/1 2000
ug/1 2000
ug/1 2000
ug/1 2000
ug/1 5000
ug/1 5000
ug/1 5000
ug/1 5000
ug/1 2000
ug/1 2000
ug/1 2000
ug/1 2000
ug/1 5000
ug/1 2000
ug/1 56000
ug/1 56000
ug/1 56000
ug/1 1000
ug/1 1000
ug/1 5000
ug/1 5000
ug/1 2000
ug/1 2000
ug/1 5000
ug/1 5000
ug/1 25000
ug/1 25000
ug/1 20000
ug/1 20000
ug/1
ug/1 10
ug/1 10
ug/1 10
ug/1 . 56000
Lowest Acceptab
Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Q
0
n
0
0
0
0
o .
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
n
w
0
0
,-t
w
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
WQ
B-9
-------
TABLE B3 - Bacteriological Parameters
STORE!
Code . Parameter Name
31501 Total Coliform
31503 Total Coliform
31504 Total Coliform
30150 Total Coliform
31613 Fecal Coliform
31615 Fecal Coliform
31616 Fecal Coliform
31672 Fecal Strep
31673 Fecal Strep
31677 Fecal Strep
31679 Fecal Strep
31749 Total plate count
31751 Total plate count
Highest A-.cceptAbl.e-. Lowest. Acceptable
Value Value
0
0
0
0
c
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4/100
t/100
1/100
1/100
t/100
1/100
t/100
t/100
t/100
t/100
t/100
t/ml
I/ml
ml
ml
ml
ml
ml
ml
ml
ml
ml
ml
ml
24
24
24
24
10
10
10
5
5
5
5
100
100
* *
**
**
**
**
* *
* *
**
**
* *
* *
**
**
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
5
5
5
5
6
6
TABLE B4 - Physical Parameters
STORET
Code Parameter Name
10 Water Temp - C
11 Water Temp - F
20 Air Temp - C
21 Air Temp - F
32 Cloud Cover, %
35 Wind Velocity,
36 Wind direction,
45 Precipitation,
70 Turbidity - JTU
74 Transp. %
75 Turbidity - HLGE ppm
77 Transparency - Seechi
80 Color, PT - CO
81 AP Color, PT - CO
85 Odor - Threshold number
94 Conductivity - Field, 25
95 Conductivity - Lab, 25 C
400 pH
403 pH - Lab
480 Salinity, ppth
Highest Acceptable
Value
mph
degrees from North
total inches per
inches
h
ay
1,
60,
60,
37
98
52
125
101
85
361
15
000
101
500
600
500
500
250
000
000
12
12
40
Lowest Acceptable
Value
-2
31
-40
-40
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0.9
0.9
0
WQ
B-10
-------
TABLE B5 - Phosphorus
STORE!
Code Parameter Name
i
650 T - P04 as P04 mg/1
653 SOLP04 - T as P04 mg/1
655 POLYP04 as P04 mg/1
660 ORTHOP04 as P04 mg/1
665 PHOS-TOT as P mg/1
666 PHOS-diss as P mg/1
7C505 TP04 as P-COL mg/1
70507 PHOS-T ORTHO as ? mg/1
71886 Total P as P04 mg/1
Highest Acceptable
Value
30
30
30
30
10
10
10
10
30
Lowest Acceptab!
Value
0
0
c
3
0
STORET
Code
1501
1503
1505
3501
3503
3505
9503
13501
22703
Parameter Nam<
Total Alpha
Diss Alpha
SUSD. Alpha
Total Beta
Diss Beta
Susp Beta
RA - 226 diss
SR - 90 Total
U-NAT-diss
TABLE B6 - Radiological Parameters
Highest Acceptable
Value
Lowest Accepcabi'
Value
pc/1
pc/1
pc/1
pc/1
pc/1
ug/1
pc/1
pc/1
ug/1
200
75
150
3500
3000
1500
500
500
500
WQ
B-ll
-------
TABLE 37 - Pesticides
STORET
Code Parameter Name
39330 Aldrin ug/1
39340 BHC ug/1
39350 Chlordane ug/1
39360 DDD ug/1
39365 DDE ug/1
39370 DDT ug/1
39380 Dieldrin ug/1
39390 Endrin ug/1
39400 Toxaphene ug/1
39410 Heptachlor . ug/1
39420 Heptachlor-epoxide ug/1
39480 Methoxychlor ug/1
39530 Malathion ug/1
39540 Parathion ug/1
39600 Methyl Parathion ug/1
39782 Lindane ug/1
Highest Acceptable.
Value
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
,9
,9
,9
,9
,9
,9
Lowest, AcceptabL
Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
TABLE B8 - Nitrogen
STORET
Code Parameter Name
600 Total N
605 Organic N
608 Ammonia-N
610 T. Ammonia-N
615 N02-N
620 N03-N
625 Total Kjel N
630 N02 & N03-N
635 NH3 & Org.-N
71850 N03-N03
Highest Acceptable
Value
mg/1 100
mg/1 15
mg/1 25
mg/1 20
mg/1 5
mg/1 50
mg/1 50
mg/1 55
mg/1 70
mg/1 65
Lowest Acceptable
Value"
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
WQ
B-12
-------
TABLE B9 - Oxygen Demand
STORE!
Code
310
335
340
Parameter Name
BOD - 5 day
COD - Low
COD - Hiah
Highest Acceptable Lowest Acceptab!
Value Value
mg/1 150 C
mg/1 1000 0
mg/1 1000 C
TABLE 310 - Dissolved Oxygen
STORET
Code
299
300
301
Parameter Name
D.O. probe
D.O.
D.O. % SAT
Highest Acceptable Lowest Acceptab]
Value Value
mg/1
mg/1
mg/1
30
30
200
0
WQ
3-13
-------
TABLE Bll - General Inorganic Parameters
STORE!
Code Parameter Name
365 Chlorine demand 15min mg/1
405 Carbon dioxide mg/1
410 Total Alkalinity mg/1
415 Phenoth. Alkalinity mg/1
435 Total Acidity mg/1
436 Mineral Acidity mg/1
437 C02 Acidity mg/1
440 Bicarbonate Ion mg/1
445 Carbonate Ion mg/1
685 T. Inorganic Carbon mg/1
690 Total Carbon mg/1
720 Total Cyanide mg/1
745 . Total Sulfide mg/1
746 Diss Sulfide mg/1
760 SWL, PBI mg/1
900 Total Hardness mg/1
940 Chloride mg/1
945 Total Sulfate mg/1
946 Diss Sulfate mg/1
947 Diss Fluoride mg/1
951 Total Fluoride mg/1
5006G Chlorine tot residual mg/1
Highest Acceptable.
Value
15
100
1000
750
1000
1000
750
450
100
100
150
10
1500
1500
150
5000
22000
2500
2500
15
15
5
Lowest Accepts:
Value"
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
n
TABLE B12 - Biological Parameters
STORET
Code Parameter Name
32210 Chlorophyll-A (unc)
32211 Chlorophyll-A (cor)
32212 Chlorophyll-B (unc)
32214 Chlorophyll-C (unc)
32217 Chlorophyll-A (unc)
32218 Pheophytin-A
32219 Pheophytin Ratio
32721 % Chi A of Phe A
32230 Chlorophyll-A
32231 Chlorophyll-B
32232 Chlorophyll-C
32234 Total Chlorophyll
60050 Total Algae
ug/1
ug/1
ug/1
ug/1
ug/1
ug/1
ug/1
ug/1
mg/1
mg/1
mg/1
mg/1
Highest Acceptable
Value
500
750
1000
200
500
200
2.0
101
. 5
.75
. 2
1 . 0
700000
Lowest Acceptab!
Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
WQ
B-14
-------
TABLE 313 - Solids
STORE!
Code
500
505
510
515
520
525
530
535
540
545
546
955
956 '
70300
. Parameter Name
Residue,
Residue,
Residue,
Residue,
Residue,
Residue,
Res idue,
Residue,
Residue,
Residue,
Residue,
Silica,
Silica,
Residue,
Total
Tot-Vol
Tot-Fix
Diss-105C
VOL-FLT
FIX-FLT
TCT-NFLT
VOL-NFlt
FIX-NFLT
SETTL
SETTL
diss
Total
diss-180C
mg/1
mg/1
mg/1
mg/1
mg/1
mg/1
mg/1
mg/1
mg/1
ml/1
mg/1
mg/1
.mg/1
mg/1
Highest Acceptable
Value
15000
10000
10000
20000
10000
10000
10000
10000
1000
1000
1000
2000 .
2000
4000
Lowest Acceptable
Value"
n
u
p.
TABLE 314 - General Organic Parameters
STORET
Code 'Parameter Name
550 Oil-grease mg/1
630 T. Organic Carbon mg/1
681 Diss Organic Carbon mg/1
32270 Chloroform Ext. mg/1
32730 Phenols . ug/1
38260 MBAS mg/1
39516 PC3S ug/1
Highest Acceptable
Value
250
100
100
5
1500
10
5
Lowest Acceptabi
Value
0
n
WQ
3-15
-------
Height
WHO Code 1555 for recording height of the-dominant, waves
Code
Code
If 50
is added to direction
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
X
Less
1/2
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
m
1/2
m
1/2
m
1/2
m
1/2
m
(
m
(
m
(
m
nan ° m
(11/2
3
6
9
ft
(5
1/2
(8
1/2
(11
)
ft
ft
ft
ft
ft
(1 ft)
ft)
)
)
)
)
)
(13 ft)
m
Height
(14
not
f
t)
determined
n •
w
]_
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
. 5 m
51/2
6 m
61/2
7 m
71/2
8 m
81/2
9 m
91/2
(16 ft)
m (171/2 ft)
(19 ft)
•m (21 ft)
(221/2 ft)
m. ( 2 4 ft)
(251/2 ft)
m (27 ft)
(29 ft)
m (301/2 ft)
Notes:
(1) Each code figure provides for reporting a range of heights. For
example: 1 =1/4 m (1 ft) to 3/4m (21/2 ft); 5 = 2 m (7 ft! to
2 3/4mm (9 ft); 9 = 41/4 m (131/2 ft) to 4 3/4 m (15 ft), etc.
(2) If a wave height comes exactly midway between the heights
corresponding to two code figures, the lower code figure is
reported; e.g. a heig-ht of 2 3/4m is reportedy code figure 5.
In aeronautical forecast codes, only the left-hand table is to be
used and code figure 9 has the meaning: 4 l/2m (14 ft) or more-.
The average value of the wave height (vertical distance between
trough and crest) is reported, as obtained from the larger well
formed waves of the wave system being observed.
WQ
B-16
-------
Period
WMO Code 3155 for recording period of dominant waves
Code
Code
2 5 seconds or less
3 6 or 7 seconds
4 3 or 9 seconds
5 10 or 11 seconds
6 12 or 13 seconds
14 or 15 seconds
8 16 or 17 seconds
9 18 or 19 seconds
0 20 or 21 seconds
1 - Over 21 seconds
x Calm, or period
not determined
Notes:
(1) The period of the waves is the time between the passage of two
successive wave crests past a fixed point (it is equal to the
wave length divided by the wave speed).
(2) The average value of the wave period is reported, as obtained
from the larger well-formed waves of the wave system being
observed.
Cloud Type (Genus)
WMO Code 0500 for recording cloud type-(genus)
Code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
x
Cl
Cc
Cs
Ac
As
Ns
Sc
St
Cu
Cumulonimbus Cb
Cloud not visible owing to darkness, fog,
sandstorm, or other analogous phenomena
Cirrus . . .
Cirrocumulus
Cirrostratus
Altocumulus.
Altostratus.
Numbostratus
Stratocumulus
Stratus. . .
Cumulus. . .
duststorm,
WQ
B-17
-------
Cloud Amount
WHO Code 2700 for recording cioud amount
Code
00
1 1 okta or less, but not zero
2 2 oktas
3 3 oktas
4 4 oktas
5 5 oktas '
6 6 oktas
7 7 oktas or more, but not 8 oktas
8 8 oktas
9 .Sky obscured, or cloud amount
cannot be estimated
0
1/10
but not zero
or less,
2/10 - 3/10
4/10
5/10
6/10
7/10 - 8/10
9/10 or more, but not
10/10
IC/l;
WQ
B-18
-------
Present Weather
Conversion from 1936 International.Meteorological Organization Code tc the
WMO Code 4501
Code Underlined WMO
Code
ABBREVIATED DESCRIPTION OF SKY AND SPECIAL PHENOMENA 4501
(equivalent)
00 Cloudless 0
0 1 Partly cloudy. 1
02 Cloudy. 1
03 Overcast. 2
04 Low fog, on ground or over sea. 4
05 Haze (but visibility greater than 2,000 m., 2,200 yds). 4
06 Dust devils seen. 4
07 Distant lightning. 9
08 Light fog or mist (visibility between 1,000 and 2,000 m., 4
1,100 and 2,200 yds).
09 Fog at a distance, but not at the ship. 4
10 Precipitation within sight. 6
11 Thunder, without precipitation at the ship. 9
12 Dust storm within sight, but not at the ship. 3
13 Ugly, threatening sky. i 9
14 Squally weather. 9
15 Heavy squalls. in last 3 hours 9
16 Waterspouts seen. 9
PRECIPITATION IN A LAST HOUR BUT NOT AT TIME OF OBSERVATION
20 Precipitation (rain, drizzle, hail, snow, or sleet)
21 Drizzle 5
22 Rain other than showers 6
23 Snow other than showers in last hour 7
24 Rain and snow or sleet but not at 7
25 Rain shower (s). time of 3
26 Snow shower (s). observation. 7
27 Hail or rain and hail shower (s). 9
28 Slight thunderstorm. 9
29 Heavy thunderstorm. 9
WQ
B-19
-------
Conversion from 1936 International Meteorological Organization Code to th.
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
WHO Code 4501
(Cont'd)
DUST STORMS AND STORMS OF DRIFTING SNOW
(Visibility less than 1,000 m., 1,100 yards
has decreased.
no appreciable change.
has increased.
Dust or sand storm.
Dust or sand storm,
Dust or sand storm,
Dust or sand storm,
Line of dust storms.
Storm of drifting snow.
Slight storm of drifting snowgenerally low
Heavy storm of drifting snow
Slight storm of drifting snowgenerally high
Heavy storm of drifting snow
FOG
(Visibility less than 1,000 m., 1,100 yards)
WMO
Code
4501
'. equivalent)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
fog.
Moderate fog in last hour
Thick fog in last hour
Fog, sky discernible
sky not discernible
sky discernibleno appreciable change during
sky not discernible
sky discerniblehas begun or become thicker during
sky not discernible last hour
Fog,
Fog,
Fog,
Fog,
Fog,
Fog
but not at time of observation
has become thinner during last hour
last hour
in patches.
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
DRIZZLE
(Precipitation consisting of numerous minute drops)
Drizzle
Intermittent
Continuous
Intermittent
Continuous
Intermittent
Continuous
Drizzle and fog.
Slight or moderate
Thick
slight drizzle
slight drizzle
moderate drizzle
moderate drizzle
thick drizzle
thick drizzle
drizzle
drizzle
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
and
and
rain
rain
WQ
B-20
-------
Conversion from 1936 International Meteorological Organization Code to th
WHO Code 4501
(Cont'd)
RAIN
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
"4
75
76
77
78
79
80
31
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
Rain.
Intermittent slight rain.
Continuous slight rain.
Intermittent moderate rain.
Continuous moderate rain.
Intermittent heavy rain.
Continuous heavy rain.
Rain and fog.
Slight or moderate rain and snow, mixed.
Heavy
SNOW
Snow or sleet.
Intermittent slight snow in flakes
Continuous slight snow in flakes
Intermittent moderate snow in flakes
Continuous moderate snow in flakes
Intermittent heavy snow in flakes
Continuous heavy snow in flakes
Snow and fog.
Granular snow (frozen drizzle).
Ice crystals
• SHOWERS ( S )
Shower (s)
Shower (s) of slight or moderate rain
Shower (s) of heavy rain
Shower (s) of slight or moderate snow
Shower (s) of heavy snow
Shower (s) of slight or moderate rain
Shower (s) of heavy rain
Shower (s) of granular snow
Shower (s) of slight or moderate hail,
Shower (s) of heavy hail
and snow
and snow
or rain
or rain
WHO
Code
45C1
' ecu ivalent
6
6
and hail
and hail
WQ
B-21
-------
Conversion from 1936 International Meteorological Organization Code to the
WHO Code 4501
(Cont'd) WHO
Code
THUNDERSTORM 4501
(equivalent)
90 Thunderstorm 9
91 Rain at time thunderstorm during last hour,
92 Snow, or sleet at time time of observation. 9
93 Thunderstorm, slight without hail or soft hail,
but with rain (or snow) 9
94 Thunderstorm slight with soft hail 9
9-5 Thunderstorm moderate without hail, but with
rain (or snow) 9
9'6 Thunderstorm moderate with soft hail at time of 9
97 Thunderstorm heavy without hail, but with observation 9
rain (or snow) 9
98 Thunderstorm combined with dust storm 9
99 Thunderstorm heavy with hail 9
WQ
B-22
-------
Present Weather
WHO Code 46 7 ? for recording present weather
Cede figure
ww
00 Cloud development not observed or not
observable characteristic change
01 Clouds generally dissolving or of the state of sky
becoming less developed during the past hour
02 State of sky on the shole unchanged
03 Clouds generally forming or developing
04 Visibility reduced by smoke, e.g. veldt or forest fires.
industrial smoke or volcanic ashes
05 Haze
06 Widespread dust in suspension in the air, not raised by
sind at or near the station at the time of ocservaticr.
07 Dust or sand raised by wind at or near the station at the
time of observation, but no well developed dust whirlis-
or sand whirl(s), and no duststorm or sandstorm seen
08'Well developed dust whirl(s) or sand whirl(s) seen at
or near the station during the preceding hour or at the
time of observation, but no duststorm or standstorrn
09 Duststorm or sandstorm within sight at the time of
observation, or at the station during the precedina hour
10 Mist
11 Patches of shallow fog or ice fog at the station,
12 More or less whether on land or sea, not deeper than
continuous about 2 metres on land or 10 metres at sea
13 Lightning visible, no thunder heard
14 Precipitation within sight, not reaching the ground or
the surface of the sea
15 Precipitation within sight, reaching the ground or the
surface of the sea, but distant (i.e. estimated to be
more than 5 km) from the station
16 Precipitation within sight, reaching the ground or the
surface of the sea, near to, but not at the station
17 Thunderstorm, but no precipation at the time of
observation
13 Squalls at or within sight of the station
19 Funnel cloud(s)** during the preceding hour or at
the time of observation
* The expression "at the station" refers to a land station or a
** Tornado cloud or waterspout.
WQ.
3-23
-------
Code 4677 (Cont'd)
ww=20-29 Precipitation, fog, ice fog or thunderstorm at the
station during the preceding hour but not at the time
of observation
ww
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Drizzle (not freezing) or snow grains
Rain (not freezing)
Snow
Rain and snow or ice pellets, type(s)
Freezing drizzle or freezing rain
Shower(s) of rain
Shower (s) of snow, or of rain and snow
Shower(s) of hail, or of rain and hail
Fog or ice fog
Thunderstorm (with or without precipita
not falling
as shower (s)
tion)
ww=30-39 Duststorm, sandstorm drifting or blowing snow
ww
30 - has decreased during
the preceding hour
31 Slight or moderate dust- - no appreciable change
storm or sandstorm during the preceding hour
32 - has begun or has increased
during the preceding hour
33 - has decreased during the
preceding hour
34 Severe duststorm or - no appreciable change
sandstorm the preceding hour
35 . - has begun or has increased
during the preceding hour
36 Slight or moderate blowing snow generally low (below
37 Heavy drifting snow eye level)
38 Slight or moderate blowing snow generally high (above
39 Heavy blowing snow eye level)
ww=40-49 Fog or ice fog at time of observation
ww
40 Fog or ice fog at a distance at the time of observation,
station but not at the station during the preceding
hour, the fog or ice fog extending to a level above that
of the observer
41 Fog or ice fog in patches
42 Fog or ice fog, sky visible has become thinner during
43 Fog or ice fog, sky invisible the preceding hour
WQ
B-24
-------
Code 4677 (Cont'd)
Code figure
44
45
46
47
48
49
ww=50-59 Prec
Fog or ice fog, sky visible No appreciable chance
Fog or ice fog, sky invisible during the preceding he-
Fog or ice fog, sky visible has begun or has become
Fog or ice fog, sky invisible thicker during the
Fog, depositing rime, sky visible preceding hour
Fog, depositing rime, sky invisible
ipitation at the station at the time of observation
ww=50-59 Drizzle
ww
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Drizzle, not freezing, intermittent slight at time of
Drizzle, not freezing, continuous observation
Drizzle, not freezing, intermittent moderate at time of
Drizzle, not freezing, continuous observation
Drizzle, not freezing, intermittent heavy (dense) at time
Drizzle, not freezing, continuous of observation
Drizzle, freezing, slight
Drizzle, freezing, moderate or heavy-(dense)
Drizzle and rain, slight
Drizzle and rain, moderate or heavy
ww=60-69 Rain
WW
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
63
69
ww=70-79
70
71
72
73
Rain, not freezing, intermittent slight at time
Rain, not freezing, continuous of observation
Rain, not freezing, intermittent moderate at time of
Rain, not freezing, continuous observation
Rain, not freezing, intermittent heavy at time
Rain, not freezing, continuous of observation
Rain, freezing, slight
Rain, Freezing, moderate or heavy
Rain or drizzle and snow, slight
Rain or drizzle and snow, moderate or heavy
Intermittent fall of snow flakes slight at time of
Continuous fall of snow flakes observation
Intermittent -fall of snow flakes moderate at time of
Continuous fall of snow flakes observation
WQ
B-25
-------
Code 4677 (Cont'd)
heavy at time of
observat ion
Code figure
74 Intermittent fall of snow flakes
75 Continuous fail of snow flakes
76 Ice prisms (with or without for)
77 Snow grains (with or without fog)
78 Isolated starlike snow crystals (with or without fog)
79 Ice pellets, type (a)
ww=80-39 Showery precipitation, or precipitation with current or
recent thunderstorm
ww
80
81
82
. 83
84
85
86
87
88
Rain shower(s), slight
Rain shower (s), moderate or heavy
Rain shower(s), violent
Shower(s) of rain and snow mixed, slight
Shower(s) of rain and snow mixed, moderate or heavy
Snow shower(s), slight
Snow shower (s), moderate or heavy
Shower (s) of snow pellets or ice - slight
pellets, type (b), with or without
rain or rain and snow mixed - moderate or heavy
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
Shower(s) of hail, with or
without rain or rain and snow
mixed, not associated with
Slight rain at time of observation
Moderate or heavy rain at time of
observation
Slight snow, or rain and snow mixed
or hail at time of observation
Moderate or heavy snow, or rain and
snow mixed or hail at time of
observation
Thunderstorm, slight or moderate,
without hail, but with rain and/or
snow at time of observation
Thunderstorm, slight or moderate,
- slight
- moderate or heavy
thunderstorm during
the preceding hour
but not at time of
observation
with hail at time of
Thunderstorm, heavy,
but with rain and/or
observation
Thunderstorm combined with
storm or sandstorm at time
vation
Thunderstorm, heavy, with
at time of observation
observation
without hail,
snow at time of
thunderstorm at
of observation
dust-
of obser-
hail
WQ
B-26
-------
CODES FOR TIDE STAGE PARAMETER 00067
DIGIT
First
CODE
•(For East and Gulf
Coast Stations)
-(For West Coast Stations)
Second
DESCRIPTION
1 High Water Slack
2 Ebb Current
3 Low Water Slack
4 Flood Current
3 Mean Tide Level (Midway
Between Mean High Water
and Mean Low Water)
1 Higher High Water Slack
2 Greater Ebb
3 Lower Low Water Slack
4 Greater Flood
5 Lower High Water Slack
6 Lesser Ebb
7 Higher Low Water Slack
8 Lesser Flood
9 Mean Tide Level
0 +-3 hour
1 +- 2 hour
2 +- 1 hour
3 f- 40 minutes
4 +- 20 minutes
5 f- 10 minutes
6 +- 5 minutes
0 No Remark
1 Determined from U.S.
Coast and Geodetic
Survey Tide or Current
Tables
2 Measured
0 No Remark
1 Maximum Ebb Current
2 Maximum Flood Current
The purpose of this parameter and the associated codes
is to provide descriptive information concerning tidal stage at
the time of sample collection for use alone or in conjunction
with.parameter 00065 which shows water surface elevation in terms
of feet above datum.
The tide codes are set up to provide the user with
flexibility in defining tidal stage. As an example, for an East
Coast sampling station, the code 1000 would be used to show that
the stage was somewhere near high water at the time of sampling
(1 - High Water Slack, 0 - Occurred within plus or minus 3 hours
Third
Fourth
WQ
B-27
-------
of the sample time, 00 - No Remark). On the other hand, if more
detailed information were available the code 1610 could hrave b-een-•
used (1 - High Water Slack, 6 - Occurred within plus or minus 5
minutes of sampling time, 1 - Determined from USC and GS Tide-
Tables, 0 - No Remark).
It is necessary that the user enter all four digits of
code in proper order — that is, code estimated occurrence of
East or Gulf Coast Mean Tide Level as 5000 rather than
0500,0050,0005, etc.
Coding for severity parameters 01300,01305,01310, 01315,
01320, 01325, 01330, 01335, 01340, 01345, 01350, 01355
0 - None
1 - Mild
2 - Moderate
3 - Serious
4 - Extreme
PARAMETER 70211
5 DIGIT TIDE STAGE CODE
1st digit 0 Low Tide
1 High Tide.
2nd digit 0 Before High or Low Tic
1 After High or Low Tide
3rd digit 0 Less than one hour
1 or Equals number of hours
4th & 5th digits 00-59 . Minutes
This technique can not be used for standard STORET fixed field
format.
WQ
B-28
-------
CODES FOR WEATHER AT TIME OF SAMPLING
PARAMETER 47501
Second and
Third
Fourth
Fifth
CODING
1-Clear
2-Scattered clouds
3-Partly cloudy
4-Cloudy
5-Mist
6-Fog
7-Light shower
8-Rain
9-Snow
0-Sleet
Wind Direction-Round direction to nearest
10 degrees and use first two digits.
00-North
05-Northeast
09-East
18-South
27-West
Wind Speed Severity
0-Calm
1-Light
2-Moderately light
3-Moderate
4-Moderately strong
5-Strong
6-Gale or stronger
Relative Temperature
1-Freezing or below
2-Cold
3-Cool
4-Moderate
5-Warm
6-Hot
WQ
B-29
-------
CODES FOR CLOUD, AMOU.NT,
PARAMETER 84030
ALPHA VALUE DESCRIPTION
CLR Clear: less than 1% sky cover
SCT Scattered: 1% to 50% sky cover
BKN . Broken: 60% to 90% sky cover
OVC Overcast: more than 90% sky cover
Thin (when prefixed to the above symbols)
-X Partial obscuration: 1% to less than 10%
sky hidden by precipitation or obstruction
to vision
X Obscuration: 10% sky hidden by precipitation
or obstruction to vision
WQ
B-30
-------
CODES FOR PHYSICAL WEATHER
PARAMETER 84031
A. WEATHER AND OBSTRUCTION TO VISION SYMBOLS
A Hail
BS Blowing snow
D Dust
F Fog
GF Ground fog
H Haze
K Smoke
L Drizzle
R Rain
RW Rain showers
S Snow
SW Snow showers
T Thunderstorms
T + Severe thunderstorms
ZL Freezing drizzle
ZR Freezing rain
B. PRECIPITATION INTENSITIES
(-) Light
(No Sign) Moderate
(+) Heavy
The Precipitation Intensity codes shown under B are prefixed to
the alpha values listed under A, Weather and Obstruction to
Vision Symbols. For example, +A would be the value for heavy
hail.
WQ
B-31
-------
CODES FOR STREAM CDNDJTLONS.
PARAMETER 84032
ALPHA VALUE DESCRIPTION
N Normal
L Low
H High
SW Swift
SL Slow
MO Moderate
C Clear
MU Muddy
0 Other
EXAMPLE: NSLMU would indicate a normal, slow flow, muddy stream,
WQ
B-32
-------
STORE! USER HANDBOOK
PART
WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
APPENDIX
C
STATE AND COUNTY CODES
!Basic Retrieval; Second Edition)
-------
APPENDIX C: STATE AND COUNTY CODES
This appendix contains complete listings of the state codes, the
codes assigned to other U.S. territories and possessions, and the
codes assigned to each county and county equivalent within each
of the 50 states. All listings appear in alphabetical sequence.
STATZ CODES:
Name
ALABAMA
ALASKA
ARIZONA
ARKANSAS
CALIFORNIA
Abbreviation Code Name
AL
AK
AZ
AR
CA
01 MISSOURI
02 MONTANA
0 4 NEBRASKA
05 NEVADA
06 NEW HAMPSHIRE
Abbreviation
MO
MT
NE
NV
NH
Cede
29
COLORADO
CONNECTICUT
DELAWARE
DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA
FLORIDA
CO
CT
DE
DC
FL
08 NEW JERSEY NJ
09 NEW MEXICO NM
10 NEW YORK NY
11 NORTH CAROLINA NC
12 NORTH DAKOTA ND
36
3 7
•> 9
GEORGIA
HAWAII
IDAHO
ILLINOIS
INDIANA
GA
HI
ID
IL
IN
13 OHIO
15 OKLAHOMA
16 OREGON
17 PENNSYLVANIA
18 RHODE ISLAND
OH
OK
OR
?A
RI
IOWA
KANSAS
KENTUCKY
LOUISIANA
MA I NE
IA
KS
KY
LA
ME
19 SOUTH CAROLINA SC
20 SOUTH DAKOTA SD
21 TENNESSEE TN
22 TEXAS TX
23 UTAH UT
- S
49
MARYLAND
MASSACHUSETTS
MICHIGAN
MINNESOTA
MISSISSIPPI
MD
MA
MI
MN
MS
24 VERMONT
25 VIRGINIA
26 WASHINGTON
27 WEST VIRGINIA
28 WISCONSIN
WYOMING
VT
VA
WA
wv
WI
WY
50
51
5 3
54
5 5
5 6
Note: The following codes are reserved for possible future
in identifying American Samoa (03), Canal Zone (07), Guam •:
Puerto Rico (43), and Virgin Islands (52).
use
WQ
C-l
-------
CODES. OF TERRITORIES AND POSSESSIONS:
Name
AMERICAN SAMOA
CANAL ZONE
CANTON AND ENDER3URY
ISLANDS
*
*
*
GUAM
JOHNSTON ATOLL
MIDWAY ISLANDS
PUERTO RICO
RYUKYU ISLANDS,.SOUTHERN
SWAN ISLANDS
TRUST TERRITORIES OF
THE PACIFIC ISLANDS
U.S. MISCELLANEOUS
CARIBBEAN ISLANDS
U.S. MISCELLANEOUS
PACIFIC ISLANDS
VIRGIN ISLANDS
WAKE ISLAND
Code
^Numeric!
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
Code Office
(Alpha) Abbr.
Notes
74
75
76
77
78
79
AQ
PQ
EC-
CO
JQ
68
69
70
71
72
73
MQ
RQ
YQ
SQ
TQ
BQ
IQ
VQ
WQ
U.S. territory in the
Pacific
CZ Territory in Panama
leased by U.S.
Under common U.S.-U.K.
administration
GU U.S. territory in the
Pacific
U.S. territory in the
Pacific. Includes Sand
Island
U.S. territory in the
Pacific
PR Commonwealth associated
with the U.S.
U.S. administered islands
in the Pacific south of
27 52'
No. Lat.; 128 14 E. Long
and the Daito-jima
U.S. territory in the
Caribbean
U.S. administered: Inclu
Caroline, Mariana, and
Marshall island groups
Includes Navassa Islands,
Quito Sueno Bank, Ronca
Cay, Serrana Bank and
Serranilia Bank.
Includes Kingman Reef,
Howland, Baker and
Jarvis Island, and
Palmyra Atoll
VI U.S. territory in the
Caribbean
U.S. territory in the
Pacific
WQ
C-2
-------
COUNTY CODES:
The codes assigned to each county and county equivalent, in
state-by-state order, appear on the following pages.
In addition to these codes, the following special county codes
have been established. The current listing of these, and any
additional special county codes, is available on-line through the
STORE! help data set named COUNTY.CODES.
AREA CODE
Chesapeake Bay-Open Water 990
Atlantic Ocean 991
Pacific Ocean 992
Gulf of Mexico . 993
Lake Erie 994
Lake Ontario 995
Lake Superior 996
Lake Huron 997
Lake Michigan 998
Canada 999
WQ
C-3
-------
ALABAMA—ALASKA
STATE
STATE
STATE
CODE
001
OC3
005
007
009
01 I
013
015
017
019
021
023
025
027
029
031
033
C- 3 r-
037
039
04!
043
045
047
049
05;
053
055
057
059
061
063
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
079
08!
083
085
087
089
NAME: ALABAMA
ABBREVIATION: AL
CODE: 01
COUNTY NAME
AUTAUGA
09 1 MA.RENGO
095 MARSHALL
097 MOBILE
099 .MONROE
10; MONTGOMERY
'03 WORGAN
'05 PERRY
i07 PlCXENS
BALDWIN !09 ?IK£
3AR3OUR
BIBB
8LOUNT
BULLOCK
BUTLER
CALHOUN
CHAMBERS
CHEROKEE
CHILTON
CHOCTAW
CLARKE
CLAY
CLE3URNE
COFFEE
COLBERT
CONECUH
COCSA
COVINGTON
CRENSHAW
CULLMAN
DALE
DALLAS
DE KAL9
5LMORE
ESCAM8IA
ETOWAH
FAYETTE
FRANKLIN
GENEVA
GREENE
HALE
HENRY
HOUSTON
JACKSON
JEFFERSON
LAMAR
LAUDERDALE
LAWRENCE
LEE
LIMESTONE
LOWNDES
MACON
MADISON
1 i 1 RANDOLPH
1 13 RUSSELL
115 STCLAIR
i i 7 SHELBY
i 19 SUMTER
1 2 ' TALLADEGA
123 TALLAPOOSA
125 TUSCALOOSA
127 WALKER
129 WASHINGTON
i31 WILCOX
133 WINSTON
STATE NAME: ALASKA
The o-^'oai political units of Alaska are
called oorcughs. There are II organized
boroughs and an unorganized borough. Un-
fortunately, for statistical purposes, rhe or-
ganized boroughs cover only a very small
percentage of "he land area of the State and
have rhe further Disadvantage of e«ciuding
military and Indian reservations which lie
within tneir boundaries. Consequently, the
unorganized ocrcugn is too large to orov.de a
f V t t" t'cal ana' s -or
these reasons rne boroughs are not usable
for most statistica! purposes.
The Bureau of the Census, in conjunction
Census Divisions for Alaska which provide a
more effective basis for statistical purposes.
The Census Divisions ore stable geographic
statistical areas with denned boundaries that
encompass the entire stcte end genera'ly
comprise the election districts. The State of
Alaska has requested that these Census
Divisions be •-•riiized for statistical purposes.
for the geopolitical subdivisions of Alaska;
namely, rhe Census Divisions and the
Boroughs. The Census Division codes all
have a zero ;n -he low order (last) position.
Also listed ne*t are codes for rhe boroughs.
These can be used in those applications hav-
ing definite reauirements to Identify these
political urn's. It shouic be noted that the low
jrder position of these codes are other than
.'ne. cr-oract
remainder
organized
•e.T-.s usir.a
Borough we
reservations
e, 2e,0 -so. -re Store :' -.ia-,-a
of it*e Srcfe other man rhe 1 i
;ofo JG-S. -c:3rdnn-civ 'nose »vi-
n.s c*r".-..ron of TIP 'Jnof^sn -^c
u'd cede •*•<* -iitirary 3.13 If-aiC-.
as •?*?'?'
STATE ABBREVIATION: AK
STATE CODE: 02
CODE
010'
020'
0301
*040-
050'
060'
070 ;
080'
090'
ICO'
liO'
120'
130'
UO'
150'
160'
170'
ISO1
190'
200'
2!0'
220'
230'
240'
250'
260'
270'
260'
290'
WQ
c-u
DIVISIONS
DIVISION NAME
ALEUTIAN ISLANDS
DIVISION
ANCHORAGE DIVISION
ANGCON DIVISION
BARROW-NORTH SLOPE
DIVISION
BETHEL DIVISION
BRISTOL BAY BOROUGH
DIVISION
BRISTOL SAY DIVISION
CORDOVA-MCCARTHY
DIVISION
FAIRBANKS DIVISION
HAINES DIVISION
JUNEAU DIVISION
KENAI-COOK INLET
DIVISION
KETCHIKAN DIVISION
KO3UK DIVISION
KODIAK DIVISION
KUSKOKW1.M DIVISION
MATANUSKA-SUSITNA
DIVISION
NOME DIVISION
OUTER KETCHIKAN
DIVISION
PRINCE OF WALES DIVISION
ScWASO DIVISION
SITKA DIVISION
SKAGV/AY-YAKUTAT
DIVISION
SOUTHEAST FAIRBANKS
DIVISION
UPPER YUKON DIVISION
VALD6Z-CHITINA.WHITTIER
DIVISION
WADE HAMPTON DIVISION
WRANGELL-PETERSBURG
DIVISION
YUKON-KOYUKUK
DIVISION
-------
ALASKA—ARIZONA—ARKANSAS
BOROUGHS
CODE BOROUGH NAME
309' BRISTOL BAY BOROUGH
3i3' FAIRBANKS NORTH STAR
BOROUGH
327 ' GREATER ANCHORAGE
AREA 3OROUGH
336' GREATER JUNEAU
BOROUGH
345 ' GREATER SITKA BOROUGH
854 ' HAINES BOROUGH
363 ' KENAI PENINSULA
BOROUGH
372 ' KETCHIKAN GATEWAY
BOROUGH
381' KOOIAK ISLAND BOROUGH
399 NORTH SLOPE BOROUGH
999' UNORGANIZED BOROUGH
040 ' BARROW-NORTH SLOPE DIVISION.
Revited flPS 6-2, September 15. Originally
040 —BARROW DIVISION.
399 NORTH SICPE BOROUGH added
?«viie3 PIPS 4-2. 1973 September 15
Codes for Genius Divisions and Boroughs
except (399; Revised FlPS 6-1, June 15,
1970. Original codes listed below
aiE'JTIAN SUNOS DIVISION
ANGCON 3'V'SiON
9ARRGW JlviSiCN
3ET"El OIVISICN
3R!S'Ol 8A" 3CROUG*
3RISTOL SAY DIVISION
CORDOVA. MCCARTHY DIVISION
C-ATcWAr 3O9OUGH
GREATER ANCHORAGE AREA 3CRO
GREATER jUNEAU 3OROUGH
GRE-"=R SITSA 3OROUG*
*ENA| =EN!NSuLA 3GRO-NW
»;NAI PENINSULA SORO-SE
<03UK DIVISION
«.OOIA« SLANO 3ORCUGH
<;JSKCK\VIV DIVISION
'.»NN CA.NAL-lC'' STRAITS O'V
NOWE DIVISION
NORTH STAR 3CRCUG*
OUTc!
-------
CALJFOtNIA—COLORADO—CONNECTICUT
STATE
STATE
NAME: CALIFORNIA
ABBREVIATION: CA
STATE CODE: 06
CODE
001
003
005
007
009
01 1
013
015
017
019
021
023
025
027
029
031
033
035
037
039
C41
043
045
047
049
051
053
055
057
059
061
063
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
079
081
083
085
087
089
COUNTY NAME
ALAMEDA
ALPINE
AMADOR
BUTTE
CALAVERAS
COLUSA
CONTRA COSTA
DELNCRTE
EL DORADO
FRESNO
GLENN
HUMBOLDT
IMPERIAL
INYO
KERN
KINGS
LAKE
LASScN
LOS ANGELES
MAOERA
MARIN
MARIPOSA
MENOOCINO
MERCED
MOOOC
MONO
MONTEREY
NAPA
NEVADA
ORANGE
PLACER
PLUMAS
RIVERSIDE
SACRAMENTO
SAN BENITO
SAN BERNARDINO
SAN DIEGO
SAN FRANCISCO
SAN JOAQUIN
SAN LUIS O8ISPO
SAN MATEO
SANTA BARBARA
SANTA CLARA
SANTA CRUZ
SHASTA
091
093
095
097
099
101
103
105
107
109
1 1 1
1 13
115
SIERRA
SISKIYOU
SOLANO
SONOMA
STANISLAUS
SUTTER
TEHAMA
TRINITY
TULARE
TUOLUMNE
VENTURA
YOLO
YU8A
STATE NAME: COLORADO
STATE ABBREVIATION: CO
STATE
CODE
001
003
005
007
009
Oil
013
015
017
019
021
023
025
027
029
031
033
035
037
039
041
043
045
047
049
051
053
055
057
059
CODE: 08
COUNTY NAME
ADAMS
ALAMOSA
ARAPAHOE
.ARCHULETA
8ACA
BENT
BOULDER
CHAFFEE
CHEYENNE
CLEAR CREEK
CONEJOS
COSTILIA
CROWLEY
CUSTER
DELTA
DENVER
DOLORES
DOUGLAS
EAGLE
ELBERT
EL PASO
FREMONT
GARF1ELD
GILPIN
GRAND
GUNNISON
HINSOALE
HUERFANO
JACKSON
JEFFERSON
061
063
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
079
081
083
035
087
089
091
093
095
097
099
101
103
105
107
109
; i
;3
15
17
19
121
123
125
STATE
K1OWA,
KIT CARSON
LAKE-
LA PLATA
LARIMER
LAS ANIMAS
LINCOLN
LOGAN
MESA
MINERAL
MOrrAT
MONTEZUMA
MONTROSE
MORGAN
OTERO
OUR AY
PARK
PHILLIPS
PITKIN
PROWERS
PUEBLO
RIO BLANCO
RIO GRANDE
ROUTT
SAGUACHE
SAN JUAN
SAN MIGUEL
SEDGWICK
SUMMIT
TELLER
WASHINGTON
WELD
YUMA
NAME: CONNECTICUT
STATE ABBREVIATION: CT
STATE CODE: 09
CODE
001
003
005
007
009
Oil
013
015
WQ
C-6
COUNTY NAME
FAIRFIELD
HARTFORD
LITCHFIELD
MIDDLESEX
NEW HAVEN
NEW LONDON
TOLLAND
WINDHAM
-------
DELAWARE—DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA—FLORIDA—GEORGIA
STATE NAME: DELAWARE 031
STATE ABBREVIATION: OE
STATE CODE: 10
CODE COUNTY NAME
001 KENT
C03 NEWCASTLE
005 SUSSEX
STATE NAME: DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA
STATE ABBREVIATION: DC
STATE CODE: 1 1
CODE NAME
OOP WASHINGTON
001 ' Washington. Revised FIPS 6-1,
June 15. 1970.
Washington, D.C. is unique in rrot it is nor
an rndeoe^cent ciry or counry 35 ,n rhe otner
States, it is identified and coded in this stana-
ard :o provide a basis for statistical applica-
tions in that the total of oil the entities in-
cluded cover the fotal land moss of rhe
United States.
STATE NAME: FLORIDA
STATE ABBREVIATION: FL
STATE CODE: 12
CODE COUNTY NAME
001 ALACHUA
003 BAKER
005 BAY
007 BRADFORD
009 SREVARD
Oil 3ROWARD
013 CALHOUN
015 CHARLOTTE
017 CITRUS
019 CLAY
021 COLLIER
023 COLUMBIA
025 DADE
027 OESOTO
029 DIXIE
033
035
037
039
041
043
045
047
049
051
053
055
057
059
061
063
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
070
081
083
085
087
AGO
OoV
091
093
095
097
099
101
103
105
107
109
1 1 1
113
115
117
1 19
121
123
125
127
129
131
133
OUVAL STATE
ESCAMBIA
FLAGLER
FRANKLIN .
STATE
GAOSDEN STATE
GILCHRIST 1
GLADES
GULF
HA/MILTON
HARDEE
HENORY
HERNANDO
HIGHLANDS
HILLSBOROUGH
HOLMES
INDIAN RIVER
JACKSON
JEFFERSON
LAFAYETTE
LAKE
LEE
LEON
LEVY
LIBERTY
MADISON
MANATEE
.MARION
MARTIN
MONROE
NASSAU
OKALOOSA
OKEECHOBEE
ORANGE
OSCEOLA
PALM BEACH
PASCO
PINELLAS
POLK
PUTNAM
ST JOHNS
STLUCIE
SANTA ROSA
SARASOTA
SEMINOLE
SUMTER
SUWANNEE
TAYLOR
UNION
VOLUSIA
WAKULLA
WALTON
WASHINGTON
CODE
001
003
005
007
009
01 !
013
015
017
019
02!
023
025
027
029
03'
033
035
037
039
043
n A c
U45
047
049
05!
053
055
057
059
06!
063
065
067
069
07!
073
075
077
079
081
083
085
087
089
091
WQ
C-7
NAME: GEORGIA
ABBREVIATION: GA
CODE: 13
COUNTY NAME
APPLING
ATKINSON
BACON
BAKER
BALDWIN
SANKS
5 AS ROW
3ARTOW
BEN HILL
3ERRIEN
31BB
BLECKLEY
3RANTLEY
BROOKS
BRYAN
3ULLCCH
3USKE
BUTTS
CALHOUN
CAMOEN
CANDIES
f A QD/""1!! I
LAKKULL
CATOOSA
CHARLTON
CHATHAM
CHATTAH.OCCHEE
CHATTOCGA
CHEROKEE
CLARKE
CLAY
CLAYTON
CLINCH
COBS
COFFEE
COLQUITT
COLUMBIA
COOK
COWETA
CRAWFORD
CRISP
DADE
DAWSON
DECATUR
DE KALB
DODGE
-------
GEORGIA—HAWAII—IDAHO
093
095
097
099
101
103
105
107
109
111
1 13
1 15
1 17
1 19
121
123
125
127
129
131
133
135
137
139
141
143
145
147
149
151
153
155
157
159
161
163
165
167
169
171
173
175
177
179
181
183
185
187
189
191
193
195
197
199
201
OOOLY
DOUGHERTY
DOUGLAS
EARLY
ECHOLS
EFFINGHAM
ELBERT
EMANUEL
EVANS
FANN1N
FAYETTE
FLOYD
FORSYTH
FRANKLIN
FULTON
GILMER
GLASCOCK
GLYNN
GORDON
GRADY
GREENE
GWINNETT
HABERSHAM
HALL
HANCOCK
HARALSON
HARRIS
HART
HEARD
HENRY
HOUSTON
IRWIN
JACKSON
JASPER
JEFF DAVIS
JEFFERSON
JENKINS
JOHNSON
JONES
LAMAR
LAN1ER
LAURENS
LEE
LIBERTY
LINCOLN
LONG
LOWNDES
LUMPKIN
MCDUFFIE
MC1NTOSH
MACON
MADISON
MARION
MERIWETHER
MILLER
205
207
209
211
213
•215 '
217
219
221
223
225
227
229
TT 1
I J 1
233
235
237
239
241
243
245
247
249
251
253
255
257
259
.261
263
265
267
269
271
273
' 275
277
279
281
283
285
287
289
291
293
295
297
299
301
303
305
307
309
31 1
313
MITCHELL 315 WIlCOX
MONROE
MONTGOMERY
MORGAN
MURRAY
NEWTON
OCONEE
OGLETHORPE
PAULDING
PEACH
P1CKENS
PIERCE
Dl h'C
r 1 1st
POLK
PULASKI
PUTNAM
QUITMAN
RABUN
RANDOLPH
RICHMOND
ROCKDALE
SCHLEY
SCREVEN
SEMINOLE
SPALDiNG
STEPHENS
STEWART
SUMTER
TALSOT
TALIAFERRO
TATTNALL
TAYLOR
TELFAIR
TERRELL
THOMAS
TIFT
TOOM8S
TOWNS
TREUTLEN
TROUP
TURNER
TWIGGS
UNION
UPSON
WALKER
WALTON
WARE
WARREN
WASHINGTON
WAYNE
WEBSTER
WHEELER
WHITE
WHITFIELD
317 WILKOS
3i9 WILKINSON
321 WORTH
CODE CONSOLIDATED
GOVERNMENT
•510 COLUMBUS
Code 215' Previously csngned to Musco-
gee County. Columbui (Code 510) identifies
a consolidated government, which has re-
placed Muscogee County os a primary divi-
sion of the State of Georgia. The name of this
new unit is not Columbus County, or Columbus
City; if is just Columbus.
STATE NAME: HAWAII
STATE ABBREVIATION: HI
STATE CODE: ' 5
CODE COUNTY NAME
001 HAWAII
003 HONOLULU
005 ; KAIAWAO
007 KAUAI
009 MAUI
005' Kolowoo. Revised FIPS 3-1, June I 5,
:°70.
-------
IDAHO—ILLINOIS—INDIANA
041
043
045
047
049
051
053
055
057
059
061
063
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
079
081
083
085
037
STATE
FRANKLIN
FREMONT
GEM
GOOOING
•OAhO
jEFFESSON
J-SOME
:
-------
INDIANA—IOWA
03 i
033
035
037
039
04;
043
045
047
049
05!
053
055
057
059
061
063
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
079
031
033
085
087
089
091
093
095
097
099
101
103
105
107
109
1 ! I
1 13
1 15
1 17
119
121
123
125
127
129
131
133
135
137
139
DECA7UR
OE
-------
IOWA—KANSAS—KENTUCKY
; 5 i
!53
i 55
; 5?
150
'el
'63
i65
'67
169
i 71
173
''75
177
;79
181
183
135
'•37
•'39
!91
1=3
195
197
STATE
STATE
STATE
CODE
001
003
005
007
009
01 1
013
015
017
019
021
023
025
027
029
031
033
035
037
039
POCA.-.GNTAS
?OL;<
?O " -'.".• AT fAMir.
PG'WESHiE:*:
SL •,-•.,— n
SAC
SCOTT
SKEL3Y
SIOUX
STORY
TAMA
TAYLOR
UNION
VAN 3 OR EN
WAPELLC
WARREN
WASHINGTON
WAYNE
WE3STES
WINNEBAGO
WINNESHIEK
WOOOBURY
WORTH
WRIGHT
NAME: KANSAS
ABBREVIATION: KS
CODE: 20
COUNTY NAME
ALLEN
ANDERSON
ATCHISON
BARBER
3ARTON
BOURBON
BROWN
BUTLER
CHASE
CHAUTAUQUA
CHEROKEE
CHEYENNE
CLARK
CLAY
CLOUD
COFFEY
COMANCHE
COWLEY
CRAWFORD
DECATUR
04:
043
045
04 7
04'
05.
053
055
057
059
061
043
065
067
06?
071
073
075
077
079
031
083
085
087
089
091
093
095
097
099
101
103
105
107
109
1 1 1
1 13
! 15
1 17
119'
121
123
125
127
129
!3I
133
135
137
139
141
143
US
147
149
DICKINSON
CONIFHAN
DOUGLAS
c. -,•..«' A »n«
±^'4tr*^.^J
ELK
ELLIS
ELLSWORTH
F'NNEY
FORD
FRANKLIN
GEARY
GOVE
GRAHAM
GRANT
GRAY
GREE'.EY
GREENWOOD
HAMILTON
HARPER
HARVEY
HASKELl
HOCGcMAN
JACKSON
JEFFERSON
.-SWELL
jCHNSCN
KEARNY
KINGMAN
KIOWA
LABETTE
LANE
LEAVENWCRTH
LINCOLN
LiNN
LOGAN
LYON
--MCPHESSON
MARION
MARSHALL
MEADE
MIAMI
MITCHELL
MONTGOMERY
MORRIS
MORTON
NEMAHA
NEOSHO
NESS
NORTON
OSAGE
OS3ORNE
OTTAWA
PAWNEE
PHILLIPS
POTTAWATOM1E
WQ
C-1 1
I 5i
'. 53
:55
'57
i 59
!6i
i Co
i65
'C7
; i-?
; 7 }
:73
I75
' 77
'79
'3i
1 33
I55
'37
'39
i9i
;93
I95
197
; oc
_C i
203
205
207
209
STATE
STATE
STATE
CODE
00 I
003
005
007
009
Ol I
OI3
015
0!7
OI9
02 i
023
025
027
029
P^ATT
-•.-.VLi.NS
RENO
.RSP'jBL:--:
RICE
Ri'.EY
SCOKS
R ' J S H
?USS:-.L
SALINE
SCOTT
SEDGV/IC<
SEW A SO
3 -rJ AW NEE
SHrSiOAiN
SHERMAN
SMITH
STAFFORD
STANTCN
STEVENS
SUMNER
THOMAS
TREGO
WA5AUNSEE
v. ALL ACE
•.V A$-H!NGTC '-4
'vVICHiTA
WILSON
WOODSCN
WYANOOTTE
NAWE: :
-------
031
033
035
037
039
041
043
045
047
049
051
053
055
057
059
061
063
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
079
081
083
085
087
089
091
093
095
097
099
101
103
105
107
109
1 I 1
1 13
115
1 17
1 19
121
123
125
127
129
131
133
135
137
139
BUTLER
CALDWELL
CALLOWAY
CAMPBELL
CARLISLE
CARROLL
CARTER
CASEY
CHRISTIAN
CLARK
CLAY '
CLINTON
CRITTENDEN
CUMBERLAND
DAVIESS
EDMONSON
ELLIOTT
ESTILL
FAYETTE
FLEMING
FLOYD
FRANKLIN
FULTON
GALLATIN
OARRARD
GRANT
GRAVES
GRAYSON
GREEN
GREENUP
HANCOCK
HAROIN
HARLAN
HARRISON
HART
HENDERSON
HENRY
HICKMAN
HOPKINS
JACKSON
JEFFERSON
JESSAMINE
JOHNSON
KENTON
KNOTT
KNOX
LARUE
LAUREL
LAWRENCE
LEE
LESLIE
LETCKER
LEWIS
LINCOLN
LIVINGSTON
KENTUCKY—LOUISIANA
LOUISIANA
LA
22
141
143
US
147
149
151
153
155
157
159
161
163
165
167
169
171
173
!75
177
179
161
133
185
137
139
191
193
195
197
199
201
203
205
207
209
21 1
213
215
217
219
221
223
225
227
229
231
233
235
237
239
LOGAN | STATE
LYON
MCCRACKEN
MCCREARY
MCLEAN
MADISON
MAGOFFIN
MARION
MARSHALL
MARTIN
MASON
MEADE
MENIFEE
MERCER
METCALFE
MONROE
MONTGOMERY
MORGAN
MUHLEN8ERG
NELSON
NICHOLAS
OHIO
OLOHAM
CvVtN
OWSLEY
PENDLETON
PERRY
PIKE
POWELL
PULASKI
ROBERTSON
ROCKCASTLE
ROWAN
RUSSELL
SCOTT
SHELBY
SIMPSON
SPENCER
TAYLOR
TOOO
TRIGG
TRIMBLE
UNION
WARREN
WASHINGTON
WAYNE
WEBSTER
WHITLEY
WOLFE
WOOD FORD
STATE
STATE
CODE
001
003
005
007
009
01!
013
015
017
019
021
023
025
027
029
031
033
0351
037
039
041
043
045
047
049
051
053
055
057
059
061
063
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
079
081
083
085
087
089
WQ
C-12
NAME: LO
ABBREVIATION:
CODE:
COUNTY NAME
ACADIA
ALLEN
ASCENSION
ASSUMPTION
AVOYELLES
3EAUREGARD
SIENVILLc
BOSSIER
CAOOO
CALCASiEU'
CALDWEtL
CAMERON
CATAHOULA
CLAIBORNE
CONCORDIA
CE 3OTO
EAST BATON ROUO
EAST CARROLL
EAST FELiCIANA
EVANGEL1NE
FRANKLIN
GRANT
IBERIA
iSERVILLE
JACKSON
JEFFERSON
JEFFERSON DAVIS
LAFAYETTE
LAFOURCHE
LA SALLE
LINCOLN
LIVINGSTON
/MADISON
MOREHOUSE
NATCHITOCHES
ORLEANS
OUACHITA
PLAQUE/MINES
POINT? COUPE:
RAPIOES
RED RIVER
RICHLAND
SABINE
ST BERNARD
ST CHARLES
-------
LOUISIANA—MAINE—MARYLAND—MASSACHUSETTS—MICHIGAN
091 ST HELENA
093 ST JAMES
095 ST JOHN THE BAPTIST
097 ST LANDRY
099 ST MARTIN
10' ST '/.ARY
103 ST TAMMANY
105 TANGIPA.HOA
107 TENSAS
109 TERRE3ONNE
1 1 1 UNION
1 13 VERMILION
1 15 VERNON
117 WASHINGTON
119 WEBSTER
121 WEST BATON ROUGE
123 WEST CARROLL
125 WESTFELICIANA
127 WINN
035' Snsi Carroll. Revised PIPS 6-1. June
15. l°70. (Spelling correcrion from "East
Carrol.")
STATE NAME: MAINE
STATE ABBREVIATION: ME
STATE CODE: 23
CODE COUNTY NAME
00! ANDROSCOGGIN
003 AROOSTOCK
005 CUMBERLAND
007 FRANKLIN
009 HANCOCK
Oil KENNESEC
013 KNOX
015 LINCOLN
017 OXFORD
019 PENOBSCOT
021 PISCATAQUIS
023 SAGADAHOC
025 SOMERSET
027 WALDO
029 WASHINGTON
031 YORK
STATE NAME: MARYLAND
STATE ABBREVIATION: MD
STATE CODE: 24
CODE COUNTY NAME
00 1 ALLEGANY
003 ANNEARUNDEL
005 BALTIMORE
009 CALVERT
Oil CAROLINE
OI3 CARROLL
015 CECIL
017 CHARLES
019 DORCHESTER
021 FREDERICK
023 GARRETT
025 HARFORD
027 HOWARD
029 KENT
031 MONTGOMERY
033 PRINCE GEORGES
035 QUEEN ANNES
037 ST MARYS
039 SOMERSET
041 TALBOT
043 WASHINGTON
045 WICOMICO
047 WORCESTER
CODE INDEPENDENT CITY
510 BALTIMORE CITY
STATE NAME: MASSACHUSETTS
STATE ABBREVIATION: MA
STATE CODE: 25
CODE COUNTY NAME
00! BARNSTABLE
003 BERKSHIRE
005 BRISTOL
007 DUKES
009 ESSEX
Oil FRANKLIN
013 HAMPOEN
0'5 HAMPSHIRE
0'7 MIDDLESEX
021 NORFOLK
023 PLYMOUTH
025 SUFFOLK
027 WORCESTER
STATE NAME: MICHIGAN
STATE ABBREVIATION: Ml
STATE CODE: 26
CODE COUNTY NAME
00! . ALCONA
003 ALGER
005 ALLEC-AN
007 ALPENA
009 ANTRIM
Oil ARENAC
013 3ARAGA.
015 3ARRY
017 BAY
019 3ENZIE
021 BERRIEN
023 3RANC-
025 CALHOUN
027 CASS
029 CHARLEVCIX
031 CHESOYGAN
033 CHIPPEWA
035 CLARE
037 CLINTON
039 CRAWFORD
04! DELTA
043 DICKINSON
045 EATON
047 EMMET
049 C-ENESEE
05! 3LAOWIN
053 GOGE5IC
055 GRAND T-RAVERS:
057 GRATiOT
059 HILLSDALE
061 HOUGHTON
063 HURON
065 INGHAM
067 IONIA
069 IOSCO
07! IRON
073 ISABELLA
075 JACKSON
077 KALAMAZOO
019 NANTUCKET i 079 KALKASKA
WQ
C-13
-------
MICHIGAN—MINNESOTA—MISSISSIPPI
031
OS3
035
087
089
091
093
095
097
099
!01
103
'05
107
109
1 1 i
: 13
1 15
1 17
1 19
121
123
125
127
129
•3!
'33
137
139
141
143
145
147
U9
151
153
155
157
159
161
163
165
STATE
STATE
STATE
CODE
001
003
005
OC7
009
KENT
KEWEENAW
LAKE
LAPEER
LEELANAU'
LENAWEE
LIVINGSTON
LUCE
MACXINAC
WACOM 3
MANISTEE
MARQUETTE
MASON
MECOSTA
MENOMINEE
MIDLAND
MISSAUKEE
MONROE
MONTCALM
MONTMORENCY
MUSKEGON
NEWAYGO
OAKLAND
OCEANA
OGEMAW
ONTONAGON
01 1
013
015
017
019
021
023
025
027
029
031
033
035
037
039
041
043
045
047
049
051
053
055
057
059
03CEOLA lVl;
CSCOOA
OTSEGO
OTTAWA
PRESQUE ISLE
ROSCOMMON
SAGINAW
STCLAIR
ST JOSEPH
SANILAC
3CHOCLCR4FT
SHIAWASSEE
TUSCOLA
VAN BUREN
WASHTENAW
WAYNE
WEXFORD
NAME: MINNESOTA
ABBREVIATION: MN
CODE: 27
COUNTY NAME
AlTKIN
ANOKA
BECKER
3ELTRAMI
SENTON
063
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
079
081
083
085
087
089
091
093
095
097
0"9
101
103
105
107
109
1 1 1
113
115
i i 7
1 19
BIG STONE
BLUE EARTH
BROWN
CARLTON
CARVER
CASS
CHIPPEWA
CHISAGO
CLAY
CLEARWATER
COOK
COTTONWCOO
CROW WING
DAKOTA
DODGE
DOUGLAS
FARIBAULT
FILLMORE
FREE3ORN
GOOOHUE
GRANT
HENNEPIN
HOUSTON
HU8BARD
I2l
I 23
125
127
I 29
I 3 3
I 33
)35
!37
!39
14!
I 43
I 45
147'
1 ^0
151
'153
155
157
159
161
163
1A5
167
ISANTI iS9
•TA3CA
JACKSON
KANA8EC
KANOIYOHI
• KITTSON.
KOOCHICHING
LAC OUI PARLE
LAKE
LAKE OF THE WOODS
LE SUEUR
LINCOLN
LYON
MCLEOD
MAHNCMEN
MARSHALL
MARTIN
MEEKER
MILLE LACS
MORRISON
MOWER
MURRAY
NICOLLET
NOBLES
NORMAN
OLMSTED
OTTER TAIL
PENNINGTON
PINE
PIPESTONE
POLK
1 71
;73
STATE
POPE
RAMSEY
RED LAKE
REDWOOD
RF.NVILLE
ROCK
ROSEAU
STLOUiS
SCOTT
SHERBURNE
SISLEY
STEARNS
STEELS
STEVENS
SWIFT
TODO
TRAVERSE
WABASHA
•A'ADENA
WASECA
WASHINGTON
WATCNWAN
WILKIN
WINCNA
•A/RIGHT
VELLOW MEDICINE
NAME: MISSISSIPPI
STATE ABBREVIATION: MS
STATE
CODE
001
003
005
007
009
01 1
013
015
017
019
021
023
025
027
029
WQ
C-1U
CODE: 28
COUNTY NAME
ADAMS
ALCORN
AMITE
ATTALA
SENTON
BOLIVAR
CAlHOUN
CARROLL
CHICKASAW
CHOCTAW
CLAIBORNE
CLARKE
CLAY
COAHOMA
COPIAH
-------
MISSISSIPPI—MISSOURI
031
033
035
037
039
041
04j
045
047
049
051
053
055
057
059
061
063 .
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
•"17O
OS'
083
035
087
089
091
093
09:
097
099
101
103
105
107
109
1 1 1
1 13
1 15
1 17
i 19
121
123
125
i27
129
13!
133
135
137
139
COVINGTON
CE sore
FORREST
FRANKLIN
GEORGE
GREENE
GRENADA
HANCOCK
HARRISON
HINDS
HOLMES
HUMPHREYS
ISSAQUENA
1 7 AW AM B A
JACKSON
JASPER
JEFFERSON
JEFFERSON DAVIS
JONES
KEMPER
LAFAYETTE
LAMAR
LAUDE.ROALE
LAWRENCE
LEAKE
L£c
LEFLORE
LINCOLN
LOWNDE5
MADISON
MARION
MARSHALL
MONROE
MONTGOMERY
NESHOBA
NEWTON
NOXUBEE
. OKTI88EHA
PANOLA
PEARL RIVER
PERRY
PIKE
PONTOTOC
PRENTISS
QUI T.MAN
RANKIN
SCOTT
SHARKEY
SIMPSON
SMITH
STONE
SUNFLOWER
TALLAHATCHIE
TATE
TIPP^H
141
143
145
147
149
151
!53
155
157
159
161
163
STATE
TISHOMINGO
TUNICA
UNION
061
063
065
WALTHALL 067
WARREN 069
WASHINGTON
WAYNE
071
073
WEBSTER 075
WILKINSON 0T7
WINSTON
079
YALO6USHA 031
YAZOO 083
085
087
i 039
NAME: MISSOURI
STATE ABBREVIATION: MO
STATE
CODE
00!
003
005
007
009
01 1
013
015
017
019
021
023
025
027
029
031
033
-035
037
039
041
043
045
047
049
051
053
055
057
059
CODE: 29
COUNTY NAME
A DAIS
ANDREW
ATCHISON
AUDRAIN
BARRY
BARTON
BATES
3ENTON
3OLLINGER
BOONE
BUCHANAN
BUTLER
CALDWELL
CALLAWAY
CAMDEN
CAPEGIRARDEAU
CARROLL
CARTER
CASS
CEDAR
CHARITON
CHRISTIAN
CLARK
CLAY
CLINTON
COLE
COOPER
CRAWFORD
DADE
DALLAS
091
093
095
097
099
101
103
105
:07
109
i ' :
1 13
115
1 17
1 19
121
123
125
127
129 •
'31
133
135
137
139
U!
143
U5
!47
!49
151
153
155
157
159 .
161
163
165
167
169
WQ
C-15
DAVIESS
DE KA.LB
OENT
DOUGLAS
DUNKLIN
FRANKLIN
GASCONADE
GENTRY
GREENE
C-RUNDY
HARBISON
HENRY
HlCKCRv
HOLT
HOWARD
HOWELL
IRON
JACKSON
JASPER
JEFFERSON
JOHNSON
KNOX
LACLEDE
LAFAYEHE
LAWRENCE
LEWIS
LINCOLN
LINN
LIVINGSTON
MCDONALD
MACON
MADISON
MARIES
MARION
MERCER
MILLER
MISSISSIPPI
MONITEAU
MONRCE
MGNTGOMER
MORGAN
NEW \AAOS!D
NEWTON
NODAWAY
OREGON
OSAGE
OZARK
PEMISCCT
PERRY
PETTIS
PHELPS
PIKE
PLATTE
POLK
PULASKI
-------
MISSOURI—MONTANA—NEBRASKA
' / 1
173
i 75
177
1 70
ISi
:33
135
187
139
193
!95
197
109
20 i
203
205
207
209
2 i i
213
215
217
219
221
223
225
227
229.
CODE
510
STATE
PUTNAM
SAILS
RANDOLPH
SAY
REYNOLDS
RIP'.EY
ST CHARLtS
STCLA1R
ST FRANCOIS
ST LOUIS
STEGENEVIEVE
SALINE
SCHUYLER
SCOTLAND
SCOTT
SHANNON
SHELBY
STOOOARD
STONE
SULLIVAN
TANEY
TEXAS
VERNON
WARREN
WASHINGTON
WAYNE
WEBSTER
WORTH
WRIGHT
INDEPENDENT CITY
ST LOUIS CITY
NAME: MONTANA
STATE ABBREVIATION: MT
STATE
CODE
001
003
005
007
009
CODE: 30
COUNTY NAME
BEAVERHEAO
3IG HORN
BLAINE
BROADWATER
CARBON
01 1
013
015
017
019
021
023
025
027
029
031
033
035
037
039
041
043
045
047
049
051
053
055
057
059
061
063
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
079
081
083
085
087
089
091
093
095
097
099
101
103
105
107
109
111
113
CARTER
CASCADE
CHOUTEAU
CUSTER
DANIELS
DAWSON
DEER LODGE
FALLON
FERGUS
FLATHEAO
GALLATIN
GARFIELD
GLACIER
GOLDEN VALLEY
GRANITE
HILL
JEFFERSON
JUDITH BASIN
LAKE
LEWIS AND CLARK
LIBERTY
LINCOLN
MCCONE
MADISON
MEAGHER
MINERAL
MISSOUIA
MUSSELSHELL
PARK '
PETROLEUM
PHILLIPS
PONDERA
POWDER RIVER
POWELL
PRAIRIE
RAVALLI
RICHLAND
ROOSEVELT
ROSEBUD
SANDERS
SHERIDAN
SILVER BOW
STILLWATER
SWEET GRASS
TETON
TOOLE
TREASURE
VALLEY
WHEATLAND
WIBAUX
YELLOWSTONE
YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL
PARK-PART
STATE
STATE
STATE
CODE
001
003
005
007
009
01 1
013
Oi5
017
019
021
023
025
027
029
031
033
035
037
039
041
043
045
047 .
049
051
053
055
057
059
061
063
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
079
081
083
085
087
089
NAME: NEBRASKA
ABBREVIATION: NE
CODE: 31
COUNTY NAME
ADAMS
ANTELOPE
ARTHUR
BANNER
8LAINE
SCONE
BOX BUTTE
BOYD
BROWN
BUFFALO
BURT
BUTLER
CASS
CEDAR
CHASE
CHERRY
CHEYENNE
CLAY
CQLFAX
CUMING
CUSTER
DAKOTA
DAWES
DAWSON
DEUEL
DIXON
DODGE
DOUGLAS
DUNDY
FILLMORE
FRANKLIN
FRONTIER
FURNAS
GAGE
GARDEN
GARFIELD
GOSPER
GRANT
GREELEY
HALL
HAMILTON
HARLAN
HAYES
HITCHCOCK
HOLT
WQ
C-16
-------
NEBRASKA—NEVADA—NEW HAMPSHIRE—NEW JERSEY—NEW MEXICO
091 HOOKER
093 HOWARD
095 JEFFERSON
097 JOHNSON
099 KEARNEY
101 KEITH
103 KEYA PAH A
105 KIM8ALL
107 KNOX
109 LANCASTER
1 I 1 LINCOLN
113 LOGAN
115 LOUP
1 1 7 MCPHERSON
119 MADISON
121 MERRICK '
123 MORRILL
125 NANCE
127 NEMAHA
129 NUCKOLLS
131 OTOE
STATE NAME: NEVADA
STATE ABBREVIATION: NV
STATE CODE: 32
CODE COUNTY NAME
001 CHURCHILL
003 CLARK
005 DOUGLAS
007 EL.KO
009 ESMERALDA
on EUREKA.
013 HUMBOLDT
015 LANDER
017 LINCOLN
019 LYON
021 MINERAL
023 NYE
025'
027 PERSHING
029 STOREY
031 WASHOE
!33 PAWNEE 033 WHITE PINE
:35 ?ES.
-------
NEW
NEV/. Yo,a:|£>-N
-------
NORTH CAROLINA—NORTH DAKOTA—OHIO
121
!23
I 25
!27
129
131
133
135
137
139
141
'43
us
M7
U9
151
153
155
157
159
161
!63
165
167
159
171
173
175
177
179
181
183
135
137
189
191
193
195
197
199
STATE
STATE
•VMTCHEU
MONTGOMERY
MOORE
NASH
NEW HANOVER
NORTHAMPTON
ONSlOW
ORANGE
PAMLICO
PASQUOTANK
PENCER
PERGUIMANS
PERSON
PITT
POLK
RANDOLPH
RICHMOND
RO8ESON
ROCKINGHAM
3OWAN
RUTHERFORD
SAMPSON
SCOTLAND
STANLY
STOKES
SURRY
SWAIN
TRANSYLVANIA
TYRRELL
UNION
VANCE
WAKE
WARREN
WASHINGTON
WATAUGA
WAYNE
WILKES
WILSON
YAOKIN
YA.NCEY
NAME: NORTH DAKOTA
ABBREVIATION: NO
STATE CODE: 38
CODE
001
003
005
007
009
COUNTY NAME
ADAMS
3ARNES
BENSON
BILLINGS
BOTT1NEA.U
01 1
013
015
017
019
021
023
025
027
029
03!
033
035
037
039
04!
043
045
047
049
051
053
055
057
059 .
061
063
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
079
081
Afl->
'JoJ
085
087
089
091
093
095
097
099
101
103
105
BOWMAN
3URKE
3URLEIGH
CASS
CAVALIER
DICKEY
DIVIDE
DUNN
EDDY
5MMONS
FOSTER
GOLDEN VALLEY
GRAND FORKS
GRANT
GRIGGS
HETTINGER
KIDDER
LA MOURE
LOGAN
MCHENRY
MCINTOSH
V.CKENZis
MCLEAN
MERCER
MORTON
MOUNTRAIL
NELSON
OLIVER
PEMBINA
PIERCE
RAMSEY
RANSOM
RENVILLE
RlCHLAND
ROLETTE
SARGENT
SHERIDAN
SIOUX
SLOPE
STARK
STEELE
STUTSMAN
TOWNER
TRAILL
WALSH
WARD
WELLS
WILLIAMS
STATE
STATE
NAME: OHIO
ABBREVIATION: OH
STATE CODE: 39
CODE
00 1
003
005
007
009
01 i
013
OI5
OI7
OI9
021
023
025
027
029
031
033
035
037
039
041
043
045
047
049
051
053
055
057
059
061
DAT
UO J
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
079
081
083
085
087
089
WQ
C-19
COUNTY NAME
ADAMS
ALLEN
ASHLAND
ASHTASULA
ATHENS
AUGLAIZE
3ELMONT
BROWN
SUTLER
CARROLL
CHAMPAIGN
CLARK
CLERMONT
CLINTON
COLUM8IANA
COSHOCTD.N
CRAWFORD
CUYAHOGA
DARKE
DEFIANCE
DELAWARE
ERIE
FAIRFIELD
FAYETTE
FRANKLIN
FULTON
GALLIA
GcAUGA
GREENE
GUERNSEY
HAMILTON
HANCOCK
HARDIN
HARRISON
HENRY
HIGHLAND
HOCKING
HOLMES
HURON
JACKSON
JEFFERSON
KNOX
LAKE
LAWRENCE
LICKING
-------
O KI AH Q ,'M A"£- Q&E G O N
0<5I
092
095
097
099
101
103
T05
;07
109
i ; i
1 13
! 15
I 17
1 19
121
123
125
127
129
131
133
135
137
139
! - 1
142
145
147
149
151
153
155
157
159
161
163
165
167
169
171
!73
!75
STATE
LOGAN
LGRAIN
LUCAS
MADISON
MAHONING
MARION
MEDINA
MEiGS
MERCER
MIAMI
MONROE
MONTGOMERY
MORGAN
MORROW
MUSKINGUM
NO8LE
OTTAWA
PAULDING
PERRY
PICKAWAY
PIKE
PORTAGE
1 PRE3LE
PUTNAM
aiCHLANO
POSS
SANOUSKY
SCiOTO
SENECA
SHELBY
STARK
SUMMIT
TRUMBULL
TUSCARAWAS
UNION
VAN WERT
V1NTON
WARREN
WASHINGTON
WAYNE
WILLIAMS
WOOD
WYANDOT
NAME: OKLAHOMA
STATE ABBREVIATION: OK
STATE
CODE
001
003
005
007
009
CODE: 40
COUNTY NAME
ADAIR
ALFALFA
ATOKA
BEAVER
BECKHAM
0! 1
013
015
017
019
021
023
025
027
029
031
033
035
037
039
041
043
045
047
049
051
053
055
057
059
061
063
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
079
081
083
085
087
089
091
093
095
097
099
101
103
105
107
109
111
1 13
i 15
1 17
1 19
BLAiNE
BRYAN
CADOO
CANADIAN
CARTER
CHEROKEE
CHOCTAW
CMASRON
CLEVELAND
COAL
COMANCHE
COTTON
CRAIG
CREEK
CUSTER
DELAWARE
OEWEY
ELLIS
GARFIELD
GARVIN
GRADY
GRANT
GREER
HARMON
HARPER
HASKELL
HUGHES
JACKSON
JEFFERSON
JOHNSTON
KAY
KINGFISHER
K1GWA
LAT1MER
LE FLCRE
LINCOLN
LOGAN
LOVE
MCCLAIN
MCCURTAIN
MC1NTOSH
MAJOR
MARSHALL
MAYES
MURRAY
MUSKOGEE
NOBLE
NOWATA
OKFUSKEE
OKLAHOMA
OKMULGEE
OSAGE
OTTAWA
PAWNEE
PAYNE
MQ
020
12'
123
125
127
!29
131
133
•>35
137
139
! 41
143
145
147
149
151
153
STATE
STATE
STATE
CODE
OCI
003
005
007
009
01 1
013
015
017
019
02!
023
025
027
029
031
033
035
037
039
•041
043
045
047
049
P'TTSBURG
?ONTCTOC
PCTTAWATCAME
PUSHMATAHA
ROGER MILLS
ROGERS
SEMINOLE
SECCOYAH
STEPHENS
TEXAS
TILLMAN
TULSA
WAGONER
WASHINGTON
WASHlTA
WOODS
WOODWARD
NAME: OREGON
ABBREVIATION: OR
CODE: 41
COUNTY NAME
BAKER
BENTON
CLACKA/VAS
ClATSOP
COLUMBIA
•ccos
CROOK
CURRY
DESCHUTES
DOUGLAS
G:LLIAM
GRANT
HARNEY
HOOD RIVER
JACKSON
JEFFERSON
JOSEPHINE
KLAMATH
LAKE
LANE
LINCOLN
LiNN
MALHEUR
MARION
MORROW
-------
OREGON—PENNSYLVANIA—RHODE ISLAND—SOUTH CAROLINA
051
033
055
057
059
061
063
065
067
06?
07!
STATE
MULTNOMAH
POLK
SHERMAN
TILLAMCOK
UMATI'.LA
UNION
WALLOW A
WASCO
WASHINGTON
WHEELER
YAMHILL
NAME: PENNSYLVANIA
STATE ABBREVIATION: PA
STATE CODE: 42
CODE
00'
003
005
007'
009
01 i
013
015
0'7
019
02!
023
025
027
029
031
033
035
037
039
041
043
045
047
049
051
053
055
057
059
COUNTY NAME
061
063
065
067
06-
07i
073
075
077
079
081
033
085
087
nso
\JO7
091
093
095
097
099
101
103
105
107
109
ADA:V:S
ALLEGHENY
ARMSTRONG
BEAVER
BEDFORD
BERKS
3LAIR
BRADFORD
BUCKS
BUTLER
CAMBRIA
CAMERON
CARBON
CENTRE
CHESTER
CLARION
CLEARFIELO
CLINTON
COLUMBIA
CRAWFORD
CUMBERLAND
DAUPHIN
DELAWARE
ELK
ERIE
FAYETTE
FOREST
FRANKLIN
FULTON
GREENE
1 i i
1 13
1 IS
1 17
1 19
121
123
125
127
!29
131
133
STATE
STATE
STATE
CODE
001
003
005
007
009
HUNTINGDON STATE
INDIANA
JEFFERSON ST^TE
JUNIATA
LACKAWANN A
1 STATE
LANCASTER
LAWRENCE
CODE
LEBANON
LEHIGH 1 00;
LUZERNE
003
005
LYCOMING I OQ7
MCKEAN
009
MERCER
MIFFLIN -,; ;
MON ROE •' ~ • "
MONTGOMERY
MONTOUR
NORTHAMPTON
NORTHUMBERLAND
PERRY
PHILADELPHIA
PIKE
POTTER
SCHUYLKILL
SNYDER
SOMERSET
SULLIVAN
SUSQUEHANNA
TIOGA
UNION
VENANGO
WARREN
WASHINGTON
u: J
015
Oi9
02!
023
C25
027
029
031
033
035
037
041
043
045
047
049
WAYNE 05 i
WESTMORELAND is?
WYOMING
YORK
NAME: RHODE ISLAND
ABBREVIATION: Rl
CODE: 44
COUNTY NAME
BRISTOL
KENT
NEWPORT
PROVIDENCE
WASHINGTON
055
057
055
061
063
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
079
031
033
085
087
039
091
NAME: SOUT
ABBREVIATION:
CODE:
COUNTY NA,
.-oBEViLl:
AIKEM
ALLENQALE
ANDERSON
BAMBERG
3ARNWE-L
BEAUFORT
BERKELEY
CALHOL.N
CHARLESTON
CHEROKEE
CHESTER
CHESTESF'ELD
CLARENDON
COLLETON
DA.RLING'CN
DILLON
=OGEF:ELC
FAiRFlELO
FLORENCE
GEORGETOWN
GREENVILLE
GREENWOOD
rvAMPTON
HCRRY
'A^PER
" w
KERSHAW
LANCASTER
LAURENS
LEE
LEXINGTON
•ViCCOfi'.MCK
MARION
MARLBORO
,NEW3ERRV
OCONEE
CRANGE3URG
.-'CK6NS
R:CHLAND
SALUDA
S?ARTANSl!RG
SUMTER
'jNlON
WIL-JAMS8URG
YORK
sc
45
C-21
-------
SOUTH DAKOTA—TENNESSEE
STATE
NAME: SOUTH DAKOTA
STATE ABBREVIATION: SO
STATE
CODE
003
005
007
009
01 1
013
015
017
019
021
023
025
027
029
031
033
035
037
039
041
043
045
047
049
05!
053
055
057
059
061
063
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
079
081
083
085
087
089
09!
CODE: 46
COUNTY NAME
AURORA
BEADLE
BENNETT
SON HOMME
BLOCKINGS
SROWN
8RULE
BUFFALO
BUTTE
CAMPBELL
CHARLES MIX
CLARK
CLAY
CCOINGTON
CORSON
CUSTER
DAVISON
OAY
OEUEL
OEWEY
DOUGLAS
EDMUNDS
FALL RIVER
FAULK
GRANT
GREGORY
HAAKON
HAMLIN
HAND
HANSON
HARDING
HUGHES
HUTC-ilNSCN
HYDE
JACKSON
JERAULD
JONES
KINGSBURY
LAKE
LAWRENCE
LINCOLN
LYMAN
MCCOOK
MCPHERSON
MARSHALL
093
095
097
099
101
103
105
107
109
1 1 1
1 13
1 15
1 17
1 19
121
123
125
127
129
131
135
137
STATE
MEADE
MELLETTE
MINER
MINNEHA.HA
MOODY
PENNINGTON
PERKINS
POTTER
ROBERTS
SANBORN
SHANNON
SPINK
STANLEY
SULLY
TODO
TRIPP
TURNER
UNION
WALWORTH
WASHABAUGH
YANKTON
ZIEBACH
NAME: TENNESSEE
STATE ABBREVIATION: TN
STATE
CODE
00 i
003
005
007
009
Oil
013
015
017
019
02!
023
025
027
029
03 i
033
035
037
039
CODE: 47
COUNTY NAME
ANDERSON
BEDFORD
8ENTON
BLEDSOE
BLOUNT
BRADLEY
CAMPBELL
CANNON
CARROLL
CARTER
CHEATHAM
CHESTER
CLAI8ORNE
CLAY . . •
COCKE
COFFEE
CROCKETT
CUMBERLAND
DAVIDSON
OECATUR
041
043
045
047
049
051
053
055
057
059
061
063
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
079
081
083
085
087
089
09!
093
095
097
099
10!
103
105
107
!09
1 i 1
i 13
1 15
1 17
1 19
1 2 1
123
125
127
129
131
133
135
!37
139
141
143
145
147
149
WQ
C-22
DE KAL8
DICKSON-
OYER
FAYETTE '
FEN'RESS
FRANKLIN
GIBSON
GiLES
GRAINGER
GREENE
GRUNDY
HAMBLEN
HAMILTON
HANCOCK
HARDEMAN
HARDIN
HAWKINS
HAYWOCO
HENDERSON
HENRY
HICKMAN
HOUSTON
HUMPHREYS
JACKSON
JEFFERSON
jOHNSON
KNOX
LAKE
LAUDERDALE
LAWRENCE
LEWIS
LINCOLN
LOUDON
MCMINN
MCNAIRY
MACON
MADISON
MARION
.MARSHALL
MAURY
MEIGS
MONROE
MONTGOMERY
MOORE
• MORGAN
O8ION
OVERTON
PERRY
PlCKETT
POLK
PUTNAM
RHEA
ROANE
ROBERTSON
RUTHERFORD
-------
TENNESSEE—TEXAS
' 5 i
: 53
' 5 ^
5 7
' 55
i.6:
•'63
; ;5
'67
'63
!7'
73
75
77
79
81
S3
35
137
,39
STATE
STATE
STATE
CODE
00:
002
005
007
009
01 i
013
015
017
019
021
023
025
027
029
031
033
035
037
039
•04!
043
0.15
047
049
SCjTT
SEGUATCHiE
SeV'EV
SHELBY
SMITH
STEWART
SULLIVAN
SuMNER
T ! P T 3 N
TROUSDALE
iJNlCOl
UNION
VAN 3UREN
WARREN
WASHINGTON
WAYNE
WEAKLEY
W"lTE
WILLIAMSON
WILSON
NAME: TEXAS
ABBREVIATION: TX
CODE: 48
COUNTY NAME
ANDERSON
ANDREWS
ANGELINA
ARANSA.S
ARCHER
ARMSTRONG
ATASCOSA
AUSTIN
BAILEY
3ANDERA
3ASTRCP
BAYLOR
3EE
3EU
2EXAR
3LANCO
BORDEN
3OSOUE
3OWIE
3RAZORIA
BRAZOS
BREWSTER
3RISCOE
3ROOKS
BROWN
051
053
055
057
059
06 i
063
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
079
031
083
085
087
089
091
093
095
097
099
101
103
105
107
109
1 1 1
1 13
1 15
i 17
1 19
121
123
125
127
129
131
133
135
137
139
14!
143
145
147
149
!SI
153
155
157
159
3URLESON
3URNET
CAIDWELL
CALHOUN
CALLAHAN
CAMERON
CAMP
CARSON
CASS
CASTRO
CHAMBERS
CHEROKEE
CHILORESS
CLAY
COCHRAN
COKE
COLEMAN
COLLIN
COLLINGSWORTH
COLORADO
COMAL
COMANCHE
CONCHO
COOKE
CCRVELL
COTTLE
C.RANE
CROCKETT
C30SBY
C'JLBERSON
DALLAM
DALLAS
DAWSON
DEAF SMITH
DELTA
DENTON
OE WITT
DICKENS
DIMMIT
DONLEY
OUVAL
EASTLAND
ECTOR
EDWARDS
ELLIS
EL PASO
ERATH
FALLS
FANNIN
FAYETTE
FISHER
FLOYD
FOARD
FORT 3ENO
FRANKLIN
WQ
C-23
i A i
:63
:65
' 67
'59
:?:
• "3
; 75
77
i 7?
' 3 '
133
• i5
1 37
'39
;9i
. ^*
! Y J
195
197
:?9
20;
203
205
207
2CC
21 i
2!?
2'5
217
2:9
221
223
'^25
^ " 7
229
23:
233 .
235
237
239
24!
243
245
247
249
25)
253
255
257
259
261
263
265
267
269
FREESTONE
FRiC
OAiNES
3A. .'ES'ON
GAR;A
GILLE5P!;
C-LASSCDCK
GOLiAO
— GONZALES
GRAY
GRAYSON
GREGG
GRi.V.ES
GCADALUPE
HAL;
fiALL
HAMILTON
HANSFCRD
HARCEMAN
rfASC'N
HARRIS
HARRISON
UA5Ti_JV
HAS
-------
TEXAS—UTAH
27i
273
275
277
279
231
283
265
287
239
291
293
295
297
299
301
303
305
307
309
31 1
313
315
317
3i9
321
323
325
327
329
331
333
335
337
339
341
343
345
347
349
351
353
355
357
359
361
363
365
367
369
37]
373
375
377
379
KINNEY
KLE3ERG
KNOX
LAMAR
LAMB
LAMPASAS
LA SAILS
LAVACA
LEE
l:CN
LIBERTY
LIMESTONE
LiPSCOMB
LIVE OAK
LLANO
LOVING
LUBBGCK
LYNN
MCCULLOCH
MCLENNAN
MCMULLEN
MADISON
MARION
MARTIN
MASON
MATAGORDA
MAVERICK
MEDINA
MENARD
MIDLAND
Ml LAM
MILLS
MITCHELL
MONTAGUE
MONTGOMERY
MOORE
MORRIS
MOTLEY
NACOGDOCHES
NAVARRO
NEWTON
NOLAN
NUECES
vOCHILTREE
'OLOHAM
ORANGE
PALO PINTO
PANOLA
PARKER
PAR.WER
PECOS
POLK
POTTER
PRESIDIO
RAINS
381
333
385
387
389
391
393
395
397
399
401
403
405
407
409
41 1
413
415
417
419
421
423
425
427
429
431
433
435
437
439
441
443
445
447
449
451
453
455
457
459
461
463
465
467
469
471
4/3
475
477
479
481
483
485
487
4S9
RANDALL
REAGAN
REAL
RED RIVES
REEVES
RE.-UGIO
SOSESTS
ROBERTSON
ROCKWALL
RUNNELS
RUSK
SA8INE
SAN AUGUSTINE
SAN JACINTO
SAN PATRICIO
SAN SABA
SCHLEICHER
SCURRY
SHACKELFORD
SHELBY
SHERMAN
SMITH
SOMERVELL
STARR
STEPHENS
STERLING
STONEWALL
SUTTON
SWISHER
TARRANT
TAYLOR
TERRELL
TERRY
THROCKMORTON
TITUS
TOM GREEN
TRAVIS
TRINITY
TYLER
UPSHUR
UPTON
UVAlDE
VAL VERDE
VAN ZANDT
VICTORIA
WALKER
WALLER
WARD
WASHINGTON
WEBB
WHARTON
WHEELER
WICHITA
WILBARGER
WILLACY
491
493
495
J97
j90
501
503
505
507
STATE
STATE
STATE
CODE
001
003
005
007
009
Oil
013
015
017
019
021
023
025
027
029
031
033
035
037
039
041
043
045
047
049
051
053
055
057
WQ
C-2U
WILLIAMSON
••/••! LSON
'..'INKLES
•VISE
WOOD
Y OAKUM
YOUNG
ZAPATA
ZAVALA
NAME: UTAH
ABBREVIATION: UT
CODE: 49
COUNTY NAME
SEAVER
BOX ELDER
CACHE
CARBON .
OAGGETT
DAVIS
OUCHE5NE
EMERY
GARFiELD
GRAND
IRON
JUA6
KANE
MiLLARD
MORGAN
PIUTE
RICH
SALT LAKE
SAN JUAN
SANPETE
SEVIER
SUMMIT
TOOELE
UINTAH
UTAH
WASATCH
WASHINGTON
WAYNE
WEBES
-------
VERMONT—VIRGINIA
STATE NAME: VERMONT
STATE ABBREVIATION. VT
STATE CODE: 50
CODE COUNTY NAME
001 ADOISON
003 BENNINGTON
005 CALEDONIA
007 CHITTENDEN
009 ESSEX
Oil FRANKLIN
013 GRAND ISLE
015 LA/WOILLE
017 ORANGE
019 ORLEANS
021 RUTLAND
023 WASHINGTON
025 WINDHAM
027 WINDSOR
STATE NAME: VIRGINIA
STATE ABBREVIATION: VA
STATE CODE: 51
CODE COUNTY NAME -
001 ACCOMACK
003 AL8EMARLE
005 ALLEGHA.NY
007 AMELIA
009 AMHERST
Oil APPOMATTOX
013 ARLINGTON
015 AUGUSTA
017 BATH
019 BEDFORD
021 3LANO
023 SOTETOURT
025 BRUNSWICK
027 BUCHANAN
029 BUCKINGHAM
031 CAMPBELL
033 CAROLINE
035 CARROLL
036 CHARLES CITY
037 CHARLOTTE
041 CHESTERFIELD
043 CLARKE
045 CRAIG
047 CULPEPER
049 CUMBERLAND
05!
053
057
059
061
063
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
079
081
083
085
087
089
091
093
095
097
099
101
103
!05
107
109
1 11
1 13
1 15
1 17
1 19
121
•123 '
125
127
131
!33
135
137
139
141
143
145
147
149
153
155
157
159
161
163
165
DlCKENSON
DINWIDDIE
ESSEX
167
169
171
FAIRFAX ;/3
FAUO'JIER
FLOYD
FlUVANNA
FRANKLIN
FREDERICK
GILES
GLOUCESTER
GCOCHLANO
GRAYSON
GREENE
GREENSVILLE
HALIFAX
HANOVER
HENRICO
HENRY
HIGHLAND
ISLE OF WIGHT
JAMES CITY
KING AND OUEEN
KING GEORGE
KING WILLIAM
LANCASTER
LEE
LOUOOUN
LOUISA
LUNENBURG
MADISON
MATHEWS
MECKLENBURG
MIDDLESEX
MONTGOMERY
NELSON
NEW KENT
NORTHAMPTON
NORTHUMBERLAND
NOTTOWAY
ORANGE
PAGE
PATRICK
PITTSYLVANIA
POWHATAN
PRINCE EDWARD
PRINCE GEORGE
PRINCE WILLIAM
PULASKI
RAPPAHANNOCK
RICHMOND
ROANOKE
ROCKBRIDGE
ROCKINGHAM
175
177
179
!8i
133
135
137
191
!93
195
197
199
C006
510
SIS'
520
530
540
550
560
570
580
590
595
600
610
620
630
640
650
660
670
673
680
690
'695
700
710
720
730
740
750
760
770
775
780
790
800
810
WQ
C-25
RUSSELL
SCOTT
SHENANDCAH
' SMYTH
SOUTHAMPTON
SPOTSYLVANIA
STAFFORD
SURRY
SUSSEX
TAZEWELL
WARREN
WASHINGTON
WESTMORELAND
WISE
WYTHE
YORK
INDEPENDENT CITIES
ALEXANDRIA
BEDFORD
BRISTOL
BUENA VISTA
CHARLOTTESVILLE
CHESAPEAKE
CUFTCN FORGE
COLONIAL HEIGHTS
COVINGTON
DANVILLE .
EMPORIA
FAIRFAX
FALLS CHURCH
FRANKLIN
FREOERICKS3URG
GALAX
HAMPTON
HARRISON8URG
HOPEWELL
LEXINGTON
LYNCH3URG
MARTINSVILLE
NANSEMOND
NEWPORT NEWS
NORFOLK
NORTON
PETERSBURG
PORTSMOUTH
RADFORO
RICHMOND '
ROANOKE
SALEM
SOUTH BOSTON
STAUNTCN
SUFFOLK
VIRGINIA 3EACH
-------
r-WASHINGTON—WEST VIRGINIA—WISCONSIN
320 WAYNESBORO
330 WILLIAMS8URG
340 WINCHESTER
5:5' 3eafora. indecencer.T Cirv. Revised
C 1 p c i. _ 1 , „ „ i e IC7O
'. JO I , June ' J. lv/b.
Seafood. 'orTieriy port or Bedford Counry,
-.as been incorporated as an independent
:.ty.
695' Noniemond, Independent City, Re-
vised FIPS 6-2. 1973 September 15. Formerly
Nonwmond County (Code 123).
STATE NAME: WASHINGTON
STATE ABBREVIATION: WA
STATE CODE: S3
CODE COUNTY NAME
00 1 ADAMS
003 ASOTIN
005 BENTON
007 CHELAN
009 CLALLAM
0!! CLARK
013 COLUMBIA
015 COWLITZ
017 DOUGLAS
Oi9 FERRY
021 FRANKLIN
023 GARFIELD
025 GRANT
027 GRAYS HARBOR
029 ISLAND
031 JEFFERSON
033 KING
035 KITSAP
037 KITTITAS
039 KLICKITAT
O-il LEWIS
043 LINCOLN
0^5 MASON
047 . OKANOGAN
049 PACIFIC
051 PENDOREILLE
053 PIERCE
055 SAN JUAN
057 SKAGIT
059 SKAMANIA
061 SNCHOMISH
063 SPOKANE
065 STEVENS
067 THURSTON
069 WAHKIAKUM
071
073
075
077
STATE
STATE
STATE
CODE
001
Afn
UUJ
005
007
009
01 1
013
015
017
019
021
023
025
027
029
031
033
035
037
039
041
043
045
047
049
051
053
055
057
, 059
061
063
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
079
WALLA WALLA-
WHATCOM
WHITMAN
YAKIMA
NAME: WEST VIRGINIA
ABBREVIATION: WV
CODE: 54
COUNTY NAME
3AR8CUR
QCOk'Cl CV
OCKNCLC "
BOONE
BRAXTCN
BROOKE
CABELL
CALHOUN
CLAY
DOOORIDGE
FAYETTE
GILMER
GRANT
GREENBRIER
HAMPSHIRE
HANCOCK
HARDY
HARRISON
JACKSON
JEFFERSON
KANAWHA
LEWIS
LINCOLN
LOGAN
MCDOWELL
MARION
MARSHALL
MASON
MERCER
MINERAL
MINGO
MONONGALIA
MONROE
MORGAN
' NICHOLAS
OHIO
PENDLETON
PLEASANTS
POCAHONTAS
PRESTON
PUTNAM
08!
083
085
087
089
091
093
095
097
099
10!
103
105
107
109
STATE
STATE
RALEIGH
RANDOLPH
RITCHIE
ROANE
SUMMERS
TAYLOR
TUCKER
TYLER
UPSHUR
WAYNE
WEBSTER
WETZEL
W!RT
WOOD
WYOMING
NAME: WISCONSIN
ABBREVIATION: Wl
STATE CODE: 55
CODE
001
003
005
007
009
Oil
013
015
017
019
021
023
025
027
029
031
033
035
037
039
041
043
045
047
049
051
053
055
057
059
WQ
C-26
COUNTY NAME
ADAMS
ASHLAND
BARRON
BAYFIELO
BROWN
BUFFALO
BURNETT
CALUMET
CHIPPF.WA
CLARK
COLUMBIA
CRAWFORD
DANE
DODGE
DOOR
DOUGLAS
DUNN
EAU CLAIRE
FLORENCE
FOND DU LAC
FOREST
GRANT
GREEN
GREEN LAKE
IOWA
IRON
JACKSON
. JEFFERSON
JUNEAU
KENOSHA
-------
WISCONSIN—WYOMING
061
063
065
067
OflS
07!
073
075
077
073
079
031
033
035
087
039
09 i
093
095
097
099
101
103
105
•' :o/
109
1 1 1
i 13
' 15
•117
KEWAUNEE
LACROSSE
LAFAYETTE
LAN GLADE
LINCOLN
MANITOWOC
MARATHON
MARINETTE
MARQUETTE
M'ENCMINEE
MILWAUKEE
.MONROE
OCONTO
GNEiCA
OuTAGAMIE
GZAUKEE
PEPIN
PIERCE
POLK
PORTAGE
PRICE
SACINE
RlCHLANO
SOCK
RUSK
S" CROIX
SAUK
SAWYER
SHAWANO
SHEBOYGAN
110 TAYLOR
12! TREMPEALEAU
123 VERNCN
125 VI LAS
!27 WALWORTH
i29 WASHBURN
13! WASHINGTON
133 WALJKESHA
135 WALJPACA
'37 WAUSHARA
•
139 WINNEBAGO
Ul WOOD
01 i
013
0!5
017
0'-9
021
023
025
027
029
03!
033
035
037
039
041
STATE NAME: WYOMING
STATE ABBREVIATION: WY
STATE CODE: 56
i /"l^fNC /"/"M IklTV VI A tlC
0^3
0^5
CROOK
rREWCNT
GOSKEN
HOT SPRINGS
JOHNSON
LARAMIE
LINCOLN
NATRONA
MOBRARA
PARK
PLATTE
SHERIDAN
SUBLE7"
SWEETV/ATER
' TETON
UINTA
WASHAKiE
WES'ON
001
003
005
007
009
ALBANY
BlG HORN
CAMPBELL
CARBON
CONVERSE
WQ
C-27
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART
WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
APPENDIX
D
BASIN CODES
;Basic Retrieval; Second Edition!
-------
APPENDIX D: BASIN CODES
This appendix contains complete listings of the major and minor
river basin codes which EPA has defined for the waterways within
the United States. There are 23 major river basins defined
within the U.S., with a variable number of minor basins defined
within each major basin. The listings are in order by major
basin code, and minor basin code within major basin.
A complete listing of these basin codes can also be obtained by
listing the STORET help data set named BASIN:CODES.
Major River Basins
CODE NAME
01 NORTHEAST
02 NORTH ATLANTIC
03 SOUTHEAST
04 TENNESSEE RIVER
05 OHIO RIVER
06 LAKE ERIE
07 . UPPER MISSISSIPPI RIVER
08 LAKE MICHIGAN
09 MISSOURI RIVER
10 SOUTH CENTRAL LOWER MISSISSIPPI RIVER
11 COLORADO RIVER
12 WESTERN GULF
13 PACIFIC NORTHWEST
14 CALIFORNIA
15 GREAT BASIN
16 ALASKA
17 HAWAII
18 PUERTO RICO
19 VIRGIN ISLANDS
20 OCEANIA
21 LAKE HURON
22 LAKE SUPERIOR
23 HUDSON BAY
Minor River Basins
Listings of the minor river basins appear in the following pages,
in major river basin sequence.
WQ
D-l
-------
01 NE NORTHEAST
01 QUINNIPIAC RIVER & WESTERN CONN COASTAL.
02 HOUSATONIC RIVER
03 PAWCATUCK RIVER & EASTERN CONN COASTAL
04 CONNECTICUT RIVER
05 THAMES RIVER
06 NARRAGANSETT BAY
OS MASSACHUSETTS COASTAL
09 . MERRIMACK RIVER
10 PISCATAQUA RIVER & NEW HAMPSHIRE COASTAL
12 SACO RIVER & SOUTH MAINE COASTAL
14 PRESUMPSCOT RIVER AND CASCO BAY
15 ANDROSCOGGIN RIVER
16 KENNEBEC AND SHEEPSCOT RIVERS
17 PENOBSCOT RIVER
18 NORTH MAINE COASTAL
19 ST. CROIX RIVER
20 ST. JOHNS RIVER
21 LAKE MEMPHREMAGOG
24 LAKE CHAMPLAIN
25 ST. LAWRENCE RIVER
26 LAKE ONTARIO SHRE - OSWEGO RIVER TO
ST. LAWRENCE RIVER
27 NIAGARA RIVER
23 GENESEE RIVER
29 OSWEGO RIVER
30 MOHAWK RIVER
31 UPPER HUDSON RIVER
32 MIDDLE HUDSON RIVER
33 LOWER HUDSON-NEW YORK METROPOLITAN AREA
34 NEW JERSEY COAST
35 LAKE ERIE SHORE & MINOR TRIBUTARIES
36 LAKE ONTARIO SHORE - GENESEE R - OSWEGO R
37 LAKE ONTARIO SHORE - NIAGARA R - GENESEE R
38 ST. REGIS RIVER
02 NA NORTH ATLANTIC
03 DELAWARE RIVER - ZONE 1
04 DELAWARE RIVER - LEHIGH
05 DELAWARE RIVER - SCHUYLKILL
06 DELAWARE RIVER - ZONE 2
07 DELAWARE RIVER - ZONE 3
08 DELAWARE RIVER - ZONE 4
12 SUSQUEHANNA RIVER
13 UPPER CHESAPEAKE BAY & MD-DEL COASTAL DEL-MARVA
14 POTOMAC RIVER
15 RAPPAHANNOCK AND YORK RIVERS - 'VIRGINIA COAST
16 JAMES RIVER
WQ
D-2
-------
03 SE SOUTHEAST
01 CHOWAN RIVER
02 ROANOKE RIVER
03 TAR RIVER
04 NEUSE RIVER
05 NORTH CAROLINA COASTAL AREA
06 CAPE FEAR RIVER
07 , YADKIN-PEE DEE-LOWER PEE DEE RIVER
08 CATAWBA-WATEREE,CONGAREE,SANTEE-COOPER
RESERVOIR
09 EDISTO-COMBAHEE RIVER
13 SAVANNAH RIVER
14 OGEECHEE RIVER
15 OCOMEE RIVER
16 OCOMULGEE RIVER
17- ALTAMAHA RIVER
18 SATILLA RIVER
19 ST. MARYS-NASSAU RIVER
20 ST. JOHNS RIVER
21 SUWANNEE RIVER
22 OCHLOCKONEE-ST. MARKS RIVER
23 WITHLACOCCHEE RIVER
24 TAMPA BAY AREA
25 PEACE RIVER
26 KISSIMMEE RIVER
27 FLORIDA EAST COASTAL AREA
28 LOWER FLORIDA AREA
29 FLINT .RIVER
30 CHATTACHOOCHEE RIVER
31 APALACHICOLA RIVER
32 CHOCTAWHATCHEE RIVER
33 PERDIDO-ESCAMBIA RIVER
34 TALLAPOOSA RIVER
35 COOSA RIVER
36 CAHABA RIVER
37 ALABAMA RIVER
38 UPPER TOMBIGBEE RIVER
39 WARRIOR RIVER
40 LOWER TOMBIGBEE RIVER
41 MOBILE BAY AREA
42 PASACAGOULA RIVER
43 PEARL RIVER
WQ
D-3
-------
04 TR TENNESSEE RIVER
•01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
05 OR OHIO RIVER
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
06 LE LAKE ERIE
01
02
03
04
05
06
11
12
13
14
15
CLINCH RIVER
HOLSTON RIVER
FRENCH BROAD RIVER
LITTLE TENNESSEE RIVER
HIWASSEE RIVER
ELK RIVER
DUCK RIVER
TENNESSEE RIVER - MAIN STEM & MINOR TRIES
ALLEGHENY RIVER
MONONGAHELA RIVER
BEAVER RIVER
MUSKINGUM RIVER
LITTLE KANAWHA RIVER
HOCKING RIVER
KANAWHA RIVER
GUYANBOT RIVER
BIG SANDY RIVER
SCIOTO RIVER
LITTLE MIAMI RIVER
LICKING RIVER
MIAMI RIVER
KENTUCKY RIVER
SALT RIVER
GREEN RIVER
WABASH RIVER
EAST FORK WHITE RIVER. ... -
WEST FORK WHITE RIVER
CUMBERLAND RIVER
OHIO RIVER - MAIN STEM & MINOR TRIES
MAUMEE RIVER
SANDUSKY RIVER
CUYAHOGA RIVER
LAKE ERIE SHORE
LAKE ERIE SHORE
LAKE ERIE SHORE
RAISIN
HURON
DETROIT
CLINTON
ST. CLAIR
MAUMEE R TO SANDUSKY R
SANDUSKY R TO CUYAHOGA R
CUYAHOGA R TO N.Y. STATE LIN;
WQ
D-4
-------
07 UM UPPER MISSISSIPPI RIVER
03 UPPER.PORTION UPPER MISSISSIPPI RIVER
04 MINNESOTA RIVER
05 ST. CROIX
06 LOWER PORTION UPPER MISSISSIPPI RIVER
07 WISCONSIN RIVER
08 MISSISSIPPI-WAPSIPINICO.N & TRIBUTARIES
09 ROCK RIVER
10 MISSISSIPPI-IOWA-CEDAR RIVERS
11 MISSISSIPPI-DES MOINES-SKUNK RIVERS
12 MISSISSIPPI-SALT RIVERS
13 CHICAGO-CALUMET RES.-DES PLAINES RIVER
15 KANKAKEE RIVER
16 FOX RIVER
17 ILLINOIS RIVER'
18 MISSISSIPPI-ST. LOUIS AREA
19 MERAMEC RIVER
20 KASKASKIA RIVER
21 BIG MUDDY RIVER
22 MISSISSIPPI RIVER-CAPE GIRARDEAU AREA
08 LM LAKE MICHIGAN
• 03' MENOMINEE
04 CEDAR
05 FORD
06 ESCANABA
07 RAPID
08 WHITEFISH
09 STURGEON
10 FISHDAM
11 MANISTIQUE
12 MILLECOQUINS
13 BEAR
14 PINE
15 ELK
16 BOARDMAN
17 PLATTE
18 BETSIE
19 MANISTEE
20 BIG SABLE
21 PERE MARQUETTE
22 PENTWATER
23 WHITE
24 GREEN BAY - WESTERN SHORE
25 FOX RIVER-WOLF CREEK
26 LAKE MICHIGAN - WESTERN SHORE
27 . MUSKEGON
28 GRAND
29 BLACK RIVER AT LAKE MACATAWA
30 KALAMAZOO
WQ
D-5
-------
31 BLACK RIVER AT SOUTH HAVEN
32 ST. JOSEPH RIVER
33 GALIEN
49 CALUMET-BURNS DITCH COMPLEX
09 MR MISSOURI RIVER
01 UPPER MISSOUR R - HEADWATERS TO MILK RIVER
02 YELLOWSTONE RIVER
03 N CENTRAL MISSOURI R - MILK R TO SPRING CREEK
04 S CENTRAL MISSOURI R - SPRING CREEK TO NIOBRARA R
05 NIOBRARA RIVER
06 JAMES RIVER
07 BIG SIOUX RIVER
08 LOWER PLATTE R FROM NORTH PLATTE
09 NORTH PLATTE RIVER
10 SOUTH PLATTE RIVER
11 KANSAS RIVER
12 LOWER MISSOURI R FROM NIOBRARA R
13 GRAND-CHARITON RIVERS
14 OSAGE-GASCONADE RIVERS
10 SM SOUTH CENTRAL LOWER MISSISSIPPI RIVER
01 • UPPER ARKANSAS R ABOVE KANSAS-COLORADO STATE LINE
02 ARKANSAS R - KANSAS-COLORADO STATE LINE TO TULSA
03 VERDIGRIS RIVER
04 GRAND NEOSHO RIVER
05 WHITE RIVER
06 LOWER MISSISSIPPI R - CAIRO. TO HELENA ARK
07 CIMARRON R-IVER-NEX MEX-COLO-KANSAS-OKLA- - -
08 NORTH CANADIAN RIVER
09 ARKANSAS RIVER - TULSA TO VAN BUREN
10 ARKANSAS RIVER - VAN BUREN TO MOUTH
11 LOWER MISSISSIPPI RIVER-YAZOO RIVER
12 SOUTH CANADIAN RIVER - ABOVE TEX-OKLA STATE LINE
13 SOUTH CANADIAN RIVER - BELOW TEX-OKLA STATE LINE
14 WASHITA RIVER
15 UPPER RED RIVER - ABOVE DENISON
16 LOWER RED RIVER - BELOW DENISON
17 OUACHITA RIVER
18 LOWER MISSISSIPPI RIVER-BIG BLACK RIVER
19 ATCHAFALAYA RIVER
20 CALCASIEU RIVER
21 LOWER MISSISSIPPI RIVER - NATCHEZ TO GULF
WQ
D-6
-------
11 CR COLORADO RIVER
01 LOWER COLORADO RIVER
02 MIDDLE COLORADO RIVER-SAN JUAN RIVER
03 UPPER COLORADO RIVER
04 GILA RIVER
05 LITTLE COLORADO RIVER
06 GREEN RIVER
20 DEAN BASIN 01
21 DEAN BASIN 02
22 DEAD BASIN 03
23 DEAD BASIN 04
24 DEAD BASIN 05
25 DEAD BASIN 06
26 DEAD BASIN 07
27 DEAD BASIN 08
28 DEAD BASIN 09
29 DEAD BASIN 10
12 WG WESTERN GULF
01 SABINE RIVER
02 HECHES RIVER
03 TRINITY & SAN JACINTO RIVERS
04 BRAZOS RIVER
05 COLORADO RIVER
06 GUADELUPE LAVACA & SAN ANTONIO BASIN
07 NUECES RIVER
08 UPPER PECOS RIVER
09 . . RIO GRANDE UPPER ABOVE PECOS RIVER
10 RIO GRANDE LOWER BELOW PECOS RIVER
13 PN PACIFIC NORTHWEST
01 KOOTENAI RIVER
02 CLARK FORK-PEND OREILLE RIVER
03 SPOKANE RIVER
04 YAKIMA RIVER
05 COLUMBIA RIVER ABOVE YAKIMA RIVER
06 UPPER SNAKE RIVER
07 CENTRAL SNAKE RIVER
08 MIDDLE & LOWER SNAKE RIVER
09 WILLAMETTE RIVER
10 COLUMBIA RIVER BELOW YAKIMA RIVER
12 PUGET SOUND
12 WASHINGTON COAST
13 . OREGON COAST
14 SOUTHERN OREGON LAKES
WQ
D-7
-------
14 CL CALIFORNIA
01
• 02 .
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
15 GB GREAT BASIN
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
16 AL ALASKA
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
17 HA HAWAII
01
02
03
04
KLAMATH RIVER
NORTH COASTAL
SAN FRANCISCO BAY REGION
CENTRAL COASTAL
SANTA CLARA RIVER
LOS ANGELES RIVER
SANTA ANA RIVER
SAN DIEGO COASTAL REGION
SACRAMENTO RIVER
SAN JOAQUIN RIVER
KINGS & KERN RIVERS AND TULARE LAKE
NORTHWESTERN LAHONTAN
HUMBOLDT RIVER
CENTRAL NEVADA
OWENS RIVER
MOJAVE RIVER
COLORADO RIVER BASIN REGION OF CALIFORNIA
GREAT SALT 'LAKE
SEVIER RIVER
ARCTIC SLOPE (COLVILLE & SAGAVAHIRKTOK RES)
N W (KOTSEVUR SOUND, NOATAK & KOBUK RES)
YUKON RIVER
KUSKOKWIM RIVER
BRISTOL BAY - BUSHAGAK & MULCHATNA RIVERS
SOUTHERN ALASKA PENINSULA
EAST COOK.INLET-SUSITNA RIVER
KENAI & KNIK ARM RIVERS
KODIAK ISLAND
COPPER RIVER
YAKUTAT BAY
SOUTHEASTERN ALASKA
HAWA11
HONOLULU OAHU ISLAND
KAUAI CO-KAUAI, MIIHAU & SMALL ISLANDS
MAUI-KALAWAO CO
WQ
D-8
-------
18 PR PUERTO RICO
PUERTO RICO .
19 VI VIRGIN ISLANDS
VIRGIN ISLANDS
20 OC OCEANIA
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
21 LH LAKE HURON
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
GUAM
MARIANA ISLANDS
PALAU
YAP
PONAPE
TRUK
MARSHALL ISLANDS
AMERICAN SAMOA
CHERRY CREEK
PIGEON
WISCOGGIN
SAGINAW
KAWKAWLIN
RIFLE
AUGRES
AUSABLE
BLACK (AT BLACK RIVER)
THUNDER BAY
SWAN CREEK
OCQUEOC
CHEBOYGAN
CARP
PINE
MUNUSCONG
CHARLOTTE
WAISKA
WQ
D-9
-------
22 LS LAKE SUPERIOR-
01 PENDILLS
02 ' TAHQUAMENON
03 TWO HEARTED
04 AUTRAIN
05 CHOCOLAY
06 CARP
07 SALMON TROUT
08 STURGEON (HOUGHTON COUNTY:
09 TOBACCO
10 PORTAGE LAKE
11 MISERY
12 ONTONAGON
13 IRON
14 PRESQUE ISLE
15 MONTREAL
23 WISC & MINN DRAINAGE
23 HB HUDSON BAY
01 RED RIVER OF THE NORTH
02 RAINY RIVER
03 DEVILS LAKE AREA
04 SOURIS RIVER
WQ
D-10
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART
WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
APPENDIX
E
SAMPLING SITES WITHIN
SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANTS
[Basic Retrieval; Second Edition]
-------
APPENDIX E: SAMPLING SITES WITHIN SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANTS
CODE NUMBERS SAMPLING POSITIONS,
0 Discharge
35 Disinfection Processing completed
31-3.4 During Process of Disinfection
30 Prior to Disinfection Process
20-29 Pre-Discharge
1-19 Post Discharge (Mixing Zone)
36-40 Other Treatment Processes, Removal
Process completed
41-89 Other Treatment Processes, During
Process of Removal
90-94 Other Treatment Processes, Prior to
Removal Processes
105 Sludge, Processing completed
106-155 Sludge, During Processing
156 Sludge, Raw
157 Phosphorous, Removal Processing Completed
158-167 Phosphorous, During Processes of Removal
168 Phosphorous, Prior to Removal Processes
169 Nitrogen, Removal Processing Completed
170-179 Nitrogen, During Processes of Removal
180 Nitrogen, Prior to Removal Processes
181 Suspended Solids, Removal Processing Completed
182-191 Suspended Solids, During Removal Processes
192 Suspended Solids, Prior to Removal Processes
193 Advanced Treatment, Removal Processing Completed
194-268 . Advanced Treatment, During Removal Processes
269 Advanced Treatment, Prior to Removal Processes
270 Secondary Treatment, Removal Processing
Completed
271-342 Secondary Treatment, During Removal Processes
343 Secondary Treatment, Prior to Removal Processes
344 Intermediate Treatment, Removal Processing
Completed
345-369 Intermediate Treatment, During Removal Process^
370 Intermediate Treatment, Prior to Removal Processes
371 Primary Treatment, Removal Processing Completed
372-396 Primary Treatment, During Removal Processes
397 Primary Treatment, Prior to Removal Processes
WQ
E-l
-------
CODE NUMBERS SAMPLING POSITIONS
398 Preliminary Treatment, Removal Processing
Completed
399-423 Preliminary Treatment, During Removal
Processes
424 .Preliminary Treatment, Prior to Removal
Processes
500 Raw Sewage
425-434 Plant By-Passes
435-454 Separate Influent Points
455-474 Collection Systems
WQ
E-2
-------
DEFINITIONS
1. DISCHARGE - The point at which the effluent is emitted
from the Outfall Sewer to the Receiving Waters.
2. PRE-DISCHARGE - Any point between the effluent of the final
Treatment Process, usually disinfection, & the point
at which the Discharge occurs. To be used, normally,
for points within the Outfall Sewer.
3. POST-DISCHARGE - (MIXING ZONE) An area of the Receiving
waters designated as a Mixing Zone.
4. RAW SEWAGE - Sewage as received, in its raw stage, at the
facility and before any treatment processes are
applied.
5, . COLLECTION SYSTEMS - Collectively, any network of conduits,
pipes, tunnels, ditches, wastewater lines, appurtenances,
pumping stations, etc., which has been designed to
convey sewage obtained from one or several sources to
a common point, usually a wastewater Treatment Facility.
6. PLANT BY-PASS - An arrangement of pipes, conduits, gates,
valves, etc., whereby flow is diverted around a treat-
ment facility with partial or no treatment.
7. SEPARATE INVLUENT POINTS - An influent to the collection
system other than the point at which the bulk of
influent is received. E.G.- An individual pipe from
an industrial source directly to the col lection'system.
8. REMOVAL PROCESSES COMPLETED - That stage of processing
where all that is intended to be accomplished during
a treatment process has been done and the wastewater
is ready for further processing or ultimate disposal.
9. DURING PROCESSES OF REMOVAL - Any of the processing stages
during which the wastewater is being treated.
10. PRIOR TO REMOVAL PROCESSES - The point at which the waste-
water or residue is received from a previous point or
source and before any treatment processes are applied.
NOTE
Use principal processes ONLY under the established codes. When
describing Non-Standard or Parallel Processes, use Other
Treatment Processes, code numbers 36 through 94 as required. Use
the Advanced Treatment Codes 193 through 269 where specific
functions as Suspended Solids, Phosphorous or Nitrogen removal
cannot be separately identified.
WQ
E-3
-------
STORE! USER HANDBOOK
PART
WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
APPENDIX
F
STORET STATION TYPE CODES
-------
APPENDIX F: STORET STATION TYPE CODES
Water quality monitoring stations can be categorized acccrdin
a variety of alphabetic descriptions which are termed station
type codes. These codes can be stored into the WQF as par
station's location data via the Station Tvoe Card .. T Card
stations can be retrieved according to station types via t
of valid stat
codes is expec
an occasional new station type code ma
EXTRACT station restriction keyword. A li
types is given below. Although this set o
be somewhat stati
added frorr, time to time. The on-line STORET help data set
STATION. TYPE always contains a list of all station type co
defined within STORET.
he
ion
ted co
y be
named
des
The list of valid station type codes as
follows:
;f December 23, 1973
..evel 1 codes: (Each station must have exactly one.)
LAKE
STREAM
SPRING
WELL
ESTURY
PIPE
LND
CANAL
RESERV
Level 2 codes:
AMBNT
The
The
The
The
The
The
from the open
in a lake.
sea.
in a river or strea
spring.
taken from a sp
in a well.
in the estuar
the ocean.
water at some point
such as a treatment
Use PIPE when the s
y zone
wicni
plant
tation
on so
terial
in a
r.
station monitors water
station monitors water
station monitors water
station monitors water
station monitors water
station monitors water
between a stream and
The station monitors
a man-made facility,
or industrial site.
monitors the effluent discharge.
The station monitors soil or crops grown
which has received hazardous or toxic materials
The station monitors water in a canal or in a drain,
The station monitors water in a reservoi
(Each station must have exactly one.1
The only valid Level 2 code unless Level 1 is coded
PIPE. Used to indicate that the sample was gat here-:
in a natural body of water, as opposed to within
a facility or in the effluent.
The Level 2 codes below are valid only if Level 1 is PIPE.
SEWER The station monitors within a sewer. (Further
defined in Level 5 . ;
INPLNT The sampling point is inside a treatment facility,
and the depth code conventions (see STORET
Handbook) for exact location will be used.
NTRTMT The samples are gathered at a point where no
pollution abatement process has been performed
on the water.
WQ
F-l
-------
Level 2 codes,
FTRTMT
TREATD
CMBTRT
Level 3 codes:
MUN '
IND
CMBMI
AGRI
Level 4 codes:
INTAKE
OUTFL
CM3SRC
Level 5 Codes:
SUPPLY
RUNOFF
HRZTL
GALERY
TUNNEL
NONPNT
RANNEY
FISH
PRECIP
SOLIDS
continued: ;
The samples are gathered at a'point where some,
but not all, of the intended pollution abatement
processess have been performed.
The samples are gathered at a point where no
further pollution abatement process will be
performed.
The point where samples are gathered is not
clearly in any of the 'above treatment status codes.
(Required if Level 1 is PIPE. Optional otherwise.
Use only one.)
The site from which samples are gathered is primarily
associated with municipal water supply and/or sewage.
The site from which samples are gathered is primarily
associated with industrial water intake and/or
effluent.
The site has both of the above attributes.
The station monitors ^water associated with agricultural,
silvicultural, or feedlot discharges.
(Required if Level 3 is used. Optional otherwise.
Use only one.)
The site from which samples are gathered is primarily
associated with a water intake.
The site from which samples are gathered is primarily
associated with pollutant effluent.
The site has both-of .the above-attributes. -
(Optional. Miscellaneous additional information.
Any combinations can be used.)
Water other than wastewater. From a water supply
system.
The station monitors stormwater.
A horizontal well, usually associated with the
Level 1 code, WELL.
Gallery. An underground structure designed to
collect subsurface water.
Tunnel, associated with the Level 1 code, WELL.
Data is associated with an effluent which is not a
point source.
Ranny Collector, usually associated with the Level 1
code, WELL.
Station where fish (to include coastal aquatic life)
are collected, identified, and analyzed for presence
of contaminants.
The station monitors rain water.
Stations where sludge or sediment are sampled.
WQ
F-2
-------
Level 5 codes, continued:
MET Station monitors meteorological data.
SBSOIL Station monitors drain tiles, or other locations jus;
below the soil surface.
TISSUE Plant or animal matter is analyzed.
CMESWR Combined sewer.
SANSWR Sanitary sewer.
STMSWR Stormwater sewer.
WQ
F-3
-------
STORE! USER HANDBOOK
PART
WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
APPENDIX
G
STORING, PROCESSING, AND RETRIEVING
INTENSIVE SURVEY DATA
-------
APPENDIX G: STORING, PROCESSING, AND RETRIEVING
INTENSIVE SURVEY DATA
Because of its important support role co water pollution control
programs particularly to the 4C CFR 13C-131 water quality
management process), water monitoring throughout the Nation has
been reoriented by EPA's Standing work Group on Water Monitoring.
from general, sometimes ill-defined data collection, to
activities designed to answer specific environmental questions.
Such reorientation will often result in a decrease in ambient
fixed station water monitoring and an increase in intensive
surveys. To benefit fully from the intensive surveys conducted,
water pollution control agencies must have a means to siore,
process, and retrieve the effluent and ambient water quality daca
collected. This appendix discusses the use of STORET for these
purpose's, and describes the STORET intensive survey capability.
DEFINITION OF AN INTENSIVE SURVEY
An intensive survey is the frequent sampling of
parameters at representative points • including points
of effluent discharge) for a relatively short period of
time to discover water quality conditions, causes,
effects, and cause-and-effect relationships. Intensive
surveys may employ physical, chemical, and biological
techniques for parameter measurement.
There are three general categories of intensive
surveys:
1. Surveys, for ambient, assessment-... -.. .
An ambient assessment survey is used to discover
general water quality conditions and to -determine cause
and effect relationships. Both ambient and effluent
sampling may be undertaken.
2. Surveys for mathematical model calibration and
verification
Mathematical model calibration and verification surveys
are used in support of the waste load allocation
process and may involve ambient and effluent sampling.
3. Reconnaissance surveys
A reconnaissance survey provides data for the design of
ambient fixed station networks (and of other larger-
scale intensive surveys) and for the integration of
water monitoring activities. In the course of such
surveys, both ambient and effluent monitoring may be
undertaken.
WQ
G-l
-------
SCOPE OF INTENSIVE SURVEY MONITORING*, ,
The states will use intensive surveys to determine
whether water quality conditions are improving or
getting worse. Such surveys can also be used to
examine cause-and-effect relationships, to provide data
for waste load allocation studies, to explain the
spatial significance of ambient station siting, to
facilitate the interpretation of data collected at
ambient stations, and to integrate monitoring
components.
An intensive survey should be conducted at least once
during a five-year period on every significant segment.
(A significant segment is any portion of a river, lake,
estuary, bay, or aquifer, where; waste loads are
allocated or adverse water quality. conditions have
either'been identified or are considered probable.)
Since there are approximately 1,500 significant
segments in the United States, it is likely that about
300 intensive surveys will be conducted a year ever a
five-year period (0.20 x 1,500 = 300, assuming that 20
percent of the 1,500 segments will be surveyed each
year over the five-year period). A typical survey may
include from 10 to 100 sampling sites (stations) and
may examine from 20 to 200 unique parameters.
Effluent data may be collected in any one of the three
types of intensive surveys, with an individual survey
generally addressing no more than 20 facilities (major
and/or minor-) .~ • This figure translates- into- 6','000' -
facilities a year, or 30,000 over a five-year period.
STORAGE OF INTENSIVE SURVEY DATA AND STATIONS
. Although an intensive survey is characterized by a
relatively large number of stations that collect
samples over a short period of Mme, the STORET system
will properly accommodate intensive survey data.
However, where only one or two pieces of data exist for
each station of an intensive survey (resulting,
therefore, in a large number of stations with
relatively little data), a user may choose not to store
intensive survey data in STORET. Although STORET's use
is recommended in.most cases, there will be situations,
as in all data processing applications, where the
volume of data involved in a given intensive survey
will not justify the use of any automated data system.
When this is the case, the user may achieve better
results through a manual data handling procedure.
WQ
G-2
-------
Each intensive survey will be assigned a unique six-
digit number which will reference all water quality
measurements made in the course of the survey. The
six-digit number will have the format: yyssnn, where yy
is che last two digits of the year in which th-e survey
was begun, ss is the PIPS code for the state in which
the survey was begun, and nn is the number of che
survey, unique within state and year and ranging from
zero to 99 in value. This intensive survey identifier
is stored as the value for parameter 116, which
signifies that the sample for which the parameter is
scored belongs to the specified intensive survey.
Stations included in an intensive survey which are not
already contained in STORET should be stored using
either the standard STORE! ?01 '.'fixed format) station
storage procedure, EASYSTOR, a STORET command
procedure.
Ambient and effluent water quality data collected at
the stations of an intensive survey should be stored
using either STORET water quality data storage
procedure type ?02, ?03, or ?04. Each sample stored
will have the unique intensive survey identifier
included as a value for parameter 116.
Only the ?Q4 storage procedure- may be used to add
parameter number 116 to an existing sample.
RETRIEVING INTENSIVE SURVEY STATIONS AND DATA PROM STORET
Once all stations and data associated with an intensive
survey have been successfully stored in STORET, users
may request (by contacting STORET User Assistance1 that
a mask be created for the stations of an intensive
survey under, the unique identifier assigned to the
survey. This mask can then be used with the EXTRACT
keyword to facilitate station selection.
The IS keyword is used to retrieve intensive survey
data, and is described in detail at che end of this
appendix. It allows a user to separate, at retrieval
.time, intensive survey data from data collected as part
of a fixed station monitoring network. It also allows
a user to segregate the data at a particular station of
an intensive survey by specific intensive survey.
To obtain a location plot and/or listing of the
stations included in a specific intensive survey, the
user would specify via an appropriate STORET retrieval
procedure, using the STC and EXTRACT keywords, the
state or state? in which the survey was conducted and
WQ
G-3
-------
the unique intensive survey s.i x-dig.i.t number. This, in
turn, would select, through: t-h-e- appropriate bit ma-s-k,
all stations belonging to the survey. (Alternatively,
the user could simply specify the stations involved in
the survey.)
Occasionally, stations of an intensive survey will be
required in downstream order. Unfortunately, only
where river-mile-index information (RMI) is available
and has been stored for the stations of the survey will
this be an easy effort. Each individual user, however,
will have the ability to create station 'paths' for
each intensive survey. To obtain the stations of the
survey in a particular path sequence, the user, instead
of employing the intensive survey bit mask, will
specify the stations needed in the required path order.
It should be noted that this is not an automatic
procedure; the user will have to state explicitly the
stations of the survey in the required path sequence.
To retrieve the ambier.t and effluent water quality data
for a particular intensive survey, the user will first
specify the appropriate state code(s) and the unique
intensive survey six-digit number as described above
(or, alternatively, will explicitly specify the
stations used in the survey) to select all stations
used in the intensive survey. To exclude all water
quality data not belonging to the specified intensive
survey, the user will again specify (through the use of
the IS keyword) the unique intensive survey number.
See the description of the IS keyword for several
examples illustrating the retrieval of intensive survey
stations and data.
WQ
G-4
-------
CLASSIFICATION: Data Selection Keyword
USE:
This keyword is used to retrieve intensive survey data
It allows a user to separate, at retrieval time,
intensive survey data from data collected as part of a
routine fixed station monitoring network. It also
allows a user to segregate data at a station of the
intensive survey by specific intensive survey.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
fyyssnn[/yyssnn
IS= < NOT
LONLY
IS=yyssnn...,
IS=NOT,
IS=ONLY,
where
specifies that only those samples
belonging to the specified
intensive survey identifier(s)
yyssnn are to be retrieved.
yyssnn is a six-digit nurr.erical
value, unique within a state for
any given year, composed of the
last two digits of the-year in
which the survey was begun (yy),
the FIPS code for the state in
which the survey was begun (ss),
and the number of the survey (nn)
conducted within state ss for
year yy. nn may be any numerical
value from 00 to 99. Up to 20
yyssnn identifiers may be
specified in a single retrieval
request, each identifier
separated from the preceding
identifier by a slash (/}.
specifies that no intensive survey
data, is to be retrieved.
specifies that only intensive
survey data is to be retrieved,
regardless of which intensive
survey it is associated.
WQ
G-5
-------
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
If., not specif led, intensive survey
data will be retrieved along w,ith
other data stored, according to
the data selection keywords
specified.
NOTES ON USAGE:
The IS keyword is valid with the RET, MEAN, PLOT, LOG,
STAND, STA, PU!s?CH, MSP, and REG retrieval programs.
'IS=NOT,' inhibits the retrieval of all samples which
have a value stored for parameter 116; 'IS=ONLY,'
retrieves only samples which have values stored for
parameter 116.
When specifying more, than one identifier via the yyssnn
value of the IS keyword, each identifier must be unique
and different. A sample is selected if it contains any
one of the specified intensive survey identifiers.
Instead of using the STC and EXTRACT keywords,
intensive survey stations can also be specified
explicitly via the agency (A) and station (S) keywords,
specifying each station that was part of the survey.
IS would still be used, however.
EXAMPLE;s):
Obtai-ri a location plot and
listing of the stations that -
belong to survey number 10
conducted by the State of
Maryland during 1977.
Perform a raw data retrieval
of the data collected in the
State of Maryland's intensive
survey number 10 conducted
in 1977 for total chlorphyll
(P=32234), BOD-dissolved
(P=311), and BOD-first stage
(P=320).
PGM=LOC,PURP=305B/STA,
STC=24,EXTRACT=772410,
TAGS,SCALE=24000,
PGM=RET,PUR?=305B/STA,
STC=24,EXTRACT=772410,
IS=772410,P=32234,
P=311,P=320,
WQ
G-6
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART
WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
APPENDIX
J
INDICATING DATA VALUE SIGNIFICANCE
WQ
-------
APPENDIX J: INDICATING DATA VALUE SIGNIFICANCE
Water Quality File data storage and retrieval procedures do not
necessarily print parametric data with the same number of
significant digits as supplied at the time of data entry.
For data with decimal points, the number of decimal places
(digits to the right of the decimal point) in printed raw data is
dependent either on predefined decimal placement values
associated with each parameter code or on the value assigned by
the program-specific decimal placement keyword DR used with' the
RET retrieval program. When the stored value does not confer- to
the expected format, STORET either adds zeros or prints a
rounded-off value. Consequently, the value printed may contain
non-significant digits that were not stored at the time of data
entry.
In addition, standard.WQF storage procedures provide no
indication as to the significance of values without decimal
points. For example, the user has no way of knowing whether a
stored value of 1500 represents an actual value of precisely 1500
(both zeros significant), an approximation to the nearest tench
(one zero significant), or an approximation to the nearest
hundredth (neither zero significant).
To preserve data significance throughout storage and retrieval, a
special coding procedure can be used at data storage time to
override the usual decimal placement conventions and to ensure
that param.etc.Lc-values ..ar_e .printed ..exactly as stored. This coding
also allows the-user to distinguish between significant and non-
significant zeros in numbers without decimal points. The
procedures for storing, changing, deleting, and retrieving
parametric data with significance indicators are discussed and
illustrated below.
WQ
J-l
-------
STORING PARAMETRIC DATA WITH SIGNIFICANCE INDICATORS
The significance of stored and printed parametric
values is preserved as coded by adding a single card
to the data storage deck in either a ?C1 fixed-form
storage procedure or a ?C4 WQGSTOR storage procedure.
'.Data storage procedures ?Q2 and ?03 may not be used
to store or change data value significance.) This
card, the QPREC card, follows immediately after the
agency card and contains only the letters QPREC, coded
in the first five columns. Only one QPREC card is
permitted in a data storage deck, and it applies to
all data stored in that particular run.
To distinguish between significant' and non-significant
zeros in values without decimal points, the letter "I"
is entered in place of all non-significant zeros.
Examples 1 and 2 show typical storage decks for 701
and ?04 storage procedures in which the digits that
are not significant are indicated by the letter Z.
EXAMPLE 1
STORING DATA WITH SIGNIFICANCE INDICATORS
USING THE ?C1 STORAGE PROCEDURE
01234
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901
5
23456789012345 .
7START
! ?ci
EXAMPLE TEST
QPREC
: AOOOOI
7601030007
7601030008
7601030009
760103001Q
0 1
12345678901234567
00010100012 00011350012
00010100Z12 OOQ11350Z12
0001010ZZ12 0001135ZZ12
000101ZZZ12 000113ZZZ12
2 3 4
390123456789012345678901
31506100014
31506100Z14
3150610ZZ14
315061ZZZ14
5
23456789012345.
7 8
.4567890
7777 A
S
6
6
6
6
7 8
. 4567890
WQ
J-2
-------
This first example illustrates the use of the ?01
storage procedure when indicating data value
significance. Four significant digits will be stored
for the time 0007. For the times 0008, C009, and
OC10, three, two, and one significant digits will be
stored, respectively. Note the use of the QPREC card.
Remember that with ?01 data entry, the 11-character
parametric field includes five digits representing the
parameter code, four digits representing the parameter
value, a "1" or a "0" indicating the sign of the
exponent, and a one digit exponent. A maximum of four
non-zero digits can be stored using the ?01 storage
procedure.
EXAMPLE 2
STORING DATA WITH SIGNIFICANCE INDICATORS
USING THE ?04 STORAGE PROCEDURE
0 1 2 3 4 5 7 8
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345...456739:
?START
?04
AC,A=EXAMPLE,UK=TEST,
QPREC
SC,AOOOO1,"601090007,?10,10,PI 1,35,P31506,1000,
SC,AOOOO1,7601090008,P10,1Z,P11,4Z,P31506, 100Z,
SC,AOOOO1,7601090009,P10,1ZZ,P11,4ZZ,P31506,10ZZ,
SC,AOCOO1,7601090010,P10,5Z,P11,6ZZ,P31506,1ZZZ,
0 1 2 3 4 ' 5 ' 7 3
1234567390123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345...456-891
This second example illustrates the use of the ?04
storage procedure when indicating data value
significance. For the time 0009, one significant
digit will be stored for parameters 10 and 11, and two
significant digits will be stored for parameter 31506.
Note the use of the QPREC card. The maximum number of
non-zero digits that can be stored using the ?04
storage procedure is six.
WQ
J-3
-------
CHANGING PARAMETRIC DATA USING SIGNIFICANCE INDICATORS
The procedures described in: Chapter DE for changing
parametric data are used when the updated values are
to be stored with their significance indicated. The
only changes to the procedures are the inclusion of a
QPREC card immediately following the agency card, and
the use of the letter "Z" in place of the non-
significant zeros for the new values. This procedure
may be used regardless of whether the old values were
stored with or without significance indicators.
EXAMPLE 3
CHANGING DATA WITH SIGNIFICANCE INDICATORS
USING THE ?01 STORAGE PROCEDURE
01 2 3 4 578
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345...4567390
?START
?01 '
14AGNFS9 SECRET NAME OF USER 9999 A
QPREC
070001 S
780715 003103Z 02 004005 00 C6
0 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 I
1234567890123456739012345678901234567890123456789012345...4567390 i
WQ
J-4
-------
EXAMPLE 4
CHANGING DATA WITH SIGNIFICANCE INDICATORS
USING THE ?34 STORAGE PROCEDURE
I i 2 3 4 5 7
12 3-4 5 6"c;:::3436"39C123456'390 123456739 01234567S90 12345. ..45673:
7START
?C4
AC, A=14AGNFS9, UK = SECRET, ruSER = NAME Or USER,
CPREC
sc,:-::;i,7sc7i5,?c3io,3z,?C400,.5,
113456-3?:i23456-39012345678901234567890123456739012345...456739:
Exarr.pies three and four illustrate the procedures for
changing parametric data values using significance
indicators. In both examples, a value of 30 will be
stored for•parameter 310, with only one significant
digit. Because the predefined decimal placement for
parameter, code 310 is XXXXXX.X, this particular value
would have been stored as "30" and printed as "30.0"
had standard procedures been used.
DELETING PARAMETRIC DATA HAVING SIGNIFICANCE INDICATORS STORED
Either the ?01 or ?04 storage procedure may be used to
delete parametric data that have been stored with
significance indicators. The procedures used are
identical to those described in Chapter DE, Section 4.
It is not necessary to use a QPREC card when deleting
data, regardless of how they were stored or which
deletion procedure is used.
WQ
J-5
-------
RETRIEVING DATA STORED WITH SIGNIFICANCE INDICATORS
Storage of parametric values with significance
indicators impacts only raw data tabulations obtained
using the retrieval program RET. Neither raw data
retrieved using other STORET retrieval programs nor
any calculated values will be affected. Data stored
with significance indicators are retrieved as part of
the standard RET output and may be interspersed with
data stored using standard procedures.
There are two ways that data stored with significance
indicators differ in printed output from data stored
using standard procedures:
1. Data stored using a deck that contains a QPREC
card will be printed out at retrieval time with
exactly the same number of decimal places as the
stored value, regardless of the predefined decimal
placement for that parameter and regardless of the
value assigned to the DR keyword, if used.
2. Where the letter "Z" was stored in place of non-
significant zeros at data entry, the letter "0" will
print. In most print chains, the letter "0" will be
fatter or -ore square than the numeric zero "0" used
for significant zeros.
In cases where all zeros in a parameter value .are
significant, and the number of decimal places stored
is the same as that specified for data stored without
significance indicators, printed values of.data scored
with and without significance indicators will be
indistinauishable.
EXAMPLE 5 •
SAMPLE RET RETRIEVAL, SHOWING DATA STORED WITH
SIGNIFICANCE INDICATORS
AND WITHOUT
Retrieve data stored at
station ABC099NM under
agency EXAMPLE for
parameters -10 and 11
(water temperature),
400 (pH), 31506 (total
col iforms), and
70300 (residue).
PGM=RET,PURP=10436/EPA,
A=EXAMPLE,S=ASC099NM,
P=10,P=11,P=40Q,
P=315C6,?=7030C,
3D=76,ED=7306,
SHIFT,
WQ
J-6
-------
STORET RET
AoCu 3 3.SM
3 3 j 7 3 u . u
S
IEVAL C
^77 07
24U J1MAP.VL.ANO
.iCciTH ATLANTIC
?CTOMAC
EXAMPLE 7auol
•,'ulj :E£T DE
GATE TIME
r
KOM
TO
7a/ui/'jl
" '}/
7s/
•j
/ j /
' 5/
7o/
7a/
70/
'•j -/ -2
•j 2 / j 2
./..'.
U/31
.•I/Li
u 2 /
ijo jCu 5
'Jvl
00
0 0
uO
Uui,
•j u 0
5
5
OOO 3
GOu
5
73/o3/u4 15 G
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
O
z
O
PART
WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
INDEX
WQ-IND
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART
WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
INDEX
WQ-IND
-------
USING THIS INDEX
This index reflects the contents of the Water Quality File (WQF)
Part of the STORET User Handbook. The pagination following the
primary and secondary (indented) terms consists of an alphabetic
designation of the chapter (FS, DE, or RET) in which the term is
found, followed by a colon, followed by one or more pairs
chapter page
t t
Hill : ill-!!!!
section
of hyphenated numbers which refer to the section and page within
the chapter. An A prefixed to the left number of an hyphenated
pair indicates a reference to an appendix within the indicated
chapter. References following a WQ designation refer to a WQF
appendix. The abbreviations used for the chapter or appendix
designations correspond to the tabs and text as follows:
Index Brown
Designation Tab Text
FS WQ-FS File Structure Chapter
DE WQ-DE Data Entry Chapter
RET WQ-RET Retrieval Chapter
WQ APPENDICES Appendices to the WQF Part
Special characters such as percent signs (%), question marks (?),
equal signs ( = ), and plus or minus signs (+_) appear before
letters in the alphabetic sequence; numbers follow letters in the
alphabetic sequence.
WQ-IND
2
-------
INDEX
%TILEnT keyword, RET:7-35
7START card
data storage control card, DE:3-18,4-4,4-5
?01 card
fixed form storage procedure, DE:4-4
station location information storage, DE:3-18
storing significance indicators, WQ:J-1
?02 card
use with DIP storage, DE:4-4,4-7
?03 card
use with DIP storage, DE:4-5,4-15
?04 card
storing significance indicators, WQ:J-1
use with WQGSTOR storage, DE:4-5,4-23
A card, DE:A2-1
(see also Agency card)
A keyword, RET:4-13
AC card
description of fields in, DE:4-24
ADDM keyword, RET:7-21
Advanced keywords (see Retrieval keywords)
Agency card
description of fields in, DE:3-2
record layout form, DE:A2-1
use with storing parametric data, DE:4-3
use with storing station location information, DE:3-18
Agency code
changing, DE:3-20
listing of valid, RET:4-14,4-77
retrieving by, RET:4-13,4-39
Agency/station file (ASF), FS:3-3
AGGR keyword, RET:4-79
Aggregated subareas, RET:7-185
Aggregating data, RET:4-79,6-25
ALLPARM program
description of, RET:6-17
sample output, RET:3-5,6-18
ANC keyword, RET:4-75
Archived data
class of, DE:3-18
retrieving by, RET:4-45
ARCLASS keyword, RET:4-45
Area file (AREAFLE), FS:3-5
AREA keyword, RET:4-31
Area-shaded maps, RET:7-7,7-91
examples of, RET:7-96
ASA99 keyword, RET:7-185
WQ-IND
3
-------
AT keyword, RET:7-21
Automatic station list (see NOPAR program)
AUXFILE
creating an, RET:7-201
definition, RET:7-199
keyword, RET:7-199
record format, RET:7-207
Auxiliary File (see LOG program)
AUXSYM keyword, RET:7-197
B keyword, RET:4-13
BASE keyword, RET:6-35
Basin codes
listing of, WQ:D-1
retrieving by, RET:4-29
BD keyword, RET:4-57
BEGIN keyword, RET:7-17
BG keyword, RET:4-61
EOT keyword, RET:4-71
Bottom samples
changing, DE:4-41,4-43
deleting, DE:4-53,4-55
retrieving by, RET:4-71
Storing, DE:4-8,4-18,4-26,4-34
BS keyword, RET:4-29
BT keyword, RET:4-59
CALCOMP plotting symbols (see Plotting symbols)
CF (see Hits file)
Change maps (see Trend maps)
Changing
agency card information, DE:3-20
agency code, DE:3-20
basin codes, DE:3-28
descriptive paragraph information, DE:3-30
latitude/longitude card information, DE:3-24
location description information, DE:3-29
major/minor basin information, DE:3-28
parametric data (see Parametric data)
RMI information, DE:3-26
station card information, DE:3-23
station codes, DE:3-23
station location information, DE:3-20,3-35
station type information, DE:3-22
station types, DE:3-22
CKNO keyword, RET:7-217
CKWDTH keyword, RET:7-217
CLR keyword, RET:6-73
CO keyword, RET:4-27
WQ-IND
4
-------
Composite sample
definition, FS:2-1
Composite values
changing, DE:4-39
retrieving, RET:4-73,4-75
storing via procedure ?01, DE:4-32,4-35
storing via procedure ?02, DE:4-11
storing via procedure ?03, DE:4-18
storing via procedure ?04, DE:4-76
with NOPAR program, RET:7-161
Computer sequence number, FS:3-2
COMSCL keyword, RET:7-57
CONLEV keyword, RET:7-85
CONN keyword, RET:7-47
Continuation card (see Parametric data storage cards)
Contour mapping keywords, RET:7-73
Contour maps
fineness of lines in, RET:7-75
number of. thin lines, RET: 7-81
(see also MSP program)
Control cards
data entry (see 7START card and ?0n cards)
NOPAR program, RET:7-145,7-155
CONV keyword, RET:7-265
Convert a stored value, RET:4-53
County codes
listing of, WQ:C-3
retrieving by, RET:4-27,4-37
CSIZE keyword, RET:7-191
D card (see Parametric data storage cards)
D keyword, RET:4-69
Data (D) card (see Parametric data storage cards)
Data entry error messages, DE:A3-1
Data files
agency/station file (ASF), FS:3-3
area file (AREAFLE), FS:3-5
data base file, FS:3-7
error file, FS:3-7
further computational file (FCF), FS:3-6
hits file, FS:3-6
illustration, FS:3-1
index files, FS:3-2
latitude and longitude file (LATF), FS:3-2
mask library file (MASK), FS:3-5
master station file (MSF), FS:3-4
MOD files, FS:3-6
relative station pointer file (RSPF), FS:3-5
river mile index file (RMIF), FS:3-4
state and county file (STCOF), FS:3-3
transient files, FS:3-6
WQ-IND
5
-------
Data selection keywords
listing of, RET:4-47
Data value significance, WQ:J-1
(see also Significance indicators)
Date checking, DE:4-3,4-24
Date groupings
BG keyword, RET:4-61
DG keyword, RET:6-25
EG keyword, RET:4-61
VD keyword, RET:6-35
Decimal input storage procedure
(see Storage procedures, types ?02 and ?03)
Decimal point placement
for MEAN program, RET:6-43
for NOPAR program, RET:7-162
for RET program, RET:6-15
Default values, RET:1-4
Deleting
parametric data (see Parametric data)
station location information, DE:3-31,3-35
DELM keyword, RET:7-22
Depth
changing sample, DE:4-39
changing station, DE:3-35 \
retrieving by, RET:4-67,4-69
storing of station, DE:3-8,3-19
storing sample, DE:4-8,4-11,4-18,4-26
Descriptive paragraph cards
changing information in, DE:3-30
deleting information in, DE:3-32
description of fields in, DE:3-15
record layout form, DE:A2-1
DG keyword, RET:6-25,7-271
DIP storage (see Storage procedures, types ?02 and ?03)
DIPMS program, FS:3-9;
Dissolved oxygen saturation calculation
with ALLPARM program, RET:6-17
with MEAN program, RET:6-47
with MSP program, RET:7-15
with PLOT program, RET:6-55
DISTRIBUTE program, FS:3-8
DM keyword, RET:6-43
DR keyword, RET:6-15
DSROC keyword, RET:4-73
EARLY keyword, RET:7-111
ED keyword, RET:4-57
EDITB program, FS:3-9
EG keyword, RET:4-61
Equating parameters, RET:5-9
Error file, FS:3-7
WQ-IND
6
-------
Error messages
data entry, DE:A3-1
MSP program, RET:A7-17
NOPAR program, RET:A7-18
REG program, RET:A7-9
retrieval, RET:A7-1
ERROR program, FS:3-10
ET keyword, RET:4-59
Examples of
data storage (see Parametric data)
retrievals (see individual keyword descriptions!
EXTRACT keyword, RET:4-41
FACT keyword, RET:6-57
FCF (Further Computational File)
definition, RET:5-1,7-221, FS:3-6
suppress creation of, RET:5-7
types of records in, RET:7-224
(see also MORE record formats)
Files (see Data files)
Fineness, of contour maps, RET:7-75
Fixed field storage procedure (see Storage procedures, type ?01)
Fixed form input procedure (see Storage procedures, type ?01)
FLEX keyword, RET:7-87
Free-form storage input (see Storage procedures, type ?04)
Further Computational File (see FCF)
GDIP program, FS:3-9
General retrieval keywords
advanced, RET:5-1
data selection, RET:4-47
introduction to , RET:4-1
listing of, RET:4-2
print control, RET:4-81
retrieval identification, RET:4-3
station identification, RET:4-9
summary of, table, RET:A2-1,A2-4
Glossary, WQ:A-1
Grab sample
definition, FS:2-1
retrieving, RET:4-73
storing via ?01 procedure, DE:4-32
storing via ?02 procedure, DE:4-10
storing via ?03 procedure, DE:4-17
storing via ?04 procedure, DE:4-27
GRAPHNO keyword, RET:7-99
WQ-IND
7
-------
Grouping
data retrieved, RET:4-61
data values on maps, RET:7-93
retrieved stations, RET:4-79
stations with MSP, RET:7-19
GROUPS keyword, RET:7-93
GROUPSB keyword, RET:7-93
GROUPSQ keyword, RET:7-93
HEAD keyword, RET:4-87
Header card
0, DE:3-7
(see also Latitude/longitude)
1, DE:3-9
(see also River mile index cards)
2, DE:3-11
(see also River mile index cards)
3, DE:3-12
(see also Major/minor basin card)
4, DE:3-14
(see also Location description card)
5, DE:3-15
(see also Descriptive paragraph cards)
Help data sets
index, DE:A1-1, RET:A1-1
Hits file, FS:3-6
creating a, RET:5-3
definition, RET:5-1
HV keyword
with MEAN program, RET:6-23
with PLOT program, RET:6-55
with STAND program, RET:6-79
Hydrologic index (see River mileages)
INCR keyword, RET:7-63
INDEX program
description of, RET:6-87
sample output, RET:3-10,6-88
Inputting data (see Storage procedures)
Instruction
definition, FS:5-1, RET:l-2,2-2
Intensive surveys, WQ:G-1
retrieving data, WQ:G-3
storing data, WQ:G-2
INVENT, INV120 programs
description of, RET:6-5
keywords special to, RET:6-3
sample output, RET:3-3,6-6,6-10
IS keyword, WQ:G-5
WQ-IND
8
-------
Keyword
definition, FS:5-1, RET:l-2
Keyword summary
alphabetical descriptions, RET:A3-1
by retrieval program, table, RET:6-2,A2-1
data selection, RET:4-47
INVENT, INV120 programs, RET:6-3
LOG program, RET:6-63,7-171
MEAN program, RET:6-19,7-267
MSP program, RET:7-3
NOPAR program, RET:7-145
PLOT program, RET:6-53
REG program, RET:7-113
RET program, RET:6-11,7-219
STAND program, RET:6-75
station identification, RET:4-9
L keyword, RET:4-17
LABEL keyword, RET:7-67
LATE keyword, RET:7-111
Latitude and longitude
changing, DE:3-24,3-35
deleting, DE:3-32
description of card fields, DE:3-7
file (LATF), FS:3-2
indicating precision of, DE:3-8
MSP contour maps, RET:7-89
record layout form, DE:A2-1
retrieval by, RET:4-17
storing, DE:3-7,3-18
LAT1, LAT2 keywords, RET:7-89
LD keyword, RET:4-67
LEFT keyword, RET:7-33
Legends (see Titling)
LH1, LH2 keywords
with MEAN program, RET:6-45
with PLOT program, RET:6-55
LINEAR keyword, RET:7-55
Linear regressions
REG program, RET:7-115
Linear transformation of values, RET:6-85
LINMIL keyword, RET:7-59
LINSTA keyword, RET:7-59
LL1, LL2 keywords
with MEAN program, RET:6-45
with PLOT program, RET:6-55
LOAD keyword
with MEAN program, RET:6-39
with PLOT program, RET:6-55
WQ-IND
9
-------
Loadings
with MEAN program, RET:6-39
with MSP program, RET:7-15
LOG program
auxiliary file keywords, RET:7-174,7-195
composition keywords, RET:187
creating an auxfile, RET:7-201
description of, RET:6-65,7-173
keywords special to, RET:6-63,7-171
overlay keywords, RET:7-174,7-181
sample output, RET:3-8,6-66,7-174,7-212
station labeling keyword, RET:7-175
station screening keyword, RET:7-173,7-175
tag station locations, RET:6-73
Location description card
changing information in, DE:3-29,3-35
description of fields in, DE:3-14
record layout form, DE:A2-1
Locked data
freeing of, RET:4-77
storing, DE:3-2
LOG keyword
with MEAN program, RET:6-41
with MSP program, RET:7-55
with PLOT program, RET:6-55
Logarithms (see LOG keyword)
LONG1, LONG2 keywords, RET:7-89
Low limits, high limits (see LV, HV keywords)
Low value, high value (see LL1, LH1 keywords)
LT=I keyword, RET:4-17
LT=NORET keyword, RET:7-179
LV keyword
with MEAN program, RET:6-23
with PLOT program, RET:6-55
with STAND program, RET:6-79
M+nS keyword, RET:7-35
Major river basin codes, WQ:D-1
changing, DE:3-28
storing, DE:3-12,3-18
Major/minor basin card
description of fields in, DE:3-12
record layout form, DE:A2-1
Manual station list (see NOPAR program)
Maps
LOG program, RET:6-65,7-173
MSP program, RET:7-7
Mask
library file (MASK), FS:3-5
retrieving by, RET:4-33,4-41
MASK keyword, RET:4-33
WQ-IND
10
-------
Master station file (MSF), FS:3-4
MAX keyword, RET:7-35
MEAN keyword, RET:7-15
MEAN program
acceptable ranges of values, RET:6-45
aggregating data, RET:6-25
assign date groupings, RET:6-25,6-35
description of, RET:6-21,7-269
DO saturation calculation, RET:6-47
exclude values from calculations, RET:6-23
keywords special to, RET:6-19,7-267
loadings, RET:6-39
output on tape or disk, RET:7-269
sample output, RET:3-6,6-22
sorting data with, RET:6-27
statistical functions, RET:6-37
un-ionized ammonia calculation, RET:6-49
MEAN=n keyword, RET:7-35
Message to plotter operator, RET:7-189
Mileage-linear plots, RET:7-7,7-59
MIN keyword, RET:7-35
Minor river basin codes, WQ:D-1
MOD file, FS:3-6
MODEL keyword, RET:7-39
Monitoring process, the, DE:1-1, FS:2-1
MORE keyword, RET:7-223
MORE record formats
MORE=SAS, RET:7-243
MORE=1, RET:7-262
MORE=2, RET:7-255
MORE=3, RET:7-249
MORE=4, RET:7-235
MORE=5, RET:7-227
MSP program
area-shaded mapping keywords, RET:7-91
contour mapping keywords, RET:7-73
data specification keywords, RET:7-29
description of, RET:7-7
general mapping keywords, RET:7-65
grouping stations, RET:7-19
keywords special to, RET:7-3
loadings, RET:7-15
plotting symbols, RET:7-36,7-79,7-99
plotting with, RET:7-7
point-plotted mapping keywords, RET:7-91
program control keywords, RET:7-11
required keywords, RET:7-9,7-13,7-32
sample output, RET:3-13
save output of, RET:7-27
scale control keywords, RET:7-51
specifying river mileages, RET:7-21
statistical functions, RET:7-35,7-71
suppress printing of station listing, RET-.7-49
WQ-IND
11
-------
MSP program (continued)
trend maps, RET:7-107
x-axis keywords, RET:7-59,7-61,7-63
y-axis keywords, RET:7-33,7-39,7-55,7-57
MSPARMS keyword, RET:7-13
Mud samples (see Bottom samples)
MUL keyword, RET:7-35
Multiple station dip input, DE:4-15
Network, monitoring, establishing a, DE:1-1
NMIN keyword, RET:7-69
NOBOX keyword, RET:7-177
NOCONN keyword, RET:7-47
NOCOUN keyword, RET:6-69
NOLIST keyword, RET:7-49
NOPAR control cards
description of, RET:7-155
NOPAR program
automatic station list, RET:7-147
control cards, RET:7-145,7-155
description of, RET:7-147.
keywords special to, RET:7-145
manual station list, RET:7-147
required keywords, RET:7-153
sample output, RET:3-15
selected station and frequency file, RET:7-150,7-159
station mask file, RET:7-151,7-159
station retrieval file, RET:7-151,7-159
NOPARCDS keyword, RET:7-153
NOPAREND keyword, RET:7-153
NOPLOT keyword, RET:6-61
NOPOLAUX keyword, RET:7-199
NOPOLPLT keyword, RET:6-71
NORET keyword, RET:5-7
NOSELECT keyword, RET:5-5
NOSTATE keyword, RET:7-183
NOTRMK keyword, RET:7-45
NOTU keyword, RET:4-39
NOVERLAY keyword, RET:7-183
NUMLITE keyword, RET:7-81
ONEORG keyword, RET:7-213
ONLYU keyword, RET:4-39
OT file
format of records in, RET:7-271
output of MEAN program, RET:7-269
OUT keyword, RET:7-271
Overlays (see LOG program)
WQ-IND
12
-------
P card (see Parametric data storage cards)
P keyword, RET:4-49
P=n keyword, RET:7-143
Parameter code keyword, RET:4-49
Parameter codes
converting values of, RET:4-53
edit check values, WQ:B-3
equating, RET:5-9
listing by group, WQ:B-1
most popular, WQ:B-3
obtain listings of, WQ:B-2
requesting a new one, WQ:B-3
retrieving by, RET:4-49
weather related, WQ:B-16
Parametric data
changing already stored, DE:4-39
changing via ?01 procedure, DE:4-42
changing via ?04 procedure, DE:4-40
definition, FS:2-2
deleting, DE:4-44
deleting all, DE:4-46
deleting entire samples (?01), DE:4-50
deleting entire samples (?04), DE:4-48
deleting selected values (?01), DE:4-54
deleting selected values (?04), DE:4-52
deleting station location and, DE:4-45
example of changing (?01), DE:4-43
example of changing (?04), DE:4-41
example of deleting all, DE:4-47
example of deleting entire samples (?01), DE:4-51
example of deleting entire samples (?04), DE:4-49
example of deleting selected values (?01), DE:4-55
example of deleting selected values (?04), DE:4-53
example of deleting station location and, DE:4-45
example of storing (?01), DE:4-38
example of storing (?02), DE:4-13
example of storing (?03), DE:4-21
example of storing (?04), DE:4-30
exclude from calculations, RET:6-23
initial storing of, DE:4-7
retrieving, RET:4-49
retrieving by conditions of, RET:7-43
retrieving by range of value, RET:4-55
retrieving by sample date, RET:4-57,4-61
retrieving by sample time, RET:4-59
retrieving significance indicators, WQ-.J-6
storing significance indicators, WQ:J-2
storing via ?01 procedure, DE:4-31
storing via ?02 procedure, DE:4-7
storing via ?03 procedure, DE:4-15
storing via ?04 procedure, DE:4-23
types of, FS:2-3
WQ-IND
13
-------
Parametric data record
uniqueness of, DE:4-1, FS:2-4
Parametric data storage cards
AC card (?04), DE:4-24
continuation card (?04), DE:4-29
continuation D card (?02), DE:4-12
continuation D card (?03), DE:4-20
continuation P card (?02), DE:4-9
continuation P card (?03), DE:4-16
data (D) card (?02), DE:4-10
data (D) card (?03), DE:4-17
parameter (P) card (?02), DE:4-8
parameter (P) card (?03), DE:4-16
parametric data card (6 card) (?01), DE:4-32
SC card (?04), DE:4-25
PARF keyword, RET:4-53
PARONLY keyword, RET:4-51
PARU keyword, RET:4-53
Percentile (%TILEnT) keyword, RET:7-35
PGM keyword, RET:4-5
PHV keyword, RET:4-55
Pi keyword, RET:7-43
PLOT keyword
with MSP program, RET:7-31
with REG program, RET:7-135
PLOT program
description of, RET:6-55
DO saturation calculation, RET:6-55
keywords special to, RET:6-53
sample output, RET:3-7,6-56
scale of plot, RET:6-59
size of plot, RET:6-57
un-ionized ammonia calculation, RET:6-55
PLOTMSG keyword, RET:7-189
Plotting symbols
%TILEnT keyword, RET:7-36
area-shaded maps,'"RET: 7-99
AUXSYM keyword, RET:7-197,7-205
CALCOMP plotting symbols, table, RET:7-101
contour maps, RET:7-79
GRAPHNO keyword, RET:7-99
MAX, MIN, MUL keywords, RET:7-36
MEAN, M+nS keywords, RET:7-36
PLOT program, RET:6-57
point-plotted maps, RET:7-99
POINTS keyword, RET:7-79
REG program, RET:7-119
trend maps, RET:7-107,7-112
with LOG program, RET:7-197
with MSP program, RET:7-36,7-79,7-99
PLV keyword, RET:4-55
PM keyword, RET:5-9
Point-plotted maps, RET:7-91
POINTS keyword, RET:7-79
WQ-IND
14
-------
Polygon retrievals, RET:4-17
MSP contour maps, RET:7-87,7-89
POST keyword, RET:7-77
Precision codes, DE:3-8
Primary station code
storing, DE:3-5
retrieving, RET:4-13
Print control keywords
discussion of, RET:4-82
listing of, RET:4-81
Priority pollutants, RET:4-41
PRMI keyword, RET:4-89
PRT keyword, RET:4-83
PRV keyword, RET:4-55
PSA keyword, RET:6-7,6-81
PSI keyword, RET:6-81
PSO keyword, RET:6-81
PUNCH program
description of, RET:6-91
sample output, RET:3-12,6-92
PURP keyword, RET:4-7
required retrieval keyword, RET:2-5
typical values, RET:A4-1
PVS keyword, RET:6-81
QPREC card
storing significance indicators, WQ:J-1
QUALITY keyword, RET:7-141
QUALMAP keyword, RET:7-25
R keyword, RET:4-63
RANGCHK program, FS:3-10
Raw data
plotting of, RET:7-77
retrievals, RET:6-13,6-17
REG program
description of, RET:7-115
keywords special to, RET:7-113
plotting symbols, RET:7-119
quality standard line, RET:7-141
regression analyses, RET:7-115
required keywords, RET:7-113,7-133,7-135
sample output, RET:3-14,7-122,7-126,7-129
REGPARMS keyword, RET:7-133
Regression analyses
REG program, RET:7-115
Relative station pointer file (RSPF), FS:3-5
Relative station position, FS:3-2
WQ-IND
15
-------
Remark codes
EPA, RET:4-63
retrieving by, RET:4-63,7-45
table, DE:4-37
USGS, RET:A6-1
USGS and MSP, RET:7-45
Required keywords
by retrieval program, table, RET:A2-1
with MSP program, RET:7-9,7-13
with NOPAR program, RET:7-153
with REG program, RET:7-113,7-133,7-135
RES keyword, RET:7-75
Restrictors, RET:4-11
(see also Station restriction keywords)
RET program
description of, RET:6-13,7-221
keywords special to, RET:6-11,7-219
MORE= capability, RET:7-223
retrieving data stored with significance indicators, WQ:J-6
sample output, RET:3-4,6-14, WQ:J-7
Retrieval error messages, RET:A7-1
Retrieval identification keywords
listing of, RET:4-3
Retrieval keywords
advanced general, RET:5-1
examples of use (see individual keyword descriptions)
general, RET:4-1
program-specific (see individual program)
(see also General retrieval keywords)
Retrieval output
print layout diagram, RET:4-82
station header information, RET:2-9
Retrieval programs
advanced, list of, RET:7-1
ALLPARM, RET:6-17
basic, list of, RET:6-1
INDEX, RET:6-87
INVENT, INV120, RET:6-3
LOG (advanced functions), RET:7-171
LOG (basic functions), RET:6-63
MEAN (advanced functions), RET:7-267
MEAN (basic functions), RET:6-19
MSP, RET:7-3
NOPAR, RET:7-145
PLOT, RET:6-53
PUNCH, RET:6-91
REG, RET:7-113
RET (advanced functions), RET:7-219
RET (basic functions), RET:6-11
RETRIV, FS:3-11
SCAN, FS:3-11
STA, RET:6-89
WQ-IND
16
-------
Retrieval programs (continued)
STAND, RET:6-75
summary of, RET:2-4
types of, FS:5-3
Retrieval request
flow through STORET, FS:5-5,5-6
how to build a, RET:2-2
steps in building a, FS:5-2, RET:2-3
structure of a, FS:5-1
RETRIV program, FS:3-11
RIGHT keyword, RET:7-33
River basin codes, WQ:D-1
River mile index
definition, DE:2-1, FS:2-3
(see also River mileages)
River mile index cards
format of fields in, DE:3-9,3-ll
indicating levels in, DE:3-10,3-11
record layout form, DE:A2-1
River mile index file (RMIF), FS:3-4
River mileages
changing, DE:3-26,3-35
deleting, DE:3-32
printing, RET:4-89
retrieving by, RET:4-21
specifying, RET:7-21
storing, DE:3-9,3-11,3-18
RMI card (see River mile index cards)
RMI keyword, RET:4-21
RMK keyword, RET:7-45
S card, DE:A2-1
(see also Station card)
S keyword, RET:4-13
Sample depth
retrieving by, RET:4-67
specifying units of, RET:4-69
storing, 4-3,4-8,4-11,4-18,4-26,4-32
SAMSCL keyword, RET:7-57
SAMSTA keyword, RET:7-19
SAS statistical package, RET:7-243
MORE=, RET:7-223,7-243
SAVE keyword, RET:7-27
SAVEOUT keyword, RET:7-27
SC card
description of fields in, DE:4-25
SC keyword, RET:6-59
Scale control
with LOG program, RET:6-67
with MSP program, RET:7-51
WQ-IND
17
-------
SCALE keyword
with LOG program, RET:6-67,7-193
with MSP program, RET:7-53
SCAN program, FS:3-11
Secondary station code, DE:3-5
changing, DE-.3-23
SEG keyword, RET:7-41
SELECT keyword, RET:5-3
Selected station and frequency file (see NOPAR program)
Selectors, RET:4-11
(see also Station selection keywords)
Sewage treatment plants
sampling sites, WQ:E-1
SF keyword, RET:6-37
Shade maps, RET:7-7,7-91
examples of, RET:7-96
Significance indicators, WQ:J-1
changing, WQ:J-4
deleting, WQ:J-5
retrieving, WQ:J-6
storing, WQ:J-2
SHIFT keyword, RET:4-85
Single station DIP input, DE:4-7
SKPLESS keyword, RET:7-83
SOMSP file format, RET:7-27
SORT keyword, RET:6-27
SP keyword, RET:6-9
ST keyword, RET:4-35
STA program
description of, RET:6-89
sample output, RET:3-11,6-90
STAND program
compare values with limits, RET:6-79
description of, RET:6-77
keywords special to, RET:6-75
linear transformations, RET:6-85
sample output, RET:3-9,6-78
specifying output format of, RET:6-81
START keyword, RET:7-61
STAT keyword, RET:7-71
State and county file (STCOF), FS:3-3
State codes
listing of, WQ:C-1
retrieving by, RET:4-27,4-35,4-37
storing, DE:3-6,3-18
Station
definition, FS:2-1
deleting from STORET, DE:3-31
identifying within a retrieval request, FS:5-7
plot locations of, RET:6-65
retrieving by, RET:4-13
retrieving by masks of, RET:4-33,4-41
ways to identify, DE:2-1
WQ-IND
18
-------
Station card
description of fields in, DE:3-5
record layout form, DE:A2-1
Station codes
changing, DE:3-23
retrieving by, RET:4-13,6-89
storing, DE:3-5
Station header information
description of, RET:2-9
shifting of, RET:4-85
Station identification keywords
description of, RET:4-10
listing of, RET:4-9
Station linear plots, RET:7-7,7-59
Station location information
changing, DE:3-20
coding examples, DE:3-33
definition, FS:2-2
deleting, DE:3-31
initial storing of, DE:3-17
types of, FS:2-2
Station location storage cards
agency (A) card, DE:3-2
descriptive paragraph (5) cards, DE:3-15
formats of, DE:3-1
latitude/longitude (0) card, DE:3-7
location description (4) card, DE:3-14
major/minor basin (3) card, DE:3-12
record layout form, DE:A2-1
river mile index (1 and 2) cards, DE:3-9
station (S) card, DE:3-5
station type (T) card, DE:3-4
types Of, DE:2-4, FS:4-2
Station mask file (see NOPAR program)
Station restriction keywords
advanced restrictors, RET:5-3,5-5,5-7
listing of, RET:4-9
selection logic employed, FS:5-7, RET:4-11
Station retrieval file (see NOPAR program)
Station selection keywords
listing of, RET:4-9
selection logic employed, FS:5-7, RET:4-11
Station selection strategies, RET-.4-11, 4-12
Station type card
description of fields in, DE:3-4
record layout form, DE:A2-1
Station type codes, WQ:F-1
changing, DE:3-22
storing, DE:3-4,3-18
retrieving by, RET:4-41
Statistical functions, RET:6-37,7-7,7-35,7-71
WQ-IND
19
-------
Statistics
plotting of, RET:7-7,7-35
REG program, RET:7-117
using SAS and MORE=, RET:7-243
STC keyword, RET:4-27
STCNTY keyword, RET:4-37
STOPMSP keyword, RET:7-13
STOPREC keyword, RET:7-215
STOPREG keyword, RET:7-133
Storage procedures
decimal input, DE:4-4,4-5,4-7,4-15, FS:4-3
fixed field, DE:4-4,4-31, FS:4-2
significance indicators, WQ:J-2
type ?01, DE:4-4,4-31, FS:4-2
type ?02, DE:4-4,4-7, FS:4-3
type ?03, DE:4-5,4-15, FS:4-3
type ?04, DE:4-5,4-23, FS:4-4
types of, DE:4-4, FS:4-2
use by function, figure, FS:4-3
variable field, DE:4-5,4-23, FS:4-4
WQGSTOR, DE:4-5,4-23, FS:4-4
Storage programs
DIPMS, FS-.3-9
DISTRIBUTE, FS:3-8
EDITB, FS:3-9
ERROR, FS:3-10
GDIP, FS:3-9
list Of, FS:3-8
RANGCHK, FS:3-10
UPDATE, FS:3-10
WQGSTOR, FS:3-10
Storage request
flow of a, figure, FS:4-5
processing of a, DE:4-5, FS:4-4
structure of a, FS:4-1
STORET help data sets (see Help data sets)
Storing a new station, DE:3-17
example, DE:3-33
Storing parametric data (see Parametric data)
Stream loadings (see Loadings)
STREAMS keyword, RET:6-73
STRTREC keyword, RET:7-215
Suppress plotting of
box around plot, RET:7-177
contour map data, RET:7-77,7-93
county boundaries, RET:6-69
data outside of polygon, RET:7-87
data with trend maps, RET:7-105
miscoded stations, RET:7-179
polygon outline, RET:6-71
specified parameters, RET:6-61
state, county boundaries, RET:7-183
stations on mileage-linear plots, RET:7-22
WQ-IND
20
-------
Suppress plotting of (continued)
thin contour lines, RET:7-83
Suppress printing of
individual station summaries, RET:6-9
MEAN-generated calculations, RET:7-271
MSP-generated computations, RET:7-27
NOPAR raw data listing, RET:7-161
raw data values, RET:4-83
station header information, RET:4-83
station input listing, RET:7-49
SYM keyword, RET:6-57
SYMANG keyword, RET:7-103
SYMSIZE keyword, RET:7-103
Syntax rules for retrievals, RET:1-2
T card, DE:A2-1
(see also Station type card)
TAGS keyword, RET:6-73
Temperature conversions
ALLPARM program, RET:6-17
MEAN program, RET:6-21
Terminal major/minor basin, DE:3-9
Terminology used in Handbook, DE:2-3,4-2
TIME keyword, RET:7-137
Titling
LOG AUXFILE plots, RET:7-197
LOG, MSP plots, RET:7-5,7-191
MSP maps, RET:7-65
retrievals, RET:4-87
TLAT keyword, RET:7-191
TLONG keyword, RET:7-191
TPLOT keyword, RET:7-107
Trend maps, RET:7-107
example of, RET:7-109
TRNDNLY keyword, RET:7-105
TS keyword, RET:6-85
U keyword, RET:4-39
UD keyword, RET:4-67
UK keyword, RET:4-77
Un-ionized ammonia calculation
with ALLPARM program, RET:6-17
with MEAN program, RET:6-49
with MSP program, RET:7-15
with PLOT program, RET:6-55
UPDATE program, FS:3-10
WQ-IND
21
-------
Variable date groupings, RET:6-35
Variable format input procedure (see Storage procedures, type ?04)
VD keyword, RET:6-35
WQF processing programs, FS:3-8
WQGSTOR program, FS:3-10
WQGSTOR storage procedure (see Storage procedures, type ?04)
XMAX keyword, RET:7-139
YMAX keyword, RET:7-139
ZOOM keyword, RET:7-89
0 card, DE:3-7
1 card, DE:3-9
2 card, DE:3-11
208 areas
retrieving by, RET:4-31
3 card, DE:3-12
4 card, DE:3-14
5 card, DE:3-15
6 card, DE:4-32
7 card, RET:4-21
8 card, RET:4-22
9 card, RET:4-23
WQ-IND
22
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART
FK
FISH KILL FILE
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
WASHINGTON, D.C. 20460
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART
FK
FISH KILL FILE
This part of the STORET User Handbook describes
how to retrieve data from the Fish Kill File, the
STORET data file which contains information on
pollution-caused fish kills which have occurred
within the United States.
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
WASHINGTON, D.C. 20460
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
FK-1
FK-2
FK-3
Appendix
A
Subject
INTRODUCTION
REPORTING FISH KILL DATA
RETRIEVING FISH KILL DATA
3.1 The FKF Retrieval Procedure
3.2 The FKF Control Statements
3.3 Retrieval Examples
Subject
POLLUTION SOURCE CODES AND
SEVERITY CODES
Page
1-1
2-1
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-8
Page
A-l
FK
-------
STORE! USER HANDBOOK
PART
FK
FISH KILL FILE
CHAPTER
FK-1
INTRODUCTION
FK
-------
CHAPTER
FK-1
INTRODUCTION
The STORET Fish Kill File contains information on pollution-
caused fish kills that have occurred within the United States as
a result of a variety of industrial, municipal, agricultural, and
transportation-related operations. The fish kills are identified
by the body of water in which they occurred, by the identified
source of the pollution which caused the kill, by the duration
and severity of the kill, and by the estimated quantity and type
of fish killed.
Information on pollution-caused fish kills has been collected
since 1960 through the combined voluntary efforts of private
individuals; state fish and game, health, and conservation
officers; and water pollution control officials at the state and
Federal levels. All fish kill reports are reviewed and evaluated
by the Environmental Protection Agency in Washington, D.C. Once
entered into the Fish Kill File, this information is used to
compile an annual fish kill report, which is published and
disseminated to the general public by EPA.
Data within the Fish Kill File are also used to provide input to
various water pollution control programs, including comprehensive
river basin planning and water quality monitoring and
surveillance. The data provide a measure of the effects of water
pollution, as well as a means of identifying specific waterways
subject to either one-time or recurrent pollution problems.
The following two chapters describe, respectively, how fish kill
data are reported, and how fish kill data can be retrieved.
FK
1-1
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART
FK
FISH KILL FILE
CHAPTER
FK-2
REPORTING FISH KILL DATA
FK
-------
CHAPTER
FK-2
REPORTING FISH KILL DATA
A fish kill is usually first noticed by a fisherman, camper, or
sportsman, who as an interested and concerned private citizen,
reports the kill to a warden or other state official. In most
instances, the state agency sends trained investigators to
identify the cause and size of the kill. These specialists may
request the help of Environmental Protection Agency field
personnel to assist in on-site investigations, or to make
laboratory analyses of dead fish tissue samples. When water
pollution is determined or suspected to be the cause, the state
agency submits a report of the kill to EPA, using the EPA Form
#7500 shown in Figure 2-1.
Supplies of the fish kill report form are available at various
state agencies, such as game and fish departments or commissions,
water pollution control boards, or departments of conservation,
natural resources, or environmental protection. Complete
instructions on completing these forms are available at the
locations which have the forms. Completed reports are sent
directly to EPA Headquarters in Washington, D.C. Personnel from
EPA review these forms, and enter the reported fish kill data
into the STORET Fish Kill File. Fish kill data can then be
retrieved by EPA regional offices and state agencies utilizing
the retrieval procedures described in Chapter 3.
FK
2-1
-------
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
OFFICE OF WATER PLANNING AND STANDARDS
WASHINGTON. D.C. 20460
REPORT OF POLLUTION-CAUSED
FISH KILL
IA. LOCATION (Stream, Lake, Ocean, etc; Latitude-LongltudeJ
B. NEAREST TOWN AND COUNTY
C. STATE
Form Approved OMB No. /58-R0036
FOROWP USE ONLY
2. DATE OF KILL
3. TYPE OF WATER
[7J FRESH [~| SALT [JJ ESTUARY
4. POLLUTION SOURCE-TYPE OF OPERATION.
A. AGRICULTURAL OPER-
ATIONS
Q POISONS (Pesticides, etc;
| | FERTILIZERS
[~~] MANURE DRAINAGE, ENSI-
LAGE LIQUORS. OR FEED
LOT OPERATIONS
r~\ HANDLING OF EQUIPMENT
AND CONTAINERS
B. INDUSTRIAL OPERATIONS
|~1 MINING
| 1 CHEMICALS
1 1 FOOD AND KIN-
— ORED PRODUCTS
Q] TEXTILES
Q OTHER:
D. TRANSPORTATION OPERATIONS
Q RAIL Q TRUCK Q BARGE OR
n PIPE- n AIR BOAT
LINE
("71 METALS
| | PETROLEUM
1 t PAPER AND ALLIED
PRODUCTS
Q7J RUBBER AND PLASTICS
C. MUNICIPAL OPERA-
TIONS
| ] SEWERAGE SYSTEM
| | REFUSE DISPOSAL
[7J WATER SYSTEM
p j SWIMMING POOL
Q POWER (Public Service)
Q PEST CONTROL
E. CONSTRUCTION OR OTHER
[7J CONSTRUCTION
Q OTHER:
F.
Q UNKNOWN
G. SPECIFIC POLLUTANT OR FACTOR CHANGING WATER CHARACTERISTICS
(Name ol chemical, thermal discharge, etc.)
5. TYPE OF FISH KILL 6. EST. NO. KIL
GAME %
NON-GAME % 8. EXTENT OF A
,00 % A. M,L|LOF
COMMERCIAL %
-ED 7. SEVERITY
Q] TOTAL Q] HEAVY Q] MOD. | | LIGHT
REA AFFECTED 9. DURATION OF CRITICAL EFFECT
B. ACRES OF A. DAYS B. HOURS
LAKE
10. ADDITIONAL REMARKS (Include effects on other than marine lilt, e.g., shell/lsh, waterfowl, ale)
11. REPORTING OFFICIAL 12. AGEI
JCY MAILING ADDRESS 13. DATE OF
REPORT
INSTRUCTIONS: Upon completion fold card to show proper address and staple or tape long
edge together.
FIGURE 2-1
REPORT OF POLLUTION-CAUSED FISH KILL
FK
2-2
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART
FK
FISH KILL FILE
CHAPTER
FK-3
RETRIEVING FISH KILL DATA
FK
-------
CHAPTER
FK-3
RETRIEVING FISH KILL DATA
STORET users may retrieve data from the Fish Kill File (FKF)
utilizing a retrieval procedure provided by STORET User
Assistance personnel. Retrieval requests may be submitted via
either a keyboard type terminal or a remote job entry (RJE)
terminal, with output returned to the terminal or routed to a
high speed printer at the computer center for subsequent delivery
to the user. The following paragraphs describe this retrieval
process in more detail.
3.1 THE FKF RETRIEVAL PROCEDURE
The STORET help data set named FKRETRV contains the job control
language (JCL) statements needed to submit any retrieval request
to the Fish Kill File. A listing of this data set as of the time
of publication of this document is shown in Figure 3-1. The JCL
statements of this data set are subject to change from time to
time; consequently, users should always utilize this data set
(which will always contain the current, correct version), as
opposed to using a previously saved copy of the data set.
To build an FKF retrieval, users need to specify the appropriate
control statements required in two places of the data set (lines
400 and 900 of the version shown in Figure 3-1). First,
following the //RETRV.CARDF DD * JCL statement can be one or more
fish kill control statements, which have a 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 coded
in column one. The uses and formats of these control statements
are described in detail in section 3.2. Second, following the
//LIST.CDF DD * JCL statement, the user may specify an
alphanumeric expression which will appear as the title of the
output generated by the retrieval.
The Terminal Procedures chapter (WQ-TERM) in Part WQ describes in
detail how to submit retrieval requests using a terminal, and how
to retrieve output generated by the requests.
All of these changes to the data set can be performed easily and
quickly via the editing facility offered by the WCC computer
services vendor.
FK
3-1
-------
100 // EXEC.FKSTORET,DSNME='CN.EPANSH.NWQS.CURRENT.FISHKILL.MASTER',
200 // VOL=OSRAM1,PRINT=A
300 //RETRV.CARDF DD * ';.
400 USER-SUPPLIED INPUT
500 //SORT.SYSIN DD *
600 SORT FIELDS=(2,?,CH,A)
700 /*
800 //LIST.CDF DD *
900 USER-SUPPLIED TITLING INFORMATION
1000 /*
FIGURE 3-1
THE STORET HELP DATA SET NAMED FKRETRV
3.2 THE FKF CONTROL STATEMENTS
In building FKF retrievals, users may select from five FKF
control statements or cards, which retrieve fish kill data
according to the following retrieval criteria:
Control Statement Retrieves By
2 State, Major/Minor Basin Codes
3 State, City Codes
4 State Codes
5 Major/Minor Basin Codes
6 Period-Of-Record, Pollution Cause
Codes, State Codes
The formats of these FKF control statements are detailed on the
following pages.
FK
3-2
-------
THE FKF CONTROL STATEMENT 2 (2 CARD)
123456789x123456789x123456789x123456789x123456789x123456789x123456789x12345678"x
2STMAMI
column 1
columns 2-3
columns 4-5
columns 6-7
Card Type Code
The number '2', signifying that fish kill
data are to be retrieved according to the
state and major/minor basin codes specified.
This code is required.
State Code (ST)
One of the two-digit numerical Federal
Information Processing Standards (FTPS)
state codes indicating the desired state or
state equivalent for which fish kill data
are to be retrieved. These codes are listed
in Appendix C to the WQF Part. If this
field is left blank, fish kill data on all
states will be retrieved, unless a major
basin code is specified. A leading zero
must be specified.
Major Basin Code (MA)
One of the two-digit numerical major river
basin codes (as defined by EPA and as listed
in Appendix D to the WQF Part) for which
fish kill data are to be retrieved. If this
field is left blank, fish kill data will be
retrieved according to the state code
specified, if any. A leading zero must be
specified.
Minor Basin Code (MI)
One of the two-digit numerical minor river
basin codes (as defined by EPA and as listed
in Appendix D to the WQF Part) for which
fish kill data are to be retrieved. This
field can be specified only if the major
basin code field is specified. If this
field is left blank, fish kill data will be
retrieved for all minor basins within the
major basin specified. A leading zero must
be specified.
FK
3-3
-------
THE FKF CONTROL STATEMENT 3 (3 CARD)
123456789xl23456789xl23456789xl23456789xl23456789xl23456789x123456789x123456789X
3STCITY#STCITy#STCITY#STCITY#STCITY#STCITY|STCITY#STCITY#STCITY#STCITY#STCITY#
column 1
columns 2-3,
9-10, 16-17,
23-24, 30-31,
37-38, 44-45,
51-52, 58-59,
65-66, 72-73
columns 4-8,
11-15, 18-22,
25-29, 32-36,
39-43, 46-50,
53-57, 60-64,
67-71, 74-78
Card Type Code
The number '3', signifying that fish kill
data are to be retrieved according to the
state and city codes specified. This code
is required.
State Code (ST)
From one to eleven of the two-digit numerical
Federal Information Processing Standards
(FIPS) state codes indicating the desired
state or states for which fish kill data are
to be retrieved. These codes are listed
in Appendix C to the WQF Part. If no state
code is specified, fish kill data on all
states will be retrieved, and printed in
state alphabetic order. Leading zeros must
be specified. If multiple state codes are
specified, they must be specified in
ascending state code order.
City Code (CITY#)
From one to eleven of the five-digit numerical
city codes indicating the desired city or
cities for which fish kill data are to be
retrieved. A copy of the City Master Directory
containing the thousands of codes
established for U.S. cities is maintained
at EPA Headquarters in Washington, D.C. A
city code must be specified for each state
code specified. Leading zeros must be
specified. A city code can be specified
only if a corresponding state code is
specified in the immediately preceding two
columns. Multiple city codes for each state
code must be specified in ascending city
code order within state code.
FK
3-4
-------
THE FKF CONTROL STATEMENT 4 (4 CARD)
column 1 Card Type Code
The number '4', indicating that fish kill data
are to be retrieved according to the state
code(s) specified. This code is required.
columns 2-3, State Code (ST)
4-5, 6-7,
8-9, 10-11, From one to 39 two-digit numerical Federal
12-13, 14-15, Information Processing Standards (FIPS)
state codes indicating the desired state or
states for which fish kill data are to be
retrieved. These codes are listed in
68-69, 70-71, Appendix C to the WQF Part. If no state
72-73, 74-75, code is specified, fish kill data on all
76-77, 78-79 states will be retrieved, printed in
alphabetic order by state. Leading zeros
must be specified. If multiple state codes
are specified, they must be specified in
ascending state code order.
FK
3-5
-------
THE FKF CONTROL STATEMENT 5 (5 -CARD)
123456789x123456789x123456789x123456789x123456789xl23456789xl23456789xl23456789x
5 MAMIMAMIMAMIMAMIMAMIMAMIMAMIMAMIMAMIMAMIMAMIMAMIMAMIMAMIMAMIMAMIMAMIMAMIMAMI
column 1
columns 2-3,
6-7, 10-11,
14-15, 18-19,
54-55, 58-59,
62-63, 66-67,
70-71, 74-75
columns 4-5,
8-9, 12-13,
16-17, 20-21,
56-57, 60-61,
64-65, 68-69,
72-73, 76-77
Card Type Code
The number '5', indicating that fish kill
data are to be retrieved according to the
major or major/minor basin codes specified.
This code is required.
Major Basin Code (MA)
From one to nineteen two-digit numerical
major river basin codes (as defined by
EPA and as listed in Appendix D to the
WQF Part) for which fish kill data are
to be retrieved. If multiple major
basin codes are specified, they must
be specified in ascending major basin
code sequence. Leading zeros must be
specified. If no major basin code is
specified, fish kill data from all major
basins will be retrieved, and printed in
ascending major basin code order.
Minor Basin Code (MI)
From one to nineteen two-digit numerical
minor river basin codes (as defined by EPA
and as listed in Appendix D to the WQF Part)
for which fish kill data are to be retrieved,
If no minor basin code is specified for a
specified major basin code, fish kill data
will be retrieved for all minor river basins
within the major river basin. A minor basin
code can be specified only if a
corresponding major basin code is specified
in the immediately preceding two columns.
If multiple minor basin codes are specified
for a single major basin code (i.e., a major
basin code is repeated), they must be
specified in ascending minor basin code
sequence. Leading zeros must be specified.
FK
3-6
-------
THE FKF CONTROL STATEMENT 6 (6 CARD)
6BY EY
PCPCPCPCPCPCPCPCPCPC
STSTSTSTSTSTSTSTSTST
column 1
columns 2-3
columns 5-6
columns 12-31
columns 37-56
Card Type Code
The number '6', indicating that fish kill
data are to be retrieved according to the
years, pollution cause codes, and/or state
codes specified. This code is required.
Beginning Year (BY)
The last two digits of the beginning year for
which fish kill data are to be retrieved.
Data will be retrieved beginning with
January 1 of the specified year. This field
must be coded. Note that column 4 is blank.
Ending Year (EY)
The last two digits of the ending year for
which fish kill data are to be retrieved.
Data will be retrieved through December 31 of
the specified year. This field must be coded,
Pollution Cause Codes (PC)
A string of up to ten two-digit numerical
pollution cause codes for which fish kill
data are to be retrieved. The codes may be
specified in any order. The string must
begin in column 12 and must not contain any
embedded blanks. If no pollution cause
codes are specified, all fish kill data will
be retrieved regardless of pollution cause.
A list of pollution cause codes is provided
as an appendix to this part.
State Codes (ST)
A string of up to ten two-digit numerical
state codes for which fish kill data are to
be retrieved. The string must begin in
column,37, with no embedded blanks. If no
state codes are specified, fish kill data
will be retrieved for all states. Leading
zeros must be specified. A listing of state
codes is provided in Appendix C, WQF Part.
FK
3-7
-------
3.3 RETRIEVAL EXAMPLES
The following retrieval examples illustrate the use of several of
the FKF control cards with the STORET help data set named
FKRETRV. In each example, the listing of the.FKRETRV data set is
followed by a page of the output produced by the retrieval.
Although much of the information contained within the retrieval
output should be self-explanatory, some may not be to those
unfamiliar with fish kill data. Cause codes and severity codes
are explained in the appendix to this part. Values listed under
the Area Affected column are expressed in miles (M) or acres (A);
and the duration of the kill is expressed in days (DA) or hours
(HR) .
Included in each FKF retrieval output are 1) a listing of the
pollution cause codes (which appears on a separate page at the
beginning of the report), 2) a summary count of the number of
kills reported (which appears on a single line at the end of the
report, and 3) a summary of all kills reported which consisted of
more than 100,000 fish (which appears at the end of the report).
FK
3-8
-------
EXAMPLE 1
Retrieve all available fish kill data for the State of Ohio (FTPS
code 39).
A copy of the modified FKRETRV data set used to retrieve this
data is shown below. The following three pages show several pages
of the output generated by this retrieval.
lOu // EXEC FKSTORET,DSNME='CN.EPANSH.NWQS.CURRENT.FISHKILL.MASTER1,
200 // VOL=OSKAM1,PRIMT=A
300 //RETRV.CARDF DD *
400 439
bOO //SORT.SYSIN DD *
bOO SORT FIELDS=(2,7,CH,A)
700 /*
BOO //LIST.CDF DD *
900 RETRIEVING FISH KILL DATA VIA THE 4 CARD
1000 /*
FK
3-9
-------
HAJCR KILLS — 100,000 OE CVES
LAKE OR STREAK
*** *
LICKING RIVER
SANDUSKY RIVER
U EH HURON RIVER
GREATER KIAfll RI
PORTAGE RIVER
NUSKINGUn RIVER
KOPP CR
BEND FK CR
GREAT BIABI R
BASSIE CR
RAtAB CR
ELANCHARD R1VEB
LAKE EBIE
GRAND R
LAKE ERIE
LAKE ERIE
BAUB EE R
TEN BILE CR
BAUBEE RIVER
SCIOTO B
GREAT BIABI R
GREAT BIABI RIVE
CRANE CBEEK
CBANBEBBY CR
BLANCHABD R
SASDUSKY RIVER
SANDUSKY R
GB BIABI R
LITTLE CREEK
HDL BR PORTAGE R
I SALT CREEK
NcAl. Ob IN
LICKING CO
SANDUSKY CO
HURCN CO
BUTLER CO
OTTAWA CO
BUSK1NGU.1 CO
AUGLA12E CO
II £L SO NT CO
BUTLEH CO
JSEENE CO
HANCOCK CU
HANCOCK CO
LAKE CO
LAKE CO
LAKE CO
LAKi. CO
LUCAS CO
LUCAS CO
BAIUON CO
BONTGOBEHY CC
HEW BIABI
OTTAWA CO
PUT BAB CO
PUT NAB CU
SANDUSKY CO
SANDUSKY CO
SHELBY CO
UNION
WOOD COUNTY
ZANESVILLE 0
STATc
OHIO
OHIO
OHIC
OHIO
OHIO
OHIO
OHIO
OHIO
OHIO
OHIO
OHIO
0.1 10
OHIO
OHIC
OHIC
OHIC
OHIO
OHIO
OHIO
OHIO
OHIC
OHIO
OHIO
OHIC
OHIO
OHIO
OHIC
OHIO
OHIO
OHIO
OHIC
YEAR
1 9 b 7 ,
'96b
196d
1 *bb
1 Jt>u
1 9b6
1 900
1975
1972
197b
197?
'97a
1 965
' 1977
1972
1972
197o
1971
197J
19b5
197U
1971
1964
1965
1972
197B
1965
197U
1977
1962
1969
1960
N LI a D E I-. OF
f ISH
J Ou ,
1«4,
250,
195,
319,
1 j 7 t
'ob.
1 12,
U5.
l,07d,
J 1 7
2,SHO]
1,2«5,
bib.
376,
27b,
261,
12,
05,
36,
2B ,
33,
300,
179,
7b3
5o5
U2b
130
092
Obb
-j tb
oOt,
OH7
750
39U
37k
559
099
UoO
000
651
U18
322
07b
9bO
968
390
1 19
522
246
171
d03
061
389
>.PtoATlCJ
HETALJ
FC.Lt
?ETBOLi.Ua
CHEB1CALS
CTi:EEi IS[;UblIilAL
PAPER phODUCTJ
UhKNOWN
JEiiaAJi. SYSTEM
t-EFUsi. UIS?CJAL
TBUCK 1 hAN SPORT A'iiUN
KCCD PnOUOCTS
SiittiA.IE SYS1E.1
PC.EK
CnEniCA I.S
POI.ER
PC'.ES
PETBCLtUn
SE.EBAUE SYSIEB
SEWERAGE SYSTEB
SEWERAui: SYSTEB
CCBBINATION
FOOD PRODUCTS
CTHEB OPERATIONS
FCOD PRODUCTS
SEWERAGE SYSIEB
SEWEhAJE SYSTEB
SEWERAJt SYSTtfl
UNKNOWN
PIPELINE TRANSPORTATION
BINING
FIGURE 3-2a
OUTPUT FROM EXAMPLE 1
FK
3-10
-------
RETRIEVING PISH KILL DATS VIA THE u CAEO
BIVEB OR LAKE
OHIO
GB MIABI R
LT BEAB CR
IB JOHN HOLE CR
WOLF CBEEK
GREATER BIABI BI
SPUING DITCH
BIAHI BIVEB
niANI GIVES
HOLES CREEK
GBEATEB HIABI BI
BUSKISGUI1 RIVEB
ALLEN BUN
BUSKINGUB R
TR-BIG OLIVE Cl
HUSKINGUB a
KCFOS1NG RIVER
WHETSTONE CR
INDIGO CB
TB-N BB KOKOSING
TBIB W BRANCH
KCKOSING RIVEB
THORN GUN
WHETSTCNE CREEK
BIG RUN CHEEK
nUSKINGUFI BIVE6
LICKING RIVER
CHAPS RUN
BUSKINGU.l I!
THCBESON BUN
flAHTLETT RUN
WAKATOBIKA CR
WASATOBIKA CB
EACCOON CREEK
GREAT BIABI RIVE
BABREL 3UN
1 FK L BIAfll RIV
PANTHER CREEK
EUFPALO CR
1 BR CUCK CR
E FK DUCK CR
U FK DUCK CR
DUCK CREEK
TR-N FK BUFFALO
HUI-ON FIVER
NCEWALK CHtEK
CBJNE CREEK
PORTAGE HIVER
CITY OR TOWN
BCNTGOBERY CO
BONTGOBEBY CO
RCNTGOBtlflY CO
SCNTGOBEBY CO
BCNTGOBERY CO
BCNTGOfliiBY CO
BCNTGOrtEBY CO
BCNTGOBEBJ CO
BCNTGOBERY CO
BONTGOBEBY CO
flOEGAN COUNTY
BORGAN CO
BORGAN CO
nORGAN CO
BOEGAN CO
BORROW CO
BORROW CO
BOEBCW CO
BORROW CO
BORROW CO
SORROW COUNTY
BT GILIAD
BT G1LEAD
BU SKIN GUM CO
BUSKINGUB CO
BUSK1NGUB CO
BUSKINGUn CO
nusKiNGUn co
KUSKINGUH CO
BUSK1NGUB CO
flU SKIN GUM CO
BUSKlNliUa CO
NEkARK
NEW BIAB1
NEH flILFOHD
NKti VIENNA
NEWTOUN
NOELE CO
NOELE CO
NOBLE CO
NOPLE CO
NOBLE COUNTY
NOHU CO
NOR WALK
NORWALK 0
OTTAWA CO
OTTAWA COUNTY
HM
12
8
8
3
9
7
7
E
6
7
10
11
10
4
10
12
7
2
5
10
b
U
9
7
9
9
3
8
7
10
a
Q
6
7
5
9
9
9
10
9
8
9
y
9
6
9
4
A1
C.E
29
ie
1 1
18
23
19
26
20
15
31
13
04
27
23
oe
i 1
oe
22
23
01
1 1
01
04
13
13
02
25
20
23
oe
OK
12
14
13
1«
0!
29
1C
01
28
23
OS
26
13
20
1C
; 1
YY
78
78
69
69
67
67
65
65
67
67
69
71
71
77
73
65
78
75
77
71
69
62
63
65
65
69
71
71
71
73
74
76
63
t>4
62
62
6 1
73
73
71
71
65
78
61
60
65
b9
CAUSE TYPE
CODE *GABE tNON-GABE
12 -
50 -
31
90 -
90 -
31 -
31
J5 -
90 -
90 -
26 -
25 -
90 -
25 -
90 -
13 -
13 -
11'-
90 -
90 -
13 -
90 -
31 c-0> SOi
50 -
21 -
90 -
28
90 -
21 -
28 -
31 -
31 -
24 5* 951
27 U 99S
28 5> 95»
28 1 J » bj%
•to - y n \
21
21 -
21 -
21 -
31
25 -
28 3 » 9o»
50 30» 70»
22 -
26 -
-OB.1EECIAL tSTIBAThD
'1SH LOSS (*| FISH KILLED
13
6,687
60
U
30,213
20
1,420
11,250
30
3
8.000
1,295
1,000
215
11
',2ob
0,775
18
90
3
2, 33
0
2,52
37
1, JU
US
-
1)5.1=09
Ib, 741
300
25
20
150
7,odn,')bO
eoo
juV 13,bb9
2» 260
40
2,235
-U,b78
2^4
b94
4 , ^ != 2
!\ AJ.JOO
^7S,-,b8
Ub
SEVERITY AREA D 8
l| (21 (3] (4) AFFECTED A S
4 _ -
-
_
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
_
_
-
4 _ _
- - -
..
,4 _ -
-
-
-
•4 t-.l
J -
_
-
-
-
-
-
- -
-
-. .."
I*
3 j.r -
3 j"
j
-
-
-
_
-
-
- "
- "
-
FIGURE 3-2b
OUTPUT FROM EXAMPLE 1
FK
3-11
-------
NUflBER Of FISH KILL REPORTS 1968-1967*
STATES JAN MB BAR APR HAY JU» JUL AUG SEP OCT »OV DEC TC1AL
OHIO 29 28 29 U2 123 169 211 215 220 119 55 20 1300
*••• TOTALS 29 28 29 U2 123 109 211 215 220 119 55 20 1300
•DATA FSOfl JUNE THRU DECEN8EH, I960 HAS BEEN EICLUDED.
TABLi 9—FISH KILL GBOUPING BY SIZE — 1S67
NUHBER OF FISH TOTAL BEPOBTED FISH KILLED
KILLED BY SIZE GBCUP BEPOBTS NC . OF BEPOB1S NO. OF FISH
1 - 1,000 78E 788 171,811
1,000 - 10,000 270 270 942,601
10,000 - 100,000 129 129 4,118,100
100,000 - 1,000,000 2S 29 6,976,899
>=1,000,000 5 5 15,673,255
UKKNOWN 79 18 15,012
**TOTAL 1,300 1,239 27,897,678
FIGURE 3-2c
OUTPUT FROM EXAMPLE 1
FK
3-12
-------
EXAMPLE 2
Retrieve all fish kill data for the State of Ohio that occurred
from 1974 through 1976.
The FKRETRV data sets below illustrate the use of the 6 card to
retrieve fish kill data by date of kill. A page of the output
generated by this retrieval appears on the next page. Note that
the kills are listed alphabetically by county.
lUU // EXEC FKSTORET,DSNME='CN.EPANSH.NwQS.CURRENT.FISHKILL.MASTER1,
200 // VOL=OSRAM1,PRINT=A
3UO //RETRV.CARDF UD *
4UU b74 7b 3y
5UU //SORT.SYSIN DD *
bUO SOKT FIELDS=(2,7,CH,A)
70U /*
600 //LIST.CDF DU *
9UU RETRIEVING FISH KILL .DATA VIA THE 6 CARD
1UOO /*
FK
3-13
-------
RETRIEVING F ISH K 1
R 1 Vf R OR L AKE
OHIO
LT THREE-PILE CR
FLAT ROCK CR
S1I PILE CR
1R-RA1TLESMKE C
OTTAWA R
RILE1 CR
SI> PILE CR
1RIB L RILEV CR
BLACK CR
•SKTABULA R
PILL CR
PCCOLGAL PR
MJCKING R
FOLR MILE CR
KOPP CR
PIAPI ERIE CAKAl
PIAP1 ERIE CANAL
AUGLAUE R
•UGLAIZE R
TRIB WHEEL IKG CR
CAP1INA CR
BEND FORK CR
BEND FK CR
STERLING RLN
FOUR PILE CR
GREAT (MAPI R
GREAT PKPI R
GREAT P1AHI R
GREAT PKPI R
CICK! CR
GREAT PIAPI R
GREAT MIAMI R
GREAT PKPI R
TRIB PILL CK
UILLCU PL*
ANDERSON Ct
TREACLE CR
BUCK CR'
LT PIAPI R
BUCK CR
BUCK CR
PUO RUN
IT PKPI R
LI P1AHI R
LT H1AH1 R
PAD P
IR-LT HUM R
LL CAIA VIA THE 6
C 1 T 1 OR TOWN
AOAPS CO
WARREN CD
ALLEN CO
ALLEN CO
ALLEN CO
ALLEN CO
ALLEN CO
ALLEN CC
ASHIABULA CC
ASMABULA co
ASHIABULA CO
ATHENS CO
ATHENS CC
ATHENS CO
AUGLAI2E CO
ALCLMZE CO
AUGIAI2E CO
AUGLAI2E CO
AUGLAI2E CO
BELPONT CO
BELPONT CO
BELPON1 CO
BELPONT CO
BROUN CO
BUTLER CO
BUTLER CC
BUTLER CO
BUTLER CO
BUTLER CO
6LTLER CO
BLUER CC
BUTLER CO
BLTLER CC
BUTLER CO
CARROLL CO
CHAPPAlGN CO
CHAMPAIGN CO
CLARK CO
CLARK CO
CLARK CO
CLARK CO
CLARK CO
CLARK CO
CLASK CO
CLARK CO
CLARK CO
CLARK CO
CARC
1
PP
1
5
«
6
t
7
7
2
6
5
4
e
e
2
6
C
e
t
s
*
7
7
1]
9
S
1C
12
7
4
2
S
S
11
4
e
7
3
6
11
1C
6
t
<;
7
12
7
AT 1
00
06
07
05
22
25
ie
12
04
OS
IS
24
OS
07
11
23
21
31
II
2C
IS
2C
OS
IS
09
13
13
2P
22
21
22
1 3
1C
07
17
OS
17
2C
02
It
12
04
02
12
04
2S
1C
»1
76
76
76
76
76
74
74
75
74
75
76
76
75
74
75
75
75
75
76
75
75
74
74
76
76
76
76
76
76
76
76
76
76
75
75
74
74
74
74
74
74
75
75
7 *
75
75
76
CODE >GAPE 1KCN-GII-E
35 -
12
26 -
31
31
31
90 -
42
so-
il
31 -
11
21
50 -
90 -
90 -
90 -
31 -
90 -
42
21 - -
31 -
31
90 -
31
26
90 -
32
32
26 -
32
32 -
26
42 -
25
13
13
90
9C -
SO
90
90 -
25
25 -
12
31
13
CCI'f'tSClAL ESTIMATED 5
FISH 1055(11 MSt KHLfC 111
22
968
*75
11.9B2
M9
•34
745
3
2C1
4.176
160
• • 4,37?
2\
4.135
112.966
172
5,S««
3,7*3
2S|
33
239
15
10
in
^,746
e?9
9
1.C7P.C47
IP. 141
5
»38
S.t36
f»P
76
19
2PO
64.676
150
JOO
120
?CO
4?
1
51
3,345
fi.217
5.P43
2H3H4) AFFECTED A
.
,
_
.
_
.
-
4 - •
.
.
-
-
4
_
.
-
-
-
_
«
-
-
_
.
_
-
_
- - -
-
.
_
-
...
_
4
_
.
-
-
_
...
4
-
.
-
-
•
K
_
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
*
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
•
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
~
-
-
-
-
-
~
-
.-
*
-
-
FIGURE 3-3
OUTPUT FROM EXAMPLE 2
FK
3-14
-------
EXAMPLE 3
Retrieve fish kill data for the Kentucky River minor basin within
the Ohio River major basin.
The copy of the FKRETRV data set below shows the use of the 5
card to retrieve fish kill data via river basins. A page of the
output generated by this retrieval is shown on the next page.
100 // EXEC FKSTORET,DSNME='CM.EPANSH.NwQS.CURRENT.FISHKILL.MASTER',
200 // VOL=OSRAM1,PRINT=A
300 //RETRV.CARDF DO *
400 b0514
500 //SORT.SYSIN DD *
bOO SORT FIELDS=(2,/,CH,A)
700 /*
bOO //LIST.CDF DD *
9UO RETRIEVING FISH KILL DATA VIA THE 5 CARD
1000 /*
FK
3-15
-------
RETRIEVING FISH KILL DATA VIA THE 5 CAFD
BIVER UR LAKE
KENTUCKY
OLD FIELD BRANCH
YELLOU CB
YELLOW CR
IELLOU CR
nUDDI BR C LT XI
RANDCOCK CREEK
SEXTON CH
COLLINS FK
HEfiRIBGTOH LA
CASCNS CR
FABfl FOND
F HOODS FAGH PD
BEBRINGTON LA
OUENS BR
nUHCTS CR
UUBTS CR
BID FK KI R
FLACKEI CR
HID PR-KENTUCKY
JESSAniNE CB
TR-HABBONDS CR
TB-H FK ELKHORN
KI CERESEARCH PD
yilLGBEEN LA
SILVEB CBEEK
COLLINS FORK
HOBSE E GOOSE CR
BIG GOOSE CREEK
BED BIBD RIVEB
BOfSE CREEK
L/BIG GOOSE CR
BED BIBD BIVEB
SBITON CB
LT SEXTON CR
GOOSE CB
BULLSKIN CBEEK
LITTLE GOOSE CB
STEVENS CBEEK
SBOOTH CR
BED BIBD BIVEB
SEXTON CBEEK
SBITON CBEEK
B1IGIHG POBK CB
ST ASAPH CR
ST AS1PH CBEEK
LEATBEBWOOD CB
CITY OR TOliN
BEAR BRANCH
BELL
BELL
BELL
CABPBEU.SBUBG
CLABK COUNTY
CLAY t; OWSLEY C
CLAY
LANViLLE
FABLER
FBANKFOET
FRANKLIN CO
GARRABD
HAZARD
HYDEN
HICEN
HYDEN
HYDEN
HYDEN
JESS AH IKE CO
L1UHENCEBURG
LEXINGTON
LEXINGTON
HADISON
BADISON CO
BA8CHESTEB
flANCHESTEB
MANCHESTER
IUNCHESTEB
BANCUESTER
BANCHESTEB
BANCHESTEB
BANCdESTEB
BANCUESTEB
nAHCUESTEB
BABCHESTEB
IUBCHBSTEB KY
OVENTON
PBBIUUB
BOABK
SEXTON
SEXTON
STABDPOBD
STANFOBD
STANFOBD
SENTZ
DATE
fin CD YY
J
9
9
9
4
5
10
10
d
6
5
7
1
4
5
5
u
7
11
8
6
B
5
5
11
e
7
11
7
9
10
6
7
8
9
5
12
7
11
6
6
7
5
9
a
6
01
23
22
20
01
20
0«
03
08
10
20
02
3C
1J
26
07
oa
19
-
21
22
02
05
OS
17
12
29
02
21
16
11
03
Of
09
ie
30
1«
20
01
16
09
02
28
11
22
01
7U
72
72
72
78
70
72
72
7tf
75
78
7d
72
76
76
11
78
78
68
71
78
77
78
72
71
66
66
69
62
62
61
61
71
76
78
61
60
69
78
67
71
71
69
73
71
78
CAUSE
CODE
90
it
20
20
13
28
21
21
50
21
90
90
90
25
25 ,
90
02
21
21
26
27
26
11
90
31
21
21
21
50
21
21
28
21
90
90
21
21
22
21
90
21
21
01
31
11
21
TYPi COHHEBCIAL
*GABE »»ON-GAnE FISH LOSS(t)
-
-
50J
-
-
-
U
-
50*
-
-
11
-
-
-
-
OOJ
-
2*
51
1001
-
-
101
10«
-
201
101
51
121
5*
3*
00»
-
151
75%
7*
-
5*
201
501
10«
-
-
-
501
-
-
-
99*
-
-
-
-
991
-
-
100*
100%
601
-
8«l
95*
-
-
-
90S
90S
-
201
801
101
70*
95*
97*
60*
-
20*
25*
93*
-
95*
80S
50*
90*
-
100*
-
-
-
_
-
-
-
-
50 %
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
10*
-
-
-
-
-
_
-
60S
10*
85*
18*
_
-
-
-
65S
25S
23 S
-
-
-
25*
-
-
ESIlHATtD SEVEB1TY AREA U
USH KILLED (1)(2| |3)(4) AFFECTED A
2
15
10
25
1,bOO 1
• -
19,395
25
400 U
1
25 U
<*00 3
20
1.286 2
-
1
200 3
2.8U1I 3
1
<*
6,965 2
9,602 2
000 3
300
30,598 1
2
0,500 2
2
1
2,000 3
3
2
46,592 2
0,286 1
200 3
3
1
29,001 1
5,610 1
-
0
10,000 1
29,203 1
10,005 2
6,506 2
1,287 1
2n
15B
15H
1311
IB
2B
20n
1«
1A
6B
21
5A
-
IB
2B
2B
10B
2B
60
1B
2B
IB
31
-
28
3B
-
17B
1B
-
SB
2B
8B
IB
2B
IB
3(1
11B
6B
3B
IB
10B
15B
2B
1fl
IB
2
-
2
-
-
-
2
-
-
-
-
1
-
1
-
1
1
1
-
2
-
~
2
2
-
5
0
1
10
-
2
1
-
1
1
5
3
1
1
2
6
2
1
H
U
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
8
-
~
-
-
-
-
—
7
-
.
-
-
-
-
-
.
-
-
-
-
~
-
-
-
_
_
-
5
FIGURE 3-4
OUTPUT FROM EXAMPLE 3
FK
3-16
-------
EXAMPLE 4
The two FKRETRV data sets below illustrate the use of the 2 and
cards to retrieve fish kill data by basin within state and by
city code within state.
100 // EXEC FKSTORET,DSNME='CN.EPANSH.NWQS.CURRENT.FISHKILL.MASTER1
200 // VOL=OSRAM1,PRINT=A
300 //RETRV.CARDF DD *
400 23905
500 //SORT.SYSIN DD *
bOO SORT FIELDS=(2,7,CH,A)
700 /*
000 //LIST.CDF DD *
900 RETRIEVING FISH KILL DATA VIA THE 2 CARD
1000 /*
100 // EXEC FKSTORET,DSNME='CN.EPANSH.NWQS.CURRENT.FISHKILL.MASTER1,
20U // VGL=OSRAM1,PRINT=A
300 //RETRV.CARDF DD *
400 339U2346
500 //SORT.SYSIN DD *
bOO SORT FIELDS=(2,7,CH,A)
7UO /*
bOO //LIST.CDF DD *
900 RETRIEVING FISH KILL DATA VIA THE 3 CARD
1000 /*
FK
3-17
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART
FK
FISH KILL FILE
APPENDIX
A
POLLUTION SOURCE CODES AND SEVERITY CODES
FK
-------
APPENDIX A: POLLUTION SOURCE CODES AND SEVERITY CODES
The values printed in the Cause Code column of FKF .retrieval
output relate to the type of operation that produced the
pollution leading to the fish kill, as opposed to the specific
pollutant which is the agent or factor directly responsible for
the kill. The codes for these types of pollution source
operations, and their appropriate subcategories, follow:
10 AGRICULTURAL OPERATIONS
11 Poisons (pesticides)
12 Fertilizers
13 Manure Drainage, Ensilage Liquors, Feed Lot Drainage
14 Handling of Equipment and Containers
20 INDUSTRIAL OPERATIONS
21 Mining
22 Food and Kindred Products
23 Paper and Allied Products
24 Chemicals
25 Petroleum
26 Metals
27 Combinations
28 Other (e.g., sand and gravel washing, logging)
30 MUNICIPAL OPERATIONS
31 Sewerage Systems
32 Refuse Disposal
33 Water Systems
34 Swimming Pools
35 Power
40 TRANSPORATION OPERATIONS
41 Rail
42 Truck
43 Barge or Boat
44 Pipelines
50 CONSTRUCTION OR OTHER OPERATIONS
90 UNKNOWN OPERATIONS
FK
A-l
-------
Severity codes range from one to four, with one signifying a
complete kill, two a heavy kill, three a moderate kill, and four
a light kill.
Severity Code Severity of Kill
1 complete
2 heavy
3 moderate
4 light
FK
A-2
-------
m
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART
EF
EFFLUENT DATA
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
WASHINGTON, D.C. 20460
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART
EF
EFFLUENT DATA
This part of the STORET User Handbook describes the
storage and retrieval of point source effluent data,
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
WASHINGTON, D.C. 20460
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter Subject
EF-1 INTRODUCTION
EF-2 STORING EFFLUENT DATA
2.1 Agency Codes
2.2 Station Codes
2.3 Storing Effluent Stations
2.4 Storing Effluent Data
EF-3 RETRIEVING EFFLUENT DATA 3-1
3.1 Retrieving Effluent Data Via the
STORET Retrieval Programs 3-1
3.2 Retrieving Effluent Data Via a
STORET Command Procedure 3-4
EF
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART
EF
EFFLUENT DATA
CHAPTER
EF-1
INTRODUCTION
EF
-------
CHAPTER
EF-1
INTRODUCTION
The STORET station type codes (see Appendix F, Part WQ) provide
the STORET user with a range of categories that can be assigned
stations when storing water related data. These codes provide
the capability of selectively restricting a retrieval to the type
of data required. One of these station type codes, PIPE, is for
effluent data, either municipal or industrial, and for either
partially treated, treated, or raw effluent. This level 1
station type code and the other level 2, 3, and 4 station type
codes are completely adequate when monitoring is conducted at the
pipe level or within a plant to determine the make-up of the
discharge. (The codes were not sufficient when monitoring was
conducted in order to determine compliance with a permit issued
to the facility. In this case, the user of the system must know
the permit conditions established by the permit. The STORET
system was not designed to store permit conditions.)
The STORET Water Quality File (WQF) was modified in order for
users to store and retrieve both permit conditions (loads and
concentrations) and actual values for the monitoring of effluent
data. These modifications allow the user to utilize the full
capabilities of the WQF when storing and retrieving effluent
data, as well as the additional capabilities documented in this
Part.
It is suggested that self-monitoring data and compliance
monitoring data be separated within the STORET system. In order
to accomplish this, we suggest that two agency codes be assigned
to the user, one for use with self-monitoring data only, the
other for exclusive use with compliance monitoring data.
The remaining two chapters within this Part describe how to store
and retrieve effluent data into and from STORET.
EF
1-1
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART
EF
EFFLUENT DATA
CHAPTER
EF-2
STORING EFFLUENT DATA
EF
-------
CHAPTER
EF-2
STORING EFFLUENT DATA
This chapter describes the procedures and methods available to
store effluent stations and effluent parametric data into the
WQF.
2.1 AGENCY CODES
All effluent data stored within the WQF must be stored under an
agency code assigned by EPA specifically for the storage of
effluent data. Effluent data are not to be stored under agency
codes used for the storage and retrieval of water quality data.
Contact STORET User Assistance for further information on the
assignment of effluent data agency codes.
2.2 STATION CODES
Stations stored using effluent data agency codes must use valid
NPDES (National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System) numbers
as primary station numbers. Each station will have the capacity
to store data for up to 999 discharges. Storage procedures for
new stations for these special effluent data agency codes are the
same as for regular water quality stations except that the prime
station number must be a nine character valid NPDES number. This
nine character number consists of a two character alpha Federal
Information Processing Standards (FIPS) state code abbreviation,
followed by a six digit, unstructured sequence number, followed
by a one character check digit. There is a pre-edit check on the
check digit. Secondary station numbers may be used to facilitate
retrieval of the parametric data, but may not be used to store
parametric data because of the internal structuring that would
preclude identification of the pipe number.
To store facilities that have not had an NPDES number assigned to
them, the primary station number must begin with the letters 'EF'
followed by a seven digit number. There will be no pre-edit
check on the one character check digit. When the facilities
designated by the 'EF1 convention receive NPDES numbers, STORET
User Assistance will transfer all the data from a station stored
with the above 'EF' convention to a newly stored station with the
NPDES number as the primary station number. The old station will
then be deleted. The user will be responsible for storing the
new station before the transfer of data takes place.
EF
2-1
-------
2.3 STORING EFFLUENT STATIONS
The storage of effluent stations utilizes the same standard
coding procedures used to store water quality stations, as
described in the Data Entry chapter of the WQF part of this
Handbook. Also, the same nine station location storage cards are
used to store effluent station data. Except for the agency (A)
card, the station (S) card, the major/minor basin (3) card, and
the location description (4) card, the formats of these cards are
identical to the formats used to store water quality data, as
described in detail in the Data Entry chapter referenced above.
Descriptions of the fields of the station location storage cards
are given below. An asterisk (*) beside a field in the A, S, 3,
and 4 cards indicates coding which is used only for the storage
of effluent stations. Note that the 3 and 4 cards contain the
facility address, receiving stream, and facility name in the
fields usually reserved for the major basin name, minor basin
name, and location name. Note also that the words 'RECVG STRM'
are required to begin the field usually reserved for the major
basin name.
Only one state code, one county code, one latitude/longitude, one
RMI, and one station type code will be allowed per facility,
regardless of the number of discharges (pipes). Special
parameters have been set up to store 1972 SIC codes at the
discharge level. Parameters 74100, 74101, 74102 and 74103 will
be used to store codes for SICs 1, 2, 3 and 4 respectively.
Parameter 74100 is the primary SIC code.
An effluent station must be stored prior to storing data at the
station. A station and its data may not be stored either in the
same job or in the same update cycle performed weekly by STORET
personnel. (Each weekend, STORET personnel run an update program
which updates the WQF data base by processing all data submitted
during the week to delete, add, or change data in the WQF.)
The following station location storage cards (and fields within
those cards) are mandatory or optional as shown below when
storing a new effluent station into the WQF.
Required Cards Optional Cards
A Agency Card 1 RMI Card
T Station Type Card 2 RMI Card
S Station Card 5 Descriptive Paragraph Card(s)
0 Lat/Long Card
3 Maj/Min Basin Card
4 Location Description Card
EF
2-2
-------
Required Fields - A Card
columns
1-8
16
17-24
74-77
78-79
80
field
agency code
effluent data
code
unlocking key
lock after
control code
card type code
remarks
must be a valid
effluent data
agency code
must be an N
9999 preferred
blank for station
and data storage
must be an A
It is strongly recommended that columns 25-61 be completed as
this information is often helpful to STORET User Assistance
personnel when attempting to assist a user with storage questions
or problems.
Required Fields - T Card
columns
1-78
80
field
station type code
card type code
Required Fields - S Card
columns
4-18
68-69
70-72
78-79
80
Required Fields -
field
primary station
code
state code
county code
control code
card type code
0 Card
columns
7-13
14-21
28
29
30-32
80
field
latitude
longitude
PC (precision code)
D (depth code)
total depth
card type code
remarks
must be a T
remarks
the 9-character
NPDES number, or
EF followed by a
7-digit number
must be NS for initial
station storage
must be an S
remarks
defaults to 4
defaults to F
defaults to 000
must be a zero
EF
2-3
-------
Required Fields - 3 Card
columns field remarks
4-27 * station location facility location
major basin name address
28-67 * station location the words RECVG
minor basin name STRM followed by
the name of the
receiving stream
68-69 major basin code
70-71 minor basin code
72-73 sub basin code
80 card type code must be a 3
The state name which was previously required on the former 3 card
is no longer required, as the state name is now automatically
generated by the system.
Required Fields - 4 Card
columns field remarks
4-51 * location of site facility name
80 card type code must be a 4
The RMI cards (1 and 2 cards) and the Descriptive Paragraph Card
(5 card) are optional cards with the storage of an effluent data
station, and have no fields which need to be specially coded for
effluent data. Appendix 2 to the WQ-DE (Data Entry) chapter to
the WQF part contains a copy of EPA Form 7500-24, the STORET WQF
station location storage cards. The above asterisked fields
denote fields which are coded differently for the storage of
effluent data.
EF
2-4
-------
2.4 STORING EFFLUENT DATA
There are two ways that effluent parametric data can be coded for
entry into the WQF. These are the ?01 and ?04 storage
procedures, which are also used to store water quality data into
the WQF. In both procedures, the agency and stations must be
identified.
The ?01 type of storage procedure (or fixed-form procedure)
employs a fixed-field or standard card format. The cards used to
code this procedure are a 7START card, a ?01 card, a fixed-format
agency card, a station card, and one or more parametric data
cards.
The ?04 storage procedure (or WQGSTOR procedure) employs a
variable or free-form card format. The cards used to code this
procedure are a 7START card, a ?04 card, an agency card (using
either a fixed-format or a variable format), and one or more SC
cards which identify the stations, dates, times, depths,
parameters and values.
2.4.1 USING THE ?01 PROCEDURE TO STORE EFFLUENT DATA
Cards Used:
?START
?01
A Card
S Card
Parametric Data Card(s) (6 Card)
The fixed-form input procedure is used to code effluent
parametric data via a standard input procedure
utilizing a fixed-field card format. The 6 card is
used to code the values of effluent parameters sampled,
and up to five parameter codes and associated values
can be coded on a single card. An agency card (A card)
and a station card (S card) precede these parametric
data cards in a parametric data storage deck.
The format of the parametric data card is as follows:
EF
2-5
-------
The Parametric Data Card (6 Card)
columns 1-3
columns 4-6
columns 7-12
columns 13-16
column 17
column 18
Sort No.
This field may be used to assign a sequence
number to each of the parametric data cards.
Any alphanumeric value may be specified;
leading zeros must be provided. This field
is optional.
Sample Depth
This field is used to store the depth at
which the sample was taken. An F (for feet)
or an M (for meters) must be coded in column
62 of the preceding A card. If sample depth
is not to be recorded this field may be left
blank.
Ending Date
The six-digit ending date of sample
collection is coded in year, month, day
order. All codes must be numeric, and
leading zeros must be coded.
Time
The time of sample collection is coded in
the military 24-hr time system format. This
field is optional.
Type of Sample
Code either a C for permit conditions or V
for actual values.
Composite Value Type
The following composite value type codes are
permissible when storing effluent data:
I
J
K
M
P
Q
R
-Average concentration
-Minimum concentration
-Maximum concentration
-Average loading
-Minimum loading
-Maximum loading
-number of exceptions (stored as
an alphanumeric field - maximum
of 5 characters)
EF
2-6
-------
columns 19-23
column 24
columns 31-35,
43-47,
55-59,
and 67-71
columns 36-39,
48-51,
60-63,
and 72-75
columns 40-41,
52-53,
64-65,
and 76-77
W
-Frequency of analysis (stored as
an alphanumeric field - maximum
of 5 characters)
-Type of sample (see column 17)
Beginning Date
The five-digit beginning date of sample
collection is coded in year, month, day
order. All codes must be numeric, and
leading zeros must be coded. Only the last
digit of the year is used to code the year.
Composite Value Indicator
Code the letter C, which indicates that a
composite sample is being stored, and that
the previous field is not a parameter code.
Parameter Code
These fields are used to specify the five-
digit codes of the parameters being coded.
All codes must be numeric and leading zeros
must be coded. A complete list of the
parameter codes defined within STORET is
referenced within Appendix B to the WQF
part.
Parameter Value
These fields are used to specify the values
associated with the parameter codes specified
in the immediately preceding 5 columns. The
first non-zero digit of the parameter value
is to be placed in the left-most column of
the field, regardless of the magnitude of
the value. (For instance, values of 0.006,
0.6 and 60 would all be coded as 6000.)
Exponent
The location of the decimal point in the
parameter value field is assumed to lie
just to the left of the first significant
digit and the exponent field is used to
denote its proper placement. The numeric
values coded in this field place the decimal
point in its proper location, as follows:
EF
2-7
-------
columns 42,
54,
66,
and 78
column 79
column 80
The left column of this field is used to
specify the direction of movement of the
decimal point. A code of 0 (zero) indicates
that the decimal point is either correct in
its assumed position, or is to be moved to
the left; a code of 1 (one) indicates that
the decimal point is to be moved to the
right for correct decimal placement.
The right column of this field is used to
control the extent of movement of the
decimal point. Any numeric code (0-9) is
valid.
The correct exponent code for the parameter
values of 0.006, 0.6, and 60 are,
respectively, 02, 00, and 12.
Rmks. (Remarks)
These fields are used to assign a one-
character alphabetic remark code to further
define the parameter values. The standard
STORET remark codes and their corresponding
definitions are given in Table 4-2 of the
Data Entry chapter, WQ Part. This field is
optional and may be left blank.
Bottom Depth
Code with the number 1 if depth indicated in
columns 4-6 is bottom depth. Otherwise
leave blank.
Card Type Code
Code the number 6.
EF
2-8
-------
2.4.1.1 EXAMPLE OF USING THE ?01 PROCEDURE FOR STORING
EFFLUENT DATA
The following cards will store permit conditions for a
previously stored station for parameters 560 and 74056.
The samples are grab taken one/day. This information
is coded on data cards 1 and 2 (GR and 1/1
respectively). Data card 3 shows storage for minimum
concentration(J coded in column 18) values of .5 and 50
for parameters 560 and 74056 respectively. Data cards
4 and- 5 show storages of average and maximum
concentrations. The beginning and ending dates are
identical (740101).
0 1
2
3 4 5
123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234.
7START
AGENCYCD
EF1234567
740101
740101
740101
740101
740101
NSECRET
CW40101C
CT40101C
CJ40101C
CI40101C
CK40101C
-
00560GR 74056GR
005601/1 740561/1
00560500000 74056500012
00560700000 74056200013
00560100011 74056400013
012345
123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234.
7 8
. .78901234567890
9999 A
0101 S
6
6
6
6
6
7 8
. .78901234567890
EF
2-9
-------
2.4.2 USING THE ?04 PROCEDURE FOR STORING EFFLUENT DATA
Cards Used:
?START
?04
AC Card or an A Card
SC Card(s)
The variable format input procedure utilizes an AC
agency card or a standard A card and one or more SC
storage cards. These cards may be used to code the
values of effluent parameters sampled under varying
sampling methods and conditions, and up to 100
parameter codes and associated values can be stored for
any given sample.
Data items appearing in and after column four of the AC
and SC cards are coded in free form format, with commas
- and no intervening blanks - separating the fields. A
comma must be coded after the last field on the card.
The formats of the control cards used for WQGSTOR input
via the ?04 storage procedure are as follows:
EF
2-10
-------
The Agency Card (AC Card), Free-form Format
field 1
field 2
field 3
field 4
field 5
field 6
Card Type Code
The letters AC must be coded in columns 1
and 2, followed by a comma in column 3.
A=agency-code,
Agency-code is the one-to-eight alphanumeric
agency code followed by a comma.
UK=unlocking-key,
Unlocking-key is the one-to-eight
alphanumeric code assigned to the user
storing the data, which must be accurately
specified before any information can be
stored for the respective stations. This
field must be followed by a comma.
USER=user-name,
User-name is a one-to-fifty-four
alphanumeric description of the user storing
the data, including his name, location,
agency, telephone number and any other
relevant information. Embedded blanks are
permitted. This field must be followed by a
comma.
Validity check (NDC)
This field is applicable only for changing
or deleting previously-stored data. The
letters NDC may be coded to indicate that
the date fields are not to be checked for
validity. This option is provided in order
to change or delete values whose dates are
invalid. This option applies only to data
stored prior to date edit checking.
(Editing on the date field has existed since
1972.) If a validity check is to be
performed, this field is not coded. The
field must be followed by a comma.
NPDES,
This special keyword must be coded to
indicate the storage of effluent data.
keyword must be followed by a comma.
The
EF
2-11
-------
The Storage Card (SC Card)
This card is used to code the remaining information to be coded
in a ?04 WQGSTOR storage procedure: the station code, dates,
depths, parameters and parameter values, and other pertinent
information. All fields are separated by commas. This card
follows either the AC agency card or the standard A card.
If more than one data card is required to record all data for a
given sample, the data may be coded on the card up to column 80.
Remaining data are then coded on a second card, and as many other
continuation cards, as required. Up to 100 parameters and
associated values can be specified in one set of SC and
continuation cards.
The length and content of the fields on the SC card are variable,
and depend upon storage requirements, the manner in which
parameter values were recorded, and other such variables. The
fields of the SC card must be arranged and coded in the following
sequence:
field 1
field 2
field 3
field 4
Card Type Code
The letters SC must be coded in columns 1
and 2, followed by a comma in column 3.
i
Station Code
The twelve-digit effluent station code which
consists of the nine-digit NPDES number for
the station followed by a three-digit
discharge ID number. This code is followed
by a comma.
Beginning Date and Time
The date on which the sample was taken, or
in the case of a composite sample, the
beginning date the sample was collected.
The date must be in the format:
yymmddtttt, where yy is the year,
mm the month, dd the day, and
tttt the time in hours and
minutes. Time is optional. The
field is followed by a comma.
Ending Date and Time
This field is coded only for composite data,
and is of the format yymmddtttt as described
above, followed by a comma. The ending date
EF
2-12
-------
may be identical to the beginning date for
actual values, but must be identical to the
beginning date for permit condition values.
Beginning and ending times, if used, must be
identical for permit conditions.
field 5 Depth
The depth at which the sample was taken,
expressed in the format
M
B
MB
V
MV
XXX, where M, B, V, MV, and MB
are all optional, but only
one may be specified, and
where XXX is the depth.
The permissible values for depth are:
DXXX depth value XXX is in feet
DMXXX depth value XXX is in meters
DBXXX XXX is bottom depth value in feet
DMBXXX XXX is bottom depth value in meters
DVXXX XXX is the depth, in feet, for a
vertically integrated sample
DMVXXX XXX is the depth, in meters, for a
vertically integrated sample
The field must be followed by a comma.
field 6 Composite Value Type
The following composite value type codes are
permissible when storing effluent data:
I -Average concentration
J -Minimum concentration
K -Maximum concentration
M -Average loading
P -Minimum loading
Q -Maximum loading
R -number of exceptions (stored as
an alphanumeric field - maximum
of 5 characters)
T -Frequency of analysis (stored as
an alphanumeric field - maximum
of 5 characters)
W -Type of sample (see field 8)
If coded, the field must be followed by a
comma.
EF
2-13
-------
field 7 Space/Time Composite
For the storage of effluent data, valid
values for this field are. C for permit
conditions and V for actual values. If
omitted, this field defaults to V.
If coded, the field must be followed by a
comma.
field 8 Sample Type
For the storage of effluent data with a
composite value type of W (see field 6), the
valid sample type values are:
CT samples were collected
continuously
GR samples are individual grab
samples
WK samples were collected weekly
.01-24 a composite sample collected
over the number of hours specified
CP a composite sample
If coded, the field must be followed by a comma,
field 9 Parameter Code
This field is used to specify the parameter
code whose value is to be stored. The field
is coded in the format
PXXXXX which stores the
parameter XXXXX with
the next field (data
item) as its value.
Leading zeros need
not be coded.
As many pairs of this field and the next
field may be coded as required. A comma
must follow each code specified. A complete
list of the STORET parameter codes is
referenced within Appendix B to the WQF
Part.
EF
2-14
-------
field 10 Parameter Value
This field is used to specify the value to
be stored for the parameter code specified
in the preceding field. If a remark code is
used, it must be the last character in the
value. Remark codes are defined in Table
4-2 of the Data Entry chapter, WQ Part.
Parameter values may be designated via
either fixed point or floating point
numerical notation. The general expression
for the format of the data field is:
.XXXXXXXXXXX ESPP
where
1) The designation .XXXXXXXXXXX represents
a fixed point number or the mantissa of
a floating point number which may include
from one to eleven digits plus a decimal
point. The decimal point may occur in
any position or be omitted. When
floating point notation is used the
decimal point is assumed to be
immediately to the left of the first
numerical digit or the position
indicated.
2) The blank constitutes an exponent
separator. Its use is optional.
3) The designation S indicates the sign of
the exponent. It may be coded plus ( + ),
minus (-), or left blank. A plus code
will cause the decimal point to be
moved to the right, a minus code will
cause it to be moved to the left, and
a blank will maintain the indicated
position. Use of the exponent sign (E)
is optional. If a code is not provided
the exponent is assumed to be positive.
\
4) The designation PP represents the value
of the exponent. Two numerical digits
must be coded if floating point notation
is used. This code controls the extent
of movement of the decimal point from
the indicated position.
(For example, correct codes for the numbers
5, 7.5, 0.1, and 98,500 are 5, 7.5, 0.1 or
EF
2-15
-------
l.OE-01, and 98500 or 9.85E04 or 9.85 E04 or
9.85E+04, respectively.)
As many pairs of this field and the
preceding field may be coded as required. A
special code of NA (for not applicable) may
be specified for the storage of individual
values of parameters.
A comma must follow each value specified.
Continuation Card
If all of the parameter values cannot be coded on a
single SC Card, a continuation card may be used. The
last character coded on the SC card must be a comma, as
a parameter value cannot be split and continued onto a
continuation card. The continuation card has no
special fields or codes; coding of parameter values may
begin in column one, and proceed as above. The last
character that must be coded on a continuation card is
a comma.
Abbreviated SC Card
When coding multiple SC cards within a single storage
run for identical stations, dates, times, and depths
(fields 2 through 5),-a '$' may be coded in their
stead, which automatically assumes the codes of these
fields as specified in the preceding fully-coded SC
card. The last SC card in the following example
illustrates the use of this SC card coding shortcut.
EF
2-16
-------
2.4.2.1 EXAMPLE OF USING THE ?04 PROCEDURE FOR STORING EFFLUENT
DATA
012345 8
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345...7890
AC,A=EXAMPLE2,UK=TEST,NPDES,
SC,NC0000001001,750201,750201,I,C,P310,50,P350,30,
SC,NC0000001002,750201,750301,I,V,PC310,20,P350,30,
SC,NC0000001002,750201,750301,W,C,P310,1/1,PD400,
SC,$,W,C,P310,GR,
012345 8
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345...7890
The first line contains the variable format agency card
where 'NPDES1, indicates that the cards following it
are to be stored as effluent data. (An A card, with an
N coded in column 16, could be used instead of an AC
card.)
The second line contains the values for NPDES station
NC0000001 which will be stored as pipe 001 with the
beginning date of 750201. The date is repeated so that
the permit conditions will print before the actual
values. STORET software sorts by final date on
sophisticated composite data. The 'I1 indicates an
average concentration, and the 'C' indicates a permit
condition. 'P310,50' indicates that the value for
permit condition-average concentration for parameter
310 is 50. 'P350,30' will store 30 as the permit
condition-average concentration for parameter 350.
The third line is an example of actual values for
average concentration for the date period between
750201 and 750301 which includes data beginning with
750201, up to, but not including, the last date. This
was done to conform with present NPDES convention.
'PC310,20' indicates a change for the previously stored
value for parameter 310 to a value of 20.
The fourth line shows that alphanumeric data '1/1' may
be stored and indicates how an individual parameter may
be deleted; i.e., PD400 will delete the frequency of
EF
2-17
-------
analysis-permit condition for parameter 400 for samples
with a date range of 750201 through 750301.
The last line illustrates a coding shortcut for SC
cards. This card assumes the station and dates coded
in line four.
EF
2-18
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART
EF
EFFLUENT DATA
CHAPTER
EF-3
RETRIEVING EFFLUENT DATA
EF
-------
CHAPTER
EF-3
RETRIEVING EFFLUENT DATA
3.1 RETRIEVING EFFLUENT DATA VIA THE STORET RETRIEVAL PROGRAMS
All of the retrieval capabilities available to retrieve Water
Quality File data from STORET are also available to retrieve
effluent data from STORET. In addition, the RET and ALLPARM
retrieval programs have been modified to print the following
information when retrieving effluent data:
- the composite value type field with two
letter codes
- the discharge (pipe).number
- special values such as NA
- alphanumeric type data for number of
exceptions and frequency of analysis, etc.
3.1.1 KEYWORDS SPECIAL TO RETRIEVING EFFLUENT DATA
The following keywords apply only to retrieving
effluent data from STORET; they do not apply to
retrieving water quality data from STORET.
The ANC keyword. The ANC keyword may be set equal to
any combination of valid effluent data composite value
codes, as listed and described in the preceding
chapter. For example, 'ANC=IP,' will retrieve the
average concentration and minimum loading values for
the requested parameters.
The LIMITS keyword. This keyword, which has no value,
causes the printing of 'conditions only1 values.
(These are depicted on effluent data retrievals as
CP(O.) An example of the output obtained with
'LIMITS,' specified is shown below.
The ACTUAL keyword. This keyword, which also has no
value, causes the printing of actual values. (These
are depicted on effluent data retrievals as CP(V).}
The default print, if neither LIMITS nor ACTUAL is
specified, consists of the conditions followed by the
actual values, by pipe, for the facilities specified.
An example of this default print is shown below.
EF
3-1
-------
3.1.2 EXAMPLES OF RETRIEVING EFFLUENT DATA USING THE RET PROGRAM
Retrieve permit conditions
stored for parameter 10
(Water temperature),300
(dissolved oxygen, 301
(dissolved oxygen saturation)
310 (BOD), and 400 (pH) for
all pipes in station
(facility) NC0003301.
PGM=RET,PURP=3 0 5B/STA,
A=EFNC,S=NC0003301,
P=10,P=300,P=301,P=310,
P=400,LIMITS,SHIFT,
STORE!' RETRIEVAL DATE 7*/lu/2u
NC00033ul Bl63oOOO 326500015 1761
36 U3 lu.U 07* 37 4U.U 5
WESTERN ELECTRIC CO
37061NC
GREENSBORO 03U003
RbCVG STRM - LITTLE ALAMANCE CR-GUIL WTP
EFNC 751230
uy»9 FEET DEPTH CLASS 00
00010 00300 00301
DATE TIME DEPTH WATER DO DO
FROM OF TEMP SATUR
TO DAY FEET CENT MG/L PERCENT
75/02/13 P101
CP(C)- LC
HC
' FA
ST
75/02/13
P102
CP(C)- LC
HC
FA
ST
75/02/13
P103
CP(C)- LC
HC
FA
ST
75/02/13
Plo4
CP(C)- LC
HC
FA
ST
75/02/13
/TYPA/IND/NTRTMT/OUTFL/PIPE
00310
BOD
5 DAY
MG/L
20.0
1/7
CP
20.0
i/7
CP
20. U
1/7
CP
20.0
1/7
CP
00400
PH
SU
6.00
9.00
1/7
CP
6.00
9.00
i/7
CP
6.00
y.oo
1/7
CP
6.00
9.00
1/7
CP
EF
3-2
-------
Retrieve both actual values
and permit conditions for
parameters 10, 300, 301,
310, and 400 for all pipes
in facility NC0003301.
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=EFNC,S=NC0003301,
P=10,P=300,P=301,P=310,
P=400,SHIFT,
STOKE!' RETRIEVAL LATt 7a/lu/20
NCUUOJ301 BlbJdOUO
Jb U3 lU.u 079 37 40. U b
WESTER ELECTRIC CO
37ubluC
32bbOOOlb 17bl
GREENSBORO U3UDU3
HECVG STRM - LITTLE ALAMANCE
EFNC 75123U
0*99 FEET DEPTH CLASS OU
OUU10
DATE TIME DEPTH WATER .
FROM OF TEMP
TO UAY FEET CENT
78/01/01 PU14
CP(V)- HC 33. U
7o/01/01
75/02/13 PlOl
CP(C)- LC
HC
FA
ST
75/02/13
7b/u5/0l P1U1
CP(V)- AC
LC
HC
75/05/Ul
75/06/01 PlUl
CP(V)- AC
LC
HC
75/06/01
7S/U7/U1 P101
CP(V)- AC
LC
HC
75/U7/UJ.
75/uy/Ul PlUl
CP(V)- AC
LC
HC
7b/U9/01
7b/lU/01 P101
CP(V)- AC
LC
HC
75/10/01
7b/ll/01 P101
CP(V)- AC
LC
HC
75/11/01
CK-GUIL WTP
/TYPA/IND/NTRTMT/OUTFL/PIPE
003UO 00301
DO DO
SATUR
MG/L PERCENT
10. fa
b.4
7.tt
a.o
7.5
7.2
7. a
7.6
7.3
7.b
8.0
7.0
10.4
8.4
7.8
y.o
9.5
8.b
10.6
00310
BOD
5 DAY
MG/L
1.5
20.0
1/7
CP
1.0
0.1
2.b
0.9
0.2
1.3
1.6
0.3
4.9
1.2
0.1
3.5
1.2
0.9
1.5
3.0
1.4
5.8
00400
PH
SU
7.90
6.00
9.00
1/7
CP
7.10
6.90
7.20
7.20
6.90
7.30
7.10
6.90
7.10
7.10
6.70
7.30
7.10
6.90
7.40
6.90
6.60
7.10
1
EF
3-3
-------
3.2 RETRIEVING EFFLUENT DATA VIA A STORET COMMAND PROCEDURE
The STORET command procedure named EFFRPT may also be used to
obtain output reports on effluent data stored within the WQF.
This procedure prompts the user for the information required to
perform the retrieval, such as the agency code, facility
identification, pipe numbers, and dates.
The procedure offers four report alternatives:
- option 0 gives a summary of violations by
facility,
- option 1 gives a summary of violations by
pipe,
- option 2, the default option, gives a
tabulation of all data available for
parameters in violation only, and
- option 3 gives a tabulation, for each
facility specified in the retrieval, by
discharge pipe number and by reporting date
within pipe number of all parametric
effluent data and permit conditions. (This
print option provides the maximum amount of
output of the four options.)
(A reply of 'HELP1 to the 'PRINT OPTION (0-3)?' prompt within the
command procedure lists these four output options.)
Examples of the reports generated by the procedure's four print
options are provided below.
EF
3-4
-------
3.2.1 EXAMPLE OF EFFRPT OUTPUT USING OPTION 0
*• STCEBT EPKLUtNr REDOUT
scooajjM WSSI:-:KN SLECTHC cc
GiiANl) TOTALS
PKIHT CP1I0.1:0 RUN DA'i
IJTALJ: UNkEi'lLI PAfcflS:
UNKtfli) PAhllS:
05
VIOLATIONS:
3.2.2 EXAMPLE OF EFFRPT OUTPUT USING OPTION 1
• « :iTl)|.-i: SFFL'JENl ;:£?C-bl PRiM Ct>TlON:1
NCOOJ3301 UESTtRK ELEC'inil. CJ
MC0003JU' .ESIEtN SiLjICTIUl. L'C,
SC0033J01 .ESTtRH ELE-'TilC CO
IICOOOJJ}' riEoTlSB Ei.eC1hlC CO
NC00033)' JiSTiii.:! ELSCTi.IC Cf.
GRAND ."( TALS
PiPt
PlPE
P1P£
PIPS
ror
oiv
102
10J
IQl
ILS:
li-Jl, DATS: 7V1J/'JO
iJHnfPij PABMS
UNutplJ PAfc.lS
UHKhPi'u PAK.1S
UNBLPTD PAtnS
UNiihpTJ PAh^J
UNktFiJ PAhrlS
J VlCLiTlCKS
J5 VlULA'liChb
1U VIOLAriCKS
jb VIOLA11CNS
1^1 VIOLATIONS
Ul VIOLA11CNS
0
71
1
7
""
tiu
EF
3-5
-------
3.2.3 EXAMPLE OF EFFRPT OUTPUT USING OPTION 2
** STCRET EFFLUENT REPORT
NC0003301 PRINT OPTIPN:2
RUN Dull : 79/1 C/05
FACILITY NC0003301 WESTERN ELECTRIC CO
DISCHARGE PIPE NO. 102
REPORTING DATE: 75C5C1
PARAMETER
CODE
00310 BOD PUT COND
•> OAT MG/L DHR VALS
00530 RESIDUE PHI COND
TOT NFLT MG/L DHR VALS
31616 FEC COLI PHI COND
HFH-FCBR /100ML DHK VALS
REPORTING DATE: 750601
PARAMETER
CODE
00310 BOD
5 DAY MG/L
PMT CONO
DHR VALS
00530 RESIDUE PMT COND
TOT NFLT MG/L DMR VALS
31616 FEC COLI PHI COND
HFM-FCBR /100ML DMR VALS
REPORTING DATE: 750701
PARAMETER
CODE
CONCENTRATION
LON AVE HIGH
155.0
ISO
321.0
240
20.0
465.C
45
320
NO REPORTED DATA
CONCENTRATION
LOW AVE HIGH
245.0
140
497.0
175
20.0
640.0
45
260
NO REPORTED DATA
CONCENTRATION
LON AVE HIGH
LOW
LfcAblNl-
«VE
HIGH N/X F/A S/l
1/V Cf
1/7 CP
I/3C CR
NO REPORTED D«1A
LOAD INC,
AVE
HIGI. N/X F/A S/T
1/7 CP
1/7 Cl'
1/3;- GR
NO REPORTED DATA
1 VIOL«IIDN(S)
I VIULM1DNIS)
? VULMICNtS)
1 VI PL » 110M S)
1 VIOLIUUN(S)
? VICLM10MS)
LOCOING
LOW AVE
HIGH N/X ^/H S/T
EF
3-6
-------
3.2.4 EXAMPLE OF EFFRPT OUTPUT USING OPTION 3
STDREI EFFLUENT REPORT
EFNC
NC0003301 PRIN1 UPIIPN:3
RUN DATE: 79/1C/05
FACILITY NC&0033C1 WIS1ERN ELECTRIC CO
DISCHARGE PIPE NO. 1C2
REPORTING DATt: 75G501
PARAMETER
CODE
00310
5 DAY
004CO
00500
TOTAL
005 3C
TOT NFL1
00625
N
50050
FLDK
BOO
MG/L
PH
SU
RESIDUE
MG/L
RESIDUE
MG/L
10T KJEL
MG/L
CONDUIT
MGD
PMT
OMR
PMT
OMR
PMT
OMR
PMT
DMR
PMT
DMF.
PMT
DMR
COSD
VALS
CONO
VALS
CONO
VALS
COND
VALS
CUND
VALS
COND
VALS
CONCENTRATION
LOW AVE HIGH
20.0
155. C 321.0 <>t5.(.
6.00 -- 9. CO
7.00 7.BC P.50
«9C 613 69r
180 2«0 320
2.200 «.2GO 5.2CC
C.08G
0.013 0.03* O.D53
31616 FEC CPLI PMT COND
MFM-FCBK /100ML OMR VALS
REPORTING DATE: 75G601
PARAMETER
CODE
IdADlNl
LOW AVt
HIGH N/X F/A S/l
1/7 CP
1/7 Cf-
00310
b DAY
BOO
MG/L
PH
SU
PNT CUND
OMR VALS
PMT COND
OIF VALS
NO REPORTED DATA
CONCENTRATION
LOU AVE
NO Kf rOKTLl. L1ATA
1/1 Gi-
l/30 GK
1 VIUK110NIS)
1 VIDLtllUNIS)
LO.'OING
117.V
2C/.0
640.0
6.00
7.JO
9.CO
7.50 7.BO
HIGH N/X F/A S/T
1/7 CP
1/7 CP
? VI OL/. llGNti)
VIOL»11UN(S)
EF
3-7
------- |